Schedule 1 Part IV - Company Scope of Work Requirements for MVHV Substations and Interconnections

SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC PROJECT
IN
AL HENAKIYAH
KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA
Schedule I
Part IV
Company Scope of Work Requirements for MV/HV

Substations and Interconnections
Revision Date Description Prepared Checked Approved
R0 Feb, 2024 First Issue for Tender Purpose PKN PKN
1 | P a g e Company Requirements for Al Henakiyah 2 Solar PV IPP, Saudi Arabia. STRICTLY CONFIDENTIAL
Table of Contents
1 Definitions............................................................................................................................................19
2 General scope of Works.......................................................................................................................20
3 Civil scope of works............................................................................................................................22
4 Electrical scope of work.......................................................................................................................23
5 Water Supply.......................................................................................................................................25
6 Consumables and Tools.......................................................................................................................26
7 Initial spare parts..................................................................................................................................26
7.1 Spare Parts for Remote End Off Taker Substation (SEC)......................................
7.2 Equipment warranties (Purchaser’s Installations) for the Remote End
Offtaker Substation.................................................................................................
7.3 Identification System..............................................................................................
8 Studies and Surveys.............................................................................................................................27
9 Engineering Data.................................................................................................................................28
10 Tender Drawings..................................................................................................................................29
11 Drawings and documents for approval................................................................................................30
12 Basic Technical Values for 33kV, 110kV Electrical and Mechanical Equipment’s...........................32
12.1 GRID Connection................................................................................................................................33
Rabigh 2 Solar PV IPP High Voltage Interconnection.....................................................................................33
13 Technical Requirements for the Electrical Balance of System............................................................34
13.1 General Terms & Conditions:..............................................................................................................34
13.2 Order of Precedence.............................................................................................................................34
13.3 Confidential Information.....................................................................................................................34
14 33kV MV Cables for PV Collector Feeders........................................................................................35
14.1 Bonding of Cables for 33kV PV Collector Feeders................................................
15 33kV MV Cables for Plant Substation.................................................................................................36
15.1 Medium and low voltage cable system...................................................................
16 LVDC, LVAC and 33kV MV Cable Installation................................................................................38
16.1 Laying Direct in the Ground...................................................................................
16.2 Ducted cables in Road Crossing for PV Farm and Plant Substation......................
17 LVDC, LVAC and MV Cables Buried Systems.................................................................................39
17.1 Excavations.............................................................................................................
17.2 Cable laying............................................................................................................
17.3 MV and LV cables..................................................................................................
17.4 Control cables..........................................................................................................
17.5 Warning tapes..........................................................................................................
17.6 Cable route markers................................................................................................
17.7 Road crossings........................................................................................................
17.8 Pulling into Ducts....................................................................................................
17.9 Cable joints..............................................................................................................
18 Medium and Low Voltage Cable Systems...........................................................................................42
18.1 Standards.................................................................................................................
18.2 Cable Construction Requirements...........................................................................
18.3 Packing and sealing Requirements..........................................................................
18.4 Installation Requirements........................................................................................
18.5 Medium Voltage Cables..........................................................................................
18.5.1 Technical requirements...........................................................................................
18.5.2 Operational requirements........................................................................................
18.5.3 Minimum requirements...........................................................................................
18.6 MV cable sizing......................................................................................................
18.7 MV cable accessories..............................................................................................
18.8 Grounding/Bonding.................................................................................................
18.9 Test requirements....................................................................................................
19 Low Voltage Power and Control Cables.............................................................................................47
19.1 General Technical requirements.............................................................................
19.2 Cable Sizing............................................................................................................
19.3 Metering and protection cables...............................................................................
19.4 LV control cables....................................................................................................
19.5 ELV control, communication and signalling cables...............................................
19.6 Heat resistant cables................................................................................................
19.7 Fire resistant cables.................................................................................................
19.8 Cable terminations and accessories.........................................................................
19.9 Test requirements....................................................................................................
20 Technical Specification of Cabling System.........................................................................................50
20.1 Scope.......................................................................................................................
20.2 Cable tray and Accessories:....................................................................................
20.3 Laying of cables:.....................................................................................................
20.4 Cable termination, Installation and Connections:...................................................
20.5 Cable Ladder and Tray supporting structures:........................................................
20.6 Guarantee:...............................................................................................................
20.7 Tests at manufacturer’s works and test certificates:...............................................
21 Electrical Design Requirements for Plant Substation..........................................................................59
21.1 Construction Features and Requirement.................................................................
22 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgears.......................................................................................................61
22.1 Qualifying requirements..........................................................................................
22.2 General Design & Safety........................................................................................
22.3 Insulator...................................................................................................................
22.4 Enclosure.................................................................................................................
22.5 Compartment...........................................................................................................
22.6 Operation & Maintenance.......................................................................................
22.7 Local Control & Substation Automation System: -................................................
22.8 Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) Circuit Breakers.........................................................
22.9 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism...................................................................
22.10 Constructional Features...........................................................................................
22.11 Control.....................................................................................................................
22.12 Spring Charged Operating Mechanisms.................................................................
22.13 Disconnectors..........................................................................................................
22.14 Earthing/Grounding Switches.................................................................................
22.15 High Speed Make Proof Earthing/Grounding switches..........................................
22.16 Current transformer.................................................................................................
22.17 Voltage Transformers..............................................................................................
22.18 SF6/Air Bushings....................................................................................................
22.19 Insulation levels and creep age distances................................................................
22.20 Gas Insulated Bus Duct (where applicable)............................................................
22.21 EHV-POWER Cable Connection (where applicable).............................................
22.22 Seismic Design Criteria...........................................................................................
22.23 Partial Discharge Monitoring System & Dew Point Meter....................................
22.24 Grounding...............................................................................................................
22.25 Quality of SF6 Gas..................................................................................................
22.26 Tests........................................................................................................................
22.26.1 Type tests................................................................................................................
22.26.2 Routine Tests...........................................................................................................
22.27 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgear Technical Data Sheet.........................................
22.27.1 To be submitted by Bidder for Company Approval as per SEC
Specification and Standards, Approved Vendor List and Formats.........................
23 Power Transformer..............................................................................................................................83
23.1 General Description................................................................................................
23.2 Spare Parts, Special Tools.......................................................................................
23.3 Temperature Rise....................................................................................................
23.4 Overloading Of the Transformer.............................................................................
23.5 Short-Circuit Withstand Capability.........................................................................
23.6 Parallel Operation....................................................................................................
23.7 Design And Construction Requirements.................................................................
23.8 On-Load Tap Changers (OLTC).............................................................................
23.9 Current Transformers..............................................................................................
23.10 Control Cubicle (Marshalling Kiosk)......................................................................
23.11 Protection And Monitoring Devices.......................................................................
23.12 Conservators............................................................................................................
23.13 Transformer Tanks and Radiators:..........................................................................
23.14 Tank Filling, Draining and Oil Sampling...............................................................
23.15 Auxiliary Wiring.....................................................................................................
23.16 Hardwired Signals...................................................................................................
23.17 Finish, Painting and Protection...............................................................................
23.18 Labelling And Marking...........................................................................................
23.19 Tests........................................................................................................................
23.20 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)............................................................................
23.21 Type tests:...............................................................................................................
23.22 Routine tests:...........................................................................................................
23.23 Special tests.............................................................................................................
23.24 Tests Reports...........................................................................................................
23.25 Transportation.........................................................................................................
23.26 Oil Treatment..........................................................................................................
23.27 33/110kV Power Transformer Technical Data Sheet.............................................
24 Earthing cum Auxiliary Transformers...............................................................................................104
24.1 Working Conditions..............................................................................................
24.2 Main Characteristics..............................................................................................
24.3 Magnetic Circuit and Windings............................................................................
24.4 Transformer Tank..................................................................................................
24.5 Fittings & Accessories..........................................................................................
24.6 Marshalling Kiosk (MK).......................................................................................
24.7 Terminals & Connection Arrangement.................................................................
24.8 Valves and their location.......................................................................................
24.9 Insulating Oil.........................................................................................................
24.10 Painting and Protection.........................................................................................
24.11 Operational Requirements.....................................................................................
24.12 Tests......................................................................................................................
24.13 Factory Assembly and Tests (FAT Test)..............................................................
24.14 Stage Inspection....................................................................................................
24.15 Routine Tests.........................................................................................................
24.16 Test Reports..........................................................................................................
24.17 33/0.4kV Earthing cum Auxiliary Transformer Technical Data Sheet.................
25 33kV MV Gas Insulated Switchgears for Plant Substation...............................................................117
25.1 Spare parts, Special Tools.....................................................................................
25.2 General Constructions...........................................................................................
25.3 Design Requirements............................................................................................
25.4 Circuit Breakers....................................................................................................
25.5 Vacuum Circuit Breaker.......................................................................................
25.6 SF₆ Circuit Breaker...............................................................................................
25.7 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism.................................................................
25.8 Spring Charged Operating Mechanisms...............................................................
25.9 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches...................................................................
25.10 Current Transformers............................................................................................
25.11 Voltage Transformers............................................................................................
25.12 Low Voltage Compartments.................................................................................
25.13 Accessories:...........................................................................................................
25.14 SF₆ gas compartments and monitoring.................................................................
25.15 Position Indicators.................................................................................................
25.16 Interlocking...........................................................................................................
25.17 Auxiliary Switches and Contactors.......................................................................
25.18 Gas Losses.............................................................................................................
25.19 Painting and Protection.........................................................................................
25.20 Test........................................................................................................................
25.20.1 Factory Assembly and Tests (FAT Test)..............................................................
25.20.2 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)................................................................................
25.21 Technical Guarantees............................................................................................
25.22 Warranty................................................................................................................
25.23 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................
25.24 Inspection Points Plan...........................................................................................
25.25 Transportation.......................................................................................................
25.26 Operation and Maintenance Manual.....................................................................
25.27 Design Report........................................................................................................
25.28 Lists of Applicable Codes and Standards..............................................................
25.29 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear Technical Data Sheet.........................................
26 Reactive Power Compensation System in accordance with the Grid Code.......................................140
27 Auxiliary supply facilities..................................................................................................................140
27.1 Auxiliary transformers..........................................................................................
28 Diesel Generators for Plant Substation..............................................................................................142
28.1 General..................................................................................................................
28.2 Standards...............................................................................................................
28.3 Technical Requirements........................................................................................
28.3.1 Diesel engine.........................................................................................................
28.3.2 Lubrication system................................................................................................
28.3.3 Fuel supply and injection system..........................................................................
28.3.4 Air intake and exhaust system...............................................................................
28.3.5 Generator...............................................................................................................
28.4 Required Technical Data.......................................................................................
28.5 Test requirements..................................................................................................
29 Batteries and Battery Charger Panel for DC System.........................................................................148
29.1 General Description..............................................................................................
29.2 Spare Parts, Special Tools.....................................................................................
29.4 Battery...................................................................................................................
29.4.1 Nickel Cadmium Batteries Type...........................................................................
29.4.2 Batteries – Construction........................................................................................
29.4.3 Battery Mounting Connections and Accessories..................................................
29.4.4 Battery Chargers, Voltage Control Units (VCU's) & Distribution
Boards/Cubicles....................................................................................................
29.4.5 Battery Chargers & VCUs....................................................................................
29.4.6 Distribution Board.................................................................................................
29.4.7 Instrumentation and Control.................................................................................
29.4.7.1 Devices on the Instrument Panel...........................................................................
29.4.7.2 Visual and Alarm Indication.................................................................................
29.4.7.3 Protection and Control Systems............................................................................
29.4.7.4 Metering................................................................................................................
29.4.7.5 Battery Charger.....................................................................................................
29.4.7.6 DC Distribution Board/Battery.............................................................................
29.4.7.7 DC Bus Coupler....................................................................................................
29.4.7.8 Grouping of Alarms (SCMS & SCADA).............................................................
29.4.7.9 Sound Control.......................................................................................................
29.4.8 Eye Wash Station..................................................................................................
29.4.9 Ventilation.............................................................................................................
29.4.10 Nameplates, Labels and Markings........................................................................
29.4.11 Painting/Corrosion Protection...............................................................................
29.4.12 Shipping and Site Assembly.................................................................................
29.4.13 Testing and Inspection..........................................................................................
29.4.13.1 Type Tests.............................................................................................................
29.4.13.2 Routine Tests:........................................................................................................
29.4.13.3 Site Tests:..............................................................................................................
29.4.13.4 Battery Charger.....................................................................................................
29.4.13.5 Battery...................................................................................................................
29.4.14 Technical Guarantees............................................................................................
29.4.15 Warranty................................................................................................................
29.4.16 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................
29.4.17 Inspection Points Plan...........................................................................................
29.4.18 Transportation.......................................................................................................
29.4.19 Operation and Maintenance Manual.....................................................................
29.4.20 Lists of Applicable Codes and Standards..............................................................
30 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)................................................................................................167
30.1 General Design Requirements...............................................................................
30.2 UPS Battery...........................................................................................................
30.3 Inverters.................................................................................................................
30.4 Static Transfer Switches........................................................................................
30.5 Manual By-pass Switches.....................................................................................
30.6 UPS Output Protection (Including Outgoing Lines).............................................
30.7 Test requirements..................................................................................................
31 Earthing & Lightning System............................................................................................................171
31.1 Lists of Applicable Codes and Standards..............................................................
31.2 Table-1 Design Data Sheet....................................................................................
31.3 Earthing system design.........................................................................................
31.4 Equipment Earthing Connections.........................................................................
31.5 Building structural earthing...................................................................................
31.6 Lightning Protection System Design....................................................................
31.7 Earthing and Lightning Protection Materials........................................................
31.8 Test Requirements.................................................................................................
32 Control & Protection Philosophy for Plant Substation......................................................................182
32.1 Technical Requirements for Control and Protection Units...................................
32.1.1 General..................................................................................................................
32.1.2 Auxiliary Supply...................................................................................................
32.1.3 Environmental Requirements................................................................................
32.1.4 Product Safety Requirements................................................................................
32.1.5 Mechanical Requirements.....................................................................................
32.1.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility.............................................................................
32.1.7 Contact Performance.............................................................................................
32.1.8 Software Licenses.................................................................................................
32.2 Tripping Circuit Supervision and Pole Discordance Protection...........................
32.3 Requirements for Protection and Control Functions.............................................
32.4 Instrument Transformer Requirements.................................................................
32.5 References.............................................................................................................
32.6 Housing, Wiring, Identification............................................................................
32.7 Testing Facilities, Indications...............................................................................
32.8 Control & Protection System................................................................................
32.9 Protection Relays..................................................................................................
32.10 Protection Alarms..................................................................................................
32.11 DC Supplies..........................................................................................................
32.12 Protection of 110kV System.................................................................................
32.13 Protection of 33kV Feeders in 35/110kV Substation............................................
32.14 Protection of LVAC System.................................................................................
32.15 Transformer and Reactor Mechanical Protection.................................................
32.16 Requirements of Protection System......................................................................
32.17 Protection Relays..................................................................................................
32.18 Protection Communications..................................................................................
32.19 Control Cables, Wiring and Cable Terminations..................................................
32.20 Control Relays.......................................................................................................
32.21 Synchronising Check Relay..................................................................................
32.22 Digital Fault Recorders (DFR) for 33kV and 110kV System...............................
33 400V LVAC Switchgear....................................................................................................................210
33.1 Purpose and Objective...........................................................................................
33.2 Descriptions of the plant.......................................................................................
33.3 Scope of supply.....................................................................................................
33.4 Design requirements..............................................................................................
33.4.1 Applicable Codes and Standards...........................................................................
33.4.2 Main Characteristics..............................................................................................
33.5 LVAC System.......................................................................................................
33.5.1 Switchgear.............................................................................................................
33.5.2 Construction Requirement....................................................................................
33.5.3 Primary Busbar......................................................................................................
33.5.4 Equipment Earthing..............................................................................................
33.5.5 Air Circuit Breaker (if applicable)........................................................................
33.5.6 Interlocking Gear..................................................................................................
33.5.7 Motor Starting Units (if applicable)......................................................................
33.5.8 Contactors (if applicable)......................................................................................
33.5.9 Fuse & Fuse Switches...........................................................................................
33.5.10 Isolators (if applicable).........................................................................................
33.5.11 Moulded Case & Miniature Circuit Breakers.......................................................
33.5.12 Residual Current Circuit breakers (if applicable).................................................
33.5.13 Current Transformers............................................................................................
33.5.14 Overvoltage Protection..........................................................................................
33.5.15 Cable Termination.................................................................................................
33.5.16 Control and Monitoring.........................................................................................
33.5.17 Anti-Condensation Heaters...................................................................................
33.5.18 Lighting and Maintenance sockets........................................................................
33.5.19 Protection Functions..............................................................................................
33.5.20 Distribution Boards...............................................................................................
33.5.21 Painting.................................................................................................................
33.5.22 Engineering...........................................................................................................
33.5.23 Packing & delivery................................................................................................
33.5.24 Testing & commissioning requirements...............................................................
33.5.24.1 Factory Tests.........................................................................................................
33.5.24.2 Type Tests.............................................................................................................
33.5.24.3 Site Tests...............................................................................................................
33.5.25 Warranty................................................................................................................
33.5.26 Quality assurance plan..........................................................................................
34 CYBER Security Requirements.........................................................................................................226
35 Grid integration..................................................................................................................................230
36 Substation Control and Monitoring System (SCMS)........................................................................231
36.1 General System Requirements..............................................................................
36.2 SCADA server and HMI.......................................................................................
36.3 Gateway.................................................................................................................
36.4 Cyber Security Requirements...............................................................................
36.5 Auxiliary systems Monitoring...............................................................................
36.6 Metering System...................................................................................................
36.7 System Design.......................................................................................................
36.7.1 Design Principles..................................................................................................
36.7.2 Hot stand-by redundancy......................................................................................
36.7.3 Availability and Reliability...................................................................................
36.7.4 System Capabilities...............................................................................................
36.7.5 System performance..............................................................................................
36.7.6 System behaviour..................................................................................................
36.7.7 Compliance with standards...................................................................................
36.8 Principle System Architecture...............................................................................
36.9 IT Security Requirements.....................................................................................
36.10 Functional Requirements......................................................................................
36.10.1 Station level functions...........................................................................................
36.10.1.1 Station Computer..................................................................................................
36.10.1.2 Workstations (HMI)..............................................................................................
36.10.1.3 Service, Analysis and Engineering Unit...............................................................
36.10.1.4 Interface to Remote Control Centres.....................................................................
36.10.1.5 Station Protection Functions.................................................................................
36.10.2 Bay Level Functions.............................................................................................
36.10.2.1 Bay Control Functions..........................................................................................
36.10.2.2 Interfaces...............................................................................................................
36.10.2.3 Local HMI.............................................................................................................
36.10.2.4 Station Interlocking...............................................................................................
36.10.2.5 Synchro check.......................................................................................................
36.10.2.6 Auto reclosing.......................................................................................................
36.10.2.7 Transformer Tap Changer Control........................................................................
36.10.2.8 Event and Disturbance Recording.........................................................................
36.10.2.9 Bay Protection Functions......................................................................................
36.10.2.10 Data Collection Functionality...............................................................................
36.11.1 Station Level Design.............................................................................................
36.11.2 Bay Level Design..................................................................................................
36.11.3 Quantity of Inputs and Outputs.............................................................................
36.12 Other Requirements..............................................................................................
36.12.1 General..................................................................................................................
36.12.2 Engineering...........................................................................................................
36.12.3 FAT and SAT........................................................................................................
36.12.3.1 General..................................................................................................................
36.12.3.2 FAT and SAT Requirements.................................................................................
36.12.4 Commissioning.....................................................................................................
36.12.5 Service, after-sales and maintenance....................................................................
36.12.6 Training.................................................................................................................
36.12.7 Documentation......................................................................................................
37 PV Plant DCS....................................................................................................................................274
37.1 General description...............................................................................................
37.2 General requirements............................................................................................
37.3 System architecture...............................................................................................
37.4 Monitoring strategy...............................................................................................
37.4.1 Meteorological station...........................................................................................
37.4.2 Communication boxes...........................................................................................
37.4.3 SCADA server......................................................................................................
37.4.4 Network and remote communication....................................................................
37.5 Integration of PV Plant Substation SCMS system with PV Plant DCS................
38 Interface with Remote End Offtaker Substation................................................................................284
38.1 Interface with the Purchaser..................................................................................
38.1.1 Remote operation..................................................................................................
38.1.2 Logical Interlock...................................................................................................
39 Telecommunication Systems.............................................................................................................286
39.1 General..................................................................................................................
39.2 Power Line Carrier Equipment.............................................................................
39.3 Optical Fiber based PDH/SDH/IP-MPLS Equipment..........................................
39.4 IP-Privat Branch Exchange (IP-PBX)...................................................................
39.5 Fiber Optical Cables..............................................................................................
39.6 MoE/Offtaker’s Telecommunication Systems......................................................
39.7 Telecommunication Network Management System.............................................
39.8 Telephony..............................................................................................................
39.9 Revision Levels and Modifications.......................................................................
39.10 Expandability........................................................................................................
39.11 Telecommunication Power Supply Equipment.....................................................
39.12 Equipment Life Span.............................................................................................
39.13 Cubicles/Cabinets..................................................................................................
40 Power Plant Controller (PPC)............................................................................................................302
40.1 Power Quality Monitoring (PQM)........................................................................
41 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)....................................................................................................304
41.1 PV Plant................................................................................................................
41.2 Plant Substation.....................................................................................................
41.3 Anti-Intrusion System for Plant Substation..........................................................
42 Lighting and Small Power Systems...................................................................................................308
42.1 General..................................................................................................................
42.2 Standards...............................................................................................................
42.3 Equipment Requirements......................................................................................
42.4 Lighting System Particular Requirements............................................................
42.5 Indoor lighting.......................................................................................................
42.6 Outdoor lighting....................................................................................................
42.7 Emergency lighting...............................................................................................
42.8 Photocells..............................................................................................................
42.9 Lighting Switches..................................................................................................
42.10 Distribution Boards...............................................................................................
42.11 Cables....................................................................................................................
42.12 External lighting....................................................................................................
42.13 Socket outlets, power outlets and plugs................................................................
43 Mechanical Design Requirement for Plant Substation......................................................................320
43.1 High Velocity Water Deluge or Sprinkler System................................................
43.2 Fire protection system...........................................................................................
43.3 Fire Detection, Alarm and Fighting Systems........................................................
43.4 Clean Agent FM-200 Suppression System...........................................................
44 Centralized Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning System for Plant Substation............................333
44.1 Purpose And Objective.........................................................................................
44.2 Codes And Standards............................................................................................
44.3 General Design Considerations.............................................................................
44.3.1 External Design Conditions..................................................................................
44.3.2 Indoor Design Conditions.....................................................................................
44.3.3 System Design Concept and Components............................................................
44.3.4 Diesel Generator Room Ventilation System.........................................................
44.3.5 Air Conditioning Equipment.................................................................................
44.3.5.1 Packaged Air Conditioning Units.........................................................................
44.3.5.2 Decorative Split A/C Units...................................................................................
44.3.5.3 Refrigerant Piping.................................................................................................
44.3.6 Fans.......................................................................................................................
44.3.6.1 Battery Room Extract Fans...................................................................................
44.3.6.2 Basement Smoke Extract Fan...............................................................................
44.3.6.3 Basement Fresh Air Fan........................................................................................
44.3.6.4 Fire Pump Room Extract Fan................................................................................
44.3.7 Air Distribution System........................................................................................
44.3.7.1 Duct Works...........................................................................................................
44.3.7.2 Duct Thermal Insulation.......................................................................................
44.3.7.3 Duct Acoustic Liner..............................................................................................
44.3.7.4 Aluminium Cladding.............................................................................................
44.3.7.5 Flexible Duct Connector.......................................................................................
44.3.8 Fire Damper..........................................................................................................
44.3.8.1 Motorized Smoke Damper....................................................................................
44.3.8.2 Motorized Volume Control Dampers....................................................................
44.3.8.3 Volume Control Dampers.....................................................................................
44.3.9 Air Terminal Devices (Diffuser, Grilles, And LOUVERS)..................................
44.3.9.1 Ceiling Diffusers...................................................................................................
44.3.9.2 Double Deflection Register /Grilles......................................................................
44.3.9.3 Gravity Air Louver................................................................................................
44.3.10 Non-Return Dampers............................................................................................
44.3.11 Sand Trap Louvers................................................................................................
44.3.12 Condensate Drain..................................................................................................
44.3.13 HVAC Control & Power Panel.............................................................................
44.3.14 Sequence Of Operation.........................................................................................
44.3.14.1 Packaged Unit Controls.........................................................................................
44.3.14.2 Battery Room Extract Fans Control......................................................................
44.3.14.3 Basement Smoke / Extract Fans Control..............................................................
44.3.14.4 Basement Fresh Air Fans Control.........................................................................
44.3.14.5 Fire Dampers Monitoring......................................................................................
44.3.14.6 Decorative Split Units - Fire Pump Room Controls.............................................
44.3.14.7 Fire Pump Room Extract Fan Controls.................................................................
44.3.14.8 Temperature & Relative Humidity........................................................................
44.3.14.9 Fire Alarm Interface..............................................................................................
44.3.14.10 DCS / Scada Interface...........................................................................................
44.3.15 Engineering...........................................................................................................
44.3.15.1 Heat Load Calculation:.........................................................................................
44.3.15.2 Shop Drawings and As-Built Drawings:...............................................................
44.3.15.3 Technical Submittal..............................................................................................
44.3.16 Packing & Delivery...............................................................................................
44.3.17 Testing, Commissioning and Maintenance Requirement.....................................
44.3.18 Warranty................................................................................................................
44.3.19 Quality Assurance Plan.........................................................................................
44.3.20 Inspection Test Plan..............................................................................................
45 CIVIL DESIGN Requirements for Plant Substation.........................................................................352
45.1 Buildings /Rooms..................................................................................................
45.2 Transformer Foundations......................................................................................
45.3 Outdoor foundations - HV equipment...................................................................
45.4 Foundation for Diesel generator............................................................................
45.5 Foundation for Fire Fighting Pump room and Fire Water Tank...........................
45.6 RCC Cables Ducts, trenches.................................................................................
45.7 Roads, pavings and gravel bed surfacing..............................................................
45.8 Site Preparation, levelling and compacting...........................................................
45.9 Water supply system (domestic)...........................................................................
45.10 Drainage and sewage systems...............................................................................
45.11 The storm water drainage system shall include three distinct parts:.....................
45.12 Landscaping..........................................................................................................
45.13 Fencing and gates..................................................................................................
45.14 Centralized air-conditioning, ventilation and heating systems.............................
45.15 Overhead Traveling Crane (As Applicable).........................................................
45.16 Other works...........................................................................................................
45.17 Other works...........................................................................................................
45.18 Geotechnical investigation....................................................................................
45.19 Scope.....................................................................................................................
45.19.1 Bore Holes.............................................................................................................
45.19.2 Trial pits:...............................................................................................................
45.19.3 Electrical resistivity test:.......................................................................................
46 Structure electromechanical and Civil Works...................................................................................359
46.1 Corrosion protection..............................................................................................
46.2 Design...................................................................................................................
46.3 Structures...............................................................................................................
46.3.1 General requirements............................................................................................
46.4 Civil works............................................................................................................
46.4.1 Design loads..........................................................................................................
46.4.2 Earthworks............................................................................................................
46.4.3 Water management and Drainage.........................................................................
46.4.4 Access road, PV Plant road and platforms............................................................
46.4.5 Security system and fencing..................................................................................
46.4.6 Storage area...........................................................................................................
46.4.7 Training.................................................................................................................
46.4.8 Operation and Maintenance..................................................................................
46.4.9 Site Clearance Final Acceptance...........................................................................
Annexure 1 – Plant Substation Approved Manufacturer’s Lists..............................................
Annexure-2 Plant Substation Single Line Diagram for SADAWI Solar PV IPP.....................
Annexure-3 Plant Substation SCMS and Cybersecurity Architecture.....................................
Annexure-4 MV 33kV RMU SLD...........................................................................................
Annexure-5 Earthing Installation Details.................................................................................
Annexure-6 Cable DUCT Bank and Trench Section Details...................................................
1 Definitions
AC Alternating current
CSV Comma separated values
CT Current transformer
DC Direct current
DCS Distributed control system
DigSilent
Is an electrical network modeling and simulation Software
PowerFactory
Electrical transient analyzer program is an electrical network modeling

ETAP
and simulation software.
FO Fiber optic
HMI Human machine interface
HV High voltage > 50 kV
LV Low voltage <1kV
LV/MV It is the power transformer included in the Transformer Station with a

Transformer(s rating of 0.8/33kV, power - temperature curve of transformer shall be
) matching with inverter’s power - temperature curve.
MV 1 kV < medium voltage < 50 kV
NVR Network video recorder
OEM Original equipment manufacturer
OPGW Optical Pilot Ground Wire
Power Plant Controller (PPC) which is a supervisory control constructed

by the Contractor at Plant level applied to regulate the terminal behaviour
PPC (Power of the complete Plant by dispatching commands for active and reactive
Plant power to the individual PV Inverters.
Controller)
PPC needs to be connected with dedicated 110kV CT and VT core from
Plant Substation.
Includes HV switchgear (circuit breaker, isolating switches, metering

transformers etc.), Power Transformer, MV switchgears, earthing or
Plant
auxiliary transformer for substation auxiliary loads and a civil building
Substation
with associated auxiliaries and SCADA and telecommunication
equipment up to the Delivery Point and excluding the ESF.
PLC Programmable logic controller
Power Suitable power transformer shall be selected as per local grid
Transformer code/ITB/Project agreements requirements.
Power system computer aided design is an electrical network modeling

PSCAD
Power system simulator for engineering is an electrical network modeling

PSS-E
PV Photovoltaic
DC/AC converter which collects the DC power generated by PV modules

PV Inverter(s)
before delivering to the AC system.
RTU Remote terminal unit
Includes monitoring system and Plant Control System for the grid
integration of the PV Plant including voltage, reactive power, power
SCADA
factor control system and frequency/active power control system at the
Delivery Point.
SCMS Substation control and monitoring system
SDH Synchronous digital hierarchy
SFTP Secure file transfer protocol
SQL Structured query language
STC Standard test conditions
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol/internet protocol
In string inverter configuration, it collects the power generated by the

Transformer 800V AC system before delivering to the Plant Substation through the
Station(s) MV AC network. Optimised size of transformer station shall be selected
as per requirement of local grid code/ITB/Project agreements
VLAN Virtual local area network
VT Voltage transformer
2 General scope of Works
The Saudi Power Procurement Company (SPPC) initiated the implementation of a large-scale solar PV
project (“Plant”) in the Saudi Arabia, approximately 36 km southeast of the city of Al Henakiyah in Madinah
Province. The name of the project is Al Henakiyah 2 Solar PV IPP.
The maximum feed-in power at the Connection Point of HENAKIYAH-PV (HNK-PV) 380 /110 KV BSP is
limited 400 MWac Al Henakiyah 2 Solar PV IPP.
New Connection Equipment and associated interfaces with SEC/NGSA, for the energy evacuation of the
Plant is necessary. The Connection Equipment and associated interfaces will be constructed, owned,
operated and maintained by the Project Company and satisfy the requirement of the SAGC to isolate and
clear faults. The requirements for the Connection Equipment and associated interfaces are described in Part
II CE and PV Interface Room, and will be in accordance with SEC/NGSA vendor list, specifications,
standards, review and approval.
The requirements for the Solar IPP Plant Substation are described in the RFP and Annexures.
This Annexures consists of two separate sets of documents, namely:

 COMPANY Scope of Work Requirement - Project Specific Technical Specifications; and
 The RFP Technical specifications released by SPPC which consist of further three set of documents,
namely:
o Part II General Technical Specifications: The general technical specifications applicable

for all Round 5 Solar PV Projects (“Part II General”);
o Part II Particular - Project Specific Technical Specifications: The project specific
technical specifications (“Part II Particular”); and
o Part II CE and PV Interface Room: The SEC/NGSA specific interface requirements,
Connection Equipment and associated grid interfaces.
In case of any conflict in requirements mentioned in this document with any other documents from EPC term
sheet/ local grid code/ITB/Project agreements/International Standards/Local Standards/etc., not explicitly
mentioned herein, then the most stringent requirement shall prevail.
It will remain the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the Project complies with this Annexures,
EPC Contract and the Related Agreements (together with the Laws of KSA, Industry Documents and
applicable international standards and codes of practice, as might be used in accordance with the Worldwide
Prudent Utility Practice.
All plant equipments supplied under this Contract shall conform to or be of higher quality than the latest
applicable standard.
Plant Substation Electrical, Civil and Mechanical requirements shall be design as per Company Specification
& requirements, SEC Specification & Standards (wherever applicable), International Standards (SEC, IEC,
IEEE, BS, EN, VDE), Norms, Local Laws, Rules & regulations, SEC Approved Vendor Lists (wherever
applicable), but not limited to the technical details mentioned in this specification.
Canvassing any Forms and Annexures by the bidder or by any other agency on their behalf may lead to
disqualification of their bid., their technical proposal, submissions during pre-bid, post-bid and especially
during the Design & Engineering and Execution Stage, with NO liability from Project Company.
Project Company shall not be responsible for any expense incurred by bidders in connection with the
preparation & delivery of their bids, site visit, participating in the discussion and other expenses incurred
during the bidding process.
In case of conflicts between below technical requirements, different specified reference standards covering
the same material or equipment, or other standards, then which will provide the highest quality and most
suitable application, as determined by the Project Company shall only prevail.
The Contractor shall agree to make no claim for alleged losses because of any difference between the
specification, standards or quantities, actually furnished and installed and the estimated quantities after detail
design or any other reasons, not being explicitly mentioned herein.
The contractor shall consider the preliminary Geotechnical Report and Topography performed by the
Company. Contractor shall comply with the outcome and must consider the recommendations of the reports
and studies as a minimum design requirement. Contractor shall comply with the outcome and must consider
the recommendations of the reports and studies as a minimum design requirement. As per the Contract, the
Company does not warrant the sufficiency, completeness, comprehensiveness and is not endorsing the
content. Contractor shall develop additional studies as part of the Works. The SCADA supplier shall be a
legally separate and independent entity from the Group Parent and shall be subject to Company approval.
The PV part of the Project shall be designed, constructed, installed, operated, maintained and
decommissioned for compliance with applicable national laws on environmental, safety, labor, social and
security matters and the performance requirements set forth in the PPA.
The Contractor shall also undertake all complementary site investigations required to validate his design (not
limited to foundations, roads, platforms, earthing calculations and cable sizing according to applicable
standards), including soil electrical resistivity measurements, soil thermal resistivity measurements,
geotechnical investigations and hydrological studies as appropriate.
The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient samplings, data and information (according to best engineering
practice) from minimum following site survey and studies are considered while preparing the design for the
Project.
 Topographical Study.
 Hydrological Study.
 Geotechnical Study.
 Pull out Tests
 Corrosion study
 Lightning risk assessment
The contractor shall provide for Project Company’s review the scope of works of above-mentioned studies
before starting any investigation.
The contractor shall consider the design ambient temperature of 50°C for equipment selection and design.
3 Civil scope of works

The civil works to be performed under this Contract shall include, but are not necessarily limited to:
 All necessary Site investigations to allow needed by the Contractor for in order to have adequate and
robust design of the PV Plant, including civil works, structures and foundations.
 All on Site testing and environmental assessments required by the Contractor to determine the final
foundation design and adequately mitigate the associated corrosion risks, The Contractor shall
determine the corrosion category of site by performing relevant corrosion category determination
test (long term corrosion tests will be not required) and same shall be approved by the company, in
any case the minimum corrosion category shall be C3 (high).
 The loading assumptions for earthquake in the civil design shall be based on the seismic factor as per
latest applicable code requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring an appropriate
seismic design for the Plant.
 All material that is not naturally corrosion-resistant shall be treated or finished to protect surface and
functional integrity under the ambient conditions prevailing at site.
 Metallic and non-metallic materials shall be UV and sand resistant and withstand ambient
temperature operation regimes as per the climatic conditions over the whole Plant design lifetime,
and where materials are specified in any part of this agreement, those characteristics are to be
considered as a minimum requirement.
 All materials used for concrete, reinforced concrete structures, steel structures, aluminum structures
or structural elements or any other building material shall be of high quality, free from defects likely
to undermine the strength and duration of service of the Plant.
Civil works and structures including foundations inside the Plant Substation shall include, but not be limited
to the following:
 Site preparation and construction facilities.
 Installation of gates, fences and CCTV system,
 Construction and testing of drainage system.
 Construction of Site facilities.
 Construction of office buildings.
 Construction of Cable Basement for Complete Control.
 Construction of the Plant Substation structure and the other structures necessary to house the LV and
MV rooms, disconnectors, meters, switches, monitoring and other electrical equipment, both in the
PV Plant Substation and the Remote End Offtaker Substation.
 Construction of all civil work required for the Plant Substation and the Remote End Offtaker
Substation.
 Construction of RCC Ducts for Cable Crossing the Asphalt Road, inside Plant Substation.
 Construction of Trenches for Control Cables for Outdoor Switchyard.
 Construction of Gantry inside the Plant Substation and OHL Tower.
 Construction of all civil work required for the Plant Substation.
The Works also include the provision, handling and use of all materials and equipment (including
Contractors Equipment), and all labor (including appropriate skilled and qualified supervision for all
individual elements of the Works) required for the performance of the Works to be completed under this
Contract.
4 Electrical scope of work
The Contractor Works includes design, supply, procure, manufactures, factory acceptance test, insurance,
delivery, installation, inspection, testing and commissioning of the Solar PV IPP Substation and the
associated interface works as specified in this Contract.
The Contractor is obligated to perform the installation, testing, and commissioning in accordance with the
Design, calculations, and studies prepared by the Contractor.
The Contractor must obtain approval from the Competent Authority for the design note calculation reports,
study reports, drawings, and plans provided by the Contractor.
The Works includes installation, inspection, testing and commissioning of the Plant Substation as specified
in this document, and including but not limited to the following systems of the Plant:
 110kV Indoor Gas Insulated Switchgear (circuit breaker, isolating switches, current & voltage
transformer, disconnector with double earthing switches, surge arrestors etc.) with Gas insulated
busduct or the suitable HV cable upto gantry and transformer side with IN-OUT Arrangement along
with the Gantry, along with the Connections up to SEC BSP Substation, including Interconnection
and Interfacing in full compliance with SEC Requirement.
 Overhead ACSR Conductor Connection between Plant Substation and Remote End Offtaker
Substation.
 Lattice Steel Structure for Gantry.
 Interconnecting Transmission Towers while connecting the Plant Substation to SEC BSF Substation
through OHL Connections (as applicable).
 33kV Metal clad Compartmentalized Single Busbar Gas Insulated Switchgear.
 33/110kV Generating Step-up Main Power Transformer.
 33kV MV AC underground circuits.
 33/0.4kV Earthing, Auxiliary transformer or Earthing Cum Auxiliary Transformer, to meet the Plant
Substation loads.
 Reactive power compensation systems i.e., FACTS Devices (STATCOM, SVG, Capacitor Banks,
others) and must comply with SAGC Grid Code and this Contract.
 Plant Substation SCADA System which shall be a legally separate an independent entity and shall be
subject to Company approval.
 Telecommunication (SDH or IP-MPLS)
 Power Plant Controller (PPC) Panel
 Power Quality Monitoring (PQM) Panel
 110kV Control & Relay Protection Panels.
 Separate and Dedicated 110kV and 33kV Fault Recorder Panel for Plant Substation.
 Copper Armoured MV Cables, LV Cables, Control cable and FO Cables inside the Plant Substation.
 All MV, LV Power Cable, Control Cables and FO Cables shall be laid in separate layers of Ladder
and Perforated type cable trays with cable/ties with MV Power Cable at the bottom, above its LV
Control Cables and above its FO Cables, in the Cable basement inside the Plant Substation and RCC
Trench for Power Transformer and others, with FINAL approval from Project Company.
 XLPE Copper Armored Cable for inside the Plant Substation for following connections:
 33kV Incomer and Power Transformer,
 33kV GIS & 33kV Capacitor Bank/ SVC/ Statcom,
 33kV GIS & Earthing Transformer, Auxiliary Transformer.
 LV DC cable.
 Redundant 2x100% Nickel Cadmium DC Batteries and 2x100% Thyristor Controlled Battery
Chargers, 2x100% UPS.
 400V LVAC Switchgear
 Metering Panel for Main & Check Meter.
 Firefighting (Water Deluge System) for Power Transformer as per NFPA 850.
 Clean Agent (Firefighting) for 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear along with its own separate and
dedicated Wall Mounted Fire Extinguishing Control Panel (FECP).
 Fire Alarm and Protection System, Wall Mounted Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) as per local
regulations and standards.
 Roof Top Centralized PACU type for Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning System (HVAC)
with Air Compressor, Air Handing Unit (AHU) on the Roof of Civil RCC Building for Plant
Substation and Ducts.
 Cybersecurity
 Small Power and Indoor & Outdoor Lighting System
 CCTV and Anti-Intrusion System
 Diesel Generators for Plant Substation
 The complete Copper Conductors for earthing system and lightning system and all necessary
interconnections for PV Farm, Plant Substation and Off taker’s Substation.
 The Remote End Protection and Telecommunication, fibre optic/OPGW and DPLC equipment of the
OHTL.
 The Supply of Main and Backup Relay Protections (Line Differential, Busbar Differential), Repeater
Relay and others at Remote End Grid Station.
 Tie-in with the Utility Remote Dispatch System and be complied to the Grid Code (or the draft Grid
Code prior to the implementation of the Grid Code) to the extent applicable. All components, data
cables (cables for internal remote control) and monitoring grid must be fiber optic (or twisted pair).,
data logger, operating system computer, router, switches etc. must be installed in industry standard
mode.
All the Works shall be suitable for the design life of ≥30 years from Provisional Acceptance, considered in
conjunction with the location of the Site and the inherent climatic conditions.
Transformers shall be certified to be suitable for installation in seismic category correspondent to the Site.
Transformers must be able to withstand seismic effect by providing appropriate seismic rated anchor. Base
plate shall be designed to permit skidding or rolling in directions parallel to centerlines of the transformer.
5 Water Supply
I. Water supply shall be designed in accordance with applicable environmental regulation,
the environmental and social impact assessment for the project (ESIA) and the water
resource management plan.
II. The Contractor shall use reasonable efforts to minimize use of water and to recycle water.
III. Potable water system shall be used to provide domestic water to the toilet flushing systems
and for any other domestic water uses. The potable water source shall be assumed is the
municipal water. The water shall be supplied by truck and would be in scope of contractor.
IV. A complete potable water system includes tank, pumps, piping, accessories, control, and
instrumentation should be provided. The potable water system should be provided with 2 x
100% adjustable frequency domestic water pumps to meet 100% of the water consumption
of the Plant. One potable water tank shall be provided which capacity for at least one-day
consumption. The tank shall be made of carbon steel with virgin high-density polyethylene
“HDPE” internal liner. The tank shall be outdoor type, and provided complete with its
injection system, control, valves, accessories, and piping.
V. Disinfection’s system shall ensure complete removal of pathogenic bacteria, viruses and
other harmful species. Storage and distribution facilities shall be designed to ensure no
formation of any contamination of the domestic water. The water shall be treated to meet
the minimum quality requirements.
VI. Water requirement at the time of construction will be in scope of contractor, contractor will
have to manage the quantity and quality of water required for the purpose of construction .
6 Consumables and Tools
The Contractor shall provide all construction, start up and commissioning spare parts and consumables for
the Plant.
The Contractor’s shall provide all special tools (those tools that can only be sourced from the OEMs)
required for installation, checking, inspection and repair of all equipment of the Plant in both stages of
project execution and during Operation and Maintenance. Any special tools and software licenses for the
equipment which are required for operation, maintenance, and configuration of plant systems, etc. shall also
be provided by the Contractor.
7 Initial spare parts
Contractor shall properly procure, supply and store at the Site, protected from the sun and the rain, an initial
set of spare parts recommended for the operation and maintenance of the Plant (the “Initial Spare Parts”).
The list of Initial Spare Parts shall be minimum include as per Schedule xx, Spare Parts; in accordance with
OEM recommendations; and Prudent Utility Practice.
7.1 Spare Parts for Remote End Off Taker Substation (SEC)
The Seller shall provide spare parts and consumables for the Remote End Offtaker Substation sufficient for
five (5) years of normal operation as per manufacturers’ guidelines for the normal operation and
maintenance of the equipment.
These spare parts and consumables will be handed over to the Purchaser on commissioning of the Remote
End Offtaker Substation. These spare parts and consumables shall be as per a list prepared by the Seller in
accordance with Good Utility Practice and delivered to the Purchaser.
If the Purchaser believes such list of spare parts and consumables has not been developed in accordance with
Good Utility Practice, then the Seller and Purchaser shall meet within five (5) Days to discuss such non-
conformities.
7.2 Equipment warranties (Purchaser’s Installations) for the Remote End Offtaker Substation
The Seller shall provide to the Purchaser a list of all equipment warranties as well as relevant contract terms
and conditions to the Purchaser. The benefit of warranties and other rights shall be transferred from the
Seller to the Remote End Offtaker Substation.
7.3 Identification System
The Contractor shall use a uniform identification designation and numbering system. The identification
designation shall be used on all drawings, schedules, descriptions, and other documents as well as on all
nameplates, tags, and on equipment and components itself (wherever applicable). For cable and wire
identification, the identification designation shall be engraved or stamped on stainless steel nameplates. Each
piece of equipment, instrument, control panel, inverter and pertaining apparatus shall be provided with
nameplates indicating its designed purpose as well as identification designation.
The labelling system shall be provided in accordance with the Company requirements. The labels shall be
clearly visible and made of extremely durable material resistant against the environmental conditions, as
minimum for the design lifetime of the Plant.
Each module shall have its identification tag with bar code which relates to its original fabrication and test
data as provided in the modules datalog. All array rows and tables must be labelled with engraved labels
showing row and PV table number. All combiner boxes must have a layout indicating the location and
number of the combiner box relative to the overall array. All combiner boxes must be labelled with
permanent marking denoting the associated string/subarray number as per the as the as-built drawings.
The entire Project documentation shall use the German KKS identification system to identify Plant
equipment, function and location. KKS procedure to be prepared and submitted by the Contractor for
Company review and approval during detailed design stage.
8 STUDIES AND SURVEYS
The Contractor shall develop the complete basic and detailed engineering, including acquisition
and preparation of all technical and interface information required to complete its scope of work.
As required for planning, permits obtention and provision of guarantees activities, according to the
Conditions of Contract, engineering services and investigations including but not limited to the
following shall be performed:
 Due diligence on all applicable aspects

 Data collection regarding all interfaces
 Review and consideration of performed geotechnical site investigations, surveys and
subsoil conditions investigations as deemed necessary.
 Hydrological study at the Site and surroundings affecting the Site. In particular, the
hydrological study shall assess the risk of flooding at the Site. The hydrological study shall
amongst others be the basis for the plant drainage design report.
 Site survey including topographic survey, investigation of interfaces and existing systems,
utilities or structures.
 Seismological study
 Corrosion protection study (environmental and underground)
 Environmental and Social Management Plans (ESMP) for the construction and the
operational phases, based on and in accordance with the Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment (ESIA)
 Prepare Health and Safety Management Plans (HSMP) for the construction and the
operational phases.
 Authority Plan including a list of relevant Authorities, required permits and approvals, a
brief description of permitting process and a timeline for permitting process up to start of
commercial operation.
 On the basis of the review of the topographical survey, geotechnical investigations and
hydrological study, any additional investigations required to serve as a solid basis for the
specification of the works, such as:
1. Dune stability assessment (if any)
2. Logistic survey (if required)
3. Aggressiveness of atmosphere, soil and water
4. Due diligence of any existing over ground or underground facilities
5. Any further topographic survey, if required
6. Any additional geotechnical surveys, if required
7. Any additional hydrological study
 Earthing Design Calculation for PV Plant Substation (Step and Touch Potential)
 Cable current carrying capacity calculation and coordination with protection equipment.
 Thermal studies and modelling for main systems and equipment
 Lightning Calculation
 Illumination calculation study
 Any other study, simulation, modelling, calculation required.
 Complete design and engineering calculations
The Contractor has to make use of internationally recognized software for simulation, modelling,
calculation, equipment sizing and analysis purposes.
The Contractor shall further take note of and respect all applicable health, safety and environmental
regulations and guidelines including dress code, housekeeping and other guidelines for workers
and visitors at the PV Plant Substation. The development of a Health and Safety Management
Plans for construction and operation is required.
By no means shall the Project Company and SPV entity be made responsible for incorrect
information provided within this Bidding Documents, and the Contractor is requested to perform
its own due diligence on all provided information and undertake its own studies, as required.
The provision of this information does not release the Contractor from performing all required
surveys, studies, and reports required for the detail design and construction phase.
9 Engineering Data
The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the Schedule as specified in
the Bidding Document. The review of these data by the Project Company will cover only general
conformance of the data to the specifications and not a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities and
details of the materials, or items indicated, or the accuracy of the information submitted. This review by the
Project Company shall not be considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and
liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these specifications.
All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after review by the Project Company shall form part of the
contract document.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all engineering and design activities related to the Project,
including but not limited to:
 The Contractor shall execute the basic and detailed design and engineering work in
compliance with the provisions of the Contract, or where not so specified, in accordance
with Good Industry Practices.
 Engineering of all Works (Electrical, Civil & Structural, I&C and mechanical) under the
Contract, this includes among others:
1. Schematics, logical and detailed diagrams and layout.
2. Simulation, modelling, calculation, equipment sizing, and analysis and calculation
notes; using internationally recognized software’s.
3. Method statements, testing and inspection protocols.
4. @CYMCAP for Cable Sizing Calculations [Mandatory]
5. @CYMGRD for Earthing Sizing Calculations [Mandatory]
 Setting up and maintaining a document and communication management platform
including provision of relevant licenses to the Employer.
 Calculation for LVAC, LVDC, 33kV MV Cables (Mandatory for All Road Crossings)
considering Cable Ducts (HDPE) in RCC ONLY, inside the PV Farm and Plant
Substation.
 General activities during design review with Employer.
 Any engineering or coordination related to existing systems or structures as required,
covering e.g., recalculation of existing systems, data acquisition or measurements on
existing systems or structures.
 Coordination with Employer, Independent Engineer or any relevant third parties as
applicable.
 Liaising with Authorities and any relevant third parties on behalf of the Employer.
 Obtaining permits and licenses on behalf of the Employer.
 Elaboration of Engineering and Design Documents, obtaining approval by Employer,
Independent Engineer or any relevant third parties as applicable, document handling,
structuring, quality assurance and control and handover to Employer and Independent
Engineer or any relevant Third Parties as applicable.
 The Contractor shall prepare, and keep up to date, a complete set of "as-built" drawings,
specifications and calculations for the Works, showing the exact as-built locations, sizes
and details of the Works as executed. These records shall be kept on the Site in form of
hard and soft copies.
 Coordination between different OEMs, designers and OEMs to confirm the safe and
proposer sizing of systems and equipment.
The Contractor shall ensure that the design is prepared according to the requirements provided
under the Bidding documents.
By no means shall the issuing entity be made responsible for incorrect information provided within
this Bid, and the Contractor is requested to perform its own due diligence on all provided
information and undertake its own design, as required. The provision of this information does not
release the Contractor from performing the detail design and comply with the requirements under
the Bidding documents.
10 Tender Drawings
Drawings are to be submitted with the Bid, showing all essential details of supply and construction of
various supplies. The drawings furnished by the Project Company with the Bidding Document are
preliminary only and the Contractor shall investigate the sites and design as per actual site requirement
without any additional cost to the Project Company.
Bidder shall submit the following drawings and documents with the Bid:
a) Brief Description of the plant and equipment offered.
b) Electrical Single Line Diagram.
c) Relay and metering single line diagram.
d) Plot plan, Substation Plan and Section.
e) Control Building layout.
f) Bill of Material.
g) Sub vendor List.
h) Filled up datasheets.
11 Drawings and documents for approval
Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit detailed design drawings and data to the
Project Company for approval. Should the Project Company direct those modifications be made in order to
satisfy the requirements of the Specifications, the Contractor shall submit revised drawings for approval.
Alteration in the Contract price shall not be allowed by reason of the drawing modifications.
The Contractor shall prepare and furnish to the Project Company such drawings, calculations, and data on
materials and equipment (hereinafter in this provision called data) as are required for the proper control and
completion of the work. This shall include but not be limited to those drawings, data and calculations
specifically required elsewhere in the Technical Specifications.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings, instructions and maintenance books, and parts lists with
recommended stock quantities for the equipment furnished, prepare and submit detailed engineering, design
and construction drawings pertaining to all civil, structural, architectural, mechanical and electrical
equipment and installations in substations. The drawings to be furnished by the Contractor shall include, but
not be limited, to the following:
a) Electrical System Design
- Design Basis Report
- Single line and three-line diagrams for AC and DC station service power supply
- Relay and Metering Single Line Diagram.
- CT & VT Sizing calculation.
- Insulation Co-ordination
- Substation Earthing/Grounding calculation
- Direct Stroke Lightning Protection (DSLP) Calculation.
- Sizing calculation of Battery & Battery-Charger.
- Design Calculation for indoor and outdoor Illumination System
- Sag, tension and short circuit force calculation.
- Cable Sizing Calculation through @CYMCAP Software.
- Calculation and coordination for selecting operation of protection relays
- Detailed material list
b) Plot Plan of Substation Premises
c) Substation Layout
- Electrical layout (Plan and section) of substations
- Electrical Clearance diagram.
- Erection key diagram for substations
- Electrical Layout of Control Building
- Cabling Layout including cable trench, cable tray, wire gutters, conduits, and specifying
location.
- Substation grounding Layout, plans, elevations, and details
- Control Room grounding Layout, plans, elevations and details
- Cable trench, duct and conduit layout plan, elevation and details.
- Substation lighting and convenience outlet plan, elevation, and details
- Installation details for equipment
- Cable schedule, specifying cable identification number, routing and length of the cable for
the substation and cable summary.
- Detailed interconnection diagram for all substation equipment, AC and DC station service
equipment and all building equipment.
d) Equipment drawings
- Dimensioned General arrangement drawings showing front and rear elevations and
identification of each device and complete nameplate schedule
- Foundation Loading Details
- AC and DC diagram for control, metering, relaying, communication, alarm, etc. required to
describe in detail the operation of all systems in the substation. Wire numbers and terminal
numbers for each device shall be clearly marked on all AC and DC elementary and
schematic diagram
- Communication system drawings
- Technical Catalogues
- Instruction Manuals for Erection, Testing and Commissioning
- Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
- Instruction books, spare parts lists, material lists and any other documents pertaining to the
substation and required for construction, operation, maintenance and repair.
e) Civil, Structural and Architectural Works

- Geo technical Investigation report
- Details of veiling and grading of substation area.
- Design Basis report
- Design/calculation of all Civil structural works
- Foundation Layout of Substations, plans and elevations indicating top of foundations, details
for anchor bolt installation, plus all data required for civil works
- Structural erection and fabrication drawings and Bar Bending schedule for RCC structures
and foundations.
- Details of slope protection and retaining walls
- Civil, Structural and architectural drawings for all buildings.
- Details of Road and Drains.
- Details of fences and gates.
- Details of stone spreading within substation area.
f) General Documentations
- Monthly Progress Report
- QA/QC Documentation including MQP and FQP for all Equipment & systems
- Testing and commissioning procedure of each equipment
- Design (Type) Test Reports as specified
- Routine Test Reports of all Equipment
- Field Test Reports
The Contractor shall draw Project Company’s attention to any conflict between the requirements of this
Company Scope of Work Requirement and its references.
Should the requirements of this Exhibit B, conflict with the requirements of the codes and standards
references herein or with the applicable Local Standards, regulations and Project Company, then the more
stringent requirements shall apply, at the Contractor’s cost.
Should there be any difference of opinion with regard to the interpretation of this requirements, then Project
Company shall instruct the Contractor to comply with the requirements, wherein the Contractor shall
implement and execute at its own cost, with no such technical and contractual liability from the Project
Company, no matter for whatsoever reasons, thereof.
The scope of work cover, detailed design and engineering, permitting, procurement, manufacturing,
subcontractor coordination, factory testing, transport to site, erection, construction, commissioning, trial run,
performance testing and reliability tests for Complete PV Farm, 33/110kV complete plant substation works
and interconnections (as and where applicable) with Remote End Offtaker substation and load despatch
center.
The contractor shall include in its scope all the equipment, works and services necessary for the complete,
safe and reliable operation and maintenance of whole PV Farm, 33/110kV plant substation and associated
works with Remote End Offtaker Substation, even if certain essential works are not expressly stated herein.
The equipment shall be design in accordance with the requirements of IEC standards in their latest editions
and other relevant codes, SEC standards, local laws and regulations along with the additional requirements
of this specification. The IPP Plant Substation will be used to connect the main transformers to the electrical
network of 110kV. This shall be used to establish the maintenance procedures and component replacements
required to achieve the ≥30 year design life.
In case of conflict between IEC, IEEE, BS, EN, VDE, SEC and Local regulations, then the most stringent
and onerous requirements shall be applicable and final approval rest with Project Company ONLY, with no
contractual and technical liability from Company and without assigning any reasons to the
Contractor/Bidder. Any costs associated to incorporate those requirements shall be solely The
Contractors/Bidder’s responsible and shall be attributable to Bidder, without any price and time implication.
Any reasoning from Bidder’s shall never have any Contractual Authenticity, Validity and Authority.
During Bidding stage, the Contractor/Bidder must provide the Type Test Certificate of individual
equipment’s and assembled products, for Power Transformer, 110kV GIS, 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgears,
Earthing Transformer, Auxiliary Transformer, Earthing Cum Auxiliary Transformers, Inverter Duty
Transformer, 33kV Ring Main Unit, LVAC & LVDC Cables, MV Cables and others, inside the PV Farm
and Plant Substation, with validity Less than equal to 5 years.
In case of unavailability of Type Test Certificate with the 5 Years Validity, then the Contractor and
Manufacturer shall be conducting the Type Test Certificate at Internationally Recognized Testing Authorities
and Place, approved by the Company. All expenses towards testing and transportation for conducting the
Type Test shall be borne by the Contractor.
Power Transformer and 110kV Indoor Gas Insulated Switchgears along with its accessories, components and
others which has not been explicitly mentioned herein, shall be Mandatorily must have been supplied and
commissioned with minimum Five (5) years of Operational experience in any CIS Countries. [Mandatory
requirement]
Final decision shall be from the Project Company and solely reserves the right to decide, approve and
reject, with no technical and contractual liability to the Bidder, no matter for whatsoever reasons.
12 Basic Technical Values for 33kV, 110kV Electrical and Mechanical Equipment’s
Nominal System Voltage 33 kV 110 kV

Highest Voltage for Equipment 36 kV 145 kV
Rated Frequency 60 Hz 60 Hz
Rated Short Duration Power-Frequency Withstand
70 kV As per SEC
Voltage
Rated Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage 170 kVpeak As per SEC
Based on
Rated Short Time Withstand Current As per SEC
Company SLD
Installation Indoor Indoor
Altitude < 1000 m < 1000 m
Pollution Level (degree as per UL and IEC) 3 3
Creepage Distance 31 mm/kV 31 mm/kV

Maximum Ambient Temperature for Outdoor +55°C +55°C
Equipments (typical year)
Minimum Ambient Temperature for Outdoor
+0°C +0°C
Equipments (typical year)
Maximum ambient humidity 100% 100%
12.1 GRID CONNECTION
AL HENAKIYAH 2 SOLAR PV IPP HIGH VOLTAGE INTERCONNECTION
The Plant will be connected on 110 kV to a new SEC/NGSA HENAKIYAH-PV (HNK-PV) 380
/110 KV BSP (Grid Station) constructed and operated by SEC.
Two (2) Numbers of 110 kV feeders will be allocated by SEC to evacuate the power generation of
the Plant. The maximum capacity per feeder is 2000A, this is in line with the capacity of each 110
KV circuit breaker within SEC/NGSA HENAKIYAH-PV (HNK-PV) 380 /110 KV BSP (Grid
Station).
The 110 kV OHLs and all related equipments will be in the scope of the Contractor.
The high voltage terminals of the main step-up transformers shall be connected via Connection
Equipment and high voltage lines to the 110 kV GIS/AIS terminals of the Grid Station. Connection
Point between the Grid Station and the IPP shall be at the 110 kV gantry of the SEC/NGSA
HENAKIYAH-PV (HNK-PV) 380 /110 KV BSP (Grid Station).
The scope of the Project Company covers all equipments up to the Connection Point; this includes
but is not limited to the following:
 110 kV Connection Equipment;

 110 kV OHL connections;
 Protection and communication for 110 kV OHL connections;
 Fiber optic cable for 110 kV OHL connection till the communication room/PV Interface
Room at the Grid Station; and
 LV power cables, control, communication cables between Plant and Grid Station.
Electrical single line diagram is provided along with this RFP.
See Part II CE and PV Interface Room of the RFP for further details of the HV Connection
Equipment and the required interfaces to the Grid Station.
The design, engineering, installation and commissioning of the above-mentioned HV Connection

Equipment and associated interfaces with SEC shall be in accordance with SEC vendor lists,
specifications, and standards and subject to SEC review and approval. SEC require the HV
Connection Equipment to comprise a circuit breaker, disconnectors, switchgear, etc. to fulfil the
SAGC requirement to isolate and clear faults at the Plant and ensure security of the grid.
The Project Company shall design, build, maintain and operate its own substation (the Plant
Substation) and the related transmission facilities to connect its generation units.
13 Technical Requirements for the Electrical Balance of System
The objective of this document is to define the constructional requirements for the electrical balance of
system of the PV Plant and for the Plant Substation of the Project.
13.1 General Terms & Conditions:
 The company reserves the right to assess bidder’s capability and capacity of the bidder for carrying
out the supplies and the decision of COMPANY in this regard shall be final.
 Company reserves the right to accept or reject any or all the tenders in part or full including rejection
of any request for issue of tender documents, alter the quantities or split the order without assigning
any reason thereof.
13.2 Order of Precedence
The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one another. If there is an
ambiguity or discrepancy in the documents, the Engineer-in-Charge shall issue necessary clarifications or
instructions to the Contractor, and the order of precedence of the documents shall be as follows:
a) EPC Contract Agreement (All Exhibits, Annexures)

b) Company Scope of Work and Technical Specifications
c) Detailed Letter of Acceptance along with its enclosures
d) Letter of Award / Fax of Acceptance
e) Drawings
f) Special Conditions of Contract
g) Instruction to Bidders
h) General Conditions of Contract
i) Other Documents
13.3 Confidential Information
Both Parties shall treat the details of the Contract as private and confidential, to the extent necessary to carry
out obligations under it or to comply with the Applicable Laws.
The Contractor shall not publish, permit to be published, or disclose any particulars of the Works in any
trade or technical paper or elsewhere without prior consent of Project Company.
14 33KV MV Cables for PV Collector Feeders
The Contractor shall lay the MV cables directly buried in Ground, HDPE Duct for Road Crossing according
to the Company specification, requirements and accordingly compliant design shall be submitted by the
Contractor.
The Bidder/Contract shall Mandatorily submit the Cable Sizing Calculation in accordance with IEC 60502
(All Series), IEC 60278 (All Series), IEC TR 62095, BS 7671:2018+A22022, IEEE, EN standards and
country specific practice shall be considered.
Cable Sizing Calculation needs to be submitted only in @CYMCAP Software. Any other software shall be
REJECTED.
All MV AC cables shall comply with the following requirements:
 Construction compliant with IEC 60502 (All Series)

 Rated maximum continuous voltage: 36kV
 Power Frequency: 60 Hz
 Longitudinal Conductor Water-Blocking: Required
 Conductor Material: Aluminum according to IEC 60228
 Insulation Material: XLPE
 Outer sheath material: PVC or PE
 Outer sheath colour: Black
 Aluminium Tape Armored
 33kV Aluminium Al/XLPE/PVC/ATA/PVC/FRLS Cable
 Sizing according to IEC 60287 and guidelines of IEC 60502-2
 Any Cyclic loading (IEC 60853) and Dry Out Conditions shall be REJECTED.
 Cables shall be mandatorily design with 20% Design Margin.
 Cables shall never Overheat at maximum electric load.
 Cables shall survive all potential electric faults without insulation and screen damages.
 Conductor size shall mandatorily be selected based on the most severe, onerous site and
environmental conditions. Wherever, 33kV PV Collector Cables and Plant Substation Power
cables are routed through directly buried ground (Trench), partly in RCC concrete cable trench,
some portions in road crossing Duct Banks and some portions in cable trays in freely ventilated
area then, Under such conditions, limiting capacity must be determined by the most onerous
condition which offer ‘Lowest Ampacity’, which shall be mandatorily “Road Crossing in Duct
Banks”.
 All installed cables shall be suitable to the environmental conditions at the Site, including UV-
protection, anti-rodent protection and water protection.
 The installed cable cross section shall be minimum of 120 sq.mm., sizing of cable shall be done
considering all de rating factors, specifically the actual values of ground temperature from
Geotech report, which shall be considered for calculation of temperature de rating, also cross
section shall be revised as per feedback from Lenders and Owner Engineers.
 Electrical tests after installation shall include:
 DC voltage of the over sheath according to IEC 60229 during 5 minutes
 Screen continuity test
 Insulation test
 Very low frequency insulation test (0.1 Hz) at 3 U0 during 15 minutes minimum
 Tan delta (0.1 Hz) at 0.5-1-1.5 and 2 U0 according to IEEE 400-2.
 If the results of tan delta test are not conclusive, a partial discharge test at 2 U0 shall be
conducted.
14.1 Bonding of Cables for 33kV PV Collector Feeders
For Single-Core Cable, from PV Farm to Plant Substation shall be Single End Bonded with Sheath Voltage
Limited (SVL) install at the Basement of the Plant Substation, must be executed.
For Three-Core Cable, from PV Farm to Plant Substation shall be Double End Bonding with Sheath Voltage
Limited (SVL) install at the Basement of the Plant Substation, must be executed.
15 33kV MV Cables for Plant Substation
The Contractor shall lay the MV cables in the Cable Basement and RCC (Cast-in-Situ) Duct for Road
Crossing according to the Company specification, requirements and accordingly compliant design shall be
submitted by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall MANDATORILY lay the cables in RCC (Cast-in-Situ) Duct and size accordingly for
followings:
 33kV Incomer Switchgear to Delta Winding of the Power Transformer
 33kV Incomer Switchgear to Earthing Transformer
 33kV Incomer Switchgear to 33kV Capacitor Bank
The Bidder/Contract shall Mandatorily submit the Cable Sizing Calculation in accordance with IEC 60502
(All Series), IEC 60278 (All Series), IEC TR 62095, BS 7671:2018+A22022, IEEE, EN standards and
country specific practice shall be considered.
Cable Sizing Calculation needs to be submitted only in CYMCAP Software. Any other software shall be
REJECTED.
All MV AC cables shall comply with the following requirements:
 Construction compliant with IEC 60502 (All Series)

 Rated maximum continuous voltage: 36kV
 Power Frequency: 60 Hz
 Longitudinal Conductor Water-Blocking: Required
 Conductor: COPPER according to IEC 60228
 Insulation material: XLPE
 Outer sheath material: PVC or PE
 Outer sheath colour: Black
 Aluminium Tape Armored
 33kV Copper Cu/XLPE/PVC/ATA/PVC/LSZH Cable
 Sizing according to IEC 60287 and guidelines of IEC 60502-2
 Cables shall not overheat at maximum electric load.
 Cables shall survive all potential electric faults without insulation and screen damages.
 Conductor size shall mandatorily be selected based on the most severe, onerous site and
environmental conditions. Wherever, 33kV PV, BESS Collector Cables and Plant Substation
Power cables are routed through directly buried ground (Trench), partly in RCC concrete cable
trench, some portions in road crossing Duct Banks and some portions in cable trays in freely
ventilated area then, under such conditions, limiting capacity must be determined by the most
onerous condition which offer ‘Lowest Ampacity’, which shall be mandatorily “Road Crossing
in Duct Banks”.
 All installed cables shall be suitable to the environmental conditions at the Site, including UV-
protection, anti-rodent protection and water protection.
 The installed cable cross section shall be minimum of 120mm2, sizing of cable shall be done
considering all de rating factors, specifically the actual values of ground temperature from
Geotech report, which shall be considered for calculation of temperature de rating, also cross
section shall be revised as per feedback from Lenders and Owner Engineers.
 Electrical tests after installation shall include:
 DC voltage of the over sheath according to IEC 60229 for 5 minutes
 Screen continuity test
 Insulation test
 Very low frequency insulation test (0.1 Hz) at 3 U0 for 15 minutes minimum
 Tan delta (0.1 Hz) at 0.5-1-1.5 and 2 U0 according to IEEE 400-2.
If the results of tan delta test are not conclusive, a partial discharge test at 2 U0 shall be conducted.
15.1 Medium and low voltage cable system
The scope of supply and services related to power and control cables shall include the complete cabling
systems required for an operational substation.
Therefore, on top of the required cables, the scope includes all necessary sealing ends, steel structure
supports, clamps, accessories, cable ducts, cables trenches, cable basement, cable canals, bus ducts etc., as
necessary.
 One (1) lot of MV cable systems comprising 33 kV Copper XLPE cables shall be provided for
the connection between the Delta secondary windings of 33/110 kV transformers and 33 kV
switchgear.
the connection between 33 kV switchgear and earthing and auxiliary transformers.
the connection between 33 kV switchgear and capacitor banks.
 One (1) lot of low voltage AC & DC LV power and control Copper cables and cable ladder,
cable tray support systems, as defined in the Technical Specification shall be provided for
interconnection of all equipment included in the scope.
16 LVDC, LVAC and 33kV MV Cable Installation
16.1 Laying Direct in the Ground
The electrical network for the complete Solar PV Farm shall consist of underground cables installed in
accordance with BS, EN and IEC Standards and the relevant SEC Laws & Regulations, standard. All cable
trench excavation and back-filling shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Coarse Sand for cable bedding and cover, B20 Concrete Slab Thickness 50mm and marker tape shall be
supplied and installed by the Contractor prior to back filling of the trench. Cables shall be buried at a least a
minimum of 1000mm below ground level and the Contractor shall be responsible for all the excavation required,
including excavation in soft and hard rock. In agricultural land, the depth of cover must be not less than
1500mm.
Buried cables shall be at a depth to avoid damage from traffic and from agricultural processes such as
ploughing over the lifetime of the PV Farm. Buried cables should also be positioned along a road or hard
standing to avoid damage. Due account shall be taken of the need to pass under roads, streams, culverts,
drainage ditches, field drains, channels and existing buried pipes and cables where these exist.
Where the nature of the ground is such that there is a risk of the cables sinking under their own weight,
suitable measures shall be taken to prevent this.
Before the cables are laid, the bottom of the trench shall be lined with sifted soil or with approved soft sand well
tamped down to a minimum depth of 200mm to form a bed. After the cables are laid, the first cover of backfill
shall consist of a layer of Company’s Approved Coarse Sand which shall be completely free of stones and debris
with a minimum thickness of 200mm above the cable after having been well tamped down, over which B20
Concrete Slab Thickness 50mm cable protective slab and Marker Tape shall be placed.
Separation distances between electrical and fibre optic cables shall be within recommended guidelines in
accordance with SEC and all applicable & relevant international standards.
Marker tapes of non-corrodible material, bright yellow in colour and indelibly marked in black with the words
"DANGER – 33kV ELECTRIC CABLE", in English and Arabic, shall be placed in the trench after back-filling
to a level approximately 250mm below the final surface level after reinstatement. In addition, before back filing,
a wide marker tape (200mm width) shall be laid 200mm above the Concrete Slab of cables. This marker cable
shall also be of non-corrodible material, bright yellow in colour and indelibly marked in black with both the
English and Arabic words for "DANGER – 33kV ELECTRIC CABLE" or as per local 33kV installation
standard.
Cable marker posts shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor according to the local standard and practice.
These shall be permanent, non-metallic, and made from durable material to prevent rotting with an
appropriate sign on each and installed above ground for underground cables. There shall be at least one
marker for every 50m, a minimum of three markers per cable run, additional markers indicating changes of
direction where they occur and where cable joints have been made are required. A marker is also required
near the start and finish of any cable run. Cable marker posts should also be engraved not just printed.
16.2 Ducted cables in Road Crossing for PV Farm and Plant Substation
Cable protective covers, in Road Crossing Areas shall be of reinforced concrete and shall be at least a minimum
of 300mm wide, 50mm thick and 500 to 1000mm long and capable of withstanding traffic loadings over the
lifetime of the PV Farm, Subject to Company Approval, depending upon numbers of Runs and Groups of
Cables.
All 33kV MV Cables, LVAC, LVDC Cables shall be MANDATORILY sized in accordance with the Cables
being “Laid In DUCT” and must submit for Company Approval.
In case of any discrepancies, this requirement shall supersede and must prevail, with FINAL Approval from
COMPANY.
Any modifications, alteration, manoeuvring, in any form shall be REJECTED.
A provision should be made for spare ducts to be included. They shall be designed for interlocking one with the
other both vertically and laterally if local regulation requires. Special covers shall be provided where required for
short radius bends.
Where cable routes cross the roadways, areas of hardstanding, other services, or obstacles they must be
installed in the appropriate ducts.
Where the appropriate depth exists, the ducts may be buried in the road structure of bridges, otherwise the
ducts shall be supported by a structure attached to the bridge parapets and protected from accidental or
malicious damage.
Buried ducts shall normally be in the form of HDPE ducts capable of being back-filled with “As-dug” graded
materials or ducts made from medium density polyethylene PE80. Buried ducts should also be suitably sized and
installed to support expected loadings. Ducts specification should be approved by the Company before
commencement of Works.
It shall be permissible to install a three-phase trefoil group in a single duct. However, no more than one 33kV
MV power cable circuit shall be drawn into each duct, and each pipe shall have a nominal internal diameter of
not less than 200mm or at least 40mm greater than the diameter of the core or trefoil group to be installed.
Ducts placed under streams or drainage ditches shall be covered with a 200mm reinforced concrete slab to
protect them from damage due to drainage clearance/ improvement Works.
Ducts buried in the ground shall extend at least one metre beyond the edge of the crossing. HDPE ducts shall be
completely embedded in concrete with a minimum 200mm thickness of concrete surrounding the ducts on all
sides. All ducts shall be sealed at each end with split plugs and bitumen or other approved means to prevent the
ingress of water or access by vermin. Sealants required for ducting shall be supplied and installed by the
Contractor.
If nose pulling is required, pulling eyes shall be fitted to the cables at the manufacturer's Works. The pulling eyes
shall be attached to the conductors and the armour wires. Pulling eyes shall be designed to minimise any tension
on the metallic sheath. Cable stockings may be used for smaller power cables where approved by the cable
manufacturer. The appropriate number of rollers over which the cable can ride shall be provided to ensure that
the cable does not rotate or twist on its longitudinal axis during the pulling operation.
17 LVDC, LVAC and MV Cables Buried Systems
17.1 Excavations
The Contractor shall lay all cables with directly buried in Soil or Sand in accordance with local regulations
and best Prudent Utility Practice. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to carry out all excavations,
trench preparation, subsequent backfilling, and reinstatement and to notify all relevant authorities and
agencies prior to commencing any cable laying works and to comply with all relevant regulations.
Cable Laying depth must not be less than 1 meter, excluding compaction & bedding and the Contractor shall
be responsible for all of the excavation and backfilling required, including excavation in soft and hard rocks,
existing roads and entries to buildings and disposal off-site of surplus soil. Cable routes and methods of
installation shall be agreed with the Company and approved prior to commencement of installation.
All cable trenches shall be bedded with suitably soft bedding material and good thermal resistivity such as
sand. Where appropriate ground conditions prevail (e.g., cable laying in peat or sandy soils), the
requirements for sand bedding and cover may be omitted at the Company’s sole discretion. Due care shall
be required to ensure that all trench bedding is free from stones, tree roots or other debris which could
damage the cables and the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the integrity of the cable
installation for the full duration of the Defects Liability Period.
The Contractor shall note the presence on the Site of any hedges, site roads, drainage or ditches which may
require to be crossed by cable routes.
17.2 Cable laying
To avoid the risk of damage, cable laying shall only take place when the temperature is at or above 0°C as
measured on a calibrated thermometer supplied and installed by the Contractor in a fixed location on the Site
as agreed in advance with the Company and has been at or above this temperature for the previous 24 hours
unless special precautions approved by the Company have been taken to maintain the cables above this
temperature.
All installed cables shall be of a type proven and reliable in service and suitable in every respect for the
required conditions of operation and for direct buried installation.
All MV, LV Power Cable, Control Cables and FO Cables shall be laid in separate layers of perforated type
cable Ladders with cable/ties with MV Power Cable at the bottom, above its LV Control Cables and above
its FO Cables, in the Complete Cable basement inside the Plant Substation and RCC Trench for 110kV
Outdoor Switchyard.
The correct length of cables shall be carefully laid in the appropriate trench using approved handling
technics. In ground conditions where there may be a risk of cables sinking, the Contractor shall make do
allowance in the measure of cable lengths and the method of installation to allow for such settlement.
17.3 MV and LV cables
MV and LV power cables shall be labeled to maintain destination identification and shall be laid on top of a
minimum of 200mm of sand bedding material that has been placed in the bottom of the trench.
Sand Bedding Material, below and above the Cables must not be more than Soil Thermal Resistivity
of 1.0 °km/W.
For MV and LV power cables, the trench depth and the amount of sand bedding material shall be
coordinated so that the cable burial depth is not less than 1000mm below ground level, depth of cable trench
shall be considered as per derating factors, and it shall be revised as per feedback from Project Company and
Owner Engineers. A further 200mm, minimum, of sand cover material shall be installed over the cables. LV
and MV cables may be laid in the same trench but shall in all circumstances be segregated by a distance of
not less than 300mm.
17.4 Control cables
Multi-core control cables shall be labeled to maintain destination identification and shall be laid on top of a
minimum of 200mm of sand bedding material that has been placed in the bottom of the trench.
For control cables, the trench depth and the amount of sand bedding material shall be coordinated so that the
cable burial depth is not less than 1000mm below ground level., depth of cable trench shall be considered as
per derating factors, and it shall be revised as per feedback from Lenders and Owner Engineers. A further
200mm, minimum, of sand cover material shall be installed over all cables.
Control and communications cables shall not be laid in the same trench as MV and/or LV power cables.
However, subject to specific project country and Company Approval, shall be laid in same trench properly
segregated from both the MV and LV cables by a distance of not less than 300mm, but this requirement shall
never be construed as acceptance by Project Company and Company reserves the right to Reject, without
assigning any reasoning whatsoever. Cables and cable cores associated with circuits carrying currents of low
signal strength shall be so designed and installed such that interference from other sources is precluded.
17.5 Warning tapes
Marker tapes of non-corrodible material of bright red color and indelibly marked with the works "danger,
electrical cable" or equivalent shall be placed in the trench after back-filling to a level approximately 150mm
below the final surface level after reinstatement. In areas subject to uncontrolled third-party excavation, a
layer of strong plastic mesh shall be laid 200mm above the cable ducts for the full width of the trench.
17.6 Cable route markers
Cable route markers shall be suitable for installation and be suitable for the prevailing ground conditions
which may include weak soils such as peat. They shall be of concrete or plastic materials or of treated timber
with appropriately worded signage all as agreed with the Company. Markers should be capable of
withstanding livestock and weather damage and remain in an upright position for the life of the installation.
17.7 Road crossings
Where cable routes crossroads cables shall be installed in high density polyethylene ducts that extend 2m
beyond the edge of the road. The cable ducts shall be at a depth 1.5m to avoid damage from traffic. Due
account shall be taken of the need to pass under or over roads, culverts, drainage ditches, channels and
existing buried pipes and cables. The ducts shall be completely embedded in concrete with a minimum
200mm thickness of concrete surrounding the ducts on all sides. The concrete covering is to extend at least
one meter beyond the edge of the road crossing.
17.8 Pulling into Ducts
The electrical network connection for the Works may consist of underground ducted cables. Buried ducts
shall be either PCC or µPVC. Not more than one power cable shall be drawn into each duct. All ducts shall
be cleaned by pulling a plug through the duct prior to cable installation. Manholes are to be provided at
points where the cable route changes direction. All ducts shall be sealed at each end with Split teak plugs and
bitumen, expandable foam or other approved means to prevent the ingress of water, insects and vermin.
All sealants shall be supplied and installed under this contract. If nose pulling is approved, pulling eyes shall
be fitted to the cables at the Manufacturer's Works. The pulling eyes shall be attached to the conductors and
the armor wires, if any. It shall be designed to minimize any tension on the metallic sheath. Cable stockings
may be used for smaller power cables and other cables to the approval of the Employer. A sufficient number
of rollers over which the cable can ride shall be provided to ensure that the cable does not rotate or twist on
its longitudinal axis during the pulling operation. The Contractor shall provide a means of demonstrating that
the maximum cable pulling tension is not exceeded.
17.9 Cable joints
The Contractor shall install the system to avoid cable joints. If a cable is inadvertently damaged during
installation, the Contractor shall be permitted to join 2 parts of the cable as part of the repair process where
this would avoid the replacing of the entire length of cable. The Contractor shall make any effort in order to
minimize the use of cable joints.
18 Medium and Low Voltage Cable Systems
This sub-section covers the technical requirements of medium and low voltage cables including cable sealing
ends, cable terminations and joints, cable containment and all associated equipment, complete in every
respect and suitable for satisfactory operation.
Cables shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation at the design rating at the maximum site
ambient temperature. The Contractor is responsible for providing all voltage drop and cable ampacity
calculations supporting the final installed cable ratings considering derating factors as defined in IEC 60287,
considering:
 Laying below ground or above ground.
 Underground soil temperature.
 Ambient air temperature.
 Load factors.
 Number of multiple core or single core three-phase cable systems in one trench or/on one
tray.
 Thermal resistivity of soil for direct buried cables.
 All cables above ground and the cables used within buildings shall be fire retardant
accordingly to standard IEC 60332-1.
 All Cables used within buildings shall be of LSZH type.
 All buried cables shall be saline resistance type, if the soil has higher than average salinity
level as per soil investigation report.
 All external cables shall be provided with a termite and vermin resistant covering.
 Cables for external installation shall be UV resistant, especially while considering the high
altitude.
18.1 Standards
In addition, and corroborated with the international standards and codes and requirements defined in the
sections above, MV and LV cables shall comply with the latest editions of the following standards as a
general requirement:
 IEC 60502-1 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated.
voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 1:
Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3,6 kV)
 IEC 60502-2 Power Cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages
from 1 kV (Um=1.2 kV) up to 30kV (Um = 36kV) – Part 2: Cables for rated
voltages from 6kV (Um=7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36kV)
 IEC 60502-4 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages
from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 4: Test
requirements on accessories for cables with rated voltages from 6 kV (Um =
7,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
 HD 620 S2 Distribution cables with extruded insulation for rated voltages from 3,6/6
(7,2) kV up to and including 20,8/36 (42) kV.
 IEC 61442 Test methods for accessories for power cables with rated voltages from 6 kV
(Um = 7,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
 IEC 60986 Short-circuit temperature limits of electric cables with rated voltages from
6kV (Um=7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36kV)
 IEC 60287 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - All relevant Parts
 IEC 60332-1-2 Tests on electric and optical fiber cables under fire conditions - Part 1-2:
Test for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire or cable -
Procedure for 1 kW pre-mixed flame
 IEC 61034 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined conditions –
All Parts
 IEC 60754-1 Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from cables - Part 1:
Determination of the halogen acid gas content.
 IEC 60304 Standard colors for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires
 IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
 IEC 60229: Tests on cable over sheaths which have a special protective function and are
applied by extrusion.
 IEC 60811 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric
cables
 IEC 61537 Cable management - Cable tray systems and cable ladder systems
 EN 50575 Power, control and communication cables - Cables for general applications
in construction works subject to reaction to fire requirements
18.2 Cable Construction Requirements
All cables provided under this Contract shall be of type and finish approved by the Employer/Engineer. All
external cables shall be provided with a vermin resistant covering. In addition, all cables for external
installation shall be UV resistant.
All cables shall be suitable for laying indoors, or outdoors in direct or indirect sunlight, in ducts, on cable
trays and ladders, underground and in water. Cable sheaths shall be resistant to the effects of oil, bacterial
action, insects, rodents and water.
All outdoor cables shall be the armored water-proof type.
Cable shields and armoring will normally be earthed at both ends. Single point earthing shall be provided for
Single Core Cables, to eliminate to a great extent the circulating currents. In these situations, the Contractor
shall develop and implement a reliable and safe concept to protect the personnel and the cable system against
harmful over voltages.
The tele protection and 48 V DC control cables shall be designed, in co-ordination with the terminal relays,
to be immune to pick up levels associated with earth faults in the station and normal operation of station
equipment.
The Contractor shall provide separate cables for the following functions and for the protection systems
(multi-function cables shall not be used):
 AC current transformer secondary circuits for metering and protection
 AC voltage transformer secondary circuits for metering and protection
 DC for protection, control, and indication circuits
 transducer output-metering information circuits
 400/230 V AC for main service cables
 400/230 V AC for building services
 supervisory control circuits.
18.3 Packing and sealing Requirements
Cables shall be dispatched on drums of robust construction with hub diameter exceeding the minimum
permissible bending radius recommended by the cable manufacturer. The drum shall be fully enclosed by
either adjacent fitting wooden battens or continuous metallic cladding.
Both ends of the cable shall be sealed fully watertight. When requested by the user, pulling eyes shall be
fitted to both ends of the cable. The pulling eye shall be directly connected to the conductor and be capable
of withstanding a tensile load of 100 N/mm² of conductor area up to a maximum of the permissible pulling
tension for the cable.
18.4 Installation Requirements
All cables shall be installed point to point as a complete single length unless the length requirement for the
circuit exceeds the standard drum lengths provided by the cable manufacturer. Approved cable joints shall be
used for such lengths in excess of standard drum lengths. Any such joints shall be recorded on the As-Built
drawings.
Cable support and containment shall be provided in accordance with IEC 61537 for all cables to be installed
under this Project.
For crossing of roads, cables shall be installed in RCC duct banks with draw pits to be provided.
Outdoor cable trays/ladders exposed to sunlight shall be provided with perforated galvanized sheet steel
covers. The covers shall be mounted on spacers to allow ventilation.
For PV Farm, the Contractor shall be responsible for adequate dimensioning of the underground cable trench
system and cable basement (Cables Entering inside the Plant Substation) to maintain the specified
segregation between the different cable systems to be provided.
The following minimum segregation distances are to be maintained:

 300 mm between low voltage power cables and control, measurement and signaling cables for
voltages above 60 V.
 600 mm between medium voltage cables and control, measurement and signaling cables for
voltages above 60 V.
During the installation of cables, the cable drums shall be supported on cable drum screw jacks and spindles.
Cables shall be continuously pulled from the upper side of the drum in the opposite direction of travel of the
direction of rolling painted in the drum’s flanges.
For those sections in which the cables are not pulled into HDPE ducts, suitable rollers shall be adequately
positioned to prevent abrasion. Rollers shall be spaced between the cable drum, and within the cable trench
at intervals as required to prevent cable sheath contact either with the ground or contact with sharp edges. At
corners or when pulling cables into ducts, special rollers have to be used. Sharp edges in the trenches or at
the ends of the cable ducts shall be covered such that no damage to the cable occurs.
Should any sheath damage occur during the cable installation all cable installation activity shall immediately
cease, and the Employer shall be informed. The Employer shall assess the severity of the damage and shall
instruct the Contractor whether sheath repairs will be acceptable, or cable replacement shall occur. Any cable
replacement deemed necessary will be at the Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the dimensioning of the cable basement systems internal to each
building. Internal cable basement systems shall consist of cable trays and/or ladders, and rigid conduit.
All surface mounted installations, the three-phase cable system(s) shall be affected in galvanized rigid steel
conduit.
During the design process, the Contractor shall provide a cable schedule listing all cables to be provided
under this Project. The cable schedule shall contain all pertinent information for each cable.
All cables shall be uniquely numbered and shall be fitted on either side of transitions through building walls
or fire barriers and at each end with a metallic corrosion resistant tag embossed with a unique cable ID
number.
The proposed identification system shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. The individual cores
must be identified by numbers or by a color code.
18.5 Medium Voltage Cables
18.5.1 Technical requirements
The Medium Voltage (MV) shall have a cross-linked polyethylene (XPLE) insulation and shall be single-
core or three-core cables with copper or aluminium conductors as specified in the data sheet and
simultaneously triple extruded insulation. MV cables and cable accessories shall comply with IEC 60502-2.
18.5.2 Operational requirements
The cable system - including cables and all accessories - shall be designed, manufactured and installed to
ensure a minimum lifespan of 40 years.
18.5.3 Minimum requirements
Cable cores shall comprise circular stranded conductor with an extruded solid insulation. The bonding
between the semiconductive layers and insulation shall be permanently strong, homogeneous and free of
contaminants. The inner semiconductive layer, insulation and outer semiconductive layer shall be extruded
simultaneously in a single step via a triple extrusion head. Immediately after the respective extrusion the
materials shall be cross-linked.
Each core shall be provided with a copper wire screen with copper equalizing tape. Alternatively, an
aluminium layer as metallic screen is acceptable for armored cables.
Single core cables shall be provided with aluminium tape armor, three core cables shall be provided
with galvanized steel tape armor. Both AWA and SWA shall be REJECTED.
The outer sheath shall be continuously extruded, shall contain anti-termite additive and shall consist of a
flame retardant, halogen free and low smoke thermoplastic compound with the following minimum
characteristics:
 flame retardant characteristics in accordance with IEC 60332-1
 low smoke density in accordance with IEC 61034-2.
The over sheath shall be provided with the following permanently legible information:
 voltage
 manufacturer
 year of manufacture
 metric marking
 cable designation.
The letters and figures shall consist of upright block characters along two or more lines, approximately
equally spaced around the circumference of the cable. The maximum size of the characters shall be 13 mm
and the minimum size not less than 15% of the nominal or specified external diameter of the cable or 3 mm,
whichever is greater.
The spacing between the end of one set of characters and the beginning of the next on the legend shall not
exceed 150 mm. Any additional information on the sheath (e.g., the Manufacturer’s name) shall not affect
the spacing between repetitions of the legend.
18.6 MV cable sizing
MV cables shall be sized for the maximum load current of the connected equipment and the respective
thermal performance shall be calculated assuming permanent full load operation under the most onerous
environmental conditions. In the case of cables for e.g., transformers with emergency loading capability, the
cable shall be sized for the emergency loading capacity. In any case, the sizing of the cable shall not restrict
the capability of the equipment connected.
The cable cross section shall be based on the current carrying capacity at site ambient and laying conditions
in accordance with IEC 60287 and shall be not less than specified in the Data Sheet. If site ambient and
laying conditions change within the route of a cable, the current carrying capacity shall be determined for
each part of the route and the sizing shall be based on the most onerous laying conditions.
When cables routed through several types of installation conditions, the Cable Conductor size shall be
mandatorily selected based on the MOST Severe, Onerous site and Environmental conditions.
For example: A power cable is routed mainly through directly buried ground (Trench), partly in concrete
cable trench, some portions in road crossing duct banks and some portions in cable trays in freely ventilated
area.
 Cable Limiting capacity shall be MANDATORILY determined by the most onerous condition
which offer ‘Lowest Ampacity’, which shall be mandatorily “Road Crossing in Duct Banks”.
The short circuit capabilities of the cables shall be adequate for the prospective fault levels and fault clearing
times, as defined in the Particular Technical Requirements and Data Sheets.
The three-phase short-circuit capacity shall be calculated for a final temperature of 250°C and for an initial
temperature gauged for a conductor temperature of 90°C.
The single-phase short-circuit capacity shall be calculated for a final temperature of the over sheath in
accordance IEC 60986.
The initial temperature in the metallic screen shall be ascertained for a conductor temperature of 90°C.
18.7 MV cable accessories
MV cable accessories shall, as a minimum, meet all the requirements of the latest edition of IEC standard
60502-4 / IEC 61442.
Outdoor termination insulators (cable sealing ends) shall be provided for external terminations. The cable
sealing ends shall be fully factory tested during production. The pollution severity shall be as defined in the
Particular Technical Requirements and Data Sheets. The base of the cable sealing end itself shall be
insulated from supporting steelwork by mounting upon epoxy resin pedestal type insulators.
Internally within switch rooms and enclosed termination boxes of transformers, proprietary heat shrink
terminations may be accepted, subject to the approval of the Employer / Engineer.
However, where MV cables terminate to equipment with plug connection, e.g., transformers with plug
connector, gas insulated switchgear (GIS), proprietary separable connectors shall be used subject to the
approval of the Employer / Engineer.
18.8 Grounding/Bonding
Unless specified or agreed otherwise, the cable screen and armor shall be grounded at both cable ends.
Where single point grounding of MV cables is required to meet the current rating requirement, the cables
shall be bonded at the switchgear end of each circuit.
18.9 Test requirements
 All routine tests on manufactured length, as stipulated in IEC 60502-2 shall be performed.
 Sample tests and type tests shall be as per IEC 60502-2.
 Post-installation tests as stipulated in IEC 60502-2 shall be performed.
19 Low Voltage Power and Control Cables
19.1 General Technical requirements
LV power and control cables and cable accessories shall be flame retardant and low smoke zero halogen
(LSZH) and shall comply with the following standards:
 IEC 60502-1 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages
from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
- Part 1: Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3,6 kV)
 IEC 60331 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions (All relevant parts)
 IEC 60332 Tests on electric and optical fiber cables under fire conditions
 IEC 60364-4-41Low voltage electrical installations
- Part 4-41: Protection for safety - Protection against electric shock
- Part 4-42: Protection for safety - Protection against thermal effects
- Part 4-43: Protection for safety - Protection against overcurrent
Low voltage 0.6/1 kV power and control cables shall be single core, two, three, four, five-core or multicore
cables with copper conductors. Conductors larger than 4.0 mm2 shall be stranded.
Power cables shall be provided with color coded core insulation. The colors of the core insulation shall
comply with IEC 60304. Control cables shall be provided with numbered cores.
All power and control cables shall be provided with a proactive (PE) conductor. LV single core cables
installed in either conduit or trunking systems within buildings shall be provided with separate earth
conductors for each circuit within conduit and trunking containment systems.
LV Power and Control cables shall be provided with steel wire armor for rodent protection. Cables for DC
supplies and services shall be of identical construction to that of the LV power cables.
DC cables for connections between batteries, rectifiers and the DC switchgear shall be single-core power
cables.
The required technical data for the LV cables is specified in the Technical Data Sheets.
19.2 Cable Sizing
The cross section of LV power and control cables shall be determined based on the following criteria:
 load current.
 current carrying capacity at site ambient and laying conditions in accordance with IEC
60287
 type, characteristic and rating of protection device
 protection against electric shock in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41
 protection against thermal effects in accordance with IEC 60364-4-42
 protection against overcurrent in accordance with IEC 60364-4-43
 the voltage drop from the main LV distribution board to the point of furthest utilization for
each circuit shall be maximum of 2.5% (apart from Metering and protection cables which
are defined in other sections).
Cable sizing calculations and sizing tables shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall be provided to the
Employer/Engineer for review on request.
The minimum cross-section for LV power cable shall be 2.5 mm2.
19.3 Metering and protection cables
AC current and potential cables shall be multi-conductor shielded overall. The shield shall be earthed at only
one end/point. All multi-core cables shall be provided with -as a minimum- two (2) spare cores.
These cables shall run direct between the outdoor equipment and the Control Building.
Metering and protection cables shall have a Power-frequency withstand voltage of 3 kV in accordance with
IEC 61869.
Current transformer cables shall be of minimum cross-sectional area 4 mm2.
Voltage transformer cables shall be of minimum cross-sectional area 2.5 mm2.
The Contractor shall be responsible for sizing the cables to suit the burdens of the connected equipment and
to ensure safe tripping of protection.
If any connections between cables from instrument transformers to the electricity meters are foreseen (such
as marshalling cabinets) they shall be duly sealed.
19.4 LV control cables
All LV control cables shall be stranded conductor and shall be insulated to 0.6/1 kV.
All DC cabling between outdoor equipment and the Control Building shall be by multi-conductor cable
shielded overall, routed via marshalling kiosks as required. Interconnections between outdoor equipment
(interlocks, etc.) shall be made at the marshalling kiosks.
For each multicore cable 15% spare cores shall be provided.
All cabling and wiring terminated into control cubicle, relay cabinets, marshaling cabinets, etc. shall be
neatly configured within the cabinet and must be accessible from the front of panels/cubicles.
19.5 ELV control, communication and signalling cables
Extra low voltage (ELV) control, communication and signaling cables shall be rated for 300/500 V and shall
have an overall aluminum/polyester screen and shall contain a separate drain wire. Conductors shall be of a
minimum cross-sectional area of 0.75 mm2.
Twisted pair cable with overall cable shield shall be used for communication cables. To minimize exposure
to interference, the communication cables shall be isolated from power cables wherever practicable.
The twisted pair cable shall conform to EN 502887. Twisted pair cables shall be used for interconnection
between protection signaling equipment and protection equipment and shall be suitable for carrying signals
without any weakening effect over distances of about 300 m.
For each cable 15% spare conductors shall be provided.
Only armored cable shall be used in the switchyard.
Cables used for telephony shall be twisted pairs and shall not be more than 0.6 mm diameter solid copper
conductor, suitable for Insulation Displacement Connections (IDC).
Cables entering the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation from outside shall be of paired construction and the entry
conduits shall be non-metallic, and non-corrosive.
19.6 Heat resistant cables
Cables used in areas where ambient temperatures are above 60°C shall be heat-resistant. Heat-resistant
cables must be suitable for continuous operation at an ambient temperature of 180°C and shall comply with
IEC 60331.
19.7 Fire resistant cables
Fire resistant cables shall be used wherever circuit integrity must be maintained, and cables must continue to
work for a specified period of time under fire conditions for personal safety, e.g., especially for the following
applications:
 fire-detection, fire-alarm, and fire-fighting-systems
 emergency and safety lighting
 systems for emergency evacuation.
Fire resistant cables shall be LSZH and fire resistant for 3 hours to IEC 60331 & IEC 60332 and shall be
installed with appropriate support systems.
19.8 Cable terminations and accessories
All cables shall be terminated with the appropriate cable sealing end, termination kit, or cable gland.
Catalogue information shall be submitted to the Employer for review during the design process of all cable
accessories proposed.
The catalogue information submitted shall be clearly highlighted to identify the precise product proposed by
the Contractor.
Cable accessories shall include cable sealing ends, cable termination kits, cable glands, etc.
All cable terminations are to be prepared and neatly formed. All cable terminations are to be connected to the
equipment terminals, terminal blocks, such that no strain is put on either cable termination or the equipment
to which the cable is connected. Where terminations are affected in control cubicles, marshalling cabinets,
etc. all cables shall be neatly loomed with sufficient slack for movement to other terminals as may be
necessary.
Through joints for LV power and control cables shall be applied only in exceptional cases, subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Any straight-through joints required shall be of the heat shrink type and shall not
degrade the design standards of the cable in any way.
 Sample tests and type tests shall be as per IEC 605021.

 All routine tests on manufactured length shall be performed as per IEC 605021 .
20 Technical Specification of Cabling System
20.1 Scope
This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer’s works, supply, delivery of
G.I. ladder type cable tray with G.I. nuts and bolts of M.S. Steel Support, supporting structures, and all other
accessories required for laying of all HV, MV Power & control cables in the cable trays as well as laying of
buried HV, MV XLPE power cable as per this specification as well as submitted cable schedule to be
furnished.
20.2 Cable tray and Accessories:
The G.I. ladder type cable tray with G.I. nuts and bolts & adequate sizes below cable tray, M.S. supports,
supporting structures & all other accessories required for laying of HV, MV power & control cables shall be
within the scope of the supply of successful bidder.
Width of cable ladder & tray and number of ladder & trays per trench should be designed by the
Bidder/Contractor based on submitted cable schedule and approved cable trench drawing for PV, Wind,
BESS Farm and each sub-station.
While deciding no. of cable ladder and tray and its width required for main cable trench and sub-trench for
PV, Wind, BESS Farm and each sub-station, Bidder/Contractor has to consider the existing number of bays
of different voltage classes under the scope of this tender.
All the power & control cable shall be laid in proper dressed up fashion without overlapping of cables on
trays.
 Width of Cable Ladder and Tray shall be 600mm.
 Minimum gap between two ladder and trays in vertical layer should be 300 mm and
horizontal gap of 600 mm (minimum).
 Minimum thickness of cable ladder and tray should be 3 mm.
The contractor shall make his own estimate of HV, MV power and control cable, cable accessories, cable
trays, supporting structures and other materials required for successful commissioning of all the bays of PV,
Wind, BESS Farm and each sub-station to be completed within the scope of this tender.
Metallic cable ladders and cable trays shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate support
without undue sag and shall not have sharp edges, burrs or projections that can damage the cable insulation
or jackets.
Cable Ladder and tray shall be designed to provide a minimum of 20 % spare space.
Cable Ladder and tray deflection shall be restricted to a maximum of 12 mm for all span lengths. Technical
details to arrive this term shall also be furnished. Cable tray shall be supplied with suitable rubber bumpers at
locations of safety hazards.
Cable Ladder and tray shall be fabricated either from corrosion resistant metal such as aluminium alloy or
carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating such as zinc coatings.
20.3 Laying of cables:
a) All HV, MV & LV Power Cables, Control Cables, FO Cables inside the Trench of Switchyard and
Cable Basement shall be mandatorily laid on the Cable Ladders & Cable Trays in accordance with
the submitted cable schedule and switchyard & control room approved cable trench drawing.
b) Cables shall be run with good workmanship and shall present a neat appearance. Overlapping of
cables on trays shall not be permitted. Twisting & jointing shall not be permitted.
c) Cables in ladder and trays shall be laid and not pulled into. Where pulling is absolutely necessary,
instead of using steel or metallic rope, manila or nylon rope is to be used. Cable shall be neatly laid
without interlacing.
d) Sufficient length of cables shall be pulled into all equipment, control & relay panels and different
junction boxes, marshalling kiosk etc. so that all the cores of a cable can be terminated in the
terminal blocks in a neat fashion.
e) Termination of cables shall be done in such a fashion to avoid tension of individual conductors or
terminals.
f) The radius of bends of any cable shall not be less than the minimum bending radius, as
recommended by the cable manufacturers.
g) Each cable shall be identified at each end and in exposed runs on cable trays by attaching
Aluminium tag with the number punched on it and securely attached to the cable conduit by not less
than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire conforming to all applicable IEC and International standards.
Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power cables and of circular shape for control cables.
Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control cabinet, control & relay panel etc.
wherever required for cable identification.
h) Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable marker made of
galvanized iron plate.
i) Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an additional
inscription “Cable joint”.
j) The marker shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval of 30 Meters
(inside Cable Basement), at each cable joints for PV, Wind, BESS Farm and at every change in
direction. They shall be located on both sides of road & drain crossings.
k) The Cable termination from all class of CTs to CT JB shall be laid on Cable trays with sufficient
Cable for further maintenance purpose. The cable tray shall be mounted with CT structure/extra
structure if require as per site condition.
l) Power and control cable in the cable trench shall be laid in separate tires. Power cables shall be on
the top tiers and control cables in the bottom tires.
m) 1000 X 1000 mm opening with vertical cable ladder support shall be provided below marshalling
kiosk for cable entry.
n) Provision of necessary holes to be provided at oil pit wall of Transformer for placing of 2 nos. 200
mm dia. or more (as per requirement) HDPE conduit. Conduit shall run from basement or trench to
Marshalling Box of Transformer.
o) Separate conduit shall be used for Power and Control cables. 40% space inside pipe shall be kept
free.
20.4 Cable termination, Installation and Connections:
a) Cable terminations and connection of cables shall be done in accordance with cable termination kit
manufacturer’s instruction, drawing and / or as directed by owner.
b) The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling cutting, taping,
heat shrinking (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal, shorting and grounding as required
to complete the job.
c) The connecting terminals shall be covered with transparent insulating sleeve so as to prevent
accidental contact with ground or adjacent terminals. The insulating sleeve shall be fire resistant and
long enough to overpass the conductor insulation. Ferrules must be provided on each core of the
control cable in order to facilitate identification.
d) The equipment will be generally provided with undrilled gland plates for cables / conduit entry. The
contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland plates, painting & touching up.
e) Control & power cable cores entering control panel switchgear, MCCB / MCB / Junction boxes /
BMK etc. shall be neatly bunched, clamped and tied with PVC perforated strap to keep them in
position.
f) Spare cores shall be also tagged with cable number & coiled up inserting ferrule numbers at both
ends.
g) All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused openings shall be
effectively closed.
h) Double compression type nickel plated brass cable glands shall be provided by the contractor for all
power & control cables. Rubber components used in cable glands shall be neoprene and of tested
quality.
i) The power & control cable between Station auxiliary transformer / Earthing-cum-Station service
transformer, Control room, DG set building / or firefighting, pump house shall be laid underground.
In addition, for lighting purpose also, cables can be laid underground in outdoor area.
j) Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of metal primer
(comprising of red oxide and zinc chromate in a synthetic medium) followed by two finishing coats
of Aluminium paint. The red oxide and zinc chromate shall conform to all IEC and International
Standards.
k) Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays with self-locking type nylon ties with
de-interlocking facility at every 5 Meter interval for horizontal run. Vertical cable runs shall be
secured with 25 mm and 2 mm thick aluminium strip clamps at every 2 Meter interval.
l) In case of MV & LV power cable, adequate extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable
two straight through joints to be made in case the cable develop fault at a later date. Bending radius
shall be maintained as minimum 12D, where D is the overall diameter of cable.
m) All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid damage due to
twist, kinks, sharp bends etc.
n) Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage.
o) Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station, wherever
cable shall pass through floor or through wall openings or other partitions, GI / PVC wall sleeves
with bushes having a smooth internal surface shall be supplied.
p) The power cable shall not be bent below the bending radius of 12D and for control cable the
minimum bending radius shall be 10D, where D is the overall diameter of cable.
q) The length of control cables for termination inside equipment enclosures shall be kept sufficiently so
that changing in termination in terminal block can be done without splicing.
r) Spare cores shall be tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.
s) All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused openings shall be
effectively closed.
t) For underground / directly buried cables, the contractor’s scope shall include excavation, preparation
of sand bedding, soil cover, supply & installation of bricks or concrete as protection covers, back
filling and ramming with supply & installation of route marker & joint markers.
u) Power cables for switchyard lighting shall be buried at a depth of 1000 mm from nearest cable
trench up to Lighting Mast / tower with lighting fixture. All the intending bidders are advised to
assess the volume of supply and erection work prior to submission of bid by site visit of new as well
as existing sub-stations.
20.5 Cable Ladder and Tray supporting structures:
Successful bidder shall supply and install all supporting structures, angles, straps, hangers, brackets, clamps,
clips, nuts & bolts and all other required materials for the installation of cables, cable ladders and cable trays
considering all the cables that are to be laid for successful commissioning of all the bays of different voltage
classes for each sub-station under the scope of this tender.
Cabling system shall be complete in all respect for laying of all the cables without any necessity of supply as
well as erection of any cable tray, supporting structure & other accessory in future, with 20% Spare Margin.
20.6 Guarantee:
Electrical & mechanical characteristics shall be guaranteed by the bidder. In case of failure of materials to
meet the guarantee, the Project Company shall have right to reject the material. Guaranteed Technical
Particulars are to be submitted by successful bidder during detailed engineering along with submitted
drawings/documents.
20.7 Tests at manufacturer’s works and test certificates:
All routine tests of all accessories required for cabling system shall be carried out at the works of the
manufacturer as per relevant IEC Standard. All acceptance tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s
works on every lot offered for inspection in presence of representative of Project Company. Selection of
samples for acceptance test as well as rejection and re-testing shall be guided by relevant IEC Standards.
21 Electrical Design Requirements for Plant Substation
21.1 Construction Features and Requirement

The Contractor shall carry out the installation, testing and commissioning as per the Design, calculations and
studies prepared by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall not start Site Works until the Contractor provide design note calculation reports, study
reports, drawings and plans are reviewed by the Company.
The Contractor shall obtain the approval of Competent Authority on the design note calculation reports,
study reports, drawings and plans provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall install, but are not limited to, the following equipment’s/systems:
 Plant Substation including at least:
 110kV Indoor Gas Insulated Switchgear (circuit breaker, isolating switches, current &
voltage transformer, disconnector with double earthing switches, surge arrestors etc.)
with Gas Insulated Busduct upto gantry and transformer side with IN-OUT Arrangement
along with the Gantry and Connections up to SEC BSP Substation, including
Interconnection and Interfacing in full compliance with SEC Requirement.
 For 110kV, Bus duct shall be single phase enclosed. Gas Insulated Bus from outside the
GIS Hall wall including support structure to SF6/Air Bushing for interconnection to
Gantry. Inner side GIB is to be considered as part of respective Feeder Bay. The 110kV
SF6 gas insulated bus (GIB) ducts shall be complete with all necessary SF6 gas filling,
interconnecting power and control wiring, grounding connections, gas monitoring
devices, barriers, pressure switches, UHF PD sensors, provision for UHF PD sensors,
piping etc complete in all respect.
 33/110kV Power Transformer, including MR, Germany Make On-Load Tap Changer
(OLTC), AVR Relay (MR, Germany) and neutral grounding.
 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear shall be of protected, metal enclosed modular type. The
main compartment shall be insulated in SF6 gas. Circuit breaker arc extinguishing
medium shall be either SF6 or vacuum.
 33/0.4kV Earthing Transformer with Neutral Earthing Resistor and/or Auxiliary
transformer for Plant Substation Loads.
 Reactive power compensation systems in terms of FACTS Devices (SVG), in order to
the Comply the RFP, SA Grid Code and this Contract.
 Copper Bare Earthing Conductor for both Lightning using Rolling Sphere or Angle
Method and for Earthing Purpose using CYMGRD Software Based calculation as per
IEEE-80 and IEEE 2778-2020 for both PV Farm and Plant Substation.
 Plant Substation SCADA System supplier which shall be a legally separate an
independent entity and shall be subject to Company approval.
 Telecommunication (SDH or IP-MPLS).
 Power Plant Controller (PPC) Panel.
 Power Quality Monitoring (PQM) Panel.
 110kV Control & Relay Protection Panels.
 Separate and Dedicated Fault Recorder Panel for 33kV and 110kV.
 Auxiliary supply (AC & DC).
 Civil Cast-in-Situ RCC Plant Substation building.
 Copper Air Terminal Rods for Lightning, which shall be mounted on the Plant
Substation building, Inverter Duty Transformer, mandatorily; Air Terminal Rods shall
be provided to other infrastructures, as applicable in accordance with the Lighting
Assessment Study and Calculation.
 Copper Armoured MV Cables, Control cable and FO Cables inside the Plant Substation.
 All MV, LV Power Cable, Control Cables and FO Cables shall be laid in separate layers
of perforated type cable trays with cable/ties with MV Power Cable at the bottom, above
its LV Control Cables and above its FO Cables, in the Cable basement inside the Plant
Substation.
 Galvanized Steel Lattice Structure for Gantry.
 LV DC cable.
 2x100% Nickel Cadmium DC Batteries and 2x100% Thyristor Controlled Battery
Chargers,
 2x100% Uninterruptible Power Supply
 400V LVAC Switchgear.
 Metering Panel (Main & Check).
 Firefighting (Water Deluge System) for Power Transformer as per NFPA 850.
 Clean Agent (Firefighting) for 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear along with its own
separate and dedicated Wall Mounted Fire Extinguishing Control Panel (FECP).
 Fire Alarm and Protection System, Wall Mounted Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) as
per local regulations and standards.
 Centralized PACU type for Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning System (HVAC)
with Air Compressor, Air Handing Unit (AHU) installed on the Roof of Civil RCC
Building of Plant Substation with proper ducting in the Basement and Control Building
Rooms.
 Cybersecurity.
 Small Power and Indoor & Outdoor Lighting System.
 CCTV and Anti-Intrusion System.
 Diesel Generators.
 The complete Copper earthing system, lightning system and all necessary
interconnections for Plant Substation and Offtaker’s Substation.
 The Remote End Protection and Telecommunication and fibre optic.
 The Supply of Main and Backup Relay Protections at Remote End Grid Station (as
applicable).
 Tie-in with the Utility Remote Dispatch System and be complied to the Grid Code (or
the draft Grid Code prior to the implementation of the Grid Code) to the extent
applicable. All components, data cables (cables for internal remote control) and
monitoring grid must be fiber optic (or twisted pair)., data logger, operating system
computer, router, switches etc. must be installed in industry standard mode.
22 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgears
The Contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission 110kV Indoor Type Gas Insulated
Substation with In-Out arrangement on Site, as per the IEC, as per the Saudi Electricity Commission (SEC),
Specification & Standards (if available), Local Norms and Regulations, Approved Vendor Lists.
110kV Gas Insulated Switchgear must be design in combination of IEC Specification and below technical
requirement.
In case of conflicts, the most stringent requirement shall be applicable and final approval rest with Project
Company since, it shall be operated and maintained by the Project Company only, over the PPA terms of 25
years, without assigning any technical & contractual justification to the Bidder.
SF6 gas cabinet from the HV circuit breakers will include three (3) pressure gauge. The Contractor shall
store on Site the following spare parts and special tools:
 Five (5) Years Spare Parts as per OEM’s Recommendation and Prudent Utility Practice
Worldwide.
 One set of special tools and tackles, which manufacturer/supplier deems necessary for the HV
switchgear erection and maintenance.
The Contractor shall install Indoor Single/Three-Phase Encapsulated type Gas Insulated Switchgear Housing
Circuit Breaker, Current Transformer, Voltage Transformer, Surge Arrestor and Disconnector with Earth
Switch.
110kV Gas Insulated Switchgears, 40kA for 3sec, separate line bay feeders but not limited to the following
devices (each). The Contractor must design in accordance with the Approved Single Line Diagram.
 Surge arresters 252kV, class 3 with discharge counters.
 Inductive/Capacitive voltage transformers with secondary Windings for metering and protection
purposes.
 Current transformers with secondary Windings for metering and protection purposes.
 Three-poles circuit breaker, single-pole motor (electrical-springs) operated with two (2) Tripping
coils and one (1) Closing coil.
 Disconnector with Double Earthing Switch at Line Bay Feeder.
The switchgear shall be Gas Insulated Switchgear, suitable for accommodation within the reserved area in
the site with the Design Ambient Temperature of +45°C.
The arrangement of the switchboard shall be such that all units face in the same direction. Particular
emphasis is placed on the provision of adequate clearance between equipment to facilitate maintenance.
The equipment offered should be adequately protect from all types of system voltage surges and any
equipment necessary to satisfy this requirement over and above that specified shall be included. Easy access
shall be provided for all equipment, which needs regular checking and / or maintenance, by means of fixed
type ladders, platforms or similar facilities.
The design shall include all facilities necessary to enable the performance of the specified site checks and
tests to be carried out. The Contractor shall state the test facilities provided and indicate any attachments or
special equipment provided for this purpose.
The Contractor shall have to submit the Type Test Reports of the particular GIS modules that is offered in
the bid with the Performance Certificate of the same type tested GIS modules.
The Contractor must furnish all relevant & necessary information for various equipment to be proposed
under the offer in conformity to both IEC and this technical specification including design parameters, test
requirements, installation, operation, and maintenance.
The SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear shall be totally safe against inadvertent touch of any of its
live constituent parts. All parts of the switchgear single phase/three phases enclosed for 110kV. The
arrangement of gas sections or compartments shall be such as to facilitate future extension of any make on
either end without any drilling, cutting, or welding on the existing equipment.
To add equipment, it shall not be necessary to move or dislocate the existing switchgear bays. The design
should be such that all parts subjected to wear and tear are easily accessible for maintenance purposes. The
equipment offered shall be protected against all types of voltage surges and any equipment necessary to
satisfy this requirement shall be deemed to be included.
This scope also includes structural support, access platform, ladders, stairs, cable raceway, conduit and other
auxiliary equipment for operation and maintenance purposes. Wherever applicable, supply and erection of
XLPE Cable/Gas Insulated Bus Duct supporting structures for incoming and outgoing XLPE cables/Gas
Insulated Bus Duct at GIS cable spreader room/PEB for the bays with provision of future bays shall be
within the scope of the tenderer.
All special tools and tackles, O&M manuals etc. required for erection, operation, testing and maintenance of
GIS shall be supplied within the quoted price. GIS supplier shall provide the embedded plates and channels
for the GIS foundations and maintaining floor tolerances. The GIS supplier shall also supply anchoring bolts
for fixing GIS and LCCs. However, OEM has liberty to exclude embedded plates, channels, and anchoring
bolts from their quoted price.
22.1 Qualifying requirements
110kV Gas Insulated Switchgear being offered should be from manufacturer who has manufactured and
supplied minimum five (5) nos. of three phase and single-phase circuit breakers suitable for Gas Insulated
Switchgear of 110kV or above class which must have been in successful operation for a minimum period of
three (3) years, as on 31.05.2024 in the Project Specific Country.
The 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgears offered should have been type tested as on 31.05.2023 as per IEC-
62271-100.
The successful Contractor/Bidder shall also submit the GTP after placement of LOA as per GTP Format
duly signed with date & OEM seal for acceptance of Project Company for approval of manufacturing
clearance.
22.2 General Design & Safety
A. Assembly
The GIS assembly shall consist of separate modular compartments such as Circuit Breaker compartment,
Bus bar compartment filled with SF6 Gas and separated by gas tight partitions to minimize risk to
human life, allow ease of maintenance and limit the effects of gas leaks failures & internal arcs etc.
These compartments shall be such that maintenance on one feeder may be performed without de-
energizing the adjacent feeders. These compartments shall be designed to minimize the risk of damage to
adjacent sections and protection of personnel in the event of a failure occurring within the compartments.
And the sections shall be designed to minimize the quantity of gas that has to be evacuated and
recharged before and after maintaining any item of equipment.
Rupture diaphragms with suitable deflectors shall be provided to prevent uncontrolled bursting pressures
developing within the enclosures under worst operating conditions, thus providing controlled pressure
relief in the affected compartment. Compartment arrangement at the end of Bus shall be such that
shutdown may be avoided for a long during future extension job.
B. Switchgear
(i) The switchgear shall be of modular design. The conductors and the live parts shall be mounted on
high graded epoxy resin insulators. These insulators shall be designed to have high structural
strength and electrical dielectric properties and shall be free of any voids and free of partial
discharge at a voltage which is at least 5 % greater than the rated voltage. They should be designed
to have high structural and dielectric strength properties and shall be shaped to provide uniform field
distribution and to minimize the effects of particle deposition either from migration of foreign
particles within the enclosures or from the by-products of SF6 breakdown under arcing conditions.
(ii) The material used for manufacturing the switchgear equipment shall be of the type, composition and
have physical properties best suited to their particular purposes and in accordance with the latest
engineering practices. All the conductors shall be fabricated of copper tubes of cross-sectional area
suitable to meet the normal and short circuit current rating requirements. The finish of the
conductors shall be smooth to prevent any electrical discharge. The conductor ends shall be silver
plated and fitted into finger contacts or tulip contacts. The contacts shall be of sliding type to allow
the conductors to expand or contract axially due to temperature variation without imposing any
mechanical stress on supporting insulators.
(iii) The switchgear line-up when installed and operating under the ambient conditions shall perform
satisfactorily and safely under all normal and fault conditions. Even repeated operations up to the
permissible servicing intervals under 100% rated and fault conditions shall not diminish the
performance or significantly shorten the useful life of the switchgear. Any fault caused by external
reasons shall be positively confined to the originating compartment and shall not spread to other
parts of the switchgear.
(iv) The thermal rating of all current carrying parts shall be minimum for one sec. (1 second) for the
rated symmetrical short circuit current.
(v) The switchgear shall be of the free standing, self-supporting with easy accessibility to all the parts
during installation & maintenance with all high-voltage equipment installed inside gas insulated
metallic and earthed enclosures, suitably sub-divided into individual arc and gas proof compartments
for the items as detailed.
a) Bus bars
b) Intermediate compartment
c) Circuit breakers
d) Line disconnector
e) Voltage Transformers
f) Gas Insulated bus duct section between GIS and XLPE cable/Overhead Conductor.
g) Gas Insulated bus section between GIS & Oil filled Transformer/ Reactor.
h) Surge/Lightning arrester.
(vi) The equipment will be operated under the following ambient conditions:
a) The ambient temperature varies between 0 degree-C and 45 degree-C. However, for design
purposes, ambient temperature should be considered as 45 degree-C.
b) The humidity will be about 95% (indoors)
c) The elevation is less than 1000 meters.
(vii) The arrangement of the individual switchgear bays shall be such to achieve optimum space
saving, neat and logical arrangement, and adequate accessibility to all external components. The
arrangement of the equipment offered must provide adequate access for operation, testing and
maintenance. The workmanship shall be of the highest quality and shall conform to the latest modern
practices for the manufacture of high technology machinery and electrical switchgear.
(viii) The heaters shall be provided, wherever required, for the equipment in order to ensure the
proper functioning of the switchgear at specified ambient temperatures. The heaters shall be rated for
240V AC supply and shall be complete with thermostat, control switches and fuses, connected as a
balanced 3phsase. 4-wire load. The possibility of using heaters without thermostats in order to
achieve the higher reliability may be examined by the bidder and accordingly included in the offer
but it shall be ensured by the bidder that the temperature rise of different enclosures where heating is
provided should be within safe limits as per relevant standards. One copy of the relevant extract of
standard to which the above arrangement conforms along with cost reduction in offer. If any, shall
also be furnished along with the offer. The heaters shall be so arranged and protected as to create no
hazard to adjacent equipment from the heat produced.
(ix) Provision shall have to be made to the switchgear for connection with ground mat risers. This
provision shall consist of grounding pads to be connected to the ground mat riser in the vicinity of
the equipment.
(x) All making and Breaking contacts shall be sealed and free from atmospheric effect. In the event of
leakage of extinguishing medium to a value, which cannot withstand the dielectric stresses specified
in the open position, the contacts shall preferable self-close. Main contact shall be first to close and
the last to open and shall be easily accessible for inspection and replacement.
(xi) The interrupter sectional drawing showing the following conditions shall be furnished for
information with the bid:
a) Close Position
b) Arc Initiation Position
c) Full Arcing Position
d) Arc Extinction Position
e) Open Position
(xii) All the three poles of the circuit breaker shall be linked together electrically.
(xiii) Circuit breakers shall be provided with two (2) independent trip coils and one (1) closing
coil, suitable for trip circuit supervision. The trip circuit supervision relay would also be provided.
Necessary terminals shall be provided in the central control cabinet of the circuit breaker.
22.3 Insulator
Gas barrier insulators and support insulators shall have the same basis of design. The support insulators shall
have holes on both sides for proper flow of gas. Gas barrier insulators shall be provided to divide the GIS
into separate compartment. They shall be suitably located in order to minimize disturbance in case of leakage
or dismantling.
They shall be designed to withstand any internal fault thereby keeping an internal arc inside the faulty
compartment. Due to safety requirement for working on this pressurized equipment, whenever the pressure
of the adjacent gas compartment is reduced, it should be ensured by the bidder that adjacent compartment
would remain in service with reduced pressure. The gas tight barriers shall be clearly marked on the outside
of the enclosures. Tests shall be carried out during the manufacturing of the switchgear to ensure that all
insulators are free of partial discharge at a voltage, which is at least 10% higher than the rated voltage.
The elbows, bends, cross and T-sections of interconnections shall include the insulators bearing the
conductor when the direction changes take place in order to ensure that live parts remain perfectly centered
and the electrical field is not increased at such points.
22.4 Enclosure
(i) Pressure Vessel/ Enclosure: The enclosure shall be designed for the mechanical and thermal loads to
which it is subjected in service. The enclosure shall be manufactured and tested according to the
pressure vessel code (ASME/CENELEC/DIN or equivalent code for pressure Vessel.) Each
enclosure has to be tested as a routine test at 1.5 time the design pressure for one minute. The
bursting strength of Aluminium castings has to be a at least 5 times the design pressure. A bursting
pressure test shall be carried out at 5 times the design pressure as a type test on each type of
enclosure.
(ii) The material and thickness of the enclosures shall be such as to withstand an internal flashover
without burn through for a period of 300 ms at rated short time withstands current. The material shall
be such that it has no effect of environment as well as from the by-products of SF6 breakdown under
arcing condition. The enclosure shall be designed to practically eliminate the external
electromagnetic field and thereby electro-dynamic stresses even under short circuit conditions.
(iii) The enclosure shall be of continuous design and shall meet the requirement as specified in clause no.
10 (special considerations for GIS) of IEEE- 80, Latest Standards. The enclosure shall be sized for
carrying induced current equal to the rated current of the Bus. The conductor and the enclosure shall
form the concentric pair with effective shielding of the field internal to the enclosure.
(iv) Temperature rises of current carrying parts shall be limited to the values stipulated in IEC- 694,
under rated current and the climatic conditions at site. The temperature rises for accessible enclosure
and accessible area but need not be touched during normal operation, shall not exceed 20 degree C
above the ambient temperature of 50-degree C.
(v) The fabricated metal enclosures shall be of Aluminium alloy having high resistance to corrosion,
low electrical loses and negligible magnetic losses. All joint surfaces shall be machined, and all
castings shall be spot faced for all bolt heads or nuts and washers. All screws, bolts, studs and nuts
shall conform to metric system.
(vi) Each pressure filled enclosure shall be designed and fabricated to comply with the requirements of
the applicable pressure vessel codes and based on the design temperature and design pressures as
defined in IEC-62271-203.
(vii) In general, the contours of energized metal parts of the GIS and any other accessory shall be
such, so as to eliminate areas or points of high electrostatic flux concentrations. The surfaces shall be
smooth with no projection or irregularities which may cause visible corona. No corona shall be
visible in complete darkness which the equipment is subjected to specified test voltage. There shall
be no radio interference from the energized switchgear at rated voltage.
(viii) The enclosure & support structure shall be designed that a mechanic 1780 mm in height and
80 Kg in weight is able to climb on the equipment for maintenance.
(ix) The Average Intensity of electromagnetic field shall not be more than 50 micro –Tesla on the surface
of the enclosure. The contractor shall confirm the same preferably with all calculations and
documents in support of the above during detailed engineering.
22.5 Compartment
(i) Each section shall have plug- in or easily removable connection pieces to allow for easy replacement
of any component with the minimum of disturbance to the remainder of the equipment. Inspection
Windows shall be provided for disconnector and earth switches.
(ii) Each individual gas-filled compartment shall be guaranteed that the pressure loss within each
compartment shall not be more than half percent (0.5%) per year. Each gas-filled compartment shall
be equipped with static filters, density switches, filling valve and safety diaphragm.
(iii) The filters shall be capable of absorbing any water vapour which may penetrate into the enclosures
as well as the by-products of SF6 during interruption. Each gas compartment shall be fitted with
separate non-return valve connectors for evacuating & filling the gas and checking the gas pressure
etc.
(iv) The bus & bay enclosure should be sectionalized in such a manner that maintenance work can be
carried out by isolating and evacuating the small, effected section and the other bus & bays should
remain in service. The breaker enclosure shall have provision for easy withdrawal of the interrupter
assemblies.
(v) The sealing provided between flanges of two modules / enclosures shall be such that long-term
tightness is achieved.
(vi) Pressure Relief:
Pressure relief devices shall be provided in the gas sections to protect the main gas enclosures from
damage or distortion during the occurrence of abnormal pressure increase or shock waves generated
by internal electrical fault arcs (preferably in downward direction). Pressure relief shall be achieved
either by means of diaphragms or plugs venting directly into the atmosphere in a controlled
direction. If the pressure relief devices vent directly into the atmosphere, suitable guards and
deflectors shall be provided. Contractor shall submit to the Project Company the detailed criteria/
design regarding location of pressure relief devices/rupture diaphragms.
(vii) Bellows or Compensating Units: - Adequate provision shall be made to allow for the
thermal expansion of the conductors and of differential thermal expansion between the conductors
and the enclosures. The bellows shall be metallic (preferably of stainless steel) of following types or
other suitable equivalent arrangement shall be provided wherever necessary.
1. Lateral / Vertical mounting units: These shall be inserted, as required, between sections of bus
bars, on transformer, shunt reactor and XLPE cable etc. Lateral mounting shall be made possible
by a sliding section of enclosure and tubular conductors.
2. Axial compensators: These shall be provided to accommodate changes in length of bus bars due
to temperature variations.
3. Parallel compensators: These shall be provided to accommodate large linear expansions and
angle tolerances.
4. Tolerance compensators: These shall be provided for taking up manufacturing, site assembly and
foundation tolerances.
5. Vibration compensators: These bellow compensators shall be provided for absorbing vibrations
caused by the transformers and shunt reactors when connected to SF6 switchgear by oil- SF6
bushings.
6. The electrical connections across the bellows or compensating units shall be made by means of
suitable connectors.
22.6 Operation & Maintenance
1. All interlocks that prevent potentially dangerous mal operations shall be constructed such that they
cannot be operated easily, i.e., the operator must use tools or brute force to over-ride them.
2. It should be impossible to unwillingly touch live parts of the switchgear or to perform operations
that lead to arcing faults without the use of tools or brute force.
3. In case of any repair or maintenance on one busbar disconnector, the other busbar should be live and
in service.
4. All the elements shall be accessible without removing support structures for routine inspections and
possible repairs. The removal of individual enclosure parts, or entire breaker bays shall be possible
without disturbing the enclosures of neighbouring bays.
5. The removed interrupter assembly must be easily and safely accessible for inspection and possible
repairs.
6. Suitable disconnector and earth switch arrangement with separate compartment shall be provided at
the end of bus to facilitate smooth execution of future GIS extension, if any without affecting
existing portion.
7. A portable ladder with adjustable height may also be supplied to access to the equipment. The
ladders and walkways shall be provided wherever necessary for access to the equipment.
22.7 Local Control & Substation Automation System: -
Separate control cubicle including gas monitoring kiosk shall be provided for each bay which shall be
installed with the switchgear for local control & monitoring of respective switchgear bay. Local control
cubicle for GIS shall be equipped with suitable hardware & software for remote control operation and
conform to the bay level controller as detailed in Substation Automation System.
Alarm& Indications
Alarm circuit shall not respond to faults for momentary conditions. The following indications including
those required elsewhere in the specifications shall be generally provided in the alarm and indication circuits.
Gas Insulating System:

a) Loss of Gas Density.
b) Loss of Heater power (if required)
c) Any other alarm necessary to indicate deterioration of the gas insulating system.
Operating System:
a) Low operating pressure.
b) Loss of Heater power.
c) Loss of operating power.
d) Loss of control.
e) Pole Discrepancy
Indicators shall be provided on all circuit breakers, isolators and earth-switches, which shall clearly show
whether the switches are open or closed. The indicators shall be mechanically coupled directly to the main
contact operating drive rod or linkages and shall be mounted in a position where they are clearly visible from
the floor or the platform in the vicinity of the equipment. Windows shall also be provided with all isolators
and earth switches so that the switch contact positions can be verified by direct visual inspection.
22.8 Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers shall comply with IEC standard 62271 and shall have valid type test report based on the
above standard conducted on an independent test lab or witnessed by independent observers. The capacitive
current switching, line charging and cable charging current, restrike performance, mechanical & electrical
endurance, making and breaking current etc. shall be as per IEC 62271. The transient recovering voltage
performance shall be as per IEC.
Circuit breakers shall be puffer or Self-Generating Gas Pressure type and shall use the SF6 gas conforming
to IEC or other approved standard as the insulating medium as well as for arc quenching. Circuit breakers
shall be single break type.
Complete circuit breaker with all necessary items for successful operation shall be supplied. The circuit
breakers shall be designed for high-speed single and three phase reclosing with an operating sequence and
timing as specified.
The circuit breakers shall be suitable for an operating sequence of O-0.3 sec–CO–3 min-CO.
Circuit breakers shall comply with IEC standard 62271-100 and shall have valid type test report based on the
above standard conducted on an independent test lab or witnessed by independent observers.
The capacitive current switching, line charging and cable charging current, restrike performance, mechanical
& electrical endurance, making and breaking current etc. shall be as per IEC 62271-100. The transient
recovering voltage performance shall be as per IEC.
A lockout feature shall be incorporate to prevent operation of the circuit breaker whenever the gas pressure
falls to a value below which it would be incapable of performing in accordance with its rated duty. Gas
monitors shall be temperature compensated.
An alarm feature shall also be incorporate to give indication of falling gas pressure prior to the lockout of the
circuit breaker.
Suitable facilities shall be included for gas sampling and for draining and replenishing the gas volume for
maintenance. Absorption of moisture and the decomposition products of arcing or discharge in the gas shall
be achieve by integral filters.
The gas flow required for arc quenching will be generated in the interrupter units by means of the puffer
piston and cylinder. The drive cabinet contains the operating mechanism and equipment for control and
monitoring of the circuit breaker.
Mechanical position indicators will be directly connected to the operating drive rods showing the single pole
switching state or a spring-operated mechanism for one 3-phase circuit breaker with one mechanical position
indicator.
Auxiliary switches allow electrical monitoring of the contacts and any intermediate positions. Auxiliary
switches shall allow electrical monitoring of the contacts and any intermediate positions.
Circuit breaker shall be single pressure type.
Design and construction of the circuit breaker shall be such that there is minimum possibility of gas leakage
and entry of moisture. There should not be any condensation of SF6 gas on insulated surfaces of the circuit
breaker.
In the interrupter assembly, there shall be absorbing product box to eliminate SF6 decomposition products
and moisture. The details and operating experience with such filters shall be brought out in additional
information schedule.
Each pole shall form an enclosure filled with SF6 gas independent of two other poles. Common, monitoring
of SF6 gas can be provided for the three poles of circuit breaker having a common drive. The
interconnecting pipes in this case shall be such that the SF6 gas from one pole could be removed for
maintenance purposes.
The offered circuit breakers along with operating mechanism shall be type tested for mechanical endurance
class M2 and must have Class E2, C2. Circuit breaker shall meet the duty requirements for any type of fault
or fault location also for line charging and dropping when used on 110kV effectively grounded system and
perform make and break operations as per the stipulated duty cycles satisfactorily.
The circuit breaker shall be capable of:

(i) Interrupting the steady and transient magnetizing current corresponding to connected
transformers.
(ii) Interrupting line/cable charging current as per IEC without re-strikes and without use of opening
resistors.
(iii) Clearing short line fault (Kilometric faults) with source impedance behind the bus equivalent to
symmetrical fault current specified.
(iv) Breaking 25% the rated fault current at twice the rated voltage under phase opposition condition.
(v) The breaker shall satisfactorily withstand the high stresses imposed on them during fault
clearing, load rejection and re-energisation of lines with trapped charges.
The Contractor shall note that total break time of the breaker shall not be exceeded under any duty conditions
specified such as with the combined variation of the trip coil voltage (70-110%) and SF6 gas pressure etc.
While furnishing the proof for the total break time of complete circuit breaker, the Contractor may
specifically bring out the effect of non-simultaneity between poles and show how it is covered in the total
break time. The values guaranteed shall be supported with the type test reports.
Test Duties and Short Line Fault with TRV shall be as per IEC-62271-100.
Material used in the construction of circuit breakers shall be such a fully compatible with SF6. The SF6 gas
density monitor shall be adequately temperature compensated to model the density changes due to variations
in ambient temperature within the body of circuit breaker as a whole. It shall be possible to dismantle the
monitor without removal of gas.
Sufficient gas shall be supplied to fill all the circuit breakers installed plus an additional 20% of quantity as
spare.
22.9 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be of motor charged spring operated. Operation will normally
be from a remote or supervisory position, but facilities shall be provided for operation locally by electrical
release and by direct manual release from stored energy devices when the circuit breaker is isolated for
maintenance.
The operating mechanism shall be anti-pumping and trip free (as per IEC definition) electrically and either
mechanically or pneumatically under every method of closing. The mechanism of the breaker shall be such
that the position of the breaker is maintained even after the leakage of operating media and/or gas.
The operating mechanism shall be such that the failure of any auxiliary spring will not prevent tripping and·
will not cause trip or closing operation of the power operated closing devices. A mechanical indicator shall
be provided to show open and close positions of breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be
visible to a man standing on the ground with the mechanism housing door closed. An operation counter shall
also be provided.
Closing coil shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between 85% and 110% of the rated voltage.
Shunt trip coils shall operate correctly under all operating conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated
breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at all values of supply voltage between 70% and 110%· of rated
voltage.
Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion consisting of material. Bearings requiring grease,
shall.be equipped with pressure type grease fittings. bearing pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be
adequately pinned or locked to prevent loosening or changing the adjustment with repeated operation of the
breaker.
Operating mechanism shall normally be operated by remote electrical control. Electrical tripping shall be
performed by shunt trip coil. Provision shall also be made for local electrical control. 'Local / remote'
selector switch and close & trip push buttons shall be provided in the breaker central control cabinet. Remote
located push buttons and indicating lamps shall also be provided.
Operating mechanism and all accessories shall be in local control cabinet. A central control cabinet. for the
three poles of the breaker shall be provided along with supply of necessary tubing, cables, etc.
Provisions shall be made on breakers for attaching an operation analyser to perform speed tests after
installation at site to record contact travel against time and measure opening time.
The Bidder shall furnish curve supported by test data indicating the opening time under close-open operation
with combined variation of trip coil and operating media along with the bid.
It shall be possible to padlock each local control function in the open position. Operation counters of non-
resettable type shall be fitted to all circuit breaker mechanisms.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical tripping pulse being
applied to the circuit breaker during the closing stroke, or of the mechanism failing to latch in the closed
position, the circuit breaker shall open fully and in such a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated
breaking current.
Mechanical indicator shall be provided for CB “ON” and CB “OFF” position. The operating mechanism
shall be suitable for a rated operating sequence of O-0.3 sec-CO-3 min-CO.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanism shall not make repeated attempts to
close the circuit breaker when the control switch is held in the CLOSE position in the event of failure to
latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of a trip signal being given to the circuit breaker.
The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and solenoid operated
valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature range when the voltage at their terminals
is any value within the voltage range stipulated in IEC 62271-100 and in addition over the range of all
operating conditions of the batteries and chargers.
The circuit breakers shall be provided with two (2) trip coils and one (1) closing coils.
22.10 Constructional Features
A. Contacts
All making and breaking contacts shall be sealed and free from atmospheric effects. Contacts shall be
designed to have adequate thermal and current carrying capacity for the duty specified and to have a life
expectancy so that frequent replacement due to excessive burning will not be necessary. Provision shall be
made for rapid dissipation of heat generated by the arc on opening.
Any device provided for voltage grading to damp oscillations or, to prevent re-strike prior to the complete
interruption of the circuit or to limit over voltage on closing, shall have a life expectancy comparable of that
of the breaker as a whole.
Breakers shall be so designed that when operated within their specified rating, the temperature of each part
will be limited to values consistent with a long life for the material used. The temperature rise shall not
exceed that indicated in IEC-62271-100 under specified ambient conditions.
The gap between the open contacts shall be such that it can withstand at least the rated phase to ground
voltage for eight hours at zero pressure above atmospheric level of SF6 gas due to its leakage. The breaker
should be able to withstand all dielectric stresses imposed on it in open condition at lockout pressure
continuously (i.e., 2 p.u. power frequency voltage across the breaker continuously)
In the interrupter assembly there shall be an adsorbing product box to minimize the effect of SF6
decomposition products and moisture. The material used in the construction of the circuit breakers shall be
such as to be fully compatible with SF6 gas decomposition products.
Provisions shall be made for attaching an operational analyzer to record travel, speed and making
measurement of operating timings etc. after installation at site.
22.11 Control
The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary-contact switches and push buttons.
Each breaker pole shall be provided with two (2) independent tripping circuits, valves, pressure switches,
and coils each connected to a different set of protective relays.
The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control. Electrical tripping shall be performed by
shunt trip coils. However, provisions shall be made for local electrical control. For this purpose, a
local/remote selector switch and close and trip control switch/push buttons shall be provided in the breaker
central control cabinet.
The trip coil shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision during both open and close position of breaker.
Closing coil and associated circuits shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between 85% and 110% of
the rated voltage. Shunt trip and associated circuits shall operate correctly under all operating conditions of
the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at all values of supply voltage
between 70% and 110% of rated voltage. If additional elements are introduced in the trip coil circuit their
successful operation and reliability for similar applications on circuit breakers shall be clearly brought out in
the additional information schedules. In the absence of adequate details, the offer is likely to be rejected.
Density meter contacts and pressure switch contacts shall be suitable for direct use as permissive in closing
and tripping circuits. Separate contacts must be used for each of tripping and closing circuits. If contacts are
not suitably rated and multiplying relays are used, then fail safe logic/schemes are to be employed. DC
supplies for all auxiliary circuit shall be monitored and for remote annunciations and operation lockout in
case of DC failures.
The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be positively driven by the breaker operating rod.
22.12 Spring Charged Operating Mechanisms
Circuit breaker shall be operated by spring charged mechanism. The mechanism shall be housed in a dust
proof cabinet and shall have IP-42 degree of protection. The operating mechanism shall be strong, rigid, not
subject to rebound or to critical adjustments at site and shall be readily accessible for maintenance.
The operating mechanism shall be suitable for high-speed reclosing and other duties specified. During
reclosing the breaker contacts shall close fully and then open. The mechanism shall be anti-pumping and trip
free (as per IEC definition) under every method of closing.
The mechanism shall be such that the failure of any auxiliary spring will not prevent tripping and will not
cause trip or closing operation of the power operating devices. A mechanical indicator shall be provided to
show open and close position of the breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man
standing on the ground level with the mechanism housing closed. An operation counter shall also be
provided in the central control cabinet.
Spring operated mechanisms with proved satisfactory service experience shall be arrange for motor charging
but means shall also be provided for charging by hand. When fully charged the spring mechanism shall have
sufficient stored energy to permit as minimum, the operating sequence O-CO/2CO to be perform following
the loss of supply to the charging motor.
Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor, opening spring & closing spring with limit switch
for automatic charging and other necessary accessories to make the mechanism a complete operating unit
Opening spring shall be supplied with limit switch for automatic charging and other necessary accessories.
As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of closing and opening operations shall be
possible. The motor shall have adequate thermal rating for this duty. After failure of power supply to the
motor, one close--open operation shall be possible with the energy contained in the operating mechanism.
Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor, which shall be used solely for compressing the closing
spring.
Motor ratings shall be such that it requires not more than 30 seconds for fully charging the closing spring.
Closing action of the circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring ready for tripping. When closing
springs are discharged, after closing a breaker, closing springs shall automatically be charged for the next
operation and an indication of this shall be provided in the local and remote-control cabinet.
The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in the operating spring to close and latch
the circuit breaker against the rated making current and also to provide the required energy for the tripping
mechanism in case, the tripping energy is derived from the operating mechanism.
A mechanical indicating device shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring. The indication shall be
visible with the doors of the mechanism cabinet closed. An auxiliary switch shall give the remote indication
of "spring discharged". The mechanism shall be charged automatically, for further operation as soon as the
circuit breaker has completed a closing operation. The time required to power charge the spring shall not
exceed 30 seconds.
The spring shall be fully charged before it can be released to close the circuit breaker. It shall not be possible
for the breaker to close whilst the spring is being charged. Spring closing mechanisms shall be designed such
that it is not possible for a fully charged spring to be released inadvertently due to external shock or vibration
caused by the breaker opening under short circuit conditions or any other cause.
The mechanisms shall be provided with means for charging the spring by hand. During this process, no
electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism shall endanger the operator or damage the equipment.
Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion resisting material, bearings which require grease shall
be equipped with pressure type grease fittings. Bearing pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately
pinned or locked to prevent loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation of the breaker. The
bidder shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the mechanism along with the operation
manual for the circuit breaker.
22.13 Disconnectors
Disconnector shall be of the single-pole, group operated type, installed in the switchgear to provide electrical
isolation of the circuit breakers, the transformers, shunt reactor, double bus and transmission lines. The
disconnector shall conform to IEC- 62271-102.
The single / three pole group operated disconnector shall be operated by electric motor suitable for use on
110V or 220V DC system and shall be equipped with a manual operating mechanism for emergency use.
The motor shall be protected against over current and short circuit. The operating mechanisms shall be
complete with all necessary linkages, clamps, couplings, operating rods, support brackets and grounding
devices. All the bearings shall be permanently lubricated or shall be of such a type that no lubrication or
maintenance is required.
It shall be possible to operate the disconnecting switches manually by cranks or hand wheels. The contacts
shall be both mechanically and electrically disconnected during the manual operation. The disconnecting
switches shall be arranged in such a way that all the three phases operate simultaneously. All the parts of the
operating mechanism shall be able to withstand starting torque of the motor mechanism without damage
until the motor overload protection operates.
These shall be suitable to make and break the charging currents during their opening and closing. They shall
also be able to make and break loop current which appears during transfer between bus bars. The contact
shielding shall also be designed to prevent re-strikes and high local stresses caused by transient recovery
voltages when these currents are interrupted.
The operating mechanisms shall be complete with all necessary linkages, clamps, couplings, operating rods,
support brackets and grounding devices. All the bearings shall be permanently lubricated or shall be of such
a type that no lubrication or maintenance is required.
The opening and closing of the disconnectors shall be achieved by either local or remote control. The local
operation shall be by means of a two-position control switch located in the bay module control cabinet.
Remote control of the disconnectors from the control room shall be made by means of Remote/ Local
Transfer switch.
The disconnector operations shall be inter-locked electrically with the associate circuit breakers in such a
way that the disconnector control is inoperative if the circuit breaker is closed.
Each disconnector shall be supplied with auxiliary switch having four normally open and four normally
closed contacts for future use over and above those required for switchgear interlocking and automation
purposes. The auxiliary switch contacts are to be adjustable type, such that, when required, they can be
adjusted to make contact before the main switch contacts.
The signalling of the closed position of the disconnector shall not take place unless it is certain that the
movable contacts will reach a position in which the rated normal current, peak withstand current and short
time withstand current can be carried safely.
The signalling of the open position of the disconnector shall not take place unless the movable contacts have
reached such a position that the clearance between the contacts I at least 80 percent of the rated isolating
distance.
All auxiliary switches and auxiliary circuits shall be capable of carrying a current of at least 10 A DC
continuously. The auxiliary switches shall be capable of breaking at least 2 A in a 110V or 220 V DC circuit
with a time constant of not less than 20 milliseconds. The disconnectors and safety grounding switches shall
have a mechanical key (pad locking key) and electrical inter-locks to prevent closing of the grounding
switches when isolator switches are in the closed position and to prevent closing of the disconnector when
the grounding switch is in the closed position.
The local control of the disconnector/Isolator and high-speed earthing/grounding switches from the bay
module control panel should be achieved from the individual control switches with the remote/local transfer
switch set to local. All electrical sequence interlocks will apply in both remote and local control modes.
Each disconnector shall have a clearly identifiable local, positively driven mechanical position indicator,
together with position indicator on the bay module control cabinet and provisions for taking the signals to the
control room. The details of the inscriptions and colouring for the indicator are given as under:
POSITION SIGN COLOUR

OPEN OPEN / O GREEN
CLOSE CLOSED / I RED
All the disconnecting switches shall have arrangement allowing easy visual inspection of the travel of the
switch contacts in both open and close positions from the outside of the enclosure.
The disconnecting switches shall be provided with rating plates and shall be accessible for inspection. The
disconnecting switches shall be capable of being padlocked in both the open and closed positions with the
operating motor automatically disengaged. The padlocking device shall be suitable for a standard size lock
with a 10 mm shank.
The padlock must be visible and directly lock the final output shaft of the operating mechanism. Integrally
mounted lock when provided shall be equipped with a unique key for such three-phase group. Master key is
not permitted.
22.14 Earthing/Grounding Switches
Three-pole, group operated, safety grounding switches shall be operated by electric motor for use on 110V or
220V DC ungrounded system and shall be equipped with a manual operating mechanism for emergency use.
The motor shall be protected against over-current and short circuit.
Each safety grounding switch shall be electrically interlocked with its associate disconnector and circuit
breaker such that it can only be closed if both the circuit breaker and disconnector are in open position.
Safety grounding switch shall also be mechanical key interlocked with its associated disconnector.
Each safety grounding switch shall have clearly identifiable local positive driven mechanical indicator
together with position indicator on the bay module control cabinet and provision for taking the signal to
Control room. The details of the inscription and colouring for the indicator are given as under:
POSITION SIGN COLOUR

OPEN OPEN / O GREEN
CLOSE CLOSED / I RED
Each ground switch shall be fitted with auxiliary switches having four normally open (4 NO) and four
normally closed (4 NC) contacts for use by others over and above those required for local interlocking and
position indication purposes.
Interlocks shall be provided so that manual operation of the switches or insertion of the manual operating
device will disable the electrical control circuits.
Provision shall be made for padlocking the ground switches in either the open or closed position. All
portions of the grounding switch and operating mechanism required for grounding shall be connected
utilizing flexible copper conductors having a minimum cross-sectional area of 120 sq. mm.
The main grounding connections on each grounding switch shall be rated to carry the full short circuit rating
of the switch for 1 sec. and shall be equipped with a copper-plated terminal connector suitable of adequate
rating for connection to the grounding grid. The safety grounding switches shall conform to the requirements
of IEC- 62271- 102. Mechanical position indication shall be provided locally at each switch and remotely at
each bay module control cabinet/ substation automation system.
22.15 High Speed Make Proof Earthing/Grounding switches
Grounding switches located at the beginning of the line feeder bay modules shall be of the high speed, make
proof type and will be used to discharge the respective charging currents, in addition to their safety
grounding function. These grounding switches shall be capable of interrupting the inductive currents and to
withstand the associated TRV.
Single phase switches shall be provided with operating mechanism suitable for operation from a 110V or
220V DC. The switches shall be fitted with a stored energy closing system to provide fault making capacity.
The short circuit making current rating of each ground switch shall be at least equal to its peak withstand
current rating of 100kA or other as applicable in the specific project.
The switches shall have inductive/ capacitive current switching capacity as per IEC-62271-102. Each high
speed make proof grounding switch shall have clearly identifiable local positive driven mechanical indicator
together with position indicator on the bay module control cabinet and provision for taking the signal
Control Room.
22.16 Current transformer
a) General:
(i) The current transformers and accessories shall conform to latest IEC-61869 and other relevant
standards except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification.
(ii) The particulars of the various cores may change within reasonable limits as per the requirements
of protection relay supplier. The manufacturer is required to have these values confirmed from
the purchaser before proceeding with design of the cores. The other characteristics of CTs shall
be as given in TECHNICAL PARAMETER of Current Transformer.
b) Ratios and Characteristics
The number, rating, ratios, accuracy class, etc. for the individual current transformers secondary cores shall
be in accordance with the table as given. Where multi-ratio current transformers are required, the various
ratios shall be obtained by changing the effective number of turns on the secondary Winding.
c) Rating and Diagram Plates
Rating and diagram plates shall be as specified in the IEC specification incorporating the year of
manufacture. The rated extended current rating voltage and rated thermal current shall also be marked on the
name plate.
The diagram plates shall show the terminal markings and the relative physical arrangement of the current
transformer cores with respect to the primary terminals (P1 & P2). The position of each primary terminal in
the current transformer SF6 gas section shall be clearly marked by two plates fixed to the enclosure at each
end of the current transformer.
d) Constructional Details
The current transformers incorporated into the GIS will be used for protective relaying and metering and
shall be of metal- enclosed type. All the current transformers shall have effective electromagnetic shields to
protect against high frequency transients.
Each current transformer shall be equipped with a marshalling box with terminals for the secondary circuits,
which are connected to the local control cubicle. The star/delta configuration and the inter connection to the
line protection panels will be done at the CT terminal block located in the local control cubicle.
Current transformers guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be intended as simultaneous for all cores.
The rated extended primary current shall be 150% at highest ratio and 200% at ratios other than highest
ratios.
The instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than five (5) for metering core. If any auxiliary
CTs/reactor are used in the current transformers, then all parameters specified shall have to be met treating
auxiliary CTs as an integral part of the current transformer. The auxiliary CTs/reactor shall preferably built-
in construction of the CTs.
The wiring diagram, for the interconnections of the three single phase CTs shall be provided inside the
marshalling box.
The current transformers shall be suitable for high-speed auto-reclosing.
Provisions shall be made for primary injection testing either within CT or outside. Electromagnetic shields to
be provided against high frequency transients typically 1-30 MHz.
22.17 Voltage Transformers
a) General
The voltage transformers shall conform to IEC-61869 and other relevant standards except to the extent
explicitly modified in the specification. Voltage transformers shall be of the electromagnetic type with SF6
gas insulation. The earth end of the high voltage Winding and the ends of the secondary Winding shall be
brought out in the terminal box.
b) Ratios and Characteristics

The rating, ratio, accuracy class, connection etc. for the voltage transformers shall be in accordance with
Approved SLD.
c) Rating and diagram plates

Rating and diagram plate shall be provided complying with the requirements of the IEC specification
incorporating the year of manufacture and including turns ratio, voltage ratio, burden, connection diagram
etc.
d) Secondary Terminals, Earthing and Fuses

The beginning and end of each secondary Winding shall be wired to suitable terminals accommodated in a
terminal box mounted directly on the voltage transformer section of the SF6 switchgear. All terminals shall
be stamped or otherwise marked to correspond with the marking on the diagram plate. Provision shall be
made for earthing of the secondary Windings inside the terminal box.
The transformer shall be able to sustain full line to line voltage without saturation of transformer. The
accuracy class will be at maximum tap.
e) Constructional Details of Voltage Transformers

The voltage transformers shall be located in a separate bay module on the bus and will be connected phase-
to ground and shall be used for protection, metering, and synchronization.
The voltage transformers shall be of inductive type, non-resistant and shall be contained in their own-SF6
compartment, separated from other parts of installation. The voltage transformers shall be effectively
shielded against high frequency electromagnetic transients. The voltage transformers shall have three
secondary Windings
Voltage transformers secondary shall be protected by MCB or HRC cartridge type fuses for all the
Windings. In addition, MCB/fuses shall be provided for the protection and metering Windings for MCB/fuse
monitoring scheme.
The secondary terminals of the VT’s shall be terminated to the stud type non-disconnecting terminal blocks
in the secondary boxes via the fuse.
The voltage transformer should be thermally and dielectrically safe when the secondary terminals are loaded
with the guaranteed thermal burdens.
The accuracy of 0.2 on secondary should be maintained throughout the entire burden range up to 100 VA on
all the three Windings without any adjustments during operation. The diagram for the interconnection of the
VTs shall be provided inside the marshalling box.
22.18 SF6/Air Bushings
Outdoor SF6 to air bushings, for the connection between the GIS and overhead lines or conventional air
insulated equipment shall be furnished where specified. Bushings shall comply with the relevant IEC
standards. The same should be type tested as per relevant IEC.
Mechanical forces on bushing terminals: Outdoor bushings must be capable of withstanding a cantilever
force and all other system stress as per IEC standard.
22.19 Insulation levels and creep age distances
The insulation levels are applicable to normal sea level atmospheric conditions. The creep age distance over
the external surface of outdoor bushings shall as per Local Site Condition but shall not be less than 31
mm/kV.
22.20 Gas Insulated Bus Duct (where applicable)
The components of the GIS shall be connected by a single-phase bus duct for 400kV and single phase / three
phase bus ducts for 110KV. The bus system shall be capable of withstand the mechanical and thermal
stresses due to short circuit currents, as well as thermal expansion and contraction created by temperature
cycling.
Necessary supporting calculation towards withstanding the stresses is to be submitted during detailed
engineering by the successful bidder.
22.21 EHV-POWER Cable Connection (where applicable)
The design of the cable end box shall fully comply with the IEC 62271-209 standard. The type and size of
cables shall be as per requirement. The final connection of the high voltage cable circuits in the GIS will be
by means of individual single-phase cables, with one cable per phase.
22.22 Seismic Design Criteria
The equipment shall be designed for operation in seismic zone for earthquake resistance. The seismic loads
are due to the horizontal and vertical acceleration which may be assumed to act non-concurrently. Seismic
level zone as per local site condition to be considered for the design of equipment.
The seismic loads shall be equal to static loads corresponding to the weight of the parts multiplied by the
acceleration. The equipment along with its parts shall be strong enough and sufficiently well connected to
resist total operating stresses resulting from the forces in normal operation but in case of abnormal condition
shall also resist with forces superimposed due to earthquakes.
The copies of type test reports for similar rated equipment, if tested earlier, should be furnished along with
the tender. If the equipment has not been type tested earlier, design calculations of simulate parameters
should be furnished along with the offer.
To prevent the movement of GIS sub-assemblies i.e., various bay modules during the earthquake, suitable
devices shall be provided for fixing the sub-assemblies to the foundation.
The contractor shall supply necessary bolts for embedding in the concrete foundation. The fixing of GIS sub-
assemblies to the foundation shall be designed to withstand the seismic events. It will also be ensured that
the special devices as well as bolts shall not be over stressed. The details of the devices used and the
calculations for establishing the adequacy shall be furnished by the supplier and shall be subject to the
purchase’s approval.
22.23 Partial Discharge Monitoring System & Dew Point Meter
Partial Discharge Monitoring System & Dew point meter shall be offered if specifically mentioned in
schedule.
Dew Point Meter
The meter shall be capable of measuring the dew point of SF6 Gas of the Circuit Breaker/ GIS equipment. It
should be portable and adequately protected for outdoor use. The meter shall be provided with due point
hygrometer with digital indication to display the dew point temperature in degree C., degree F or PPM. It
should be capable of measuring the corresponding pressure at which due point is being measured.
The measurement and use of the instrument must be simple, direct without the use of any other material/
chemical like dry ice/ acetone etc. It should be suitable for operation on 220 Volts AC mains supply.
Technical specification:
Partial Discharge Monitoring System
The system shall be used for detecting different types of defects in Gas Insulated Switchgears (GIS) & GIB
such as Particles, Loose shields and Partial Discharges as well as for detection of Partial discharges in other
types of equipment such as Cable Joints, Current Transformer and Potential/Voltage Transformer.
The system shall be capable for measuring PD in charged Gas Insulated environment. The principal of
operation shall be based on UHF with internal sensors. The instrument shall also be able to detect partial
discharges in GIB, cable joints, terminations, CTs and PTs etc. also.
Detection and measurement of PD and bouncing particles shall be displayed on built in large LCD display
and the measurement shall be stored in the instrument and further downloadable to a PC for further analysis
to locate actual source of PD such as free conducting particles, floating components, voids in spacers,
particle on spacer surfaces etc.
Details of internally fitted PD sensors (location and numbers) in GIS equipment & GIB shall be shown in
relevant drawings and finalised during detailed engineering.
The PDM system shall be designed in such a manner that it can detect Partial Discharge of 5 pC or above
generated within any part of GIS & GIB. The same is required to be demonstrated as a part of site test during
commissioning.
The PDM kit shall be supplied from a manufacturer renowned worldwide who have service facility in the
respective project country.
Online Partial Discharge Monitoring System
If specifically mentioned in BOQ then online PDM system is to be considered. In addition to above
requirements, the system should satisfy the followings –
 An on-line continuous Partial Discharge Monitoring (PDM) system shall be designed to provide
an automatic facility for the simultaneous collection of PD data at multiple points on the GIS &
its associated GIB ducts and Voltage Transformers adopting UHF technique. The data stored
shall provide a historical record of the progress of PD sources and shall identify the areas of
maximum activity.
 The PDM system shall be provided with capacity for readily interfacing with UHF PD sensors of
present and future GIS Bays (if not specifically mentioned, 2 nos. additional bays at each voltage
class is to be considered). Detailed drawings and documents shall be submitted during
engineering stage for approval.
 Power supply to PDM PC shall have protection against surges, overload and short circuit. A
dedicated on-line UPS system for a minimum of 15 minutes duration is to be provided.
 System shall be able to generate all the logs related to system fault, system access, PD event, and
any changes in system setting etc.
 The PDM system shall generate alarm when action is required; viz. a) PD alarm (abnormal PD
activity indicating a risk of failure) & b) PD system fail alarm to be connected to SAS.
 The PDM system should have the facility of Real Time display, which will give an instant
indication of PD activity coupler wise, with one-second update period. The PDM system shall be
able to capture the PD data triggered by associated switching operations of CBs & isolators.
 Historical data and file storage with date and time stamp shall be available. Sufficient storage
facility shall be available to review historical data updated for the lifetime of switchgear.
 In order to interpret various types of PD defects, intelligent diagnostics software (expert system)
shall be built- in as part of the PDM software capability.
22.24 Grounding
IEEE-80-2014 [Latest Edition] should be followed for design and provision for grounding system to protect
operating staff against any hazardous touch voltages and electro-magnetic interferences.
The GIS supplier shall define clearly what constitute the main grounding bus of the GIS. The GIS supplier
must supply the entire material for grounding bus of GIS viz conductor, clamps, joints, operating and safety
platforms etc. Conductors with copper bars are preferred over copper wires. The GIS supplier should supply
all the earthing conductors and associated hardware material for the following:
1. Connecting all GIS equipment, bus ducts, enclosures, control cabinets, supporting structure etc. to
the ground bus of GIS.
2. Grounding of transformer, reactor, CT, VT & CVT, SA and other outdoor switchyard equipment/
structures etc.
The enclosure of the GIS may be grounded at several points so that there shall be grounded cage around all
the live parts. A minimum of two nos. of grounding connections should be provided for each of circuit
breaker, transformer terminals, cable terminals, surge arrestors, earth switches and at each end of the bus
bars.
The grounding continuity between each enclosure shall be effectively interconnected with Cu bonds of
suitable size to bridge the flanges. Subassembly to subassembly bonding shall be provided to provide gap &
safe voltage gradients between all intentionally grounded parts of the GIS assembly & between those parts
and the main grounding bus of the GIS.
Each marshalling box, local control panel, power and control cable sheaths and other noncurrent carrying
metallic structures shall be connected to the grounding system of GIS via connections that are separated
from GIS enclosures.
The grounding connector shall be of sufficient mechanical strength to withstand electromagnetic forces as
well as capable of carrying the anticipated maximum fault current without overheating.
At least two grounding paths shall be provided to connect each point to the main grounding bus. Necessary
precautions should be undertaken to prevent excessive currents from being inducted into adjacent frames,
structures of reinforcing steel and to avoid establishment of current loops via other station equipment.
All flexible bonding leads shall be tinned copper. All connectors, for attaching flexible bonding leads to
grounding conductors and grounding conductors to support structures shall be Y/G Copper Conductor.
The contractor shall provide suitable measure to mitigate transient enclosure voltage caused by high
frequency currents caused by lightning strikes, operation of surge arrestor, ph./ earth fault and discharges
between contacts during switching operation. The grounding system shall ensure safe touch & step voltages
in all the enclosures.
The contractor shall provide suitable barrier of non-linear resistor/ counter discontinued SF6/ Air
termination, SF6/ Transformer or Reactor termination, SF6/ HV cable bushing etc. to mitigate transient
enclosure voltage.
22.25 Quality of SF6 Gas
The SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear shall be designed for use with SF6 gas complying with the
recommendations of IEC 376,376A & 376B, at the time of the first charging with gas. All SF6 gas supplied
as part of the contract shall comply with the requirements of IEC as above as a minimum & should be
suitable in all respects for use in the switchgear under all operating conditions.
22.26 Tests
22.26.1 Type tests
Equipment supplied shall be of type tested design. During detailed engineering, the Bidder shall submit for
Company’s approval the reports of all type tests as listed in Section-2 of this specification & carried out
within last ten (10) years from the date 31.05.2023.
These reports should be for the tests conducted on the equipment similar to those proposed to be supplied
under this contract and test (s) should have been either conducted at an independent laboratory or should
have been witnessed by Project Company. However, if bidder is not able to submit report of the type test(s)
conducted within last ten years from the date 31.05.2023 or in the case of type test report(s) are not found to
be meeting the specification requirements, the bidder shall conduct all such tests under this contract at no
additional cost to the Project Company and Owner either at third party lab or in presence of
Company’s/Clients/owners representative and submit the reports for approval.
All acceptance and routine tests as per the specification and relevant IEC & GOST standards shall be carried
out. Charges for these shall be deemed to be included in the equipment price. The type test reports once
approved for any projects shall be treated as reference.
For projects of MASDAR, an endorsement sheet will be furnished by the manufacturer confirming
adherence and “No design Change”.
22.26.2 Routine Tests
1) Routine tests as per IEC: 62271-100 shall be performed on all circuit breakers. In addition to the
mechanical and electrical tests specified by IEC, the following shall also be performed.
2) Speed curves for each breaker shall be obtained with the help of a suitable operation analyzer to
determine the breaker contact movement during opening, closing, auto reclosing and trip free
operation under normal as well as limiting operating conditions (control voltage, pneumatic
pressure etc.).
3) The tests shall show the speed of contacts directly at various stages of operation, travel of
contacts, opening time, closing time, shortest time between separation and meeting of contacts at
break make operation etc.
4) This test shall also be performed at site for which the necessary operation analyzer along with
necessary transducers, cables, console etc. shall be furnished as mandatory maintenance
equipment.
22.27 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgear Technical Data Sheet
22.27.1 To be submitted by Bidder for Company Approval as per SEC Specification and Standards,
Approved Vendor List and Formats.
23 POWER TRANSFORMER
The Contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission the Power switchgear on Site as per the
Design provided by the Contractor and the OEM recommendation.
Power Transformer must be designed at a Design Ambient Temperature of +55°C (without shed) and
shall be designed and tested in accordance with SEC Standards and IEC 60076- (All Series). In case of
conflicts between two standards, then most onerous and stringent conditions shall be applicable.
The Contractor shall store at site the following spare parts:
 OEM recommended spare parts for two years.

 One set of special tools and tackles, which manufacturer/supplier deems necessary for
the Power Transformer erection and maintenance.
The transformer size which shall be rated for the maximum exporting capacity of the PV Plant without
overloading. No load limitation during day hours shall be accepted.
Transformer’s specification shall be not limited to the following requirements:

 ONAN/ONAF, or ONAN/ONAF/ONAF cooling type.
 3-phase, two Windings, according to SEC Standards and IEC 60076- (All Series)
 Copper (Cu-Cu) Winding.
 New mineral oil in according to the IEC 60296 compatible for transformer materials.
 Design Ambient Temperature: +55°C
 Limited inrush current (< 10 In).
 Rated HV voltage: 110kV.
 Rated MV voltage: 33kV.
 On load tap changer (OLTC): +/-10 x 1.25% Ynd11d11 or Ynd1d1 vector group.
 Minimum impedance according to SEC Standards.
 Recommended Short circuit impedance: 19 % at Base (ONAN) (to be finalised based on
the Short circuit calculations).
 Flux Density at 110% Rated voltage (core/yoke): 1.55 T
 Continuous Duty: 110%
 Creepage distances according to SEC Standards.
 Equipped with Protection relay according to applicable codes & standards (pressure,
temperature, oil level, etc.)
 Valves for oil filling, draining, and sampling.
 Rating and diagram aluminium plate. (Rating plate as specified in IEC 60076).
 Temperature control system so that no insulation overheating occurs, and
 Name plate and wiring diagram on them in a visible place.
The transformer manufacturer shall provide manufacturing plant ISO9OO1, ISO14001 and OHSAS18001
certifications.
23.1 General Description
Three phase mineral oil-immersed transformer with two (3) Windings, ONAN/ONAF cooling, 33/110kV ±
10x1.25 % kV, Ynd1d1 or Ynd11d11, 60 Hz, that complies with the design requirements, with previous
design acceptance by Company and Grid Operator, and whose supply includes the following:
 HV Bushings of Power Transformers shall be connected to the 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgear
through 110kV Gas Insulated Busduct.
 33kV XLPE Copper Armoured cables shall be connected to MV Cable Box of Power
Transformer.
 On-load tap changer (OLTC) on the HV side, shall be MR, Germany.
 Automatic voltage regulator (AVR) relay shall be MR (TAPCON), Germany.
 Filling oil for the first fill, with 5% reserve.
 Nitrogen or inert gas for transport.
The Contractor must provide for the supply, assembly, detailed engineering, mechanical works, ancillaries
equipment, loading/unloading, freight, shipping, packaging, storage, factory and site tests, performance &
reliability tests, HV test equipment (as applicable) for successful energization of power transformers that
complies with the design requirement.
Electrical and Mechanical components for Generating Step-up power transformers components shall be
properly sized to meet the maximum rating levels required with the use of fans, under maximum cooling
conditions, as applicable.
Transformer shall be designed for outdoor installation and direct sun exposure.
Transformers shall be certified to be suitable for installation in seismic category under national conditions as
per Geotechnical Study. Allowable tolerances shall be established as per IEC 60076 series. If observed
manufacturing tolerances are far better than standard requirements, then these tolerances shall be notified
and included in the data sheet.
Winding Temperature, Oil Temperature and Hot Spot Temperature shall be design as per as per IEC
Standards at design temperature of +55°C Without shed.
Contractor shall design the transformers for the project lifetime. Minimum Insulation, clearances and
creepage distance for step-up Power Transformer shall comply with IEC standards and requirements taking
into account site conditions.
23.2 Spare Parts, Special Tools
The Contractor will include:
 Five (5) Years OEM recommended Spare Parts.

 25 Years OEM recommended Spare Parts.
 One (1) set of special tools and tackles, which manufacturer/supplier deems necessary for the
transformer erection and maintenance.
The list shall include the quantities, the replacement frequency and the delivery time. This recommendation
shall be in accordance with the operation and maintenance manual and shall comply with availability
requirements, if applicable.
Materials consumed during erection, testing and commissioning will not be considered as spare parts and
shall be supply as per contract along with main equipment. Any spare parts utilized before final acceptance
of the equipment needs to be procure and supply by manufacturer/supplier without any price implication
being incur on client/end user.
Spare parts shall be properly marked and packed to ensure appropriate protection from loss or damage
during shipment and storage. Recommended storage procedure shall be furnished by manufacturer/supplier.
23.3 Temperature Rise
Depending upon maximum site conditions (temperature and altitude), the service conditions and the cooling
method, the maximum temperature rises allowed at full load shall be as indicated in SECStandards
Manufacturer/Supplier shall provide transformer rated power vs. ambient temperature diagrams including
curves for permanent and maximum allowable hot spot temperatures according to IEC 60076-2 and 7. Hot
spot temperatures shall account for the effect of thermally upgraded paper as and when required.
Transformer rated power curve shall include the effect of the bushing whether internal or external.
23.4 Overloading Of the Transformer
Manufacturer/supplier shall provide the maximum 110% overload capabilities of transformers without
affecting transformer design life. Bushings, tap changers and other current carrying devices shall withstand
maximum overload capabilities. Transformer capability curves for the complete range of ambient
temperatures (extreme conditions) shall be furnish during detailed engineering.
23.5 Short-Circuit Withstand Capability
For any tap positions, the step-up transformer shall be able to withstand the thermal and mechanical effects
of external short-circuits without damaging the equipment as mentioned in SECStandards Detailed lists of
certified short-circuit test data on step-up transformer with similar core and coil design shall be submitted as
part of design review.
23.6 Parallel Operation
No parallel operation has been envisaged.
23.7 Design And Construction Requirements
Manufacturer/supplier shall ensure that materials utilized shall be new, without deterioration and of good
quality.
The magnetic core shall be form by packages of cold oriented grain laminated sheets, reduced losses and
magnetizing current. Manufacturer/supplier found OEM’s design are better then, have the liberty to propose
accordingly.
Transformer base plate shall be able to withstand Seismic effect by providing appropriate seismic rated
anchor. Base plate shall be designed to permit skidding or rolling in directions parallel to centrelines of the
transformer.
The skids shall extend to the edge of the tank and beyond, where necessary, to give the transformer a suitable
tipping angle when completely assembled.
Primary and secondary Windings shall be independent of each other and shall be made of electrolytic high
conductivity insulated with pure cellulose tale. Magnetic flows must be uniformly distributed across the
Windings. Windings shall be able to withstand the required short-circuit dynamic stress with the tap changer
in the worst position.
The first turns of the Windings as well as the tap changer outputs, if required, shall have proper insulation
sufficient to withstand shocking oscillation/waves.
The Windings shall be designed to withstand the effects of short-circuits all over the tapping range.
The Contractor may use thermally upgraded paper in order to enhance transformers lifetime. This shall be
mentioned in the offer.
Transformer bushings shall be design and construct in accordance with SEC Standards, IEC 60137 and IEC
61463 duly rated to the maximum short circuit current, available or as specified. Bushings with stud or plug
type shall be provided on top of tank cover for each bushing, as and when required for frequency response
analysis testing.
The tank is in steel. The use of case iron is prohibited. The transformers must be suitable designed to prevent
movement of the active part, both during operation and transportation/handling. The tank, valves and all
joints must be perfectly air, water and oil tight until the maximum operating temperature.
The tank and its equipment, the tank cover and the oil conservator shall be designed to withstand, without
permanent deformation, the full vacuum and over pressure equal to twice the top height of transformer.
Transformer cover and tank shall be designed such accumulation of water, or the formation of gas pockets
can be prevented. The inner side of the tank cover shall be designed to collect and direct gases to Buchholz
relay.
Earthing terminals shall be provided close to each corner of the tank for transformer earthing. All metal parts
shall be bonded to the tank by earthing straps.
Contractor shall clearly mention the corrosion protection applied to aluminium and aluminium alloy parts.
Interior portion of the transformer tank shall be treated with specific paint that resistant to oil (hot).
Radiators shall be attached to the main tank through isolating valves, set of flanged valves will be included
for the future purpose, if required.
The tank shall be equipped with all required accessories for installation and handling such as:
1. Lifting Eyes
2. Pulling Eyes
3. Jacking Pads
4. Rollers/Pads (If Applicable)
Transformer tank shall be capable of complete evacuation up to full vacuum without any deformation.
Manufacturer/supplier shall design oil system in such manner that alarms pertaining to Oil shall not be
initiated at same time towards peak transformer loading, Maximum site temperature, maximum solar
condition and zero Wind speed. OEM’s design can be considered upon successful justification.
Each transformer shall be equipped with a containment bund capable of holding the entire transformer oil
content.
All transformer valves are preferred to be accessible from ground level at front of rear side of transformer as
per manufacturer design.
Manufacturer/Supplier shall perform and demonstrate compatibility between insulating liquid used and
transformer gaskets, seals, paint, and other non-metallic components.
Mineral oils shall be in accordance with SECStandards Oil sampling units shall be provided at ground level.
Transformer must be certified and labelling thereby containing no such detectable level of poly chlorinated
biphenyl (PCB).
Supplier shall guarantee that the transformer oil will prevent corrosive Sulphur formation. A dissolved
combustible gases oil analysis test shall be performed on the transformer to establish the baseline condition.
Contractor shall demonstrate compatibility between insulating liquid used and transformer gaskets, seals,
paint and other non-metallic components.
Transformer shall be designed for ONAN/ONAF operation.
Cooling system shall be formed by two (2) cooling groups; power supply of each group shall be equipped
with independent breaker and contactor. The cooling system sizing shall provide for a sufficient level of
redundancy by taking into account at least the failure of one fan.
External surfaces of cooling fans shall be Hot dip galvanized and painted.
Control circuit of cooling fans equipment shall be provided with manual and automatic control. There shall
be a local and remote alarm signal for failure in a cooling system group. All breaker (incoming, groups, fans
etc.) shall have contacts for remote signalling.
Automatic control of the start-up and shutdown of the cooling groups shall be done by means of the thermal
image device, depending on the temperature of the Windings.
As backup of the thermal image device, automatic start-up and shutdown control of the fans shall be
provided by means of the thermometer for the top oil of the tank.
23.8 On-Load Tap Changers (OLTC)
The HV Windings are equipped on neutral side with an on-load tap-changer. The OLTC shall comply with
SECStandards, IEC 60214-1, and IEC 60214-2. It shall be sized for the full power of the transformer and
shall be able to support overloads.
Country of
No. Description Model Make Quantity
Origin
Vacuum Switching Type
1 MR Germany As per SLD
On-Load Tap Changer (OLTC)
Automatic Voltage Regulator
2 TAPCON MR Germany As per SLD
(AVR) Relay
On load tap changer shall be Vacuum Switching Type.
Warning signs and operating procedures shall be visible to operators working on tap changers. All tap
positions shall be properly and clearly indicated in local mode with operations counter and in remote mode
via electrical contacts.
On-load tap changers Diverter switch will be housed in separate tank and tap selector will be housed in the
main tank.
Electrical and Mechanical Safety blocking devices shall be provided to prevent overrunning the end position.
On load tap changers shall be operated by a step-by-step motor drive unit mounted on the outside of main
tank. Tap change operation shall be initiated by one single control impulse from the local or remote control
and automatically accomplished.
On Load Tap Changers shall have a two-position selector switch “Local-Remote”. Remote Control shall be
through Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) relay or DCS. Manual operation shall be possible locally
when the motor drive unit is unavailable. In the Local Position, it must prevent remote actuation of the on-
load tap changer.
The AVR (MR TAPCON) shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor in the Substation building.
Driving motor mechanism shall be powered from the power supply of the control cubicle. Power supply to
driving motor shall be protected by 3-pole circuit breaker.
The On Load Tap Changer control/motor drive unit cabinet, fixed on the tank, shall be equipped with an
adjustable thermostat, and associated heating resistance which shall be MR, Make with Country of Origin as
Germany.
The Contractor shall at least provide for the following signals but not limited to (Decided during detailed
engineering):
 Local/remote mode
 On Load Tap Changer Protective relay alarms
 Tap changing command (increase/decrease)
 Operating position of the on-load tap-changer (current tap number)
 Motor-drive and On Load Tap Changer alarms and fault status
23.9 Current Transformers
Current transformer (CT) shall be designed in accordance with IEC 61869-2, both rated thermally and
mechanically to fit its associated bushing in order to withstand short circuit current of the system without
damage. CTs shall be housed inside the main tank (Internally).
The type and number of CT shall be defined by the Contractor in accordance with the measuring and
protection scheme that he has defined.
Terminals of the transformer secondary circuit shall be of short-circuiting type. The HV Windings are
equipped on neutral side with an on-load tap-changer. The OLTC shall comply with SEC Standards, IEC
60214-1 and IEC 60214-2. It shall be sized for the full power of the transformer and shall be able to support
overloads.
23.10 Control Cubicle (Marshalling Kiosk)
Local control cubicle shall be furnished for housing the control equipment and the auxiliary power supply
equipment. All electrical components inside the local control cubicle shall be rated with maximum internal
temperature inside cubicle considering site ambient temperature.
Control, Alarm and signalling devices shall be mounted on a cabinet attached to the transformer with
minimum IP55 protection class.
Proper lighting and anti-condensation heaters controlled by thermostat with over-riding manual control shall
be provided inside the cubicle. Local control cubicle shall have anti-vibration mountings.
At the bottom of Cubicle/panel, manufacturer shall have a removable lid with sets of boreholes to introduce
the cables, equipped single compression cable glands. Power supply as required for transformer systems and
components shall be derived from this cabinet.
23.11 Protection And Monitoring Devices
The transformers shall be at least equipped with the following devices:
 A Buchholz relay between the oil conservator and the tank:
 Buchholz shall have alarm and trip contacts
 Buchholz relay shall comply with IEC 50216-2 and IEC 50216-3
 An OLTC protective relay (like MR RS 2001 or equivalent).
 Pressure relief devices with contacts installed on the tank (number of devices to be defined
according to transformer design studies).
 A dial thermometer for Winding Temperature by thermal image (with contacts and including
current transformer),
 A dial thermometer for oil temperature monitoring and fan control (with contacts).
 The manufacturer shall provide for a sufficient number of thermometer pockets on the tank
cover for temperature probes (including reserve). The number of probes shall comply with the
requirements of article 7.4.1 of IEC 60076-2 or SECStandards.
23.12 Conservators
Conservators shall be removable for transport purposes and be provided with:
 Buchholz relays with alarm and trip contacts.

 Level indicator.
 Filling hole with valve.
 Combined filter and drain valve.
 Detachable end plate.
 Lockable isolating valve.
 Regenerative type dehydrating breather.
 Sump shall be provided to prevent sludge and moisture from being drawn into transformer.
 Electrical connections shall not be obstructed by the position of the conservator.
 Conservators shall be provided with either a prismatic or magnetic liquid level indicator,
readable from ground level.
 Where specified on the data sheet a conservator that prevents contact between the oil in the
transformer tank and the ambient air shall be used, e.g., either the membrane type or multi-
compartment type of split conservator.
23.13 Transformer Tanks and Radiators:
 Transformer tanks and radiators shall be constructed of steel.

 Radiators and corrugated tanks shall be hot dip galvanised
 Each transformer shall be fitted with one filling/filter connection valve near the top of the
tank and one drain/filter valve near the bottom of the tank.
 Transformer tanks shall be provided with a minimum one liquid sampling valve for each
independent fluid compartment with unrestricted access (e.g., for DGA measurements).
23.14 Tank Filling, Draining and Oil Sampling
The transformers must be equipped at least with:
 A drain valve for the oil conservator of main tank with standard connection interface and
closure,
 A drain valve for the oil conservator of OLTC with standard connection interface and closure,
 Two valves for oil treatment placed respectively on the top and on the bottom of the tank
(diagonally) with suitable normalized connections. The lower valve shall allow for almost
total draining of tank oil.
 On the lowest part of the tank, a small orifice with screw cap for total draining of tank oil,
 The tank shall be equipped with two oil sampling valves (top and bottom of the tank). They
can be included in the valves for oil treatment,
 An oil and gas sampling valve for Buchholz relay accessible from man height,
 All valves shall be clearly indicated for open and closed positions with clear visibility from
floor for inspection.
23.15 Auxiliary Wiring
Contractor must provide all electrical cables between equipment, local control cubicles, OTI, WTI, terminal
boxes etc. with suitable mechanical protection (with conduit etc.).
Wiring in the terminal boxes shall be properly numbered with ease in identification for external wiring
purpose.
Wiring shall flame retardant (IEC 60332-3-24) and halogen free (IEC 60754-1) in full conformance with
IEC standard requirements.
All incoming and outgoing cables shall be carried out as per manufacturer design. All internal wiring shall
terminate on one side of terminal blocks, leaving the other side for purchaser’s extern wiring connections
which shall be routed in such a way to ease in removal of devices or O&M without affecting the internal
wiring.
Cable joints in internal wiring up to the terminal points will not be admitted and only one cable will be
connected to each terminal point.
Instrumentation, communication, control and power wiring shall be routed separately. Separation shall be
sufficient enough to prevent crosstalk and electrical interference on instrumentation and control circuits.
Cables for instrument transformers shall be screened or as per manufacturer recommendation.
Earthing connections made for movable parts such as doors, shall be made with extra flexible single core
conductor. 20% Spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal block.
23.16 Hardwired Signals
Following hardwired signals, minimum to be provided for monitoring and control, both IPP substation
control building and from the DCS/SCADA system but not limited to:
 Operation on “Automatic”
 Operation on “Manual”
 Fans in Operation
 Fan Group 1 unavailable
 Fan Group 2 unavailable
 Power Supply
 Winding Temperature
 Oil Temperature
In addition to above, the output signals (including alarm and trip signals) from the devices with Oil Level
indicators, thermal image, oil temperature indicators, top oil thermostat, Buchholz relay, contacts of the
pressure relief valve, and the secondary Winding of the current transformers shall be wired to terminal
blocks located in the control cubicle/panel. Further, desired signals shall be decided during detailed
engineering stage.
23.17 Finish, Painting and Protection
The transformers shall be protected by a multilayer paint coating ensuring effective and durable protection in
the conditions of service (including overload) and in accordance with respective region climatic conditions.
Radiators should be hot-galvanized and receive paint finish.
Bolts and screws must be made of durable materials in nature or as a result of treatment.
Contractor shall provide a painting procedure during detailed engineering stage. Any paint which doesn’t
confirm to health and safety requirement or without proven experience on similar application shall be
discarded.
23.18 Labelling And Marking
Step-Up Transformers shall have two (2) stainless steel name plates including at least the data specified in
IEC and SEC Standards.
Technical data shall be engraved in the name plate in such a manner that it’s readable even if surface is
discoloured or unmarked. Taps and terminals shall be clearly and permanently labelled in accordance with
IEC 60616.
All transformers equipment shall be labelled in accordance with drawings.
All push buttons, levers, rotation directions for operating handles and cooling fans shall be clearly marked in
English.
All wiring shall be provided with wire markers at both and wiring connections at all terminal blocks, with
numbered or lettered permanent type markers in accordance with manufacturer/supplier drawings.
23.19 Tests
Complete factory and site tests shall be carried out by manufacturer’s qualified personnel, to guarantee the
correct performance of the tests, and the results of such tests shall be recorded in the relevant test protocols.
Step-up Power Transformer shall be subjected to tests in accordance with SEC Standards. These shall
include the tests required in data sheets.
It shall be at the Company’s decision to depute representative(s) for attending stage inspection and various
tests during actual manufacture and assembly of transformer(s) to ensure quality of product and material
being used.
Test charges shall be part of cost of the equipment. Transformer type should have short circuit certificate
from a reputed laboratory.
Stage Inspection
 Prior to conducting the stage inspection, the following documents shall be given to
inspection officer(s) for verification:
 Invoice of Suppliers
 Mill’s Test Certificate
 Packing Lists
 Bill of lading
 Bill of entry certificate by custom
 Description of material, electrical analysis, and physical inspection certificate for surface
defects, thickness and width of the material shall also be made available.
Company’s representative might carry out stage inspection of the transformers during
manufacturing/assembly stage. The stage inspection will particularly include following tests/check besides
the general routine tests to be conducted during manufacturing stages as per manufacturer’s standard
practice, including:
 Physical Inspection/Checking of Winding insulating material, core material and other

accessories/fitting of transformer.
 Measurement of core area, cross sectional area of Winding(s), number of turns in each
Winding.
 Verification of HV and MV Coils, conductor size, I.D., O.D., Axial length, weight,
insulation covering etc.
 Measurement of thickness of tank plates (Bottom and sides) and to conduct pressure &
vacuum tests as per CBIP manual for transformer tests to ensure the adequate strength of
tank plates.
 Sample testing of core material for checking specific loss, magnetization characteristic (i.e.,
B.H. Curve plot) and thickness.
 Visual and dimensional check during assembly stage of core.
 High Voltage test (2kV, 60Hz for one minute) between all core bolts if provided and agreed
to frame bars/fish plates etc. and ferromagnetic steel of core.
23.20 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)
Factory Acceptance Test will be conducted in the presence of Company representatives before delivery of
the equipment. The transformers will be tested according to SEC Standards. The Contractor shall provide a
detailed program of the tests at least two months in advance. The tests report shall be transmitted at the latest
two weeks after the completion of the tests.
If a specific configuration of the transformers is required to perform the tests (e.g., adding oil/air bushings),
this shall be described in the test procedure. The impact on measurement shall be clearly assessed during the
tests and stated in tests reports. Any additional measurement required for this assessment shall be performed.
23.21 Type tests:
Minimum one transformer shall be subjected to below mentioned type tests:
 Temperature Rise type test (according to IEC 60076-2)

 Determination of sound level (IEC 60076-10) for each method of cooling for which a
guaranteed sound level is specified.
 Measurement of the power taken by the fan and liquid pump motors.
23.22 Routine tests:
Each completed step-up transformer shall be subjected to below mentioned routine tests:
 Measurement of Winding resistance,

 Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement.
 Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load loss.
 Measurement of no-load loss and current at 90 %, 100% and 110 % of rated voltage
 Full wave lightning impulse test for the live terminals (li)
 Applied voltage test (AV)
 Induced voltage test with pd measurement (IVPD)
 Line terminal ac withstand voltage test (LTAC)
 Auxiliary wiring insulation test (aux w)
 Tests on on-load tap-changers
 Leak testing with pressure for liquid immersed transformers (tightness test
 Check of the ratio and polarity of built-in current transformers.
 Determination of capacitances Winding-to-earth and between Windings.
 Measurement of DC Insulation resistance between each Winding to earth and between
Windings.
 Measurement of dissipation factor (tan δ) of the insulation system capacitances.
 Measurement of dissolved gases in dielectric liquid from each separate oil compartment
except diverter switch compartment
23.23 Special tests
Each completed step-up transformer shall be subjected to below mentioned Special tests:
 SFRA tests (test configuration shall be compatible with the repetition of the same test on-
site)
 Zero sequence impedance measurement
23.24 Tests Reports
After all tests have been completed, certified copies of each test report shall be furnished. Each report shall
supply the following information:
 Complete identification data including serial number of the transformer.

 Method of application, where applied duration and interpretation of results for each test.
 Test actual conditions and measurements.
 Guaranteed values and applicable test tolerance
23.25 Transportation
During transport up to installation on foundations, transformers will be equipped with a shock recorder. The
Contractor shall transmit to the Company the records and the analysis report. The Contractor shall take all
the necessary measures if the measurements indicate a risk of internal damage (measured acceleration greater
than the maximum acceleration used for design).
This includes additional onsite tests like SFRA. The analysis of the results is the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Company shall receive a copy of test reports if applicable.
If transformers are not transported filled with oil, the oil must be replaced with nitrogen or dry air. Gas
pressure must be checked on arrival on site.
23.26 Oil Treatment
The Contractor shall provide for the oil treatment required on site (including temporary power supply as far
as required).
23.27 33/110kV Power Transformer Technical Data Sheet
ITEM DESCRIPTION U.M. REQUIREMENT VENDOR Rev

DATA
A1 GENERAL DATA
A1 1 Item: -
A1 2 Quantity No. As per SLD
A1 3 Standards to Comply IEC 60076 Standards
(All Series)
B1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
B1 1 Design ambient temperature (MAX /MIN) °C +55(Without shed) / 0
B1 2 Altitude M ≤1000
B1 3 Relative average humidity (Average / % 65/85
Maximum)
B1 4 Wind velocity km/h 43
B1 5 Seismic zone factor MSKscale -64 - As per Seismic regulation
of KSA as per MSK scale -
64
B1 6 Site environment - Class III (Heavy): Areas
with a high industry a
population Density where
pollution is present every
day
B1 7 Location - Outdoor
C1 NETWORK PARTICULARS
C1 1 Rated high voltage with % variation / 110± 10% / 3 phases

kV
phases
C1 2 Rated supply frequency with % variation Hz 60 ± 3%
C1 3 Highest system high voltage kV 145
C1 4 Calculated Fault level symmetrical 40
(Network 3ph short circuit power) on high kA See Note (2)
voltage side
C1 5 Calculated Single phase to ground short 40
circuit (Network short circuit power) on kA See Note (2)
high voltage side
C1 6 Required fault withstand duration (3 sec /
s 1 sec
2 sec / 1 sec)
7 Rated voltage, kV
HV kV 110
LV 33
C1 8 Maximum operating voltage, kV
HV kV 145
LV 36
C1 9 System high voltage end Neutral Solidly earthed
grounding: (solid / resistance earthed / -
unearthed)
C1 10 System low voltage end Neutral
Earthing Transformer with
grounding: (solid / resistance earthed / -
NER
unearthed)
C1 11 Service - Power transformer-Step Up
D1 ELECTRICAL DESIGN DATA

Rated power ONAN/ONAF
D1 1 ONAN rating must be atleast 75% of MVA
Rated Power
As per SLD@ +55°C
D1 2 For PV MVA
without shed
D1 3 For BESS MVA Not Applicable
D1 4 Duty - Continuous
D1 5 Single phase / three phase unit Three phases
D1 6 Voltage Ratio No load at principal tap kV 33/110
D1 7 Current Ratio at principal tap A (*) / (*)
No load current at 100% voltage and
D1 8 A (*)
110% voltage
D1 9 Exciting Current at % primary voltage % (*)
(90% /100% / 110%)
D1 10 Vector Group - YNd1d1 or Ynd11d11
Design short circuit withstand capacity
D1 11 kA (40) – 1s
(1s/3s)
Impedance voltage at rated current,
D1 12 nominal voltage and 75°C HV-LV, % 19
Tolerance as per SEC standard
HV-LV impedance voltage at rated
D1 13 current, highest transformer ratio, 75°C % Approx. 18
(according to SEC deviation)
HV-LV impedance voltage at rated
D1 14 current, lowest transformer ratio, 75°C % Approx. 17
(according to SEC deviation)
Zero sequence impedance per phase
D1 15 % Approx. 19
(primary/secondary)
Equivalent Circuit Voltages Resistance at
D1 16 % (*)
principal tap
Equivalent Circuit Voltages Reactance at
D1 17 % (*)
principal tap
D1 18 Highest system voltage for high HV kV
voltage winding (primary)
D1 19 HV-N kV
D1 20 Power frequency withstand HV kV
voltage for high voltage
D1 21 winding (primary) HV-N kV
D1 22 Lightning impulse withstand HV kV
voltage for high voltage
D1 23 winding (primary) (BIL) HV-N kV
Highest system voltage for low
D1 24 LV kV
voltage winding (secondary)
Lightning impulse withstand
D1 25 voltage for low voltage winding LV kV
(BIL) (secondary)
D1 26 Core construction (core type / shell type) - Core type
- low loss cold rolled grain
D1 27 Core material
oriented
D1 28 Core plate thickness - Maximum 0.3 mm
D1 29 Insulation of core laminations - (*)
D1 30 Insulation of core clamping plates - (*)
D1 31 Winding conductor material - Copper
Type of high voltage winding -
D1 32 Interleaved
(Interleaved / helical)
Type of low voltages winding (Interleaved -
D1 33 Helical
/ helical)
High voltage winding insulation type -
D1 34 Graded
(Graded / Uniform)
Low voltage windings insulation type
D1 35 - Uniform
(Graded / Uniform)
D1 36 Insulation class - A
D1 37 Insulation material (HV / LV / Tapings) - (*)
Maximum Temperature rise above site
D1 38 ambient condition, (Maximum Ambient K Maximum 55 (Class A)
50 °C) (winding by resistance / top oil)
Maximum Average winding Temperature
D1 39 K Maximum 60 (Class A)
rise (Maximum Ambient 45.8 °C)
Maximum hot spot temperature when
D1 40 loaded as per IEC 60076-7 at site K Maximum 72.2
condition
Resistance of Winding Per Phase @ 75°C
D1 41 Ω (*)
high voltage winding / low voltage
winding / tertiary winding
D1 42 Flux Density at rated voltage (core/yoke) T 1.60
Current Density at full load high voltage
D1 43 A/mm2 3 A/mm2
winding / low voltage winding
Cross section area of winding high voltage
D1 44 mm2 (*)
winding / low voltage winding
Number of turns in windings per phase.
D1 45 High voltage winding / low voltage No. (*)
winding
Mean length of winding per phase. High
D1 46 m (*)
voltage winding / low voltage winding
D1 47 Thermal time constant Heating / Cooling h (*)
Exciting Current at % high voltage end
D1 48 - (*)
(90% / 100% / 110%)
Magnetizing inrush current as percentage
D1 49 A (*)
of full load current under worst condition
D1 50 Transformer overload capacity for 2 hours - Yes
E1 LOSSES, REGULATION, EFFICIENY AND POWER FACTOR

No-load losses at rated frequency and
E1 1 voltage (principal tapping 130MVA): kW (*)– guaranteed value
(guaranteed value)
Load losses (in copper) corrected to the
E1 2 reference temperature of 75 °C at the kW (*)– guaranteed value
principal tap position: (guaranteed value)
Total losses at rated: voltage, frequency
E1 3 and load in principle tapping without kW (*)– guaranteed value
losses in accessories
Losses in Accessories (ventilators, heaters
E1 4 etc.) at rated load and spare cooler out of kW (*)– guaranteed value
operation
F1 MECHANICAL DATA
F1 1 Type Of Transformer - Oil Immersed
F1 2 Tank design pressure kPA (*)
F1 3 Tank Thickness base / wall / cover mm (*)
F1 4 Material of gaskets for tank bolted joints - (*)
F1 5 Noise level at 1 m dBA 80Max
Details to be
provided by
Class: I (According to IEC
supplier
F1 6 Oil type - 60296)
according to the
Type and Manufacture: (*)
requirement in
the markup
F1 7 Oil preservation system (Conservator
- Conservator diaphragm type
diaphragm type / sealed tank type)
F1 8 Painting Type - Epoxy type
F1 9 Colour shade - Local SEC standard
F1 10 Tank Bladder Rupture Alarm - YES
F1 11 IP rating - IP 55
G1 COOLING SYSTEM
G1 1 Cooling type (ONAN/ONAF/OFAF) - ONAN/ONAF
G1 2 Radiator manufacturer - (*)
G1 3 Radiator material - (*)
G1 4 Radiator thickness mm (*)
G1 5 Radiator mounting type - (*)
G1 The radiators may be mounted separate
6 from the tank or mounted on the - YES
transformer tank.
G1 7 Valve material / make - (*)
G1 8 Number of fans (W + S) No. (*)
G1 9 Fan manufacturer / model - (*)
G1 10 Free air flow 3
m /h (*)
G1 11 Fan type single speed / dual speed - (*)
G1 12 Fan speed r/min (*)
G1 13 Fan Mounting - (*)
G1 Protection mesh (painted / hot dip
14 - (*)
galvanized)
G1 15 Blade material - (*)
G1 16 Fan motor rating kW (*)
G1 17 Fan motor enclosure - (*)
G1 18 Ingress protection of fan motor enclosure - (*)
G1 Fan motor insulation class / motor design
19 - (*)
temperature rise limit
G1 20 Fan motor efficiency class (IE1 / IE2 / IE3) - (*)
G1 No./ 3Ph/1Ph
21 Motor Supply phases / voltage / frequency
V / Hz 380/220, 60 Hz
G1 22 Oil pump quantity (W + S) No. N.A.
G1 23 Pump manufacturer / model - N.A.
G1 24 Oil flow L/h N.A.
G1 25 Pump type - N.A.
G1 26 Pump speed - N.A.
G1 27 Pump mounting - N.A.
G1 28 Enclosure ingress protection - N.A.
G1 29 Pump motor rating kW N.A.
G1 Pump motor insulation class / motor
30 - N.A.
design temperature rise limit
G1 Pump motor efficiency class (IE1 / IE2 /
31 - N.A.
IE3)
G1 32 Pump Motor Supply phases / voltage / No. / V
N.A.
frequency / Hz
CONNECTION DETAILS
H1
H1 1 HV and LV Terminal orientation (90
- 180
degree / 180 degree)
H1 2 Primary connection details overhead line /
- Conductor
cable / bus duct (HV Side)
H1 3 Secondary connection details overhead
- Cable
line / cable / bus duct (LV Side)
H1 4 Primary bus connection flange dimensions - (*)
H1 5 Secondary bus connection flange
- NA
dimensions
H1 6 Primary overhead conductor size - N.A.
H1 7 Secondary overhead conductor size - N.A.
H1 HV connection cable quantity, type and (*) - Direct connection
size termination from 110kV
8 -
GIB or through 110kV
ACSR conductor
H1 9 HV Cable entry - NA
H1 10 HV Neutral grounding with cable / earth
- Copper Cable
bar
H1 11 HV Neutral grounding conductor size - Refer note 2
H1 12 LV connection cable quantity, type and
- Will be specified later
size
H1 13 LV Neutral grounding with cable / earth
- NA
bar
H1 14 LV Neutral grounding conductor size - Will be specified later
H1 15 LV Cable connection chamber (Air Air insulated/filled
insulated / compound filled) connection box, busbar
-
designed for connection of
10 cable per phase
H1 16 LV Cable entry Bottom with non-magnetic
-
gland plate
H1 17 Phase – phase clearance mm according to IEC60076-3
H1 18 Phase – neutral clearance mm according to IEC60076-3
H1 19 Phase – earth clearance mm according to IEC60076-3
I1 BUSHINGS
I1 1 Manufacturer - (*)
I1 2 HV bushing voltage class and type - 145/OIP
I1 3 LV bushing voltage class and type - 36/Porcelain
I1 4 Neutral bushing voltage class and type - 52/OIP
I1 5 Current rating of HV bushing A (*)
I1 6 Current rating of LV bushing A (*)
I1 7 Current rating of neutral bushing A (*)
I1 1 minute power frequency withstand
8 kV (*)
voltage HV bushing
9 kV (*)
voltage LV bushing
10 kV (*)
voltage neutral bushing
I1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage HV
11 kV (*)
bushing
I1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage LV
12 kV (*)
bushing
I1 Lightning impulse withstand voltage
13 kV (*)
neutral bushing
I1 Creepage distance HV bushing-Class 3-
14 mm (*)
25mm/KV
I1 Creepage distance LV bushing-Class 3-
15 mm (*)
25mm/KV
I1 Creepage distance neutral bushing-Class
16 mm (*)
3-25mm/KV
I1 17 Bushing with / without Oil level gauge - (*)
I1 Bushing arcing horn (required / not
18 - (*)
required)
J1 BUSHING CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (As per Protection and Metering)
J1 1 High voltage side protection CT quantity No. (*)
J1 2 High voltage side protection CT ratio A/A (*)
J1 3 High voltage side protection rated burden VA (*)
J1 High voltage side protection CT rated
4 - (*)
accuracy class and limit factor
J1 5 High voltage side metering CT quantity No. (*)
J1 6 High voltage side metering CT ratio A/A (*)
J1 7 High voltage side metering rated burden VA (*)
J1 High voltage side metering CT rated
8 - (*)
J1 9 Low voltage side protection CT quantity No. (*)
J1 10 Low voltage side protection CT ratio A/A (*)
J1 11 Low voltage side protection rated burden VA (*)
J1 Low voltage side protection CT rated
12 - (*)
J1 13 Low voltage side metering CT quantity No. (*)
J1 14 Low voltage side metering CT ratio A/A (*)
J1 15 Low voltage side metering rated burden VA (*)
J1 Low voltage side metering CT rated
16 - (*)
J1 17 HV Neutral side protection CT quantity No. (*)
J1 18 HV Neutral side protection CT ratio A/A (*)
J1 19 HV Neutral side protection rated burden VA (*)
J1 HV Neutral side protection CT rated
20 accuracy class and limit factor - (*)
J1 21 LV Neutral side protection CT quantity No. (*)

J1 22 LV Neutral side protection CT ratio A/A (*)
J1 23 LV Neutral side protection rated burden VA (*)
J1 LV Neutral side protection CT rated
24 - (*)
J1 Y Single Phase CT to measure
25 Transformer winding temperature - (*)
provided by Supplier
K1 TAP CHANGER
K1 1 Tap Changer Type (On load / Off circuit) - On load
K1 2 Model / Manufacturer - MR TAPCON
K1 3 Taps located on Low voltage winding
- WYE side of HV winding
end / High voltage winding end
K1 +/- 10 x1.25%
4 Tap range and steps - (-12.5% To +12.5%),
21 steps
K1 5 Tap step - 1.25%
K1 6 Rated voltage of on load Tap Changer. kV (*)
K1 1.2 times of highest
7 Rated current of on load Tap Changer. kA
transformer winding current
K1 Short circuit withstand current and
8 kA / s (*) / 1s
duration
K1 9 Bidirectional power flow (Yes / No) - Yes
K1 Automatic voltage control in case of on
10 - Yes
load tap changer (Yes / No)
K1 Local / remote operation in case of on load
11 - Yes
tap changer
K1 Type, Rating and efficiency class of on
12 - (*)
load tap changer motor.
K1 Diverter switches of all on load tap
13 changers shall be located in a separate - Yes
tank
K1 Power frequency withstand test voltage as
14 AC140
per IEC 60214/SEC
K1 Between first and last contacts of the
a) - (*)
selector switch
K1 Between any two adjacent contacts of the
b) - (*)
selector switch
K1 c) Between open divertor switch contacts - (*)
K1 15 Tap Changer Surge Relay - Yes
L1 PANELS
L1 Marshalling panel / Transformer Cooling

1 control panel / Remote Control Tap - Yes / Yes / Yes
Changer (RCTC/AVR) panel
L1 2 AVR Manufacturer Type MR
L1 3 Marshalling panel (Integral / non integral) - Integral
L1 4 Outdoor panels - Yes (Marshalling)
L1 Yes (RTCC & Transformer
5 Indoor panels -
Cooling control panel)
L1 6 Indoor panel location - HV Substation
L1 7 Ingress protection for indoor panel - ≥IP42
L1 8 Ingress protection for outdoor panels - ≥ IP55
L1 9 Material of panel - CRCA sheet steel
L1 10 Panel thickness mm (*)
L1 11 Cable entry outdoor panel / indoor panel - Bottom / Bottom
L1 12 Mounting type indoor panel - Free standing floor mounted
L1 Marshalling panel wall
13 Mounting type Marshalling panel - mounted on transformer
tank
L1 As per manufacturers
14 Color and shade of indoor panels -
standard
L1 As per manufacturer’s
15 Color and shade of outdoor panels -
standard
L1 No. / V
RTCC panel one point power details.
16 / Hz / (*)
Phases / voltage / frequency / power rating
VA
L1 No. / V
Marshalling panel one point power details.
17 / Hz / (*)
Phases / voltage / frequency / power rating
VA
L1 Transformer cooling panel one point No. / V
3Ph/1Ph
18 power details. Phases / voltage / frequency / Hz /
380/220 V, 60 Hz
/ power rating VA
L1 RTCC panel & cooling panel to
19 transformer cable scope (By vendor / By - By Others
others)
L1 Marshalling panel and cooling panel to
20 transformer cable scope (By others / By - By VENDOR
vendor)
L1 Minimum cable sizes in package wiring
21 and conductor material. Power / CT circuit mm2 1.5 / 1.5 / 1.5
/ control cable
L1 Package cable type. (PVC / XLPE)
22 - XLPE / Armored
(Armored / Unarmoured)
L1 Panel control wiring type (PVC / XLPE),
23 -t PVC -FRLS
(FR / FRLS / LSZH)
M1 ACCESSORIES
M1 1 Rating and diagram plate of stainless steel - Yes
M1 2 Terminal marking plate - Yes
M1 3 Oil Temperature Indicator with two - Yes
contacts each for alarm & trip
M1 Silica Gel Breather with transparent clear
4 - Yes
glass enclosure
M1 High & low voltage Winding Temperature
5 Indicator with two contacts each for alarm - Yes
& trip and a 4-20mA signal
M1 6 Sampling valve - Yes
M1 Pressure Relief device with two trip
7 - Yes
contacts
M1 8 Thermometer pockets - Yes
M1 Conservator with drain valve and
9 - Yes
magnetic oil gauge and plane level gauge
M1 10 Conservator with / without air bladder - Yes (with)
M1 11 Air Release vent - Yes
M1 Buchholz relay for main tank with two
12 - Yes
alarm and two trip contacts
M1 Buchholz relay for OLTC with two trip
13 - Yes
contacts
M1 14 Top oil filter valve - Yes
M1 15 Bottom oil filter valve - Yes
M1 16 Inspection cover - Yes
M1 17 Drain Valve with plug - Yes
M1 18 Earthing Terminals - Yes
M1 19 Bus duct flange on HV / LV side - No
M1 20 Jacking Pads - Yes
M1 21 Lifting eyes - Yes
N1 WEIGHT AND OVERALL DIMENSIONS

N1 1 Total oil volume of transformer L (*)
N1 2 Oil volume of conservator L (*)
N1 3 Oil volume of tap changer L (*)
N1 4 Complete transformer weight without oil Ton (*)
N1 5 Complete transformer weight with oil Ton (*)
N1 6 Core Ton (*)
N1 7 Windings Ton (*)
N1 8 Total oil weight Ton (*)
N1 9 Untanking weight Ton (*)
N1 10 Weight of heaviest portion for transport Ton (*)
N1 11 Weight of largest portion for transport Ton (*)
N1 Overall dimensions of transformer [L-W-
12 m (*)
D]
N1 Shipping dimensions of heaviest part [L-
13 m (*)
W-D]
N1 Shipping dimensions of largest part [L-W-
14 m (*)
D]
O1 GENERAL NOTES
O1 1 (*) Data to be provided by Vendor in ‘Vendor data’ Column.
O1 2 Data will be confirmed during the technical bid evaluation stage
O1 3 The transformers shall be suitable for skid mounting
O1 4 All transformers shall be suitable for parallel operation
O1 5 Local Project Country Climatic conditions needs to be considered.
O1 6 Parameters of the CT`s core mentioned in clause J1:25 should be defined by the power transformer`s
manufacturer
24 Earthing cum Auxiliary Transformers
The EPC Contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission on site the earthing transformer, which
shall be used for providing a neutral point in the MV system given that the transformers in this system are
delta connection. Earthing transformer shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60076 (All Series).
33/0.4kV Oil filled earthing transformer, 60 Hz , whose design, manufacturing, construction, installation,
test, and commissioning of Earthing Transformer shall be in accordance with the latest codes and standards.
The technical data of the Earthing transformer shall be in accordance with the data sheet and Single Line
Diagram (SLD).
The equipment shall be designed for continuous duty at rated load and under the given climatic conditions.
Standard industrial high-performance systems shall be used. Components and equipment of same kind and
type shall be selected for equivalent functions.
24.1 Working Conditions
Basic data sheet for earthing transformer

Service Outdoor
Type of Service Continous
IP MK Cubicle/Cable Boxes IP55
Seismicity As per Local Conditions
Standards SEC and IEC 60076
Insulating Liquid Oil
Cooling Type ONAN
Frequency 60Hz
Power As per Load Calculations
Primary Voltage 33kV
Average Heating in Windings 50°C
Heating Oil in the Upper Layer 55°C
Warming hottest spot in the Windings 68°C
Secondary Voltage (kV) 0.4kV
Vector Group ZNyn11
Rated Short Time Withstand Current 40kA for 1 seconds as per SEC
Installation Outdoor
Altitude ≤1000 m
Pollution level (degree as per UL and IEC) Level III, 40mm/kV
Max. Design ambient temperature (typical year) +55⁰C outdoor without shed
Min. Design ambient temperature (typical year) -0 ⁰C
Two magnetic oil levels indicators, one for the transformer tank’s oil and one for the load tap changer. Both
indicators must have different free potential contacts for low level alarm.
Pressure release device with alarm and trip free potential contacts for transformer tank and load tap changer
tank.
Buchholz relay: with two floats with alarm and trip free of potential contacts. One for the transformer tank
and other for the load tap changer tank.
Contact thermometer for measuring the temperature of the transformer oil, with use for tripping and alarm
indication.
Current transformers shall be capable of mechanically and thermally withstanding the same over currents
and overload, for the same periods, as the associated Windings of the power transformer.
Moreover, they shall withstand all dielectric tests applied to the power transformer Windings and shall be in
position and in circuit during the power transformer voltage withstand and impulse tests.
Open circuits shall be avoided during testing of the transformer.
All current transformers shall be shorted and earthed in the factory and delivered to site in that condition.
The CT terminals should have provision for shortening links during testing.
The arrangement of protective current transformers associated with the earthing transformer Windings is
shown below:
 Two (2) three-phase earthing and auxiliary transformers 33/0.4 kV, hermetically sealed type
with off load tap changer, each of minimum 630 kVA (while the Contractor shall provide
substation and PV plant load calculation and properly size the actual rating and also to ensure
that the system accommodates the phase-to-neutral loads by providing a return path for current
to neutral), suitable for outdoor installation, provided with sunshade, shall be provided:
 two (2) CTs on neutral/ ground connection of zigzag winding
 one (1) CT on neutral/ ground connection of secondary winding
 two (2) set of three single phase tank mounted surge arresters for the secondary (33 kV) side.
Windings is shown below only for Bidder’s understanding and representative purpose. Whatsoever reason,
Bidder must not consider and construed, as FINAL selection from COMPANY.
Unless otherwise indicated in the corresponding paragraphs, the equipment and components to be
supplied must be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with all applicable International
Codes and Standards and local and national regulations, as indicated in the standard list below.
In the event of conflict between any of the codes and standards listed, the most stringent requirement shall
apply.
It shall be the Supplier’s responsibility to be, or to become, knowledgeable of the requirements of the codes
and standards set out below. Any changes or alterations to the equipment required for compliance with these
codes and standards shall be at the expense of the Supplier.
Should the Supplier wish to subcontract any of the work covered by this Specification, it is his responsibility
to ensure that his subcontractors are made fully aware of the relevant requirements of this Specification. The
Purchaser has the right of approval of proposed subcontractors.
24.2 Main Characteristics

The earthing shall be of the three-phase type with two Windings, mineral oil-immersed, for indoor or
outdoor installation, direct exposure to sun in case of outdoor solution and continuous operation, with the
characteristics defined in the data sheets and specification.
The transformers shall be capable of withstanding the thermal and dynamic effects caused by the external
short-circuit currents without damage when operating in any tapping position, in accordance with IEC
60076-5 and connection point requirements.
The transformers shall be capable of continuous operation at their rated power in any changer tap without
exceeding the specified temperature and temperature rises.
The transformers shall be designed for a useful life of at least 25 years, comprising long periods of
continuous operation over a range of ambient temperatures as indicated in this specification, not including
components that due to their nature have shorter replacement periods and are easily replaceable.
24.3 Magnetic Circuit and Windings
The core shall be constructed from laminations of cold rolled, grain-oriented sheet steel.
The magnetic core and the core clamping structure are to be insulated from each other and from the tank and
shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2500 V DC for one minute between the core and clamping
structure, core to tank and clamping structure to tank.
Grounding leads from the frame and core are to be brought out through separate bushings to facilitate testing
at site.
The bushings and links shall be protected by providing suitable enclosure. Permanent, Engraved
Identification plates shall be provided for the bushings.
24.4 Transformer Tank
The tank shall be made of stiffened welded steel with suitable lifting lugs to hold the weight of transformer
during shifting and four jacking pads.
The transformer tank and other oil filled compartments including radiators and conservator shall be capable
of withstanding full vacuum and over pressure conditions.
Bolted openings are required for Inspection of internal assembly. Any bushing should be removable without
opening the tank cover.
Provision of Access shall be provided at the top of the transformer. Suitable provisions shall be provided for
connection to local earthing.
24.5 Fittings & Accessories
The following accessories shall be provided as minimum:
Conservator tank with removable end cover complete with lifting lugs, dial type and prismatic type oil level
indicators marked with minimum oil level and dehydrating breather.
A breather shall be mounted at an accessible height and environment-friendly type gel used shall be with
distinct colour change from dry to wet condition.
Radiators connected to tank through flanged joints in order to enable cooling.
Auto Sealing type PRD with normally open type Contact (which needs to be protected against ingress of
water & dust in operational condition)
Dial type temperature indicators for indicating the top oil temperature and Winding hot spot temperature (LV
Winding).
Gas and oil-actuated relay (Buchholz relay) having alarm contacts.
A rating plate & connection diagram plate bearing the data specified in IEC 60076 – 1
A plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release cocks or plugs
Separate Rating plate showing the details of approved characteristics of Neutral CT used for protection
purpose.
Current transformer for protection in the HV & LV Neutral shall be supplied, installed and all necessary
wiring to terminal blocks in the transformer marshalling kiosk to be done.
24.6 Marshalling Kiosk (MK)
Wirings meant for external interfacing of the transformer shall be terminated in the marshalling kiosk.
The MK shall be protected adequately protected against ingress of moisture and dust (IP55 Min).
The door of MK shall have a door stopper to prevent unwanted door closures.
A drawing pocket shall be provided on the door.
A UV resistant sight glass to view the oil/Winding shall be provided temperature indicators.
Clear labels shall be provided for all components in the marshalling kiosk.
Anti-condensation heater controlled by thermostat & hygrostat with control switch & 'HEATER-ON'
indication lamp shall be provided in the marshalling kiosk.
Trip and alarm wires shall be terminated in feed through terminal blocks. All trip wires shall be provided
with red ferrules and marked 'Trip'.
Min 20% of terminals of each type shall be provided as spare.
24.7 Terminals & Connection Arrangement
Plug-in type cable terminations shall be adopted for both line and neutral ends of HV & LV. The termination
shall be of approved type suitable for receiving XLPE cables. The number of cables shall be as per the SLD.
For the easiness of cable connection, termination shall be provided on the wall side of the transformer.
Suitable access shall be provided for internal inspection.
During Maintenance of transformer, it shall be convenient to access, disconnect & reconnect all
terminations.
Suitable provision for grounding of the cable armour / screen and grounding of the shield wire from T-
connector of the plug-in terminals need to be provided.
24.8 Valves and their location
Each transformer shall be fitted with the following valves as a minimum requirement. All valves shall have
'open' & 'close' position indicators and direction arrow marks on the handle. For all valves, engraved
identification labels are to be provided with valve numbers.
 50mm Drain cum bottom filter valve
 50mm top filter valve diagonally opposite to the bottom filter valve
 15 mm sampling valve
 Valves on either side of the Buchholz relay
 Valve for draining of the conservator
 Valves at each point of connection of the radiator
24.9 Insulating Oil
All characteristics of the oil shall be as per Table-2 of IEC 60296.
The inhibited oil shall have high oxidation stability and low sulphur content as specified in IEC 60296.
Oil manufacturer shall be certified on conformity to ISO 9001 by an organization authorized for
certification.
Oil manufacturer shall carry out all tests on the oil as per IEC 60296 and test reports shall be provided for
each batch indicating the batch number and quantity.
For inhibited oil, Manufacturer shall include quantity of each antioxidant added in the type test report.
Oil shall be supplied in Steel drums or IBCs. Batch number and type of Oil (Inhibited or Uninhibited) shall
be clearly marked on the container.
The oil supplied shall be Inhibited / Un-inhibited Mineral insulating oil for Transformer conforming to IEC
60296 as specified in the equipment specification.
24.10 Painting and Protection

All surfaces that so require shall be prepared stripped, primed, and painted in accordance with climatic
conditions here defined.
All the metal structure of the transformer will be treated with anti-corrosive paint suitable for saline areas
with high corrosion and contamination as well as moisture and salt concentration.
The paint used must be resistant to radiation UV and must ensure a long durability.
24.11 Operational Requirements
Signal List
The transformers shall provide a minimum of the Signals mentioned below to the LCC. The signals are
divided as Alarm and Trip as classified.
Alarm signals
Trip signals
24.12 Tests
The factory acceptance tests shall include all electrical and mechanical routine tests (No Type and Special
tests) as listed in subsequent sections in accordance with the appropriate IEC Standard applicable at the time
of test.
Also, any additional routine or tests called for by CLIENT to ensure that the individual plant or equipment
being supplied meets the requirements of the Specification should also be carried out.
Identical unites type and special test reports, shall be submitted the offered transformer.
24.13 Factory Assembly and Tests (FAT Test)
The transformer shall be subjected to tests in accordance with IEC 60076 Cl.ll.l.2.1 & IEC 60076-6 clause
10.9.2. These shall include the tests required in data sheets included.
The entire factory and site tests shall be carried out by supplier’s qualified personnel, to guarantee the correct
performance of the tests, and the results of such tests shall be recorded in the corresponding test protocols.
The transformer shall be completely assembled and tested at the Factory. It shall be at the option of the
purchaser to send a representative(s) for carrying out stage inspection and various tests during actual
manufacture and assembly of transformer(s) so as to satisfy regarding the quality of product and material
being used.
All routine tests as per specification are to be conducted and no deviation in respect of conducting these tests
will be acceptable. Test charges shall be part of cost of the equipment. Even if charges for such test are
indicated elsewhere in the tender, it will be presumed that these tests will be conducted free of cost. If
purchaser selects to send a representative, all tests shall be carried out in his presence.
24.14 Stage Inspection
Before carrying out the stage inspection the following documents shall be given to Inspecting Officer(s) for
verification:
 Invoice of supplier
 Mill's test certificate
 Packing list
 Bill of landing
 Bill of entry certificate by custom
 Description of material, electrical analysis, physical inspection, certificate for surface defects,
thickness and width of the material
The purchaser's representative may carry out stage inspection of the transformers during manufacturing/
assembling stage. The stage inspection will particularly include following tests/ check besides the general
routine tests to be conducted during manufacturing stages as per manufacturer's standard practice.
 Physical inspection/checking of Winding insulating material, core material and other
accessories/fitting of transformer.
 Measurement of core area, cross sectional area of Winding(s), number of turns in each Winding.
 Verification of HV and MV Coils, conductor size, I.D., O.D., Axial Length, Weight, Insulation
covering etc.
 Measurement of thickness of tank plates (Bottom and sides) and to conduct pressure & vacuum
tests as per CBIP manual for transformer tests to ensure the adequate strength of tank plates.
 Sample testing of core material for checking specific loss, magnetization characteristics (i.e.,
B.H. Curve plot) and thickness.
 Visual and dimensional check during assembly stage of core.
 High voltage test (2KV, 50Hz for one minute) between all core bolts if provided and agreed to
frame bars/fish plates etc. and ferromagnetic steel of core.
24.15 Routine Tests

Each completed transformer shall be subjected to following routine tests. No extra charges for any of the
tests shall be paid. No deviation shall be acceptable.
 All Routine tests shall be carried out on each transformer as specified in IEC 60076-1.
 Insulation power factor (tangent delta) & Capacitance measurement. Acceptance limit for
tan delta shall be 0.5% max at 20-degree C.
 Measurement of Insulation Resistance (15 sec, 1 min & 10 min) and calculation of
Polarization Index (10 min / 1 min). PI Value shall be greater than 1.3. The test shall be
done after completion of dielectric tests.
 Measurement of magnetizing current at low voltage on HV & LV
 Tests on Transformer Oil filled in the transformer. The characteristics of the oil filled in the
transformer during test shall satisfy the requirements specified in Table 3 of IEC 60422.
 Calibration of Oil and Winding Temperature Indicators shall be done at an interval of 10°C
till the set 'TRIP' temperature. Hotspot gradient setting and verification of set gradient of
WTIs shall also be done. Tests shall be performed preferably with an automatic temperature-
controlled oil bath.
 Test on Marshalling Kiosk: Tests shall be carried out to prove the correct functioning and
wiring of the complete equipment. All secondary wiring including panel wiring and control
circuits and all apparatus connected directly thereto shall withstand a high voltage test of 2
kV AC to earth.
 Frequency Response analysis shall be done as last test, with core demagnetized condition,
before dismantling for dispatch. Test shall comply with IEC 60076-18.
 Measurement of paint coating thickness.
Manufacturer's test reports of all accessories shall be made available during the FAT. Final FAT reports of
all Earthing and Auxiliary transformers shall be submitted together in one folder.
24.16 Test Reports
After all tests have been completed, certified copies of each test report shall be furnished. Each report shall
supply the following information:
 Complete identification data including serial number of the transformer.
 Method of application, where applied duration and interpretation of results for each test.
 Temperature data corrected to 75 ºC including ambient temperature.
24.17 33/0.4kV Earthing cum Auxiliary Transformer Technical Data Sheet
No. Particulars Required value Guarantee Notes

value
1 33kV Earthing & Auxiliary Transformer
(1) Name of the manufacturer (*)
(2) Country of origin (*)
(3) Applicable Standards IEC
(4) Type 33kV Oil-immersed earthing
transformer
(5) Service Life (Year) 30
(6) Maximum continuous rating (in KVA) (High/low） voltage 1000/400
side
(i) HV Rated Short Time Neutral Current (A) 800
(ii) HV Rated Short Time Neutral Current Withstand
10
Duration (secs)
(6.1) Short Circuit Capacity of Winding (Design)
(i) HV Winding 0.267/10 sec
(ii) LV Winding 18.04/3 sec
(7) Site Conditions
Maximum Design Ambient Temperature 50°C
Altitude Sea Level
Consideration for Exposure to Sunshine YES
Water Deluge System for Fire Protection YES
Noise Level 58.0 dBA (Pressure Level)
(8) No load voltage ratio at Principal (Nominal) tap (in kV/kV) 33/0.4
(9) Maximum Voltage of Equipment at HV/LV Side 36/1
(10) Rated frequency (in Hz) 60 Hz
(11) Number of phases 3-Phase
(12) Type of Cooling AN
(13) Connections
(i) H.V. Winding cable
(ii) L.V. Winding cable
(14) Vector group ZNyn11
(15) Tapings
(a) Range 33kV + 2x2.5%
(b) Number of steps 5
(c) Variation of voltage in each step (in KV) 2.5%
(d) Tap Location Primary Side
(e) Voltage Regulation Mode Off-Circuit Voltage
(d) No load voltage ratio in each tap (in kV/kV)
Tap Number Voltage Ratio in Yes
kV/kV
1. 35/0.4kV
2. 35.875/0.4kV
3. 36.75/0.4kV
4. 34.125/0.4kV
5. 33.25/0.4kV
(16) (Temperature Rise under normal operating condition above
ambient temperature
(a) Windings (in Degree C) 55
(b) Maximum hot spot temperature of copper Windings (in 68
Degree C)
(17) Flux Density in the Core at Nominal Voltage and Frequency
(No Load)
(i) Limb 1.60 T
(ii) Yoke 1.60 T
(18) Magnetizing current referred to H.V. at rated frequency
(a) at 90% rated voltage: (in Amps)
(b) at 100% rated voltage: (in Amps)
(c) at 110% rated voltage (in Amps)
(19) No load current at rated voltage and Rated frequency (in ≤0.65%
Arms)
(20) Regulation at 75°C
(i) At Unity Power Factor 1.08%
(ii) At 0.8 Power Factor (Lag) 3.15%
(21) Impedance between HV & LV Winding at 75°C 4.0% (+/- IEC Tolerance)
(22) Zero Sequence Impedance on HV Winding 74 (+/- IEC Tolerance)
(23) Maximum Current Density in the Windings
(i) HV Winding at CMR 1.02 A/mm² (Approx.)
(ii) LV Winding at CMR 2.37 A/mm² (Approx.)
(iii) HV Winding at Short Time Current Rating 31.04 A/mm² (Approx.)
(24) Type of Insulation
(i) HV Windings Class-A
(ii) LV Windings Class-A
(25) Oil Sealing System (Type)
Hermetically Sealed / Bolted
(i) Main Tank
with Gasket
(ii) Other Parts
(26) Winding Connections Brazed / Crimped?
(27) No load loss in KW at rated frequency and voltage
(a) at Lowest tap
(b) at principal tap ≤1.15kW
(c) at highest tap
(28) Load loss in kW Rated output and frequency
(a) at Lowest tap
(b) at principal tap ≤11.5kW
(c) at highest tap
(29) Efficiencies (in percentage)
(31) Impedance voltage on rated KVA base at rated current and ≤ 4% positive sequence
frequency for the principal tapping (in percentage) impedance
(32) Reactance voltage at rated current and frequency for the
6.5%
principal tapping (in percentage)
(33) Short time current rating for short circuit with duration
a) H.V. Winding (in K. Amps) 25
b) Duration (in seconds) 3s
(34) Permissible overloading with time 10% (3 hours)
(35) Core:
a) Type high-quality cold-rolled
laminated silicon steel
b) Flux density of Core and yoke at principal tap 1.60T
(36) 33kV side Winding
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage(kVpeak) 200 (Full wave),
220(Chopping wave)
1min power frequency withstand voltage (kV rms) 85
(37) Type of Winding
(a) High Voltage
(b) Low Voltage
(38) Winding conductor
i) Material of the Winding conductor
(a) High Voltage Copper
(b) Low Voltage Copper
ii) Current density of Windings at rated KVA
(a)High voltage (Amp. per sq.cm)
(b)Low voltage (Amp. per sq.cm)
(39) Insulation Withstand Test Voltages
i) Lightning Impulse withstand test voltage 9kv Peak)
a) H.V.
b) L.V.
ii) Power frequency withstand test voltage (in KV rms for 1 min)
a) H.V.
b) L.V.
(40) Current in the Winding at rated KVA
i) Low Voltage (in Amps)
ii) High Voltage (in Amps)
(41) Max noise level (LPA) - according to IEC 60076-10 - at a
measuring distance of 2m with all forced cooling in 70
operation(dB)
2 HV Bushing
(1) type
(2) a) Country of origin
(3) Manufacturer
(4) Maximum voltage of equipment (kV) 36
(5) Rated current (A) 630
(6) Rated short time withstand current (kA) 25
(7) Duration of time(s) 3
(8) Creepage distance(mm/kV) 31
(9) Insulation level
1) -1min power frequency withstand voltage (kV 95(dry)
rms)
- Lightning full wave shock tolerance voltage (kV peak) 200
3 LV Bushing
(1) type
(2) Country of origin
(3) Manufacturer
(4) Maximum voltage of equipment (kV) 1
(6) 1. Rated short time withstand current(kA) 25
(7) 2. Duration of time(s) 3
(8) Creepage distance(mm/kV) 31.5
(9) Insulation level
-1min power frequency withstand voltage (kV rms) 3(dry)
4 Dimensions
(1) Untanking(kg)
(2) Oil(kg)
(3) Total weight(kg)
(4) Transport Limitation weight(kg)

(5) Overall Dimensions after assembly(m) (LxWxH)
(6) Size of largest package(m) (LxWxH)
5 33kV Grounding resistance cabinet
(1) Name of the manufacturer
(3) Applicable Standards IEC
(4) IP Level IP55
5.1 33kV disconnecting switch
(1) Type
(2) Rated voltage (kV) 33
(4) Rated frequency (Hz) 50
(5) Rated short time withstand current/duration (kA/s) 25/3
(6) Rated peaks withstand current (kA) 63
(7) Rated short time withstand voltage at power frequency (1min)
Phase-to-ground kV (effective value) 90
Between open contacts kV (effective value) 100
(8) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
Phase-to-ground kV (peak) 190
Between open contacts kV (peak) 215
5.2 Surge arrester
(1) Type Zinc oxide arrester
(2) Model /
(3) Rated voltage (kV): 30
(4) Continuous operating voltage (kV) 24
(5) Nominal discharge current (kA) 1.5
(6) Lightning surge current residual voltage (kV) 80
(7) Impulse surge current residual voltage (kV) 75
(8) 1mA DC reference voltage(kV) ≥44
5.3 Zero sequence current transformer
(1) Model /
(2) Rated voltage 24kV
(3) Rated current ratio 150/1A
(4) Protection class 10P10/10P10
(5) Rated capacity 30VA/30VA
(6) Rated insulation level of primary Winding
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage peak (kV) 125
Effective value of rated power frequency withstands voltage 50
(1min) (kV)
5.4 Resistor
(1) Manufacturer
(2) System rated voltage (kV) 35
1min power frequency withstand voltage (effective value) 90
(4)
(kV)
(5) Lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak) (kV) 190
(6) Working voltage of resistor (kV) 33√3
(7) Max. working voltage (kV) 36/√3
(8) Resistance value (25℃) (Ω) 73.4
(9) Rated thermal current (A) 300
(10) Rated heating time (s) 10
(11) Short-time power-on temperature rise (10S) (K) 760
(12) Long-time power-on temperature rise (K) 385
25 33kV MV Gas Insulated Switchgears for Plant Substation
This specification applies to the design, engineering, manufacturing/fabrication, assembly, inspection, testing
before dispatch, packing, forwarding, supply and delivery at destination by suitable transport from foreign
origin, unloading at site and installation and commissioning of 33kV, 3 phase, 50Hz metal-enclosed Indoor
gas-insulated switchgear (GIS) on turnkey basis and as specified in the following sections of this document.
All the equipment shall be suitable for satisfactory operation in local environment climate and dry dust laden
atmosphere. The equipment shall be able to withstand wide range of temperature variation (-5º to 45ºC).
Temperature rise shall be guided by as per IEC 62271-200. The plant / apparatus / equipment supplied shall
comply in all respect with the requirement of Local laws, local Electricity Rule & Regulations, and IEC with
latest amendment.
All the equipment and all their auxiliary components shall be design and built for a minimum design life of
≥30 years. This requirement is not a guaranteed value but shall be used to determine the wear and ageing of
components. This shall be used to establish the maintenance procedures and component replacements
required to achieve the ≥30 -year design life.
The equipment shall be design in accordance with the requirements of IEC Standards in their latest editions
and other relevant codes, along with the additional requirements of this specification.
The equipment offered shall be adequately protected from all types of system voltage surges and any
equipment necessary to satisfy this requirement over and above what is specified, shall be included.
Performance, testing and rating of the Switchgear shall conform to the latest edition of all relevant IEC
Publications as a minimum requirement, supplemented by other national standards (or their functional
equivalents) subject to the approval of Project Company.
Compliance of the Switchgear manufacturer with the provisions of this specification does not relieve him of
the responsibility of furnishing Switchgear and accessories of proper design electrically and mechanically
tailored to meet the operating guarantees at the specified service conditions.
All hardware used in the assembly of the Switchgear must be either of corrosion proof material, or be hot dip
galvanized. A detailed Corrosion Protection/Painting description shall be submitted with the Bid. From all
devices alarm/trip contacts from source to the panel terminal block should be wired for both local/remote
purpose, ready for implementation during commissioning/future maintenance use.
Manufacturer/Supplier shall design the equipments for life span of 25 years. Minimum Insulation, clearances
and creepage distance for gas-insulated switchgear shall comply with IEC standards and requirements taking
into site conditions.
Prior to shipping above-mentioned switchgear components, the following must be provided:
 List of all impact recorders fixed on equipment to be shipped (serial number, type, etc.)
 The permissible impact / shock value
 User manual for the impact recorder
 Instructions for interpretation of recorded data
Removal of impact recorders at site shall be done under end user supervision.
25.1 Spare parts, Special Tools
As part of Tender bid requirement, the manufacturer/supplier shall quote for following:

 One (1) set of special tools and tackles, which manufacturer/supplier deems necessary for
the transformer erection and maintenance.
25.2 General Constructions
The Switchgear shall be an indoor gas-insulated, factory assembled, totally enclosed, metal clad, dead front,
3-phase cubicle design (segregated SF6 insulated compartments for Circuit breaker busbar systems and
Cable connections). It shall be suitable for local and remote control.
The switchgear shall be designed to ensure optimum continuity and reliability of supply as well as safety for
operation.
Each of the gas compartments shall have a separate gas filling non return valve, gas density monitoring by
means of a temperature-compensated pressure sensor, and its own pressure relief system.
The power cables shall be fed in from the bottom and rear side of the panel. Provision shall be provided for
cable testing and current and voltage injection.
A leakage rate of less than 0.1% per annum is required. The gas tanks should therefore preferably be state of
the art manufactured of stainless steel and cut / welded by laser and built as a hermetically sealed pressure
system.
The switchgear is to be designed in such a way that all high voltage parts along with the cable plugs are
located within the SF6 enclosure.
For operator safety the switchgear must have protection system against internal faults in each partitioned
compartment. In the event of internal arc, the hot gases are to be guided via pressure relief disks from each
compartment concerned. The pressure relief duct ends are guided to open air or fitted with absorbers to cool
and de-energize the hot gases. Hazards to persons or risk of fire are to be reliably prevented. Evidence is to
be provided of type testing to IEC 62271- 200, IAC class AFLR for 33kV.
The high voltage part of the switchgear does not require maintenance under normal conditions during the
lifetime of the switchboard. The circuit breaker drive mechanisms must be accessible for inspection and
maintenance without opening the gas system.
Pressure relief has to be provided for each high voltage compartment. Relief into the cable basement or
cavity below a false floor is not permitted.
Metering, circuit breaker chamber, cables and cable box chamber should have proper access for
maintenance, proper interlocks should be provided. The switchgear shall be complete with all necessary
wiring fuses, auxiliary contacts, terminal boards etc.
The design of the panels shall be such that no permanent or harmful distortion occurs either when being
lifted by eyebolts or when moved into position by rollers or trans pallets.
SF6 gas tank shall be Aluminium alloy 6mm thickness; remaining enclosure shall be steel minimum 2mm
thickness.
The switchgear must be readily extendable in either direction.
The switchboard may be subject to seismic disturbance hence the switchgear supplier shall provide the type
test report or documentation to support the same.
Each cubicle shall be equipped with anti-condensation heater controlled by thermostat.
Each gas compartment shall be available with repair openings, so that during any kind of maintenance or
repair can be possible on site & no need to bring the panels at factory.
25.3 Design Requirements
The switchgear shall be of the SF₆ gas insulated three-phase encapsulated type, suitable for accommodation
within a building and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing at the Site.
The arrangement of the switchboard shall be such that all units face in the same direction. Particular
emphasis is placed on the provision of adequate clearance between chambers to facilitate maintenance.
The equipment offered should be adequately protected from all types of system voltage surges and any
equipment necessary to satisfy this requirement over and above that specified shall be included. Easy access
shall be provided for all equipment, which needs regular checking and / or maintenance, by means of fixed
type ladders, platforms or similar facilities. A mobile platform to reach any equipment, all manual operating
handles, etc. shall be supplied within the overall quoted price of switchgears.
Cable sealing ends shall be suitable for terminating the cables specified directly into the switchgear. The
dimensions of cable sealing end chamber shall be complied with IEC62271-209. Anchoring bolts for fixing
switchgear shall be supplied by the supplier/OEM.
The design shall include all facilities necessary to enable the performance of the specified site checks and
tests to be carried out. The Contractor shall state the test facilities provided and indicate any attachments or
special equipment provided for this purpose.
Circuit breakers, disconnectors, earth switches, VTs, CTs cable termination chambers, all and any other
chambers and components must be capable of withstanding a gas over pressure of 130% of normal operating
pressure continuously.
All special tools and tackles O&M manuals etc. required for erection, operation, testing and maintenance of
switchgear should be supplied within the quoted price. Switchgear supplier/OEM shall provide the
embedded plates and channels for the switchgear foundations and maintaining floor tolerances.
OEM/Supplier shall also supply anchoring bolts for fixing switchgear. However, OEM/Supplier has liberty
to exclude embedded plates, channels and anchoring bolts from their quoted price.
All operating mechanisms have to be motorized. All the basic mechanical operations shall be possible after
door opening to avoid unauthorized access. Manual emergency operation and mechanical position indicators
shall also be provided.
The bus bar section shall be of ample capacity to carry the rated current continuously without excessive
heating and for adequately meeting the thermal and dynamic stresses in the case of short circuit in the system
up to full fault MVA. The bus bar shall be of Copper and Cross section of the same shall have to be designed
to limit the current density.
25.4 Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers can be SF6 or Vacuum type.
SF₆ breakers can also be consider and shall use the SF ₆ gas confirming to IEC standard as the insulating
medium as well as for arc quenching.
The circuit breakers shall be suitable for an operating sequence of O-0.3 sec–CO–3 min-CO.
Circuit breakers shall comply with IEC standard 62271-100 and shall have valid type test report based on the
above standard conducted on an independent test lab or witnessed by independent observers. Evidence of
type test report as per the standard shall be submit along with offer.
The capacitive current switching, line charging and cable charging current, restrike performance, mechanical
& electrical endurance, making and breaking current etc. shall be as per IEC 62271-100.
Supplier/Manufacturer has to submit evidence for circuit breaker switching duty for reactive compensation
system. Any over voltage protection device included for such duty shall be clearly stated in the tender offer.
The transient recovering voltage performance shall be as per IEC.
The circuit breakers shall have first pole to clear factor of 1.5.
The offered circuit breakers along with operating mechanism shall be type tested for mechanical endurance
class M2 and must have Class E2, C2.
Two (2) trip coils and One (1) closing coil shall be provided.
The breakers shall be capable of Making & Breaking the short time current in accordance with the
requirement of IEC 60056 conform to latest amendment thereof and shall have 3 phase rupturing capacity of
25kA or 31.5kV for 3 secs at 33kV.
The circuit breakers shall be vacuum type and comply with IEC Publication 62271-100. The stationary
mounted circuit breakers shall be type-tested. Test certificates, as evidence of successful completion of type
tests shall be submitted by the successful bidder on request.
The HV part of the circuit breakers must be maintenance-free for lifetime under normal operating conditions
to IEC 60694. The CB drive is accessible for maintenance.
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with accessories but not limited to the following:
 ON-OFF indicator for indicating circuit breaker position.
 Trip push button
 Shunt trip coil operating between 70% - 110% of rated control voltage.
 Close coil, operating between 85% - 110% of rated control voltage.
 Spring charge motor, operating between 90% - 110% of rated control voltage.
 Two trip coils and one closing coils shall be provided in all the breakers.
 Mechanical indicators for switch position and mechanism position
 Mechanical Counter
25.5 Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers employing the vacuum interruption principle shall incorporate vacuum bottles of declared
and established manufacturer. Each interrupter shall be capable of individual adjustment for correct
operation and easy removal for maintenance or replacement.
Vacuum bottles shall not require the addition of insulation or stress shielding to achieve the necessary
dielectric strength externally and shall not be mechanically braced by components, which may reduce the
integrity of the insulation across the open gap.
25.6 SF₆ Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers employing SF₆ gas as an interrupting medium shall operate on the principle of self-
generated gas pressure or rotating arc for arc extinction. Means of confirming the existence of adequate gas
density in the circuit breakers shall be available without removing the unit from service. The system of gas
monitoring shall be temperature compensated and with sufficient contact for alarm and lockout.
Auxiliary switches allow electrical monitoring of the contacts and any intermediate positions.
25.7 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be of motor charged spring operated. Operation will normally
be from a remote or supervisory position, but facilities shall be provided for operation locally by electrical
release and by direct manual release from stored energy devices when the circuit breaker is isolated for
maintenance.
It shall be possible to padlock each local control function in the open position. Operation counters of non-
resettable type shall be fitted to all circuit breaker mechanisms.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical tripping pulse being
applied to the circuit breaker during the closing stroke, or of the mechanism failing to latch in the closed
position, the circuit breaker shall open fully and in such a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated
breaking current.
Mechanical indicator shall be provided for CB “ON” and CB “OFF” position. The operating mechanism
shall be suitable for a rated operating sequence of O-0.3 sec-CO-3 min-CO.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanism shall not make repeated attempts to
close the circuit breaker when the control switch is held in the CLOSE position in the event of failure to
latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of a trip signal being given to the circuit breaker.
The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and solenoid operated
valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature range when the voltage at their terminals
is any value within the voltage range stipulated in IEC 62271-100 and in addition over the range of all
operating conditions of the batteries and chargers. The circuit breakers shall be provided with two trip coils.
25.8 Spring Charged Operating Mechanisms
Spring operated mechanisms with proved satisfactory service experience shall be arrange for motor charging
but means shall also be provided for charging by hand. When fully charged the spring mechanism shall have
sufficient stored energy to permit the operating sequence O-CO/2CO to be perform following the loss of
supply to the charging motor.
A mechanical indicating device shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring. The indication shall be
clearly visible from the front of the breaker. In addition, suitable contacts shall be provided which may be
used for remote indication.
An auxiliary switch shall give the remote indication of "spring discharged". The mechanism shall be charged
automatically, for further operation, as soon as the circuit breaker has completed a closing operation. The
time required to power charge the spring shall not exceed 30 seconds.
Auxiliary switches shall be provided in circuit breaker tripping circuits to interrupt the tripping supply as
soon as the circuit breaker has completed the tripping operation, and to interrupt the closing supply as soon
as the circuit breaker has completed the closing operation.
The spring shall be fully charged before it can be released to close the circuit breaker. It shall not be possible
for the breaker to close whilst the spring is being charged. Spring closing mechanisms shall be designed such
that it is not possible for a fully charged spring to be released inadvertently due to external shock or vibration
caused by the breaker opening under short circuit conditions or any other cause.
All operating coils for use on the D.C. supply, shall be connected so that failure of insulation to earth does
not cause the coil to become energized.
Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with MCBs on each unit and shall be independent of each
other and all other circuits. The MCBs shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts for remote/SCADA
signalling.
The mechanisms shall be provided with means for charging the spring by hand. During this process, no
electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism shall endanger the operator or damage the equipment.
Locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the circuit breaker can be prevented from being
closed when it is open. These facilities shall not require the fitting of any loose components prior to the
insertion of the single padlock required.
It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanism to render inoperative the electrical tripping.
Where earthing through the circuit breaker is adopted the method of earth position selection shall be
arranged to disconnect the trip supply in the earth position.
25.9 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches
Disconnecting switches shall be arranged for operation while the equipment is alive but will not be required
to break current other than the charging currents of open busbars and connections (circuit breaker bushings)
or load currents shared by parallel disconnectors under the conditions of this Specification.
Disconnectors of earth switches shall comply with the requirement of IEC 62271-102. Disconnectors shall
preferably be housed in compartments partitioned from circuit breakers. Line disconnector gas zones must be
separated from the cable sealing ends or outdoor bushing gas zone.
Switch mechanisms shall be so design that the disconnector cannot be open by forces due to currents passing
through it and shall be self-locking in both the "open" and "closed" positions.
The mechanism shall open and close all three phases simultaneously. The disconnector will have a common
motor drive for the three poles.
Power operated drives shall be provided which shall be suitable for local, remote and supervisory control
except earth switches and should be fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility.
It should be possible to lock- off the manual and local facility and padlock the mechanism in the open and
closed positions with the motor automatically disengaged. Local mechanical position indicators shall be
provided on disconnecting and earthing switches and shall be visible from the front side of the panel.
Line Disconnectors will be able to switch capacitive current encountered in the course of energizing or de-
energizing of the GIS and loop currents when commutating currents from one busbar to another.
Each section of busbar, which can be electrically isolated from other sections of busbar by means of
disconnectors or circuit breakers shall incorporate earthing switches. The mechanisms of the high-speed
fault-making earthing switches shall be spring operated. It shall be possible to charge the spring by dc motor
and manually.
During the manual charging of the spring, motor operation shall be prevented. The spring shall not be
charged when the earthing switch is in open position, but the charging of the spring shall be initiated as a
sequence of the closing operation.
Slow speed maintenance earthing switches shall be operated locally only with the mechanism driven with a
dc motor and manually. During the manual operation, the supply circuit of the dc motor shall be
automatically disconnected. Interlocks shall be provided to prevent unintentional use of this earthing
equipment.
Earthing switches shall be arrange such that, with a minimum use of tools and special fittings, they may be
used to facilitate such tests as CT primary injection, timing, voltage drop and resistance measurement
without the necessity to open gas-filled compartments.
All earthing switches shall have insulation terminals to enable CT primary injection, timing test, cable fault
detection, etc. without shut down of busbars or adjacent bays.
Isolators or isolators combined with earthing switches shall be motor operated. In cases of emergency,
manual operation must be possible. Arrangement shall be provided for earthing of individual feeders and bus
bars without hampering the functionality of the Sub Station.
Detection of the switch positions is to be performed by proper wear and tear free arrangement. The actual
position of contacts for all 3 phases must either be visible via a mechanical position indicator directly
connected to the drive shaft or directly detectable at the main contacts.
Disconnectors and Earthing Switches will be provided with at least one spare normally open and one spare
normally closed contact, each wired out to terminals for the connection of external wiring.
25.10 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be of low reactance type.
The current transformers shall contain no hygroscopic materials, which could affect the moisture contents of
the SF₆ gas in the CT chamber, in case SF₆ circuit breaker is considered.
The rated short-time thermal current shall not be less than the through fault capacity of the associated circuit
breakers.
Each current transformer shall have a continuous extended current rating of at least 1.2 times the rated
current.
All current transformers shall be installed with the P1 terminals adjacent to the busbar. The polarity of the
primary and secondary Windings of each current transformer shall be clearly indicated and in addition, labels
shall be fitted in readily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and duty of each transformer.
For multi-ratio secondary Windings, a label shall be provided at the secondary terminals of the current
transformer clearly indicating the connections required for each ratio. These connections and the ratio in use
shall also be shown on the diagram of connections.
All connections from secondary Windings shall be brought out and taken by means of separate insulated
leads to a terminal block specially designed for the CT circuits, mounted in the LV Compartment.
The terminals of the secondary Windings shall be connected to LV Compartment.
The secondary Windings shall be earthed at one point through a removable link, which shall be in the panels
which accommodate the relays for protection and at the switchgear for indication or metering purpose.
CT terminal blocks located in the LV Compartment shall have shorting/ disconnecting links to allow testing.
It shall be possible to carry out primary injection testing of the CTs including magnetizing curve testing,
when the switchgear is fully assembled, or retesting of the CTs during the service life of the switchgear
without interruption of supply to adjacent circuits.
The current transformer as specified in IEC 61869 shall be given on an accessible plate mounted external to
the current transformer.
The Current Transformer shall be use for Metering and Protection Purpose. Current transformers shall be
accommodated in a separate gas chamber adjacent to the circuit breaker.
25.11 Voltage Transformers
Voltage transformers shall be of electromagnetic type and of metal-enclosed design, which shall be
compatible with the switchgear.
They shall contain no hygroscopic insulating material, which could affect the moisture contents of the SF₆
gas in the VT chamber, in case SF₆ circuit breaker is considered.
All line voltage transformer shall be provided with manual operated disconnector for disconnecting the VT,
for maintenance, testing and operation.
The voltage transformers shall be capable of discharging the capacitance of line, cables and switchgear,
which may remain connected to them during switching operations. The Contractor shall declare any
limitations of the equipment for this duty.
Voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be provided with miniature circuit breakers as close to each
voltage transformer as possible and shall be labelled with Winding and phase indication. The MCB’s/fuses
shall be equipped with contacts for remote indication/alarm.
For single-phase voltage transformers separate earth links for each secondary shall be provided and each
neutral lead shall be connected together at a single earth point in the local control cubicle. Earthing of the VT
HV Winding shall be through a link separate from the LV Winding.
The ratio and phase angle errors of voltage transformers shall not exceed the permissible limits prescribed in
the relevant IEC 61869 Standard.
Voltage transformers shall be capable of carrying continuously, without injurious heating 50% burden above
their rated burden and shall withstand 1.9 times rated voltage for 8 hours without saturation and damage.
Busbar VTs shall be connected by using motor operated isolator/3 position switches. Line VTs shall have
disconnecting facilities preferred.
It shall not be possible for the voltage transformer secondary circuits to be connected in parallel, except
through interposing voltage transformers associated with synchronization scheme to prevent any possibility
back energization through synchronizing circuits.
When meters are provided with voltage signals for VTs not connected directly to the same circuit, as the
current transformers then the voltage signals shall be wired through auxiliary contacts to break the circuit
automatically when the circuit breaker is open.
The Voltage Transformer shall be as per IEC 61869 series.
25.12 Low Voltage Compartments
The low voltage compartment shall be located preferably in the upper part of the switchgear cubicle. All
measurement instruments, push buttons, switches, indication, alarm lamps, etc. shall be mounted in the front
door and flexibly wired to the fixed part of the LV compartment.
Each circuit-breaker bay shall be provided with a low voltage compartment containing local control switches
and a mimic diagram for the operation and status indication of the circuit-breaker and all associated
disconnectors and earth switches together with selector switches to prevent local, remote/supervisory
controls being in operation simultaneously.
Local manual release facilities shall be provided for closing and tripping the circuit breaker. The operation of
both releases shall be subject to lockout if insufficient stored energy is available. Local manual releases
shall be provided with locking off facilities.
Sufficient electrical terminals shall be provided for the termination and inter-connection of all cabling
associated with remote and supervisory control, alarms, indications, and protection and local ring main
supplies.
The control switches, local/remote selector switch, mimic diagram, etc. shall be mounted on the front side of
the panel which swing angle of 120°.
The LV compartment shall have sufficient space to accommodate all components, wiring, terminals, MCBs,
aux. Relays, control switches and position indicators etc.
Lockable control switches with spade type handles shall be provided for earth switches and disconnectors,
whereas with pistol grip type handles for circuit breakers. All control switches shall be lockable and
effective only when local mode is selected.
A semaphore indicator is required for each device (CB/DS/ES etc.) as part of mimic diagram and each
semaphore indicator shall be label with the device SCADA Number. CTs, VTs, Transformer, etc. shall be
properly integrated in the mimic diagram.
If a DS or ES is not, in the fully open or closed position, “control circuit faulty” alarm shall be initiated and
electrical operation of all the devices shall be locked.
A red colour emergency trip push button shall be provided for each low voltage compartment and shall be
protected with suitable cover/flap.
The colour of LV compartment shall be RAL 7032, internal colour shall be semi-gloss white. However,
manufacturer/supplier may propose their in-house design colour shade.
The sheet steel thickness shall be minimum 2.5 mm. The low voltage compartment shall be supplied with
gland plates separated as two halves. The anchoring bolts etc. for installing the switchgear shall be supplied.
Each switchgear shall have a copper earth bar and cross section shall be decided during detailed engineering.
Provision shall be provided for drawing pockets and ventilation arrangement.
The degree of protection (IP) of enclosure shall be as per manufacturer’s in-house design standards.
The terminal block for each application i.e., CT circuits of each function, VTs, control, status and alarms,
SCADA indication and status circuits, AC supplies, DC supplies, bus wires etc. shall be properly segregated
and labelled to suit the application and subject to approval during engineering stage.
The CT terminal blocks shall have shorting links, isolation and injection test facilities whereas VT terminals
shall have isolation and injection test facilities i.e., two separate types complying the above requirement shall
only be applied for CTs and VTs. VT terminal blocks shall not have any provision for shorting. Ferrule
Numbers shall be provided for all wiring.
The control switches to be provided for local operation of CBs, disconnectors, earth switches etc. shall be
lockable, spring return to neutral position type i.e., 3 positions ‘close - neutral - open’. However, the
local/remote selector switch shall be supplied with two positions type, lockable, key free in remote position
only.
LV compartment shall have door limit switches and panel illumination. Also, a heater controlled by
humidistat and heater on/off switch, ‘heater on’ indication lamp etc. shall be provided. A separate lamp test
push button (black colour) for testing all the indication lamps shall be provided.
Anti-condensation heaters of an approved type shall be provided inside each cubicle and compartment. The
heaters shall have individual humidity stat and thermostatic control and shall be arranged to cut off when the
cubicle internal temperature exceeds between 30°C and humidity less than 50%.
Direct driven auxiliary spare contacts shall be provided for all the devices (CB, Disconnectors and Earth
switches) and wired up to low voltage compartment:
 At least 2 N/O and 2 N/C (normal contact)

 At least 1 N/O and 1 N/C (early make late break contact)
25.13 Accessories:
Space heaters: Thermostatically controlled resistors, operating range 25°C to 55°C at AC power supply.
Electrical outlet: Two poles and ground 16A.
All CT/VT and AC circuit wiring of the low voltage compartment shall be with minimum 2.5 mm² wires
whereas other DC wiring shall be 1.5 mm² wires. The wires shall have voltage grade of 0.6/1 kV.
All indication lamps located in LV Compartment shall be of Neon Type.
25.14 SF₆ gas compartments and monitoring
Each encapsulated phase shall be sub-divided into separate Gas Compartments.
Gas Compartments are separated by means of watertight conical insulators. Gas compartments of the three
phases shall be separate and each mold has a connection, to which could be connect a vacuum pump or gas
filling equipment or recovery of the gas.
Each gas compartment must have:
A gas supply with quick release coupling. An integrated filter prevents dust and impurities from entering the
compartment. The gas supply shall be designed to allow the connection of all instruments and equipment
maintenance.
A pressure relief device to protect against overpressure in excess.
An absorber to collect moisture and degraded products. The Densimeter is merely a mechanical device that
controls pressure compensated temperature. An alarm is activated at two levels for the lower gas density. All
drivers and power parts mounted on insulating molds shall be made of epoxy resin. The material will prevent
any chemical attack resulting from the decomposition of SF₆ products.
The insulators will be manufacture according to IEC Standards, resist internal arches, and prevent their
propagation to continuous compartment. All drivers and power parts mounted on insulating moulds made of
epoxy resin. The material will prevent any chemical attack resulting from the decomposition of SF₆
products.
The insulators will be manufactured according to international standards, resist internal arches and prevent
their propagation to continuous compartment.
The encapsulated phase must have a relief valve against the explosion of the envelope. The relief device will
be manufactured of a rupture disc pressure pre-set opening. The stamped flange will ensure by means of a
gasket synthetic elastomer so that the two internal seals are protected from the outside.
One Temperature compensated pressure gauge completely assembled with alarm and lockout contacts for
CB and alarms of both first & second stage for other GIS compartments shall be provided in each gas zone
of the GIS. In case of different rated pressure at GIS compartment, gauge used for lower pressure
compartments adjacent to the high-pressure compartment shall have additional alarm contact for high
pressure to monitor the internal leak.
Temperature Compensated Pressure Gauge without scale is not acceptable since gas leakage rate cannot be
monitored without a scale.
Gauge should have a scale either from 0-1 to max range or in the operational range as a minimum. Colour
coding for alarm stages red/yellow/green/blue shall be provided over the gauge dial. Blue colour shall be
provided for high-pressure alarms (if applicable).
Initiation of spurious alarm from Temperature Compensated Pressure Gauge due to vibration during CB
operation is not acceptable. Timer or any other devices should not be provided to mask the spurious alarm.
Pressure gauge shall be located in such a position that readings can be taken easily standing on the floor.
SF₆ low / high-pressure alarms shall be extended to local control panel, HMI and master station as below:
 Stage-1 SF₆ low-pressure alarms shall be grouped together for all the chambers of each bay for
LV COMPARTMENT annunciator alarm.
 Stage-2 SF₆ low-pressure alarms shall be grouped together for all the chambers except CB of
each bay for LV COMPARTMENT annunciator alarm.
Stage-2 of CB shall be extended as CB lockout and trip circuit should be disabled.
SF₆ high-pressure alarms shall be grouped together for applicable chambers of each bay for LV
COMPARTMENT annunciator alarm.
Stage-1, Stage-2(except CB) and high-Pressure alarms (if applicable) shall be grouped together for
remote alarm.
The SF₆ gas used in the GIS shall have the following minimum properties according to the latest publication
of IEC.
Maximum allowable concentration of impurity (by weight)
 Air 0.05%
 CF4 0.05%
 Humidity 15 ppm
 Hydrolyzable fluoride (HF) 1.0 ppm
IEC provides a biological control gas, and SF₆ manufacturer must submit a certificate to attest that the gas is
in accordance with the recommendations of the IEC.
25.15 Position Indicators
Position indicators shall be provided for all circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches to show
whether the main contacts of these switches are in the fully open or closed positions. Position indicator
should be directly coupled with shaft drive for all three phases.
25.16 Interlocking
An interlocking scheme shall be provided which considers the following basic requirements for the
implemented single busbar arrangement.
Along with Interlocking, inter tripping must be provided between 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear and PV
Collector Feeders.
All interlocking shall be submitted to approval before starting the schematic diagram.
To safeguard maintenance personnel who may be working on one section of the equipment with other
sections live.
To prevent incorrect switching sequences which could lead to a hazardous situation to plant, equipment and
personnel.
To prevent earthing of live circuit.
The interlocking scheme shall be electrical for all operational interlocks and preferably of the
mechanical/key type for maintenance safety interlocks but shall be effective when the equipment is being
controlled locally, under emergency hand operation or from a remote position.
All Electrical interlocks shall so function as to interrupt the operating supply and a system of interlocks shall
be provided, which shall cover the emergency hand operation of apparatus, which is normally power
operated. Failure of supply or connections to any electrical interlock shall not produce or permit faulty
operation.
Electrical bolt interlocks shall be energized only when the operating handle of the mechanism is brought to
the working position.
Visible indication shall be provided to show whether the mechanism is locked or free. Means, normally
padlocking, shall be provided whereby the bolt can be operated in the emergency of a failure of interlock
supplies.
Where key interlocking is employed, tripping of the circuit breaker shall not occur if any attempt is made to
remove the trapped key from the mechanism. Any local emergency- tripping device shall be kept separate
and distinct from the key interlocking.
25.17 Auxiliary Switches and Contactors
Auxiliary switches shall be provided on all circuit breakers disconnectors and earthing switches for local,
remote & SCADA indication, control and interlocking. With each circuit- breaker, disconnecting device, and
earthing device, there shall be supplied all necessary auxiliary switches, contactors and mechanisms for
indication, protection, metering, control, interlocking, supervisory and other services. All such auxiliary
switches shall be enclosed in dust free housing.
Not less than 3NO and 3NC spare auxiliary switches shall be provided with each circuit breaker,
disconnectors and earthing switches.
Spares after completing all scheme requirement and CT’s early make, late brake contact shall be used
(Minimum 2 numbers of early make late brake NO and NC contacts to be provided).
All auxiliary switches shall be wired up to a terminal board on the LV Compartment of the switchgear
whether they are in use or not in the first instance and shall be arranged in the same sequence on all
equipment.
25.18 Gas Losses
The Manufacturer should guarantee the equipment for a gas loss of not more than 0.5% per annum in any
single gas compartment.
In case of extensive and repeated gas leaks at any time during the warranty period, the purchaser will have
the right to request the contractor to replace the part of the assembly, which causes the leakage.
All costs associated with such works shall be borne by the supplier/manufacturer.
25.19 Painting and Protection
All surfaces that so require shall be prepared stripped, primed and painted in accordance with climatic
conditions defined.
The coating method of the envelope’s molten aluminium and welded pipe of aluminium is as follows:
 Layers: 1
 Layer thickness: 70 µm to a minimum
 Protection method: Surface preparation and 2-component paint.
 Colour code: RAL 7038 - RAL 9016 - RAL 7035. Another Color according to RAL should
be possible at the discretion of final customer
 Composition: Siloxane – Epoxy
The used lacquers will be free of harmful materials like cadmium, lead, and chromic acids.
25.20 Test
25.20.1 Factory Assembly and Tests (FAT Test)
The routine tests on GIS, LV Compartment and accessories shall be conducted, as per the latest edition of
relevant IEC 62271-203 standard. The complete routine test report including GIS, LV Compartment, CTs,
VTs, cables from GIS to LV COMPARTMENT etc. arranged section wise for each bay should be submitted
for approval.
The manufacturer shall submit the routine test procedure of complete GIS, CTs, VTs, LV Compartment, etc.
at least 3 months before the inspection, for End User approval.
The following routine tests shall be conducted. In addition, any other tests referred by the standard but not
listed below shall also be applicable.
1) Complete Bay IEC 62271-203 Clause
 Dielectric Tests on the Main Circuit

 Tests on Auxiliary and Control Circuits
 Measurement of the Resistance of the Main Circuit
 Tightness Test
 Design and Visual Check
 Pressure Tests of Enclosures
 Mechanical Operation Tests
 Tests on Auxiliary Circuits, Equipment, and Interlocks in the Control Mechanism
Pressure Test on Partitions
- Visual inspection and design check, schemes and interlocks check, LV COMPARTMENT tests,
gas pressure switch test, etc.
- Name plates check measurement of insulation resistance, earth continuity check.
2) Circuit Breaker IEC 62271-100 Clause

 Dielectric Withstand Tests on Control and Auxiliary Circuits
 Tightness Test
 Mechanical Operating Tests (Including Resistance and Current Measurement of Closing and
Trip Coils and Checking Anti-Pumping Function, Timing etc.)
 Measurement of operating time/timing diagram
3) Disconnectors and Earth Switch IEC 62771-102 Clause

 Dielectric Tests on Auxiliary and Control Circuits
 Tightness Test
 Mechanical Operation Tests (Including Verification of Early Make Late Break Feature of
Busbar Disconnector Aux. Contacts).
 Timing test, coil check etc.
4) Current Transformers
 Measurement of Secondary Winding resistance

 Accuracy test
 Testing of composite error test
 Verification of knee-point voltage
 Inter turn overvoltage test
 Determination of reminance factor
 Determination of the instrument security factor
 Routine Tests to all current transformers shall be done as per IEC-61869 series. In addition,
the following Tests are mandatory
 Polarity test
 Power frequency test on secondary Winding
 Determination of errors (Accuracy test)
 Appearance
5) Voltage Transformers
IEC 61869 series, Routine Tests applicable to Voltage Transformers as per IEC standards.
 Visual inspection
 Gas tightness test
 Verification of terminal marking
 Winding resistance
 Power frequency withstand on primary
 Power frequency withstand on primary between sections and secondary
 Determination of errors
 Insulation resistance
 Operating test and power frequency voltage test on disconnecting device
 Dielectric test on auxiliary and control circuit
 Insulation resistance auxiliary and control circuit.
The performance of the components of the switchgear shall be substantiate by test data relevant to the
designs offered.
Evidence of type tests shall be submitted with the Tender.
6) LV Compartment:
Major components of LV Compartment are to be tested and calibrated. Functional tests of LV

Compartment to be carried out during factory acceptance tests.
 Mechanical and visual inspection

 Control wiring check
 Measurement of insulation resistance
 Dielectric test
 Control circuit test, interlocks etc.
 Coil check test
 Sequence test
 Measurement of paint thickness, earthing etc.
25.20.2 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)
The GIS manufacturer shall furnish the details of site test procedure, method statement, site test format etc.
for the GIS, CTs and VTs, LV Compartment etc. with clear diagrams for approval at least two months before
delivery of GIS.
25.21 Technical Guarantees
The supplier shall guarantee the values as per manufacturer’s standards and further detailed technical data
sheet for purchase review.
25.22 Warranty
33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear shall be supply in accordance with the technical part of the MFS and shall be
guaranteed “Back-To-Back” with Masdar requirement.
25.23 Quality Assurance
Manufacturer/supplier shall implement a quality management system in accordance with the stipulations of
the general purchasing conditions.
25.24 Inspection Points Plan
Manufacturer/supplier shall submit explicitly to the purchase Inspection plan and update for each and
individual phases of procurement, manufacture, testing and shipment. Manufacturer/supplier shall submit
internal procedures to purchaser for review and acceptance.
Purchase shall select the points on inspection plan, which they or their representatives shall witness. During
the inspection visit, the Purchaser reserves the right to review applicable documentation that has not been
presented for his approval (ex: manufacturing procedures etc.).
Inspection Points Plan shall comprise of minimum following sections: -
 Materials Inspection
 Inspection of Manufacturing
 Examination and Tests
 Protection, cleaning, painting, labelling, delivery, and final documentation.
 Installation and Maintenance Requirement
25.25 Transportation
GIS when prepared for shipment shall be fitted with a shock recorder, which shall remain in SITU until the
equipment is delivered at site. One complete set of transportation blanking covers which are removed during
installation shall be properly identified and stored in the substation.
25.26 Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be submitted for approval which shall contain details
of oil processing at site. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall contain copies of approved As-Built
Drawings. Soft copies of O&M Manual shall also be submitted in pdf format with proper index/mark for
easy retrieval.
25.27 Design Report
Bidder will submit a design report (Post Tender Win) after study phase (and before construction),
including:
 Main results of thermal design

 Main results of mechanical design
 Main results of short-circuit study/design.
25.28 Lists of Applicable Codes and Standards
Unless otherwise mentioned in the corresponding documents, the offered equipments and applicable
components must be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with all relevant International Codes
and Standards (IEC), as indicated below.
In the event of conflict, between any of the codes and standards listed, the most stringent requirement shall
apply.
Should there be any possibility to sub-contract complete or partial work to others, then it shall be sole
responsibility of manufacturer/supplier to ensure subcontracted party or parties are fully conversant with
applicable requirement of International Codes, Standards, and specification. Client/End-user reserves the
right of approving sub-contracting party/s.
33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear
IEC 62271 Series High voltage switchgear and control gear
IEC 60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur Hexafluoride
IEC 60137 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V
IEC 60233 Tests for hollow insulators for use in electrical Equipment
IEC 60099-4 Metal-oxide surge arrestors without gaps for AC Systems
IEC 61869 Instrument transformers: current and voltage Transformers

High voltage alternating current circuit breakers-Inclusive load
IEC 61233
switching
IEC 60059 IEC Standard current rating
IEC 62215 Guide for asymmetrical short circuit breaking test Duty 10
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
25.29 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgear Technical Data Sheet
No. Technical Data Data Required Data Offered
1 33kV switchgear
(1) Manufacturer
(3) Standard IEC62271
Indoor, SF6
(4) Type Gas Insulated Switchgears
(GIS)
Model
(5) Nominal system voltage (kV) 33
(6) Equipment highest voltage (kV) 36
(8) Rated current of main busbar (A) 3150/2500
(9) Rated short time withstand current: (kA) 25
(10) Rated duration of short circuit: (s) 3
(11) Rated peak withstand current: (kA) 63
IP67 (SF6 housing)

(12) Protection class
IP42 (switchgear enclosure)
(13) Rated insulation level
a. Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

(kV, rms)
- Common value 90
- Across the isolating distance 100
(14) b. Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (kV, peak value)
- Common value 195
(15) Auxiliary and control circuits (kV) 2
(16) Materials of busbar Copper
(17) Temperature rise (K)
Accessible parts-expected to be touched in normal operation 30
Accessible parts-which need not to be touched in normal

40
operation
(18) Noise (dB)
(19) SF6 Leakage per year <0.1%
(20) Maintenance period (year) ≥25
(21) IP level IP42
(22) Switchgear size
(23) Switchgear weight
2 33kV circuit breaker
(1) Manufacturer
(4) Type Indoor SF6 or Vacuum
(5) Model
(8) Rated current (A)
Main transformer incoming & circuit-breaker coupling busbar 3150/2500
PV collector line 1250
Auxiliary transformer& grounding transformer 630

(kV, rms)
- Common value 90
(11) b. Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (kV, peak value)
- Common value 195
(13) Rated short-circuit breaking current (kA): 31.5

(14) Rated short time withstand current: (kA) 31.5
(15) Rated duration of short circuit: (secs) 3
(16) Rated short-circuit peak making current: (kA) 81.9
(17) Rated time data
Break time
Closing time
Opening time
Close-open time
Unsynchronized time of opening time
Unsynchronized time of Closing time
(18) Rated operation sequence O-0.3s-CO-3min-CO
(19) Temperature rise (K)
Terminals for the connection to external conductors 50
Accessible parts-expected to be touched in normal operation 30
Accessible parts-which need not to be touched in normal
40
operation
(20) Electrical endurance E2
a. Rated short-circuit breaking current ≥20 times
b. Break rated current ≥2000 times
Mechanical operation duration ≥10000 times
(21) Capacitive Endurance C2
(22) Mechanical Endurance M2
(23) First-pole—to clear factor 1,5
3 33kV voltage transformer
(1) Manufacturer
three-phase, cast resin epoxy
(4) Type
type
(5) Model
Nominal system voltage (kV) 33
Equipment highest voltage (kV) 36
(7) Network neutral grounding unearthed
33/√3: 0.1/√3: 0.1/√3: 0.1/√3:
(8) Rated voltage: (primary/secondary)
0.1/3kV
- measuring core 0.5/30VA
- metering core 0.2/30VA
- protection core 3P/50VA
Quantity of secondary Windings 4
Connection of three-phase set Wye-wye-wye-wye-open delta
(9) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak value): 195kV
(10) Rated power-frequency withstand voltage (r.m.s): 90kV
(11) maintenance period (year) ≥25
4 33kV current transformer
(1) Manufacturer
three-phase, cast resin epoxy
(4) Type
type
(5) Model
Nominal system voltage (kV) 33
Equipment highest voltage (kV) 36
(7) Network neutral grounding unearthed
(8) Rated current:(primary/secondary)
(8.1) Main transformer Incoming
- protection core – High Impedance Busbar Protection (DZ) CL PX, 2500/1A
- protection core – High Impedance Busbar Protection (CZ) CL PX, 2500/1A
- protection core – BCPU + FR CL:5P30/30VA, 2500/1A
- metering core – Metering + PFC @SVG CL:0.2FS5, 2500/1A
- protection core – Transformer Differential Protection @33kV CL:5P30/30VA, 2500/1A
- protection core – Transformer Differential Protection @33kV CL:5P30/30VA, 2500/1A
(8.2) PV Collector Feeder
- protection core – 87L CL PX, 2500/1A
- protection core - BCPU 5P30/30VA, 500/5A
3530.4kV Earthing Cum Auxiliary transformer& grounding
(8.3)
transformer)
- protection core (SBEF) CL:5P30/30VA, 500/1A
- protection core (Restricted Earth Fault @33kV) CL:5P30/30VA, 1000/1A
- protection core (Restricted Earth Fault @400V) CL: PX, 1000/1A
(8.4) 33kV Circuit-breaker coupling busbar
- metering core - Metering CL:0.2FS5, 2500/1A
- protection core – BCU Protection CL:5P30/30VA, 2500/1A
(8.5) Reactive Compensation Bank Feeder
- protection core – Protection CL PX, 1200/1A
- protection core – Protection CL PX, 1200/1A
- protection core – Metering CL:0.2FS5, 1200/1A
(9) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak value): 195kV
(10) Rated power-frequency withstand voltage (r.m.s): 90kV
(11) Rated short-time thermal current 31.5kA(2s)
(12) Rated dynamic current: (kA) 81.9kA
(13) maintenance period (year) ≥25
5 33kV disconnector
(1) Manufacturer
(4) Type Indoor, three-position
(5) Model
(7) Equipment highest voltage (kV) 40.5
a) 3150A (main transformer
incoming & circuit-
breaker coupling busbar)
(8) Rated current (A) b) 1250A (Collector line)
c) 630A (Auxiliary
transformer & grounding
transformer)
(kV, rms)
- Common value 90
b. Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (kV, peak value)
- Common value 195
(12) Rated short time withstand current: (kA) 31.5
(13) Rated duration of short circuit: (s) 3
(14) Rated peaks withstand current: (kA) 81.9
(15) Maintenance period (year) ≥25
6 33kV Surge arrester
(1) Manufacturer
(3) Standard IEC60099-4
(4) Type MOA without gaps
(5) Model
(9) Rated voltage (kV) 42
(10) Continuous operating voltage (kV) 34
(11) Nominal discharge current (kA): 10
(12) Maximum residual voltage for steep current impulse (kV) 132
Maximum residual voltage versus discharge current
(13) 121
characteristics for lightning impulse (8/20μs) (kV)
(14) Maximum residual voltage for switching impulse (kV) 101
(15) DC reference voltage (1mA) (kV): 60
(16) Material of housing Porcelain
26 REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GRID

CODE
The Contractor shall be responsible to design reactive power compensation system by providing FACTS
devices i.e., STATCOM, Static Var Compensator or Generator (SVG or STATCOM) for the Project, if
applicable.
Reactive Power Compensation Calculation shall be design at +50°C. Such compensation system shall be in
compliance with the Grid code/ITB/Project agreements and shall be approved by SEC.
27 AUXILIARY SUPPLY FACILITIES
The Contractor shall transport, install, test and commission the auxiliary supply facilities. The Auxiliary
supply facilities shall comprise at least the following equipment:
 Auxiliary transformers to meet the substation Auxiliary Load

 AC system (including AC distribution board, AC panels)
 DC system (including DC distribution board, batteries, chargers, ...)
 UPS for critical equipment (including fire detection and alarm system)
 Diesel generator inside Plant Substation
General arrangement
The auxiliary supply will be provided by two (2) auxiliary and earthing transformers 33/0.4 kV of minimum
630 kVA for every Substation.
The basic design of the auxiliary AC & DC system shall consist of a single busbar 0.4 kV, including a
sectionalizing circuit breaker.
In normal operation mode, one of the earthing and auxiliary transformer circuit breakers shall be in open
position and the busbar sections shall be coupled to each other.
The 0.4 kV busbar shall be split into two busbar sections, both feeding the essential loads and non-essential
ones, wherein the load must be equally distributed. The 0.4 kV busbars shall be fed from the substation
earthing and auxiliary transformers.
The essential-loads section shall be fed by a diesel generator set in case of emergencies.
A suitable control device (BCU, IED), providing interlocking conditions, shall be installed to implement the
control of the auxiliary supply system and the in-feeding sources. The control device shall provide the
possibility to define interlocking conditions in order to avoid that two sources feeding the bus bar in parallel.
LV AC installations
The function of the LV AC station supply system is to feed the auxiliary equipment, as well as the lighting
and other services, via the relevant AC distribution boards for the complete substation.
DC installations
The function of the DC system is to provide the DC supply for all auxiliary and substation DC dependent
equipment (relevant to the extended part of the substation), through the DC distribution boards. This
equipment comprises the protection relays, control systems and the communication systems in addition to
the emergency lighting.
Batteries rated 125 V DC and 48 V DC shall be of valve-regulated Ni-Cd type.
Each battery shall consist of two sections, fed from separate and dedicated LVAC Bus.
The battery capacity shall be defined during the detailed design stage but shall NOT be less than stated
below [Mandatory].
Each section of the battery shall be capable of supplying 100% of the DC loads (including future extension)
and considering other 20% design margin for the ageing of the battery system.
This requirement is applicable for both 125 V DC and 48 V DC batteries. The sizing calculation shall be
in line with IEEE - 1115 standard.
27.1 Auxiliary transformers
The Contractor shall transport, install, test and commission the auxiliary transformers for PV Farm and Plant
Substation (As Applicable).
28 Diesel Generators for Plant Substation
In the case of failure of the normal power supply, this emergency supply shall start up automatically to
ensure safe and control of the plant. A diesel generator set properly sized to service the PV Plant loads and a
minimum of XXXX kW (rating of diesel generator shall be decided as a part of detailed engineering) shall
be installed.
28.1 General
An emergency diesel generator unit shall be provided to ensure that essential auxiliary supplies are
maintained in the event of outage of the HV or LV systems. It shall supply the auxiliary power required to
facilitate a safe shut-down of all units and shall maintain safe auxiliary power supply in case of blackout
conditions (including the required control and monitoring facilities and the Central Control Room).
The diesel generator shall comprise but not be limited to the following items :
 Diesel engine with governor and accessories; synchronous generator, 400-volt, 60 Hz , 3-phase
4-wire, exciter and voltage regulator
 fuel tank and stand.
 mounting hardware
 control panel
 battery supply for control and starting complete with automatic battery charger.
 generator circuit breaker
 tools, sufficient for routine maintenance
 two sets of “Start-up” spares
 interconnecting wiring of engine controls
 exhaust system, complete with silencer.
The generator rating indicated in the Technical Data is a provisional assessment of the requirement, the
Contractor shall size the generator for the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation to suit the sum (plus 25%) of the
maximum individual demand kVA of each of the following loads:
 battery chargers
 control room lighting & air-conditioning
 protection & control lighting & air-conditioning
 communications room air conditioning
 switchyard distribution panel
 external guardhouse(s)
 security lighting
 CCTV system (if any).
28.2 Standards
The design, manufacturing, construction, installation, testing and commissioning of the diesel generator unit
shall be in accordance with the relevant codes, standards, as well as local rules and regulations including but
not limited to those listed below. The latest revision of the publications referred to shall apply.
 IEC 60034 Diesel Generator Unit
 IEC 60044 Instrument transformers
 IEC 60269 Low-voltage fuses
 IEC 60157 Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear
 IEC 60255 Electrical relays
 IEC 60298 AC metal-enclosed switchgear and control-gear for rated voltages above
1kV and up to and including 52 kV
 IEC 60408 Low-voltage equipment provided by enclosures.
 IEC 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies
 IEC 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
 IEC 60664 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems
 IEC 60686 Stabilized power supplies, ac. Output
 IEC 60694 Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and control-gear
standards
 IEC 60715 Dimensions of low-voltage switchgear and control-gear
 IEC 60865-1 Short-circuit currents (AC)
 IEC 60947 Low voltage switchgear
 IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
 IEC 61660-2 Short-circuit currents (DC)
 IEC 61936-1 Power installations exceeding 1 kV AC – Common Rules
28.3 Technical Requirements
28.3.1 Diesel engine
The engine shall be water- cooled, with a closed-circuit radiator and fan. The radiator and fan assembly,
which shall be installed inside the diesel generator room, shall have the necessary anti-corrosive
treatment/material. Suitable electrical heating of the cooling water during standstill of the diesel generator set
shall be provided, if required, to allow for the specified starting time.
The diesel engine shall be directly coupled to the generator, and both installed together on a common base
frame. Vibration absorbers shall be used to prevent transmission of vibrations to the surrounding area.
The cylinder liners, the main bearings and the connecting rod bearings shall be replaceable, without
disturbing the crankshaft.
All pumps shall be engine driven and mounted on the engine, and/or on the common base frame.
The governor shall be electronic or mechanic type and shall be designed as to guarantee trouble free
automatic synchronization of the unit with the grid.
Two independent over-speed protections shall be provided. The devices may be either mechanical or
electronic type and shall shut down the diesel engine at the same set point.
The diesel engine shall be equipped with a crankcase over pressure breather with oil separator.
The breather pipe after the oil separator shall be connected either to the exhaust or to the air manifolds (not
exposed to the air).
The engine shall be equipped with crankcase over-pressure switches to trip the engine when the blow of
gases build-up inside the crankcase if the breather is blocked.
The engine may be required to run for extended periods of time during maintenance, without benefit of its
assigned generator loads.
Equipment may be exposed to wind-borne sand and dust, and therefore shall be equipped with appropriate
fuel, oil and air filters.
Although the diesel generator set is intended for stand-by / emergency duty, all ratings must be based on full
load 72-hour continuous service, without benefit of interruption or load cycling, to allow for power outage of
indefinite duration.
The engine shall be started automatically on failure of normal power supply.
The generator will be connected automatically to the load.
28.3.2 Lubrication system
The engine shall be fully force lubricated. The main oil pump shall be gear-driven by the main shaft. Where
necessary, a suitable interval lubricating equipment shall be provided to allow for the specified starting time.
28.3.3 Fuel supply and injection system
The fuel oil tank shall be located at an adequate distance from the diesel engine room, at a safe and
convenient adjacent location, and shall be sufficiently sized for 24 hours of continuous full-load operation of
the diesel generator. The tank shall be topped- up manually. The ambient air temperature is as specified in
Specification.
An integrating fuel meter shall be installed, suitably connected to the engine's fuel admission and return
system, to measure the actual consumption of the engine.
The outlet connection of the fuel extraction line on the diesel storage tank shall be at least 10 cm above the
fuel tank bottom, or otherwise suitably positioned to prevent the intake of any sludge or water which may
have accumulated in the bottom of the storage tank.
A drain valve shall be fitted to the tank to permit the drain off of any such accumulation of sludge or water.
The ventilation openings of the tanks shall be protected by a flame trap.
28.3.4 Air intake and exhaust system
The engine shall be fitted with an air-intake filter.
Flexible connections to the air intake duct, exhaust line and all other external pipework shall be provided.
Temperature-resistant materials shall be used for the exhaust piping and the required expansion bellows.
Expansion joints in the exhaust pipe shall be made of metal and exhaust silencers shall be galvanized.
The engine exhaust gas outlets and ventilation inlet ducts shall be arranged to ensure that the exhaust gas is
not channeled back into the ventilation air inlet system.
28.3.5 Generator
General
The relevant IEC regulations shall apply, except where more stringent rules are stated below.
The generators shall be air cooled with forced ventilation. A heater shall be provided to protect the generator
against humidity during stand-still.
Six double element Pt 100 temperature sensors shall be provided, embedded in the stator windings and wired
to terminal boxes.
Temperature detectors shall also be provided for stator end plates and other positions if mentioned elsewhere
in the Specification.
Overvoltage and overspeed protection shall be provided.
Bearings
Bearings and, if necessary, also couplings and auxiliary lines shall be insulated so as to ensure that no
damage or injury of any kind would result through currents caused by shaft voltages.
Excitation
A brushless rotating diode rectifier excitation system shall be provided. The rotating diodes shall be easily
accessible for maintenance.
The excitation equipment shall be so designed that the highest voltage is reached at 5/4 load and a power
factor of 0.7. The excitation response ratio shall be greater than 1.0/second (IEC 60034-3).
During short circuits, the time taken to de-excite from rated voltage to 10% of rated voltage shall not exceed
8 seconds. The de-excitation time for open circuit de- excitation from rated voltage to 10% of rated voltage
shall not exceed 30 seconds.
The excitation and de- excitation control equipment shall be combined with the voltage regulation equipment
in cubicles and shall be located in the diesel generator room or attached to the diesel generator.
Generator main connection
The generator’s main connection shall be provided with LV power cables.
All necessary current and voltage transformers for protection, excitation, measuring, etc. shall be provided in
the generator line connection cubicle which feeds power to the 400 V distribution board. The generator
circuit breaker shall be in the generator line connection board.
Voltage regulator
A solid-state type of voltage regulator, with automatic and manual control within ±5% an accuracy of ±0.5% of
the rated voltage, ranging from no-load to full-load conditions at rated frequency, shall be provided. A suitable
transfer control system with transfer switch and necessary meters and controls shall be provided for a smooth
bump less transfer from automatic to manual and from manual to automatic voltage control. Bump less and
smooth transfer shall be automatically initiated in the case of a sudden failure of the voltage regulator.
The Contractor shall supply all required auxiliaries such as generator field breaker, discharge/suppression
resistor, motor-operated voltage adjusting rheostat and other accessories, which are required for safe and
continuous operation.
Generator protection
The protective relays used for generator protection shall be of the digital/numerical type. The relays shall be
of a well proved design with 5 – 10 years’ operational experience.
The protective relays shall be installed in a steel-sheet cubicle, this cubicle shall be mounted in the diesel
generator room along with the other cubicle for control, monitoring, regulating, signaling excitation and
voltage regulation. The scope of protection relays shall be proposed by the Bidder.
Control and monitoring
The following control and monitoring equipment shall be provided as a minimum at the load control panel:
 remote/local selector switch
 automatic/manual selector switch
 engine ON/OFF
 voltage regulator higher/lower switch
 voltage set point adjustment switch.
 speed regulation higher/lower switch
 circuit breaker control switches implemented in a mimic diagram.
 indication instruments at least for:
 cooling water inlet and outlet temperature
 fuel oil tank level
 lube oil pressure
 lube oil temperature(s)
 generator active power
 generator reactive power
 generator current (all three phases)
 generator voltage with selector switch
 generator frequency/engine speed
 generator stator winding temperature (six)
 exciting current
 all required positions and alarm indication
 hours run metering.
A relay assembly shall be mounted in the control panel to provide dry alarm contacts for remote indication
of engine safety device operation.
Additional features shall be provided if required for safe and satisfactory operation.
All control and monitoring cubicles shall be installed locally in the diesel generator rooms.
All necessary interlocking and alarm circuits shall be provided to eliminate any possible damage to the
equipment due to malfunctioning of instruments or operational errors.
28.4 Required Technical Data
The required technical data for the diesel generator is specified in the data sheet.
A diesel generator unit (DGU) shall be installed and used as the emergency power supply source. Rated
output voltage of the DGU shall be 400 V AC.
The rated power of the DGU shall be such that the DGU is capable to supply all the critical substation
systems for 24 hours.
The final power ratings shall be defined during the detailed design stage but shall not be less than stated
below.
The DGU shall be installed in a prefabricated container equipped with fire-detection system and exhaust gas
evacuation system.
A fuel tank with diesel fuel for the DGU shall be installed in the substation area for emergency use. The
volume of fuel stored shall be suitable for uninterrupted fuel supply of the DGU for 24 hours.
The DGU shall be connected to the intermediate bus of the LV AC switchgear via an automatic bus-tie
circuit-breaker.
The DGU shall be started automatically in case of voltage loss at busbars of 0.4 kV AC switchgear and stop
automatically after normal auxiliary supply voltage restoration.
Parallel operation of auxiliary power supply system and DGU shall be avoided.
One (1) diesel generator set, adequately sized by the Contractor but as a minimum of 200 kVA shall be
provided, along with a fuel tank accommodating fuel for a continuous operation in line with the relevant
Technical Data Sheets. The diesel generator set shall be housed in a thermal- and noise-insulated
prefabricated cover.
Functional tests shall be provided at the manufacturer’s workshop, including load test.
29 Batteries and Battery Charger Panel for DC System
29.1 General Description
This specification covers the design, manufacture, factory testing, marking, packing, shipping, and
transportation to site, installation, site testing and commissioning of 2x100% 125V Nickel Cadmium (Ni-Cd)
batteries, 2x100% Thyristor Controlled Battery Chargers and 125V DC Distribution Board.
This specification gives the minimum requirement for DC System such as Charger, Battery, voltage control
units and DC distribution.
This requirement is not a guaranteed value but shall be used to determine the wear and ageing of
components. This shall be used to establish the maintenance procedures and component replacements
The required batteries, chargers and DC Distribution board shall conform in every respect to international
recognized standards for engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing
continuous commercial operation within the parameters guaranteed by the manufacturers and in accordance
with the specifications.
The batteries and chargers, to be offer, shall be designed to work as indoor equipment and shall be complete
in all respects necessary for their effective and trouble-free operation as far as possible.
The life of battery and charger shall be considered for a period of at least 30 years of successful operation
without any failure in any components which is installed and utilized in the 125V DC system both charger
and battery.
The battery charger(s), VCU’s and D.C. distribution boards shall generally be provided in separate self-
contained units housed in separate cubicles, bolted together to form a common board. The battery shall be
suitable for indoor installation in a separate battery room.
Compliance of the Batteries and Battery Charger manufacturer with the provisions of this specification does
not relieve him of the responsibility of furnishing DC system and its associated accessories of proper design
electrically and mechanically tailored to meet the operating guarantees at the specified service conditions.
All hardware used in the assembly of the battery charger must either be of corrosion proof material, or be hot
dip galvanized. A detailed Corrosion Protection/Painting description shall be submitted with the Bid. From
all devices, alarm/trip contacts from source to the panel terminal block shall be wired for both local/remote
purpose, ready for implementation during commissioning/future maintenance use.
The design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 125V DC battery system shall be envisaged
by the OEM/Supplier/Contractor for substation control and protection for the Plant Substation(s).
Manufacturer/Supplier shall design the equipment’s for life span of ≥30 years. Minimum Insulation,
clearances and creepage distance for batteries and battery charger shall comply with IEC standards and
requirements taking into site conditions.
29.2 Spare Parts, Special Tools
As part of Tender bid requirement, the manufacturer/supplier shall quote for following:
One (1) set of special tools and tackles, which manufacturer/supplier deems necessary for the transformer
erection and maintenance.
Manufacturer is responsible for full functionality of DC system even if the equipment or service to be
provided are not specifically mentioned in this specification.
The Bidder/Contractor must submit the Battery and Battery Charger Sizing Calculation prepared by
OEM, as per Approved Manufacturer Lists. Any Manual Calculation shall be REJECTED.
Each system comprising of battery, charger, DVR and DCDB must be rated to take entire load individually.
The nominal D.C. system voltage shall be 125V and the voltage measured at the distribution switch board
shall not vary by more than plus 10% and minus 15% of the nominal voltage under all charging conditions
when operating in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
Two systems shall be used as one for D.C supply-1 and the other for DC supply-2. Dual battery
chargers shall be fed from a different AC source.
The rectifier assembly shall be 12 pulse full wave fully controlled thyristor bridge type and designed to meet
the duty as required by the respective Charger. The rectifier block shall be provided with their own heat
dissipation arrangement with natural air-cooling.
Chargers in both systems shall be of identical design and rating with no common control or common circuit
to prevent Common Point Failure of Chargers. Ratings of Main switches and Replaceable type HRC fuses
should be the same, and sufficient enough to carry the entire load and designed for maximum short circuit
current. DCDB Incomer and Bus coupler switches shall have load-making capacity.
The required batteries and chargers/voltage control units/distribution systems shall be design in dual
configurations (two systems), comprising:
 Two (2) battery banks

 Two (2) battery chargers (one for each system) and each charger in separate enclosure
 Two (2) Voltage control units (VCU’s) for regulating the DC output voltage at the 125 V
distribution boards in separate enclosure when the rectifier/chargers are in float/trickle or boost
charge mode
 Two (2) Distribution boards (Both coupled with each other through changeover facility) for
distributing power to the various loads in separate enclosure. The VCU’s and distribution board of
each system can be in separate enclosure, if permitted by space. The switchboards shall be located in
the middle and adjacent to the battery charger of each system.
 Two (2) Battery Fuse Boxes with voltmeter and fused switch disconnector with alarm contacts for
local and remote located in battery room.
A complete 220 V DC supply system shall be provided for the substation extension, including:
 one (1) 220 V DC distribution board with DC control panel, comprising two busbars. Each
busbar section will be connected to the relevant battery charger.
 Two (2) 400/110 V Thyristor Controlled rectifiers / battery chargers.
 two (2) 220 V DC batteries of Ni-Cd type, each with a minimum capacity of 600 Ah (10h
discharge rate).
In addition, for supply of 48 V DC, required for certain equipment of the SCMS and telecommunication
system, the following shall be provided:
 one (1) 48 V DC distribution board with DC control panel, comprising two tied busbars.
 two (2) 400/110 V rectifiers / battery chargers
 two (2) 48 V DC batteries of Ni-Cd type, each with a minimum capacity of 150 Ah.
The complete arrangement for DC installations shall be designed taking into consideration possible future
extensions.
The substation control & monitoring system (SCMS), the telecommunication system, as well as the
protection, control and emergency lighting systems will be fed from the 220 V DC or 48 V DC distribution
boards, as necessary.
The batteries and rectifiers will be sized to supply the required DC loads, taking into considerations the
present and future services in the substation final stage.
The DC distribution boards shall be provided with all hardware required for reliable operation and safe
isolation, as well as with protection against short circuits.
Each system shall be rated to feed 100% of the entire calculated DC load of the Substation. The nominal
rating of the DC supply shall be 220 V at DC Distribution Board.
The Battery and chargers to be offered shall be designed to work as indoor equipment (unless else specified).
400V AC, 3-phase system, 60 Hz , shall feed the chargers separately. The required MCCB’s/MCB’s at the
AC source as well as the wiring and power cables shall be included.
In any event, the DC. Load voltage shall not drop below 85 % of its nominal value, after the battery has
taken the full continuous load for 4 hours nor exceed 105% of the nominal value during boost or float/trickle
charge. The voltage at both DCDB bus bars shall be maintain within tolerance at all times during the
float/boost charge of batteries.
Metering circuits shall be wired for remote & SCADA indication. The batteries shall be protected against
over-discharging. Earth fault detectors for each DC. Busbar shall be provided. Terminal blocks for all
externally connected wiring shall contain 20% spare terminals.
Section of 1.5 mm² copper with colour coded sleeves as follows:

 DC Positive - red.
 DC Negative-black.
All power and control conductors shall be stranded copper, 90°C minimum temperature rating. All internal
wiring shall be flexible and adequately rated for a minimum 125% of the full load current rating.
From all devices, alarm/trip contacts from source to the panel terminal block shall be wired for both
local/remote purpose, ready for implementation during commissioning and maintenance use. It shall be
noted that after installation of the battery systems, the Bidder/Contractor shall be obliged to take all
necessary measures (e.g., supply of standby generator) to avoid leaving the Battery discharged.
29.4 Battery
29.4.1 Nickel Cadmium Batteries Type
Nickel Cadmium batteries of high-performance type and low discharge rate shall be provided and shall be
capable of providing normal DC loads required for the operation of Substation.
The battery shall be vented Nickel Cadmium type complying with IEC 60623. The Battery capacity shall be
de-rated considering 25 years of operation.
Each battery shall have sufficient capacity to supply the substation loads for a period of Ten (10) hours,
while the chargers out of service. (Station Battery Duty)
During detail engineering stage the ampere-hour (AH) capacity of batteries shall be calculated based on
standing (continous) load, momentary (intermittent) load, spare capacity, ageing factor and temperature
derating factors for Eight (8) hours discharge rate, as per IEEE 1115 (IEEE Recommended Practice for
Sizing Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications).
DC Load Curve shall be Continous between Amperes and Minutes shall be Continous (Straight line) parallel
to Minutes (X-axis).
For example, refer below Curve. Random or Intermittent or Momentary Loads in calculation shall be
REJECTED. It means, L1 + L2 + L3 shall be add together and Battery must be size on the Total DC Current
i.e., L1 + L2 + L3.
29.4.2 Batteries – Construction
The cell containers shall be of robust, impact resistant construction in translucent material permitting visual
inspection of electrolyte and shall be having built-in vent caps, the vent caps shall be of flame retardant type.
They shall be mounted on appropriate steel stands while ensuring that a minimum floor area is taken up and
a ground clearance from the floor must be provided.
Each cell must be readily accessible and can be remove from its position without having to remove or shift
adjacent cells. The cell containers shall be marked with maximum and minimum electrolyte levels. Vent
caps shall be of flame-retardant type.
The nickel plated intercell connectors as well as the cell terminals are suitably insulated by PVC shrouds,
sleeving or cover plates.
The minimum voltage at the end of the five (5) hours discharge cycle and number of cells per battery shall be
decided by the OEM. Float charging (normal) voltage and boost charging (after complete discharge) voltage
per cell must be decided by the OEM for Nickel Cadmium Batteries.
The electrolyte shall be free from impurities and dilution of the alkaline electrolyte and topping up of cells
shall be carried out using distilled water only. Battery cells shall be clearly identified by permanent
numbering.
The number and arrangement of the cells in each battery bank shall be such as to maintain the voltage at the
distribution board within the regulated limits over the complete charge and discharge cycle. In the meantime,
it shall cater for the voltage drop over the whole chain of cables up to the equipment input when the battery
alone is feeding the DC load (charger is disconnected).
The electrolyte performance and the design of the cells shall be such that site inspection and routine
maintenance activities, including topping up of the electrolyte, shall not be at short intervals (probably for
not less than six months).
The following information shall be indelibly marked on outside of each cell of the Battery:
a) Manufacturer's reference number and code
b) Country and year of manufacture.
c) Type of cell
d) Nominal Capacity at 5-hour rate
e) Serial Number/stack number
The electrolyte capacity and general design of the cells shall be such that inspection and maintenance,
including topping up of the electrolyte, shall be at intervals of not less than twelve months.
The following maintenance equipment shall be supplied

a) Two electrolyte-pouring funnels
b) Two Safety Goggles
c) Two pairs of rubber hand gloves
d) Two syringe hydrometers of suitable range
Upper and lower electrolyte level in case of transparent containers.

At site each battery cell, upon mounting the entire cells on the battery stand, shall be numbered in a
sequence.
Earth leakage relay, which shall operate in the event of earth leakage current, shall be provided as applicable.
It shall be possible to easily disconnect the battery earthing.
The Bidder/Contractor may furnish any additional technical particulars relevant to the technology of the
battery offered in addition to the technical particulars.
29.4.3 Battery Mounting Connections and Accessories
The Battery shall be mounted suitably on steel stands of robust construction and in such a way that allows
easy access to each cell during maintenance. The stands shall be treated with acid resisting enamel or glossy
paint.
The complete mounting shall be placed in a well-ventilated battery room of the respective station. The
Battery shall be supplied and erected complete with all necessary connections and cabling. Connections
between tiers/between end cells shall be by PVC cables arranged on suitable racking or supports.
The connections between the cells shall preferably be bolted type. The bolts, the nuts, the connectors etc.
shall be effectively lead-coated to prevent corrosion. Terminal plates of each cell shall be clearly marked as
positive and negative. End take-off connections shall be made by single core PVC insulated cables.
A box (made of steel and suitably painted to match other installations in the same vicinity) equipped with a
set of fused switched disconnectors together with auxiliary alarm contacts for remote supervision shall be
mounted close to the battery.
The number and arrangement of the fused switched disconnectors shall be such as to enable disconnection of
the battery without interrupting the supply from the charger to the load and to enable disconnection of the
charger output without interrupting the supply from the battery to the load through the VCU.
Warning signs shall be fitted to precaution personnel of the danger of removing or replacing a fuse whilst the
load is connected. It shall be possible to monitor the operation of the fused switch disconnector when
disconnecting the battery from the system either for maintenance or due to faults.
One set of tools comprising two syringe hydrometers, one voltmeter, ten cell-bridging connectors, one
electrolyte-pouring funnels, two electrolyte thermometers, battery instruction card for wall mounting,
electrolyte airtight containers, labels, other items necessary for the erection and correct functioning and
maintenance of the battery shall be provided with the battery.
29.4.4 Battery Chargers, Voltage Control Units (VCU's) & Distribution Boards/Cubicles
All Battery chargers shall be type tested to IEC 60146-1-1 requirements and shall generally comply with the
requirements of IEC 60146, BS 4417 standards. Chargers shall be designed for operation from a three-phase
ac auxiliary supply with a nominal voltage of 400 V, 50Hz.
The battery chargers, VCU's and DC distribution boards shall be provided in separate cubicles (two cubicles
for each, for the two systems). The battery chargers shall be designed to be constant voltage, constant current
type.
Each of the two battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation to feed the 100% load charging the
corresponding battery bank, either on float or on boost charging modes.
The cubicle shall be an indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed cubicle. All necessary
base frames, anchor bolts and hardware shall be part of cubicle fixing.
Removable gland plates shall be provided in all cubicles. The lugs for power cables shall be made of
electrolytic copper with tin coat.
Power cable sizes shall be define based on calculation for the voltage drop over each stage and accordingly
the suitable cable lugs and drilling of gland plates can be defined. The cubicles shall be vermin proof.
Ventilation louvers if provided shall be backed with screens. All doors and covers shall be fitted with
synthetic rubber gaskets.
The cubicles shall have hinged double leaf doors at the front and at the backside i.e., cubicles shall have both
front and rear end openings for adequate access to the inside components. The cubicle doors shall be
properly earthed.
The degree of protection of charger cubicle shall be at least IP-41. All indicating instruments, control
switches and indicating lamps shall be flush mounted on the front side of the cubicles.
The minimum thickness of sheet steel used in the construction of cubicles, compartments etc. shall be 2.5
mm throughout. The control wiring shall be PVC insulated, of at least 2.5 mm2 stranded copper wires.
Control terminals shall be suitable for connecting two wires, with 2.5 mm2 stranded copper conductors.
All terminals shall be numbered for ease of connections and identification. Each wire shall bear a ferrule or
tag on each end for identification. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided for control circuits.
The insulation of all circuits except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand test voltage of 2 kV
AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least 10mm shall be maintained throughout for such circuits, right
up to the terminal lugs. Whenever this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded.
29.4.5 Battery Chargers & VCUs
The chargers to be offered shall be high efficiency, short control response time, low output ripple especially
when battery is disconnected.
It shall be of the Thyristor-controlled type.
The rating of the charger shall be provided according to the DC load requirements of the project and in line
with approved DC SLD.
Necessary surge protection devices and semiconductor type fast acting fuses comply with IEC 60269-4 with
suitable fuse fitting shall be incorporated in each arm of the rectifier connections to protect the thyristor
Bridge.
The output voltage shall be regulated such as to continuously be as close as possible to the nominal rated
voltage even in case of wide variation in the AC voltage or frequency, therefore the adequate number of
dropping diodes to achieve this task shall be selected properly. However, in the case of battery feeding the
load during discharge cycle, the range (nominal + 5%, - 10%) is still acceptable.
Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically for all dc loads between 0 and 100% irrespective of
variations in the voltage of the ac supply within the limits as Frequency variation of 47 to 53 Hz and Voltage
variation of ± 10%.
The rectifier transformer and chokes shall be dry, and air cooled (AN) type capable of operating
continuously at full load on any tapping with the maximum specified ambient temperature. The rectifier-
transformers and chokes shall have class-F insulation.
Chargers shall limit the ripple content (RMS) in the output voltage to less than 2.0 % of the nominal output
voltage irrespective of the DC load, even when they are not connected to a battery. Filter capacitors used in
the charger shall be long life grade according to IEC 60384-4.
The charging circuitry shall be so designed that the failure of any component will not give a situation, which
will cause permanent damage to the battery by over-charging.
Charger shall be designed with a performance on float charge such that with the output voltage set at
approximately 1.4 V per cell at 50% load and rated input voltage and frequency, the output voltage shall not
vary by more than plus or minus 2% with any combination of input supply voltage and frequency variation
as stipulated in this Specification and output current variation from 0-100% of rating.
Each charger shall have the charger on/off switch located inside the battery charger. An emergency stop-
switch along with suitable protection covering shall also be provided on the charger panel.
Each charger shall also have boost charging facility which shall be selectable by a float/boost charge
selection switch, and which will give boost charging of 1.60 (voltage control) -1.8 (current control) volts per
cell.
Fast recovery blocking diode shall be provided in the output circuit of each Charger to prevent current flow
from the D.C. Battery into the Charger.
The rectifier transformer shall be of a suitable design complies with the standard IEC 60076. The rating of
the transformer shall correspond to minimum 125% of the rating of associated rectifier assembly.
Transformer shall be suitably designed for minimum inrush current during start up; any additional circuitry
in this regard shall not be permitted. The transformer shall have a delta-connected primary and a star-
connected secondary.
Rectifier assemblies and semi-conducting devices employed in the charger shall be of the silicon type. They
shall be adequately rated, with due regard to air temperature within the charger enclosure, for the maximum
ambient temperature.
AC and DC switches shall be provided at the input and output with the adequate rating respectively. The
operating handle of the switch shall be fully insulated. The charger failure device shall detect the AC supply
voltage failure. The detecting device shall not operate on switching surges or transient loss of voltage due to
faults on the power system.
In addition, the charger shall be equipped with an MCB at the input and fuses and an off-load isolator at the
DC output. The battery charger shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual control of
output voltage and current. It shall have current limiting facility, where if the voltage control is in an
automatic mode, it shall cause a gradual lowering of the output voltage when the DC load current exceeds
the load limiting setting.
The current limiting characteristics shall be such that any overload or short circuit in the DC system shall
neither damage the charger, nor cause blowing of any of the charger fuses. The charger shall not trip on
overload or external short circuit.
Soft start features should be invariably provided to minimize the in-rush current. Uniform and smooth
adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic modes) shall be provided.
During boost charging, the battery charger shall operate on constant current mode (when automatic regulator
is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the boost charging current continuously over a range of 50 to
100% of the rated output current for boost mode.
For limiting the output voltage of the charger, a potentiometer shall be provided, whereby it shall be possible
to set the upper limit of the boost voltage as per the specified value. The charger shall automatically switch
into the equalizing/boosting mode when the battery has discharged to a pre-set value.
A timer to control the boost charging time shall be provided. The charger shall be able to recharge the battery
after a complete discharge cycle, i.e., to 95% of its capacity within a time interval of not more than 10 hrs
and in the meantime supply the entire equipment design load.
Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in the charger to reduce as much as possible the ripple content and
also to suppress noise in the output voltage irrespective of the DC load, especially when the battery is not
connected to the charger.
The charger output voltage (battery disconnected from the charger) shall be free of noise. The interference
voltage, frequency evaluated, shall be as per the ITU-T.
The input of the charger shall be equipped with a device, which shall cause the charger to switch off in the
event of DC output over voltage. Short circuit at the charger output shall not cause any damage to the
charger. The construction of the charger shall ensure easy access to all components smooth and safe
maintenance. A thermal overload relay incorporating a distinct single phasing protection shall be provided
for the AC input.
The relay shall trip the input AC switch. AC and DC Voltmeters and Ammeters (with shunt) shall be
provided for the charger/distribution board, at the input and output correspondingly. The instruments shall be
flush type, dust proof and moisture resistant. The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero
adjustment.
All fuses shall be of the HRC type with auxiliary alarm contacts for remote supervision. Fuses shall be
mounted on fuse holders mounted on fuse bases. Insulated fuse pulling handle shall be supplied for each
charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen such as to cater for the protection purpose.
The design of the charger shall not allow any reverse current flow from the DC battery into the charger.
A Hardware Lockable override selector switch shall be provided inside the charger unit to enable a first
conditioning charge to be made, in line with the battery manufacturer’s recommendations, for batteries,
which are shipped dry and require forming at site.
The battery charger shall be self-protecting from a short circuit on the output by operating in current limit
down to a short on the output. The charger shall return to normal operation when the short circuit is
removed. The use of fuses, MCBs or other similar devices will not be acceptable in meeting this
requirement.
Suitable voltage monitoring relay shall be provided for each charger to detect failure of the incoming supply
and failure of the dc output when in float/boost charge mode. These relays shall operate appropriate
indicating lamps on the respective charger front panel and shall have additional voltage free contacts for
operating remote and supervisory alarms. These alarms shall be immune from normal supply fluctuations
and shall not be initiated when anyone charger is taken out of service.
Each charger shall have protection against overloads and limit the output to 125% of its maximum rating.
The charger shall also be fitted with a device to de-energize the charger in the event of any dc output over
voltage.
Audible noise while in operation shall not exceed 65dB at full load measured at any point of operation at a
distance of 1meter away from any surface.
Lamp/LED test facilities shall be included in each charger. Indication lamps shall be LED type with bright
illumination and long life.
29.4.6 Distribution Board
At the input of the 220V DC distribution board, the following logic shall be satisfied in order to achieve the
power supply security (reference shall be made to the respective drawing):
 Normal operation: Two separate infeed from charger 1/battery B1 and charger 2/ battery B2.
 One battery infeed off (under voltage): automatic changeover by closing the DC bus coupler,
with manual restoration.
In case of a major shutdown at the station, (both AC infeed to the chargers are lost), the coupling switch
shall remain open. In case of an auto-changeover the Bus coupler shall close after the respective incomer
opens. However, manually selected switching operations shall permit momentary paralleling of the two DC
systems, to ensure uninterrupted power supply. On initiation, the operation shall be automatic.
Fault on one DC bus section: the respective infeed CB to clear, however, the bus coupler to remain open.
Key-locked switch for auto-changeover blocking (e.g., maintenance).
The above shall be achieve by combination of 3-position Key-Lockable selector switch marked as
“Maintenance – Manual – Auto” and push buttons for operation. The selection mode status shall be transfer
to SCADA.
Cabling and wiring terminations shall be shrouded to avoid accidental short circuit or earthing of the battery.
PVC insulation shall be used for fuse wiring connections.
Suitable voltage control shall be provided to avoid over-voltages on the DC busbar sections, each
independently arranged from voltage supervision circuits of the chargers.
Suitable means shall be provided such that when the charger is operating in float charge mode and when
switching to boost charge mode, the voltage at the outgoing distribution terminals shall be automatically
limited to within the tolerances.
This shall be achieved by the insertion of voltage dropping diodes into the input circuit and the diodes shall
have a rating of at least twice the board's rated load.
A minimum of three diode strings (stages) shall be provided, which shall be inserted into the input circuit of
DCDB in stages to provide the range of voltage control in DCDB within limits as specified elsewhere in this
section. It is preferred that during float mode the diode assembly shall not be included in the circuitry.
Suitable alarm relays shall be provided to monitor at the distribution board both high and low battery
voltages to pre-set values. The relays shall be fitted with variable time delays adjustable between 0-30
seconds. The relays shall indicate the fault condition locally and shall have two sets of voltage free contacts
for indication to SCADA and the RCP.
The DC panels shall have alarm indications such as:

 Lamp test
 Supply infeed/bus coupler on/off
 Supply infeed/bus coupler trip
 DC feeder trip (one for all feeders per panel)
 Auto-changeover.
In addition, one general DC alarm, which shall be connected to the alarm panel in the station control room,
shall be provided.
At the output, the 48V DC distributed boards with 2x100% Redundant Ni-Cd batteries and 2x100% Charger
shall comprise double-pole switches at the output to feed all various equipment. The switches (circuit
breakers) shall be equipped with an auxiliary alarm contact for alarming and monitoring the
tripping/switching off events.
29.4.7 Instrumentation and Control
29.4.7.1Devices on the Instrument Panel
The following devices shall be furnished and mounted on the instrument panel of the chargers (measuring
instruments shall be of the digital type):
i. MANUAL-AUTOMATIC changeover switch.
ii. One AC voltmeter for reading the AC input supply voltage.
iii. One AC ammeter for reading the AC input current.
iv. Three dc voltmeters with suppressed zero (one for the charger output, one for the battery
voltage and one for the load voltage).
v. Three dc ammeter, (one for the charger output current, one for the battery current bi-
directional and one for the load current) with internally mounted shunt as applicable.
vi. Potentiometer for "equalizing charge" current setting (in MANUAL position).
vii. Potentiometer for "float charge" voltage setting (in AUTOMATIC position).
viii. Potentiometer for adjusting dc output voltage (in MANUAL position) with the ranges of
positions necessary to set the charger from "float charge" to "equalizing charge".
ix. A timer with a range of 0 to 24 hours to control the equalizing period.
The timer shall automatically be activated upon restoration of AC supply voltage following the loss of ac
input power.
29.4.7.2Visual and Alarm Indication
The following LED indications shall be provided in the charger and distribution panel to announce and
monitor the following events respectively:
 Test push button for checking all LEDs
 Charger supply on
 Charger supply fail
 Rectifier Fuse failure
 Charger fuse/MCB trip
 Load limiter operated
 DC output high
 DC output low
 Charger on equalising/boost
 Battery earth leakage for positive and negative
 Under voltage and over voltage
 Battery Ah available.
 Electrolyte Level Low
 High Temperature Alarm
Apart from the local alarm/indication on the panel following alarms /indication shall be wired to
SCADA:
 220 V DC Battery Charger -1 Faulty
 220 V DC Battery Charger -2 Faulty
 220 V DC Station Battery -1 faulty
 220 V DC Station Battery -2 faulty
 220 V DC Station Battery -1 electrolyte Level low
 220 V DC Station Battery - 2 electrolyte Level low
 220 V DC Station Battery -1 earth fault
 220 V DC Station Battery -2 earth fault
All the alarms for SCADA are minimum and subject to approval during detailed engineering.
DCDB Alarms shall be as a minimum, with the following alarms:
 Low DC Volts distribution- Alarm shall be initiated when the distribution or sub distribution
voltage reach below the limit set as approved.
 DCDB Config. Abnormal- Alarm shall be initiated if bus coupler is close or if
'Auto/Manual/OFF' selector switch selected in Manual or OFF mode or aux control supply
failure. (As applicable)
 Distribution MCB Trip - Alarm shall be initiated when any of the distribution MCB trips
 DC Earth Fault Alarm - Alarm shall be initiated when there is positive or negative earth fault in
the system
29.4.7.3Protection and Control Systems
The charger shall be equipped but not limited to with the following protective and control devices:
a) Charger shall be self-protected against high transient over-voltages in dc and ac control and
power circuits. This protection shall be built into the equipment and no special external
connections, configuration of leads or connections of any external equipment shall be required.
b) AC input thermal magnetic air circuit breaker (number of poles and interrupting capacity in
accordance with system requirements).
c) Protection against discharge of the battery into the battery chargers upon failure of the AC
supply, with automatic resumption of pre-set charging rate when power is restored.
d) Loss of AC power relays.
e) Low DC voltage relay.
f) DC over-voltage relay.
g) Any failure of the charger, detected by any of these alarms, or protective devices shall be
indicated locally, either by lights, or on the front of the rectifier and on local annunciation panel.
These alarms shall be possible for grouping in one common alarm for remote transmission.
h) Forced air-cooling system failure alarm shall be provided if such a cooling system is used.
i) HRC fuses open.
29.4.7.4Metering
An LCD monitoring panel shall be provided on the front of each charger. The LCD display shall be at least 2
lines x 20 characters, with green backlighting. All alarms and operating conditions shall be shown on the
digital display.
All alarms shall have site adjustable time delays from 1 second to 300 seconds to avoid spurious reporting.
Charger's digital display shall have accuracy to within 1%. Controls and alarms may be protected by a user
assignable password.
In LCD, the information shall be easily accessible with a menu driven screen. Readings shall be indicated up
to two decimal places. As a minimum, the following information shall be available for display:
 Input AC voltage - Line to line for each phase
 Input AC current for each phase
 Load Current
 Load Voltage
 Rectifier Current
 Rectifier Voltage
 Battery Current -Charge and discharge
 Battery Voltage
29.4.7.5Battery Charger
Each battery charger shall be provided with the following instruments:

Charger Output Voltage Voltmeter (0-120% max. boost output)
 Charger Output Current Ammeter (0-150% max. rated output).
 Battery charge/ discharge Current Ammeter (200% - 0 -200% normal standing load)
 AC input Voltmeter with Selector switch
 AC input current with selector switch.
Battery Charger 1/2 summary alarm, comprised of the mains failure, charger output failure and rectifier
failure conditions, shall be provided in the form of at least three sets of voltage free contacts for each charger
for use with the supervisory alarm scheme, to provide remote indication of these alarm conditions on the
substation common control panel and to operate a local indicator, labelled BATTERY CHARGER 1/2
FAULTY, to be mounted near the above instruments, one for each respective charger.
A common alarm shall be generated by the above monitoring devices for which at least three sets of voltage
free contacts shall be provided for use with the supervisory alarm scheme, to provide remote indication of
this alarm condition on the common control panel and to operate a local indicator, labelled BATTERY
FAULTY, which shall be mounted near the charger indicators.
29.4.7.6DC Distribution Board/Battery
The D.C. distribution board shall be provided with the following instruments, which shall be mounted on DC
distribution board:
 Output Voltage Voltmeter (0-120% max. rated output).
 Distribution Board Load Ammeter (0-150% normal standing load)
The D.C. system shall be fitted with monitoring devices to check the continuity of the battery circuit. In
particular, an alarm shall be provided if a battery fuse fails or if the battery circuit impedance rises above a
predetermined level due to poor intercell connection or any other reason.
Indications of the following status and alarm conditions shall be provided on respective DCBD & SCADA:
 DCDB – Incomer 1 Open/Closed/Trip Indication & alarm to local alarm & SCADA
 DCDB – Incomer 2 Open/Closed/Trip Indication & alarm to local alarm & SCADA
 DCDB – Bus Coupler Open/Closed/Trip Indication & alarm to local alarm & SCADA
29.4.7.7DC Bus Coupler
A double pole Bus coupler switch shall be located either in DCDB1 or DCDB 2 to couple DC Bus-1 and
Bus-2. The bus coupler shall be motorized switch disconnectors with facility of manual operation built in.
Under any circumstances, bus coupler shall not be permitted to close to a faulty bus. Necessary interlock
shall be provided to prevent the closing operation of bus coupler on bus fault. Incomer and bus coupler
switch disconnectors shall be capable of making to the maximum prospective fault current available at that
point of the system.
29.4.7.8Grouping of Alarms (SCMS & SCADA)
All alarms specified above shall have additional separate voltage free contacts for operating remote and
supervisory alarms. The alarms shall be grouped in the respective panels.
Battery and Charger related alarms shall be grouped at charger cubicle. The grouped alarms shall be wired to
the plant DCS/SCMS panel and configured for DCS/SCMS.
29.4.7.9Sound Control
The level of the sound generated by the Charger/VCU equipments, which is supplied under this
specification, shall meet the IEC requirements, as available.
29.4.8 Eye Wash Station
During the construction of Battery room, the contractor shall provide an eyewash unit inside the room. The
eyewash unit shall be identified with a highly visible sign.
Eyewash stations should be designed to deliver water to both eyes simultaneously. However; the volume
should not be at a velocity that may injure the eyes. The unit should be between 83.8 and 114.3 cm (33 to 45
inches) from the floor, and a minimum of 15.3 cm (6 inches) from the wall or nearest obstruction.
The unit should also be designed so that it can be activated in less than one second, and it remains
operational without the operator's hand on the valve (or lever, handle, etc.) and stops only with the re-
activation of the valve being located in an easily accessible place. Since the nozzles to eyewash stations
typically need to be protected from airborne contaminants, the units are to be designed such that the removal
of these covers should not require a separate motion by the user when the unit is activated.
Floor and surface finishes in the battery rooms shall be alkaline resistant.
Battery rooms and charger rooms shall be provided with properly secured wall-mounted thermometer.
Access to the battery room shall be independent. Any connection to the other rooms through battery room
shall not be permitted.
Any equipment shall not be located vertically above the batteries and shall have a minimum horizontal
separation of one meter from the nearest cell. All equipment in the battery room shall be suitable for
hazardous operation.
Return air-conditioning ducts from battery rooms shall be prohibited. The battery room temperature shall be
maintained equal to 25°C or less to ensure best battery performance and minimum service life of 25 Years.
29.4.9 Ventilation
Ventilation of Battery room shall be considered as below during the detailed engineering and construction.
At least two 'heavy duty, corrosion resistant and explosion proof exhaust fans (main and standby) each
designed for 100% continuous duty, for each battery room shall be provided with the electrical interlock to
operate automatically with an adjustable timer.
Free discharge of gas from battery room is a must. The minimum ventilation shall be as recommended by the
battery manufacturer.
The ventilation system is determined such that the hydrogen concentration shall be limited to less than 2% of
the total air volume of the battery room and with respect to the safety requirement for secondary batteries
and battery installation standard, EN 50272-2.
An interlock between the battery room exhaust fan and the boost charging function of the 110VDC C&P
chargers shall be provided, such that failure of exhaust fan shall bring the respective room battery chargers
from boost mode operation to float mode operation with a latched alarm on charger panel, as "Battery
Ventilation Fail".
This alarm should be grouped with battery charger failure alarm. Air inlets and outlets shall be located in
such a manner to provide effective cross ventilation over the batteries.
29.4.10 Nameplates, Labels and Markings
The nameplates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each battery bank, charger, on front as
well as rear sides, larger and bold nameplates shall be provided to identify the charger. Nameplates with full
and clear inscription shall also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various
equipment and ease of operation and maintenance.
29.4.11 Painting/Corrosion Protection
All surfaces that so require shall be prepared stripped, primed and painted in accordance with climatic
conditions defined.
The coating method of the envelope’s molten aluminium and welded pipe of aluminium is as follows:
 Layers: 1
 Layer thickness: 70 µm to a minimum
 Protection method: Surface preparation and 2-component paint.
 Colour code: RAL 7038 - RAL 9016 - RAL 7035. Another colour according to RAL should be
possible subject to detailed engineering
 Composition: Siloxane – Epoxy
The used lacquers will be free of harmful materials like cadmium, lead and chromic acids.
29.4.12 Shipping and Site Assembly
The batteries shall be shipped empty along with required quantity of electrolyte for initial filling at site.
29.4.13 Testing and Inspection
29.4.13.1 Type Tests
Type test reports for tests performed on battery, charger and DCDB as per relevant IEC where applicable,
shall be submitted. If evidence of successfully carrying out the above tests is not available, the above tests
shall be carried out on one unit in presence of purchaser without any extra cost.
 Battery - Type test in accordance with IEC 60623

 Battery Charger - Type tests according to IEC 60146
 DC Switchboard - Type tests according to IEC 60439
The Bidder/Contractor shall supply certified copies of type test certificates covering the proposed battery
chargers of similar operating range, data features, design and construction.
29.4.13.2 Routine Tests:
The Bidder/Contractor is required to carry out routine tests on each assembled and finished battery &
charger system to demonstrate the integrity of the DC supply system.
Routine test certificates shall be submitted for Owner’s Engineer/Consultant review and approval before
shipment of the battery & charger. The battery & charger shall pass all the routine tests as laid down in the
relevant IEC Standards.
The visual inspection, which shall determine conformity of the battery & charger equipment with the
requirement, shall be part of the routine tests. In addition to the standard routine tests on the charger, the
following tests shall be performed:
 Load test
 Automatic voltage regulator operation
 Performance test on the completed panel
 Insulation test
 Surges withstand capability test
 Load limiting feature.
29.4.13.3 Site Tests:
Upon installation of the battery and battery charger system, they shall be tested in the presence of Owner’s
Engineers/Consultant.
29.4.13.4 Battery Charger
Physical Site Inspection
a) Checking of the battery charger cabinet interior to verify clearances between live electrical parts,
insulation of phase and neutral buses from cabinet, and tightness of all mechanical connections.
b) Checking of main breaker trip element dimensions and ratings at the battery charger cabinet shall be
performed.
c) Checking the operation of the main breaker by application open-close-open sequence manually.
d) Checking of wiring termination and conductor sizes.
e) Checking of levelling and alignment of installed battery charger cabinets.
f) Checking of tightness of connections and fastenings and use of proper tools.
g) Checking the correct phasing of equipment connections.
h) Checking the proper grounding.
i) Checking of all current carrying connections, including bus connections and wiring, as installed by
Bidder/Contractor, in agreement with wiring drawings.
j) Checking of physical integrity of major parts and all instruments and components.
k) Checking of proper battery charger cabinet and cable identification.
l) Checking the correct circuit fusing.
m) Checking the ratings, dimensions, protection class of all major components, as panels, cubicles,
silicon rectifiers, buses, circuit breaker, fuses, relays, transformers, etc.
Tests
a) Polarity check.
b) Battery voltage check.
c) Proper settings and calibrations.
d) Meter calibration and operation.
e) Functional check of all alarm circuits including low voltage, ground detection and AC failure. f)
Insulation resistance test.
g) Output ripple test.
h) The ability of the charger to maintain this desired operating voltage level.
i) Testing of breaker trip settings.
j) Measurement the continuity of each current carrying connections by MEGGER.
k) Testing the changing output voltage function by disconnected battery.
l) Testing the quick charge and trickle charge mode.
m) Testing the charging current limiting (maximum current) by short-circuited DC output.
n) Testing of automatic periodic dis-charging/re-charging.
o) Testing the Battery Charger inputs/digital outputs and control (LED’s) and protection functions
at/from the Battery Charger Board, from the station level via the MBSC System (substation control
room) and from the Area Control Centre level.
p) Testing the Battery Charger inputs/digital outputs, alarm indications (LED’s) and fault monitoring at
the Battery Charger Board and at the sequence event recorder (substation control room) and at the Area
Control Centre level.
29.4.13.5 Battery
Physical Site Inspection
a) Checking of battery room. It shall be clean and dry.

b) Checking of ventilation system operating.
c) Washing water is easily available and accessible.
d) Checking of the battery assembly to verify clearances.
e) Checking of properly installed cell terminal coverings.
f) Battery cells are properly installed and numbered.
g) Checking of battery assembly wiring.
h) Checking of wiring termination and conductor sizes to and from battery assembly.
i) Checking all wire connections to verify that wire connections are adequately tightened.
j) Checking of levelling and alignment of installed battery assembly.
k) Checking of tightness of connections and fastenings and cell links are tight, and use of proper tools.
l) Checking of correct polarity marking are clearly made for each cell and equipment connections.
m) Checking of proper grounding.
n) Measurement the continuity of each current carrying connection (MEGGER).
o) Checking of physical integrity of major parts and all instruments and components.
p) Checking of proper battery and cable identifications.
q) Checking of correct circuit fusing.
r) Checking of ratings of all major components and verification equipment’s accordance with the
specification.
s) Check for cracks and/or solution leakage at battery housing.
t) Check Battery electrolyte i.e., level, color and specific gravity.
u) Checking of fuse box alarm.
29.4.14 Technical Guarantees
The supplier shall guarantee the values as per manufacturer’s standards and further detailed technical data
sheet for purchase review.
29.4.15 Warranty
220V Batteries, Charger, DCDB shall be supply in accordance with the technical part of the MFS and shall
be guaranteed “Back-To-Back” with Masdar requirement.
29.4.16 Quality Assurance
Manufacturer/supplier shall implement a quality management system in accordance with the stipulations of
the general purchasing conditions.
29.4.17 Inspection Points Plan
Manufacturer/supplier shall submit explicitly to the purchase Inspection plan and update for each and
individual phases of procurement, manufacture, testing and shipment. Manufacturer/supplier shall submit
internal procedures to purchaser for review and acceptance.
Purchase shall select the points on inspection plan, which they or their representatives shall witness. During
the inspection visit, the Purchaser reserves the right to review applicable documentation that has not been
presented for his approval (ex: manufacturing procedures etc.).
Inspection Points Plan shall comprise of minimum following sections: -

a) Materials Inspection
b) Inspection of Manufacturing
c) Examination and Tests
d) Protection, cleaning, painting, labelling, delivery and final documentation.
29.4.18 Transportation
Batteries and Chargers when prepared for shipment shall remain in SITU until the equipment is delivered at
site.
29.4.19 Operation and Maintenance Manual
Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be submitted for approval which shall contain details
of oil processing at site. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall contain copies of approved As-Built
Drawings. Soft copies of O&M Manual shall also be submitted in pdf format with proper index/mark for
easy retrieval.
29.4.20 Lists of Applicable Codes and Standards
Unless otherwise mentioned in the corresponding documents, the offered equipments and applicable
components must be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with all relevant International Codes
and Standards (IEC), as indicated below.
In the event of conflict, between any of the codes and standards listed, the most stringent requirement shall
apply and the FINAL Decision rests with Project Company, without assigning any reason to
Bidder/Contractor/
Should there be any possibility to sub-contract complete or partial work to others, then it shall be sole
responsibility of manufacturer/supplier to ensure subcontracted party or parties are fully conversant with
applicable requirement of International Codes, Standards and specification. Client/End-user reserves the
right of approving sub-contracting party/s.
 IEC 60623 Secondary Cells and Batteries Containing Alkaline Or
Other Non-Acid Electrolytes – Vented Nickel-Cadmium
Prismatic Rechargeable Single Cells
 BS 5634 Testing Potassium Hydroxide Used in Alkaline Cell
 BS 381C Specification for Colours for Identification Coding
and Special Purposes
 IEC 60146 Specification for Semiconductor Rectifier Equipment.
 IEC 60146 Semiconductor Converters – General Requirements
And Line Commutated Converters
 BS 88 Cartridges Fuses for Voltages Up to and Including
1000V AC and 500V DC
 IEEE 1115 IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Nickel-
Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications
 DIN VDE 0875 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical Lighting and
Similar Equipment.
30 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)
The Contractor shall transport, install, test and commission an uninterruptible power system (UPS) to feed
all the components that cannot suffer any power outage and cannot be fed in direct current such as control
loads, and instrumentation loads. UPS shall be capable of supplying its associated connected load for a
period of Five (5) hours.
An UPS power supply system of adequate size and autonomy shall be provided for all consumers which
require un-interruptible supply (e.g., workstations).
The UPS system shall MANDATORILY consist of two (2) independently operating units.
Each system shall be complete and include, among others, the following items:
 one (1) thyristor controlled 220 V DC / 230 V AC inverters.

 one (1) thyristor static transfer switches
 one (1) manual bypass switches
 one (1) distribution boards with control devices
 monitoring system with three (3) contacts for each alarm of the 240 V AC UPS
 UPS enclosure, similar in characteristics with the enclosures of the AC and DC switchgear.
30.1 General Design Requirements
The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system shall provide continuous uninterrupted AC power to
consumers requiring safe AC supply, such as SCMS, etc. The UPS system shall comprise of all necessary
control, static switches, manual bypass switch, etc. necessary for the reliable operation of UPS system under
all operating conditions of the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation.
The required UPS shall conform in all respects to international recognized standards for engineering design
and workmanship and should be capable of performing continuous commercial operation in accordance with
the specifications and the guaranteed parameters.
The required UPS shall comply mainly with IEC 62040 standard, along other standards as detailed below:
 IEC 60747-6 Semiconductor devices - Discrete devices - Part 6: Thyristors
 IEC 60896 Stationary lead acid batteries - General requirements and methods of test
 IEC 61936-1 Power installations exceeding 1 kV AC - Common rules
 IEC 62040-1 Uninterruptible power supply systems (UPS)
- Part 1: General and safety requirements for UPS used in operator access area.
- Part 2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
- Part 3: Method of specifying the performance and test requirements
The UPS to be offered shall be complete in all respects necessary for their effective and trouble-free
operation when connected to the system.
The UPS system shall comprise but not be limited to the following major items:
 rectifiers
 inverter
 static transfer switch
 manual by-pass switch with bypass transformer
 UPS distribution with MCBs / MCCBs
 UPS battery.
The output power shall be designed to meet the requirements of the consumers requiring uninterrupted
supply.
The UPS shall be suitable for continuous operation, and function satisfactorily with a combination of
variations of the incoming supply voltage and frequency as defined in data sheets.
The UPS system shall be fed from LV AC essential switchboard via suitably rated MCCBs.
The enclosure of the UPS shall be in accordance with the chapter “Electrical Cubicles”.
Manual by-pass switch with bypass transformer and outgoing feeders shall not be installed separately from
the rectifier / inverter to allow maintenance of these, while the consumers are on bypass operation.
As a minimum, the following status and alarm indications shall be provided locally and for remote indication:
 AC Supply Fail
 Battery - High Voltage
 Battery - Low Voltage
 Charger Fail Indication
 Battery Earth Fault
 DC Supply Fail
 Float Charger On
 Boost Charger On
 Inverter Fail Indication
 UPS on bypass
 Output MCB Trip (Common for all MCBs).
30.2 UPS Battery
The batteries shall be valve-regulated Nickel Cadmium (Ni-Cd) type, rechargeable, sealed type, suitable for
indoor installation in cubicles in electrical operating rooms.
The overall battery installations shall comply with the latest versions of the following standards:
 IEC 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes
- Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells.
 IEC 62259 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes
- Nickel-cadmium prismatic secondary single cells with partial gas recombination.
 IEC 62485-1 Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations
- Part 1: General safety information
 IEC 62485-2 Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations
- Part 2: Stationary batteries
The battery shall be mounted inside a battery cubicle. The battery cubicle shall be sufficiently ventilated by
natural ventilation and shall be suitably protected against corrosion by the battery electrolyte. The battery
shall be spaced to permit sufficient access to all individual cells to allow replacement of cells and/or
checking cell voltages and connections.
The discharge capacity of the battery shall be sufficient to supply the loads during a discharge time given in
data sheets of this specification.
The battery sizing shall consider that the service voltage required shall not drop below recommended figures
(permitted voltage tolerances of the individual loads) and the voltage fluctuations caused by power
consumption of various loads shall be kept within permitted limits.
A minimum of 25% spare capacity in each battery shall be considered while sizing the batteries and ageing
factor as per standards / as recommended by the manufacturer for a life period (see also data sheets) shall be
considered.
30.3 Inverters
The inverters with static transfer switches shall be supplied and installed to provide power supply, voltage
and frequency as detailed in the data sheets. The output of the invertors shall be continuously synchronized
to the input of the static transfer switches.
The inverters shall have load switches for the input circuits, as well as the contactors locally/manually and
automatically operated for the output circuits, located upstream the static switches.
The inverters shall have overload and short circuit protection.
30.4 Static Transfer Switches
A static transfer switch shall be provided to transfer the critical load from the inverter directly to the main
power source (via bypass transformer), and vice versa, without interrupting or degrading computer
operations. This operation shall occur if the inverter system fails or an overload beyond the capabilities of
the inverters develops either by load faults or inrush currents. The static transfer switch shall consist of static
interrupters located on the output of each inverter and a static switch on the bypass transformer.
The static switch shall be capable to feed the output loads and shall be rated 30 % above the nominal inverter
rating.
Internal failures in an inverter unit shall cause the static interrupter to trip with minimum damage to the
inverter and isolate only the inverter which failed. Failure of two inverters or overload conditions discussed
above shall remove the inverters and bypass the main supply. Necessary voltage, frequency and automatic
synchronizing devices for synchronization of the inverter outputs with the main supply shall be provided.
30.5 Manual By-pass Switches
This switch shall allow the load to be supplied from the AC distribution board, during periods when the UPS
is being repaired. The switch transfer shall be "make-before-break" to assure loads power continuity.
Isolating Bypass Transformer
Bypass transformers shall be single phase two winding isolating transformers with electrostatic screen to
provide galvanic isolation between LVAC incoming supply and UPS output.
Tappings shall be provided to permit matching of the output voltage to the requirements of the load. The
trans-formers shall be of the air-cooled type, rated to accommodate overloading and to meet the performance
required in the transient and short-circuit states and shall comply with IEC 60076 as appropriate.
30.6 UPS Output Protection (Including Outgoing Lines)
UPS outgoing feeders shall be protected by MCBs/MCCBs. The rating and tripping characteristic of the
MCBs/MCCBs shall be selected carefully to ensure protection of the connected load and its supply cable.
Due care must be taken to ensure the following:
 MCBs/MCCBs of outgoing feeders shall not trip due to possible inrush currents of the protected
system.
 MCBs/MCCBs must trip within the times required by IEC 60364 in case of fault at the remote
end of the feeder.
 For UPS systems, the type and routine tests shall be as per IEC 60146-1-1.
 For DC switchgear, the verifying and routine tests shall be as per IEC 61439 and IEC 60947.
 For batteries, the type- and batch acceptance tests shall be as per IEC 60623 / IEC 62259.
31 Earthing & Lightning System
The Contractor shall install and test a collective earthing system, or its extension where required. The
earthing system must include the grounding network of the Plant Substation (as well as the connections to all
foundations, structures and equipment thereof), the grounding of the main electrical switching equipment,
the grounding network of the Earthing & Auxiliary Transformer, the perimeter fence and the cable
conductors and grounding connectors necessary for interconnections of the different grounding systems, as
well as any other metallic equipment.
The earthing system must be installed to ensure the safety of the equipment and personnel at the Site and its
surroundings.
For complete PV Farm, Plant Substation and Remote End Offtaker Substation, Bare Copper Conductor must
be utilized for Main Earthing Mess, Earthing Risers, Equipment Earthing Connection. Galvanised Steel or
any other materials shall be REJECTED.
PV Farm must be in Equipotential with the Plant Substation and accordingly, PV Farm Earthing shall be
Mandatorily considered the Grid Fault Current as 31.5kA.
Earthing Calculation must be executed by considering the Grid Fault Current (I G) as 40kA, mandatorily in
Earthing Calculation. Plant Substation shall be connected to the PV Farm at minimum Ten (10) earthing
points maintaining equipotential.
For Earthing Calculation only CYMGRD Software shall be considered. Any other Earthing Software
(CDEGS, ETAP, others) Calculation shall become null and void.
The resistance to earth of any part of the earthing system for the Plant Substations shall not exceed 0.5ohm,
which value shall be demonstrated by calculation and during construction of the plant substation.
The Lightning System for Control Building of the Plant Substation, Inverter Duty Transformer, 33kV RMU,
PV Modules, shall be through Bare Copper Conductor Only. On the roof of Control Building of the Plant
Substation, Bare Copper Flat Strip or Conductor with dimensions 30x6 sq.mm. shall be provided duly
clamped at maximum distance of one (1) and shall be connected to the Ground through Disconnecting Links.
Separate and Dedicated Earthing Test Pit must be provided for Lightning System and Earthing System. Each
lightning protection system shall be bonded directly to the main earthing mesh system through Copper Y/G
Conductor.
The grounding system shall include overhead ground wires, underground grid, ground rods and connections.
The Contractor shall conduct Site measurement of electrical soil resistivity, and also calculations required for
the Contractor to provide the design of all earthing facilities and lightning protection facilities.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the earthing system, which is part of the Design
provided by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Company. The Contractor shall install the connections
of the main network of the earthing system and the earthing rods using exothermic welding or compression
connectors for grounding, which should be approved by the Company.
 Distance between the adjacent Bare conductor for Main Earthing Mesh of Plant Substation
must be maintained <=10meters.
 Distance between the adjacent Bare Copper Flat for Lightning System on the Roof of Plant
Substation must be maintained <=5meters.
Enough safe margin shall be maintained between maximum actual touch potential and maximum permissible
touch potential. To form an equipotential bonding, all the equipment and building reinforcement bar shall be
connected to main earth grid.
Cable trays and its supports steel work shall be bonded with copper conductor of minimum 70Sq.mm (for
between cable supports & 16 Sq.mm (for between cable trays) to form an equipotential bonding.
All tanks shall be grounded at two points with grounding cable connections from two different points of the
grounded grid.
The achieved step potential beyond the substation periphery shall be within the limit. The achieved touch
potential outside the substation shall be verify for over a meter distance.
31.1 Lists of Applicable Codes and Standards
31.2 Table-1 Design Data Sheet
Sl.
Description Data
No.
1 Maximum Grid Fault Current (IG) LG Fault Current 40kA
2 Fault Duration 0.5s
3 Decrement Factor 1
4 Split Factor 0.8
5 Earth Fault Current (kA, sec)
110kV System 40kA, 1s
33kV System 31.5kA, 1s or 3s
6 For PV Farm
33kV System 31.5kA, 1s or 3s
7 Maximum Allowable Temperature (°C)
Copper Bare Conductor 250
Y/G PVC Sleeve Copper Conductor 160
8 Ambient Temperature (°C)
Ground 30
Air 45
9 Buried Bare Conductor mesh
Conductor Size (Minimum) 300 sq.mm.
Depth of Burial 1m
Mesh Size 10 x 10m
10 For Lightning Protection Bare Conductor mesh
Conductor Size (Minimum) 300 sq.mm.
Mesh Size 5 x 5m
Numbers of concrete inspection pits with concrete lids with
11 isolation facility (with 20 mm dia. & 6 m long rod minimum)
for the following
Power Transformer area 2
Earthing Cum Auxiliary Transformer area 2
33kV Switchgear area 2
Periphery 4
12 Conductor size for transformer neutral 300 sq.mm.
13 Number of auxiliary mats (grids) in following areas
Conductor Area 300 sq.mm.
Substation Control Building 1
110kV Outdoor Switchyard Area 1
Fire Pump Room 1
Number of risers (minimum) with PVC Sleeve for Y/G
14
Copper Conductor in the following areas
33kV Switchgear 2
Power transformers 6
Earthing Cum Auxiliary Transformers 6
Control Room 1
LVAC Room 2
Battery Room 1
Fence 4
Other Auxiliary Equipment’s 1 each (where required)
Type of joints between the conductors of the main grid
15 Exothermic Welding
Exothermic and grid to risers
16 Type of Connections with Equipment Bolted Type
17 Grid Resistance Ohms Less than 0.5 ohm
Minimum size of conductor with green/yellow PVC sleeve
18
for equipment earthing (Sq.mm)
Power Transformer, Earthing Transformer 300 sq.mm.
110kV Air Insulated Switchgear 300 sq.mm.
Main LVAC switchboard 300 sq.mm.
110kV Control and Relay panels 185 sq.mm.
Other auxiliary equipment 185 sq.mm.
Fence 70 sq.mm.
Cable Support 70 sq.mm.
Additional earth rods required to get specified grid
19
Resistance
Diameter of the rod (mm)(minimum) 20
Length & Number of rods Based on design calculation
31.3 Earthing system design
As a general concept, a full underground and above-ground earthing/grounding system shall be provided for
both Plant Substation and PV Plant, which shall be MANDATORILY interconnected with each other
Earthing at least minimum five (5) points, as per IEEE 2778-2020.
Earthing & Lightning for both PV Farm and Plant Substation shall be through Copper Conductor only.
The earthing system and installations shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the standards
referenced within this specification and shall be in accordance with "The Guide for Safety in Alternating
Current Substation Grounding" as published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Incorporated, Publication No. IEEE 80, 81, 2778-2020.
The earthing/grounding system shall include earthing grid, raisers, grounding rods and all required
earthing/grounding connections.
The function of an earthing/grounding system for an electrical installation shall be threefold:

 To maintain the potential of any part of the installation at a definite value with respect to the
ground.
 To allow current to flow in the event of a fault to ground, so that the protective equipment will
operate, and the faulty circuit thus become isolated.
 To ensure that in the event of a fault, equipment normally ‘dead’ (unenergized) does not attain a
dangerous potential above or below ground.
The Contractor shall present calculations to show the earthing system meets these requirements and can be
shown to be safe in terms of touch, step and transferred potentials.
Earthing/grounding systems shall perform satisfactorily for the whole lifetime of the project without
deterioration due to corrosion. It should continually maintain the low resistance to the ground, satisfy thermal
stability, and be capable of carrying maximum anticipated full fault currents without deterioration.
The design of the earthing requirements for the various voltage level switchyards/switchgears shall be
considered independently. The earthing/grounding system, even when designed with a very low resistance,
cannot be considered as an equal-voltage surface.
Substantial system voltage differences may occur and may directly influence through a number of factors
such as system resistance, system geometry and distribution of ground currents, ground resistivity, and
frequency of the transient. Nevertheless, each sub-system shall be adequately bonded together during
normal system operation.
Electrical measurements of the subsoil at various depths shall be made at the site in order to determine the
layered effects of the ground from which the effective ground resistivity and hence the expected resistance of
the proposed earth grid system may be predicted.
If a plot or an area of it will be filled with a soil layer > 1 m to raise the level, two soil resistivity
measurements – one before and one after the filling – shall be carried out. Based on the results of these
measurements and taking into account the system parameters, the appropriate calculation and design shall
then be worked out.
The calculation shall indicate areas where impermissible touch and step voltage exists. This shall include
also the surrounding area approximately 3 m outside the boundary), where people/vehicles are likely to pass
by.
Soil composition may be highly corrosive and special consideration shall be given to this problem. The
earthing grid shall be effectively protected against corrosion. Cathodic protection, if considered, may
adversely affect other equipment and shall be subject to approval by the Employer/Engineer.
In actual design, the earthing system shall take the form of a combination of grids of buried conductors and
earth rods driven vertically into the ground. Within the grid, conductors shall be laid in parallel lines at
reasonably uniform spacing. They shall be located along rows of structures or equipment to facilitate the
making of earth connections, where practical.
The earthing/grounding system installation shall be closely coordinated with the relevant parts of the civil
works and have to be checked with the detailed civil engineering drawings related to all structures, including
foundations. The structural reinforcing bar, rebar, within building columns and slabs shall be made
electrically continuous.
Electrical continuity shall be assured by use of either proprietary rebar clamps or by exothermic welding
across rebar sections.
The design of earthing/grounding system, the methods of earthing/grounding, and the shielding of control
circuits shall not affect the control equipment.
Upon approving the calculation and respectively the earthing/grounding design the Contractor shall
commence the implementation of the earthing/grounding system accordingly.
The main earth grid and each subsidiary earth grid shall have a cross sectional area, as required by fault
currents, of not less than 0.5 s duration.
Connections to the grid of all non-current carrying metallic parts, which might become energized by chance,
such as metallic structures, building earth, equipment, earth rods, water pipes, etc. MUST NOT be less than
specified in the Table-1 Design Sheet and shall be of mechanical ruggedness.
The spacing between conductors forming the mesh system shall be such as to limit the grid potential rise to a
value that limits the touch voltage to a value not greater than the maximum tolerable touch potential,
assuming a fault clearance time equal to that of the main protection equipment being provided.
Each group of earth electrodes shall be connected to the main earth grid through connections having a cross
sectional area of not less than specified in the Table-1 Design Sheet, which shall be protected from
corrosion.
The grid shall be subdivided into a number of sections, interconnected with test links. The test links shall be
accessible from above-ground.
Areas of grid where high concentrations of fault currents can appear, as at neutral earthing connections, shall
have reinforced conductor sizes, where necessary, as to handle adequately the highest fault current and its
duration.
In case the equipment is widely spaced in the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation, individual local grids may be
established at the various equipment locations and the local grids shall be interconnected and connected to
the earthing grid.
Interconnecting conductors shall not be less than the size of the conductor for the main grid.
Metallic parts of all equipment, other than those forming part of an electrical circuit, shall be connected
directly to the main earth system via a single conductor. The arrangement of the meshed earth system shall
be such as to minimize the length of these single connections.
All non-accessible buried connections within, or to the earth grid, shall be affected by either brazing, using
zinc-free brazing material with a melting point of not less than 600°C, or by approved exothermic welding.
All exposed joints shall be at a minimum height of 150 mm above floor or ground level.
Earth conductor joints that are required to be broken for testing or maintenance shall have tinned mating
surfaces.
Where construction activities within the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation outdoor area require or cause the
existing earth grid to be either exposed or suffer damage, all necessary earth grid reinstatement work and any
associated civil work is deemed to be within the Contractor’s scope of work.
Equipotential bonding shall be undertaken to prevent the occurrence of excessive touch potentials on
conductive parts of the installation which are not part of a current carrying electrical circuit.
From the point of view of the possible damage to apparatus, the earthing system shall be such as to limit
voltage appearing between the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation equipment and the main body of earth, so that
insulation breakdown or burning does not occur on apparatus. For the same reason, voltage rise between
earthed points in the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation shall be kept to a minimum.
In addition, the effectiveness of any surge protection devices shall be fully realized by providing an adequate
earth path. In this case the earthing system shall not only be of low resistance, but of as low reactance as
practicable.
31.4 Equipment Earthing Connections
All external metal-clad equipment in 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation outdoor area, shall be provided with
earth bars externally installed adjacent to the equipment. The earth bars shall be used for bonding of
enclosures and ancillary equipment and for the attachment of portable earths when equipment is undergoing
maintenance. The earth bars shall be directly connected to the buried earth grid by a minimum of two
connections.
The number of earthing/grounding rods shall be defined according to earthing/grounding calculation.
Within the 110kV GIS room (As Applicable) and within the MV switchgear room, an earth bar shall be
installed around the perimeter of the room. The earth bar shall be used for bonding of enclosures, internal
equipment earth bars and ancillary equipment, and for the attachment of portable earths when equipment is
undergoing maintenance.
The earth bar shall be directly connected to the buried earth grid by a minimum of two connections, but in
any case, at maximum every 10 m of building earth ring length. The minimum conductor size shall be as
defined in the Table-1 Design Sheet and shall be yellow-green PVC insulated stranded copper conductor.
Where the main LV switchgear is located internally within the control building, an earth bar directly
connected to the buried earth grid shall be provided. The earth bar shall be used for bonding of enclosures,
internal equipment earth bars and ancillary equipment, and for the attachment of portable earths when
equipment is undergoing maintenance.
The earth bar shall be directly connected to the buried earth grid by a minimum of two connections. The
minimum conductor size shall be as defined in the Table-1 Design Sheet and shall be yellow-green PVC
insulated stranded copper conductor.
A separate earth bar shall be provided within the control and relay room for the connection of the instrument
earth bars provided within control and telecommunications equipment for the earthing of instrument cable
screens.
Each instrument earth bar shall be directly connected to the buried earth grid by a single connection to
prevent circulating current and noise. The minimum conductor size shall be as defined in the Table-1 Design
Sheet and shall be yellow-green PVC insulated stranded copper conductor.
The secondary of current transformers shall be connected to ground at only one point.
Steel fences within and around 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation and/or switchyard areas shall be connected to
the earthing/grounding system at different intervals. Touch and step potentials on both sides of the fences
must be within the specified limits.
The points of bonding to the earthing / grounding grid shall not exceed 10 m. A detailed calculation is
necessary to ensure touch voltages are safe unless it is possible to install a grading electrode or a perimeter
electrode typically 1 m away and buried 1 m deep. Gate openings in fence-lines shall be bonded across
between posts with a minimum conductor of 70 mm 2 to prevent differences in potential. Gate hinges shall be
bonded with 35 mm2 flexible braid conductor.
The maximum resistance to ground from the connection point on equipment in any facility shall not exceed
0.5 Ω, when measured by standard ground resistance measurement techniques in dry season.
All earthing conductors passing through concrete shall be installed in PVC ducts/pipe. All such cable
exit/entry points shall be sealed to provide vermin, insect proof, and water-tight sealed.
1. Earthing Conductor Connections

Earthing conductor connections shall be done by bolting and/or exothermic welding. Due care must be taken
to avoid electrochemical corrosion when interconnecting different materials.
2. Power Transformer
An earthing mesh shall be installed underneath each power transformer.
Tanks of power transformers shall be connected to the earthing system at least on two diagonally opposite
positions to two different points of the earth grid.
Grounded neutrals of 33/110 kV power transformers shall be connected through neutral grounding
resistance, to be used for the limitation of single-phase short circuit currents, to two separate earthing rods.
The earthing rods shall be connected to the Earthing System at two different points of the earth grid.
Ground neutrals of 33/0.4 kV earthing, and auxiliary power transformers shall be connected by two insulated
copper conductors to two separate earthing rods. The earthing rods shall be connected to the Earthing System
at two different points of the earth grid.
3. Steel Structures
Steel structures shall be connected to the earth grid via two different risers to two different points of the earth
grid.
4. Outdoor Switchgear
Besides the earth connections of the equipment, the structures shall be earthed at least on two diagonally
opposite positions to two different points of the earth grid.
Earthing switches shall be connected directly to the earth grid, not via the steel structure.
5. Surge Arrester
The surge arrester earthing terminal shall be connected via a surge counter directly to the earthing grid, not
via the steel structure. The connection from the earthing terminal to the surge counter must be done by
insulated copper cable with adequate withstand voltage. The earthing terminal of the surge counter shall be
connected to a dedicated earthing rod, which shall be interconnected with the earthing grid.
6. Cubicles
Control/Protection Panels, Marshalling Cubicles, Transformer Control Panels, etc. shall be connected to the
Earthing System individually via two copper conductors of minimum 50 mm 2.
7. Cable Containment Systems

Individual sections of metallic cable trays or cable ladders must be electrically interconnected with each
other by approved means (e.g., bolted connections approved for this purpose or copper cable jumpers). A
minimum of one bare copper earth conductor shall be run along with the cable tray or ladder and shall be
connected to it visibly at intervals of maximum 20 meters. Several cable trays running along the same route
shall be interconnected with each other and with the earth conductor at intervals of maximum 20 meters
(common earth conductor is acceptable).
The earthing conductor must be interconnected with the earthing system at intervals, as practical, but as a
minimum at both ends of the cable tray route.
8. Operating Areas
For outdoor operated equipment an operator platform as described in IEEE 80 shall be provided and
interconnected with the earth grid and with the equipment earth connection.
9. Storage Tanks and Piping

As a general rule, metallic storage tanks shall be connected at two diagonal points with the earthing grid.
Metallic piping shall be earthed at all service points. Flange connections shall be provided with links to
ensure earthing continuity.
The rules of relevant standards and service providers shall be observed. In case rules of relevant standards
and service providers and/or corrosion protection require deviations from this general rule, adequate
solutions shall be proposed to ensure safety.
For earthing of trucks supplying oil, provisions shall be provided at every unloading bay for quick fixing of a
flexible connection to the earth grid.
The Contractor shall prepare and provide suitable measures to protect buried pipes and other metallic parts
against electro-chemical corrosion.
31.5 Building structural earthing
Building structures and structural reinforcing shall be provided with equipotential bonding as described in
particular in IEC 62305-3. and other applicable IEC standards.
For potential grading and to protect against excessive contact potentials, a stranded a buried earth ring in
accordance with IEC 62305-3. and other applicable IEC standards shall be provided around each of the
buildings.
Minimum one earthing rod shall be installed, one at each corner of the control building and of the 110 kV
GIS and transformers building and at least two, in diagonal, for the other buildings from the 33/110 kV PV
Plant Substation premises.
31.6 Lightning Protection System Design
The following aspects shall be taken into consideration:

 Protection against lightning strokes
 Protection by lightning arrests
 Configuration of earthing systems
 Use of VT and CT with acceptable transient response.
The Contractor shall undertake a risk assessment according to IEC 62305 and shall base the design of the
lightning protection system on the results obtained.
The design, dimensioning and construction of the lightning protection system shall be in accordance with the
specified standards.
A rolling sphere principle to class IV shall be applied to the design of the system, unless otherwise indicated
by the afore-mentioned risk assessment.
All metallic services shall be bonded to an equipotential bonding bar, which shall be of tinned copper and
having dimensions 500 x 50 x 5 mm. All services such as data, telecommunication system, etc. shall be
protected by Surge Protective Devices, SPDs.
An air termination network shall be provided for each building, and for any other significant structure
located within the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation premises.
The lightning protection air termination network for buildings shall consist of a roof level meshed network
and finials / air terminations (made of high conductivity bare copper and of not less than 8 mm in diameter
or of tape type, with minimum equivalent cross section for current carrying capacity), either mounted
directly to the roof surface or suspended above the roof.
The air termination network as described above shall be designed based on the rolling sphere principle.
Lightning protection down conductors (made of high conductivity bare copper and of not less than 8 mm in
diameter or of tape type, with minimum equivalent cross section for current carrying capacity) of sufficient
quantity shall be provided for all buildings. The minimum number of down conductors is two for ancillary
buildings and ten for the control building and for the 110kV GIS (As Applicable) and transformers building.
At each building all down conductors except one shall contain readily accessible disconnecting links to
facilitate testing of the effectiveness of the lightning protection system.
All disconnection points shall be numbered consecutively on the drawings and shall be labeled at the
buildings.
All connections and joints shall be installed mechanically and electrically effective (clamped, screwed,
riveted or welded) in order to suit the local climatic conditions.
All supports and connections shall be made of best suitable materials.
All conductor fittings shall be manufactured from high strength copper alloys with phosphor bronze nuts,
bolts, washers and screws. Binary brass copper alloys will not be acceptable. Bi-metallic connectors shall be
used between conductors or connections of dissimilar materials. Insulating material shall be interposed
between metallic fittings and structures of dissimilar metals to prevent corrosion.
Whenever dissimilar materials are to be joined, transition plates are to be inserted as required to ensure that
electrolytic action is avoided. Connections between sacrificial dissimilar metals should be avoided wherever
possible.
High conductivity hard-drawn bare copper stranded conductor or tape shall be used for buried earth
conductors.
All conductors passing from an external location to an internal location shall be PVC insulated copper
stranded conductors.
All exposed earthing conductors shall be PVC insulated stranded copper conductors.
Rebar within structural columns shall be bonded to the down conductors at cast-in non-ferrous bonding
connections.
Re-entrant loops shall be avoided with the air termination network and down conductor installations.
The down conductors shall be configured as a Type A system according to IEC 62305 and shall terminate in
pre-cast earthing rod pits containing driven earth rods. The copper-clad steel ground rods shall be at least
3000 mm long and not less than 19 mm in diameter.
The steel for copper-clad rods shall be low carbon steel with a tensile strength of not less than 570 N/mm 2.
The pre-cast earth rod pits shall also contain a connection between the lightning protection system and the
buried earth grid.
Each outdoor steel tank shall be connected to 3 earthing electrodes evenly distributed around the
circumference if it is not connected to the main earthing system.
31.7 Earthing and Lightning Protection Materials
Earthing conductor materials shall be as define in the Table-1 Design Sheet.
Whenever dissimilar materials are to be joined, transition plates are to be inserted as required to ensure that
electrolytic action is avoided. Connections between sacrificial dissimilar metals shall be avoided wherever
possible.
31.8 Test Requirements
Earthing system tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEEE 81, including the following:
 measurement of earthing resistance after installation
 measurement of earthing resistance before commissioning.
On completion of the earthing system, the Contractor shall undertake a test of the complete earthing grid of
the both PV Farm and 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation together.
The earth grid resistance test shall be carried out by the fall of potential method, requiring the availability of
a local low voltage supply but other methods using an earth resistance megger will be acceptable in the
event of a local supply being unavailable. The stand-alone earth grid resistance shall not exceed 0.5 Ω.
The resistance shall then be measured with all transmission line earth wires connected to the earthing grid.
The measured earth resistance with the transmission lines connected shall not exceed 0.5 Ω, when measured
by standard ground resistance measurement techniques in dry season.
Any value higher than 0.5 Ω shall be REJECTED by the Employer.
In the event of the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation resistance obtained with the foregoing installation being
of a magnitude unacceptable to the Employer/Company’s Engineer, then - where practicable - the ground
area enclosed by the earth system shall be increased by installing directly in the ground a copper conductor
in the form of a ring around the site at a significant distance from the boundary fence.
Alternatively, earth conductors can be directly buried radially outside the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation
perimeter fence. The use of earth plates as current carrying electrodes is not acceptable.
The test shall be repeated immediately before initial energization of the 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation. Any
remedial work necessary to return the value to the original value obtained shall be deemed to be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
The following tests are stipulated to be carried out by the Contractor regarding the lightning protection
system:
 visual inspection after installation
 Measurement of the earth voltage UE by the voltmeter/ ammeter method, test current 100 - 300
A or an equivalent; other method can be proposed for acceptance by the Employer if above will
be proved to be not feasible.
 measurement of the touch voltage UB.
32 Control & Protection Philosophy for Plant Substation
Each element of 110kV Network for both Plant Substation and Remote End Offtaker Substation must be
protected and provided with Two Main Protections, ensuring complete redundancy to each other.
Each main protection shall be designed to solely isolate the faulty element of the respective voltage network
from the rest of the system in 100ms or as per SEC requirement in case the fault is in 110kV system.
Separate and dedicated Lockout Relay (86) and Trip Circuit Supervision Relay. Protection scheme must be
designed to achieve high rate of selectivity and sensitivity of the protection system.
The Contractor shall transport and install, test and commission a full protection system in accordance with
the Design prepared by the Contractor.
The Contractor must submit the List of Relay with Make and Country of Origin for Company’s and SEC
Approval.
Protection relays are microprocessor-based relays. They provide a combination of functions including
protection, monitoring, control, and automation. Relay self-checking functions shall be included. Protection
relays are capable of automatic disturbance recording (Event Reporting and Sequential Events Recorder
(SER) with settable pre-fault duration and user-defined triggering. Protection relays allow oscillography
waveform recording (OWR).
The waveform recording function shall include analog signals of all three phase voltages, three phase
currents and neutral current and significant digital signals of protection trips, circuit breaker status and input/
output contact status. Recordings shall be triggered by any protection operation and shall be stored in a non-
volatile memory. SER and OWR data recorded in protection relays are automatically uploaded to the
SCADA server computer.
The Contractor shall install on load tap-changer controller, which shall allow:
 Automatic/manual mode
In automatic mode, tap changer for Power transformer is controlling tap changer position to keep MV
voltage in defined tolerance. Vacuum type OLTC shall be considered.
In manual mode, tap changer is controlled by operator from:
 Tap changer front panel (local)
 SCADA HMI (remote control mode 1)
The Contractor shall install all the infrastructure works needed to make the on-load tap changer is able to
provide to the DCS/SCADA but not limited to the following:
 Automatic/manual mode
 OLTC alarm
 Up/down command
 Tap position.
 Motor alarms
The Contractor shall transport and install, test and commission a full protection system in accordance with
the Design prepared by the Contractor and Approved by the Company.
The Contractor must submit the List of Relay with Make and Country of Origin for Company approval, in
accordance with the Company’s Approved Vendor Lists Only.
For 110 kV System, a dedicated Fault recorder and disturbance system shall be installed inside the Plant
Substation and the Remote End Offtaker Substation.
Inter-tripping and Inter-locking system
The inter-tripping and inter-locking system shall mandatorily be provided between 33kV Gas Insulated
Switchgear installed inside Plant Substation and 33kV Ring Main Unit of Renewable Farm, as per the
Prudent Utility Practice in a way to prevent the operator from reaching or creating unintentionally a
dangerous or potentially dangerous condition.
EPC shall provide the Tripping Matrix between 33kV RMU of Solar PV Plant and 33kV GIS of Plant
Substation, mandatorily through 12C Fibre Optic Cable. Any non-compliance shall be REJECTED.
As a part of mandatory submittals, Bidder shall submit the Following documents during detailed
engineering:
a) Tripping Matrix between Plant Substation and PIF.
b) Tripping Matrix between PV Farm and Plant Substation.
Protection system
The protection system shall be installed by the Contractor in accordance with design provided by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall install protection devices of all equipment and systems including but not limited to PV,
LV AC system, Inverters, MV collection system including switchgear and cabling, all auxiliary systems, MV
switchyard, Plant Substation, protection for LILO connection and EI.
Safety equipment
The Contractor shall install on Site the safety equipment according to applicable norms and standards.
Standards for Control & Protection
The list/table of standards below is not an exhaustive list and it will remain the responsibility of the
Contractor to ensure that the Project complies with this Agreement and the Related Agreements, together
with the Laws of Azerbaijan, Industry Documents and applicable international standards and codes of
practice, as might be used in accordance with Prudent Utility Practice.
IEC 60050 (488) International electrotechnical vocabulary chapter 448 – Power system protection
IEC 60255 Measuring relays and protection equipment
IEC 61439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
IEC 60664 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems
IEC 60694 Common Specifications for High-Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Standards
IEC 60870 Telecontrol equipment and systems
IEC 61140 Protection against electrical shock
IEC 61173 Overvoltage protection for photovoltaic modules
IEC 61850 Power Utility Automation and Communication
IEC 62271 Standards for high-voltage switchgear and control gear
IEC 62351 Power System Control and Associated Communications – Data and Communication
Security
IEC/TR 62357 Power system control and associated communications - Reference architecture for
object models, services and protocols
NEMA250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum)
32.1 Technical Requirements for Control and Protection Units
32.1.1 General
Either as segregated units or as combined units, the following general minimum requirements for control and
protection units shall be fulfilled:
 The current inputs shall be rated to be connected to the standard current transformers. The
current inputs shall be able to carry the currents mentioned in the Technical Data Sheets.
 The current input for residual current shall be of sensitive current input.
 The threshold of the binary inputs shall be settable in different wide ranges.
 The control and protection units shall have an integrated power supply, as well as a redundant
power supply, covering a wide range of input voltage.
 The making and breaking capacity of the output relays shall be in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 60255-1.
 The binary inputs of the relay shall be of opto-coupler type.
 Protection units shall have optical inputs for arc protection (applicable for protection units and
combined control and protection units).
 The units shall have a built-in self-supervision system continuously monitoring the hardware and
software.
 The units shall provide a role-based authentication system with administrator programmable
individual passwords for the viewer, operator, engineer, and administrator.
 The units shall support IEC 60850-5-104 protocol.
 The units shall support time synchronization via PPS. IRIG-B or GPS.
 The units shall fulfil the requirements for cyber-security, according to IEC 62443 and IEC
62351.
 The units shall support XRIO configuration format.
 All IEDs shall be provided with an optical interface for connecting to the station bus according
to IEC 61850.
 Monitoring and basic configuration of all input and output logical signals shall be possible
locally and from SCMS.
 Disturbance and Sequence of Event records shall be retrievable from substation SCMS and from
the Control Center.
 Evaluation software with mathematical operations and reporting format templates shall be
provided at both locations.
 All multifunctional protection terminals shall have at least 4 remotely selectable setting groups.
32.1.2 Auxiliary Supply
DC power supply shall serve all multifunctional protection and control. Duplicated or Main/Back-up
protection systems of the same feeder shall be supplied by two independent DC sources. A cold stand-by
charger shall be provided for back-up circuits.
Relay cubicle DC supplies shall be monitored, and a central alarm shall be issued whenever the voltage
exceeds the limits for reliable operation. Supply schemes shall be based on the fail-safe principle, e.g., loss or
open circuit shall not cause incorrect opening or closing of protection contacts.
Within the specified DC voltage and frequency variations the offered relays shall retain their rated
characteristic accuracy and full operation capability.
32.1.3 Environmental Requirements
1. Temperature
The standard nominal range of ambient temperature for operation and storage shall be according to Section II
c.3 Technical Data Sheets.
The protection devices shall operate correctly for the minimum and maximum operation and storage
temperature and shall be tested according to IEC 60255-1, with the procedure provided in IEC 60068-2-1
and IEC 60068-2-2. In addition, the change of temperature test requirement shall be fulfilled according to
IEC 60255-1, with the test procedure provided in IEC 60068-2-14.
2. Humidity
The protection devices shall operate correctly with a relative humidity according to IEC 60255-1. This shall
be tested according to IEC 60068-2-30 for cyclic humidity changes and IEC 60068-2-78 for steady state
humidity.
32.1.4 Product Safety Requirements
All protection devices shall comply with the product safety requirements according to IEC 60255-27 and, for
merging units, according to IEC 61869-13.
32.1.5 Mechanical Requirements
All protection devices and merging units shall fulfil the following mechanical requirements:
 vibration requirements according to IEC 60255-21-1
 shock and bump requirements according to IEC 60255-21-2; and
 seismic requirements according to IEC 60255-21-3.
32.1.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The electromagnetic emissions of the protection devices, as well as the immunity of the protection devices
against electromagnetic disturbances, shall fulfil the requirements of IEC 60255-26.
In addition, for merging units, the electromagnetic requirements of IEC 61869-13 shall be applied.
For the tests, for which the severity levels are not mentioned explicitly in IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61869-13,
or where different levels are considered as acceptable, the levels or acceptance criteria shall be applied.
32.1.7 Contact Performance
The output relays and trip relays of the protection devices shall fulfil the contact performance requirements
according to IEC 60255-1.
32.1.8 Software Licenses
The following requirements shall be met:

 The licenses shall be timely unlimited throughout the lifetime of the device or system.
 Failure rectifications and upgrades shall be implemented by the Contractor until the end of the
Defects Notification Period.
 Rectification patches for safety relevant failures shall be provided until the end of the lifetime of the
device or system.
 Application source code shall be provided in case the manufacturer of the software terminates the
support for the software.
32.2 Tripping Circuit Supervision and Pole Discordance Protection
The trip contacts shall be hardwired and act via tripping relays on the trip coils of the relevant circuit
breaker. Two tripping relays with remote reset via the station controller shall be implemented for all HV
circuit breakers, with one trip relay combining the Main protection relays and the second combining the
Backup protection relays. Each trip relay shall act on a separate trip coil of the circuit breaker. The trip
output individual protection functional assemblies shall be of relay type.
Trip circuits shall be continuously supervised in the closed and open position of the circuit breakers. The trip
circuit supervision shall include, to the extent feasible, all loops between trip contacts.
Circuit breaker pole discordance protection shall be provided as an integral part of the CB control.
32.3 Requirements for Protection and Control Functions
The required functionality and the grouping in protection terminals (IED) for each individual feeder are
described in below sections. This section gives details on the requirements for the major protection functions,
irrespective of the specific assignment to a particular terminal.
The Contractor can propose alternative arrangements suitable to the offered IPR types but NOT BINDING to the
Project Company and shall be rejected or approved, at the SOLE discretion of Project Company, which no
technical and contractual liability to the Contractor.
1. Line differential protection (87L1 & 87L2)
The current differential based protection shall be considered with the following requirements as a minimum:
 two-stage biased protection. A very sensitive stage and a very fast high set stage.
 Phase segregated measuring units and trip outputs.
 Separately adjustable sensitivity for phase and earth-faults
 Typical operating time max. 30 ms
 Direct transfer trip for one-side fault infeed
 Direct transfer trip by external input, max. 20 ms transmission time, opto-coupler input
 Charging current compensation
 Saturation detector
 transient biasing shall be incorporated in case of heavy faults in the adjacent sections or even
very close to the protection zone.
 Compensation of skewed end-to-end transmission time delays
 Master-slave CPUs synchronization
 Five zones quadrilateral shaped distance function backup for phase and earth faults, including
Mutual zero sequence compensation.
 IN/OUT switches for function and transfer trip enabling
 4 setting groups
 The function shall be stable in case of series capacitive compensation.
 Comprehensive hardware and software self-supervision, including communication links
 The function shall be blocked when CTS detects a fault in the secondary circuit of the CT.
2. Distance protection (87L2, 21)
The phase and earth fault full scheme distance protection shall be suitable for HV transmission system
applications, featuring:
 typical operation time less than 30 ms

 simultaneous measurement of all fault loops
 quadrilateral characteristic for phase and earth faults
 unlimited directional discrimination by cross-polarization and voltage memory
 correct performance in the presence of CT saturation and CVT transients
 accurate impedance measurement down to 10% of the rated current
 separate measuring units for accelerated Zone 1
 4 impedance back-up zones (forward / backward selection, timer-controlled)
 permissive or blocking signaling assignable to any of the impedance zones
 phase segregated trip
 power swing blocking selectable for all zones
 out of step tripping (pole slip protection)
 weak infeed and current reversal logic
 switch-on-to-fault feature
 parallel line zero sequence compensation
 distance- to- fault locator with compensation of the remote fault infeed, arc resistance, load
current, and mutual coupling of parallel lines
 VT supervision
 Loss of VT zone blocking
 DC supply supervision (local and remote alarms)
 hardware and software self-supervision, including blocking in case of communication link
failure
 disturbance and event recorder with substation- synchronized time tagging (1ms resolution).
One dedicated permissive or blocking end-to-end signal is provided for the distance function signaling. All
necessary additional devices, plug connectors, hardwired or fiber optic short connections to the patch panel
are part of the supply.
3. Out-of-Step Protection (78)
Stable power swing and out of step conditions shall be detected with the following functions:
 Out of step tripping (OST)
 Out of step blocking (OSB).
The optimal locations of OST and OSB protection relays systems shall be determined by the Contractor. The
relays shall be based on impedance measurement method and react to:
 measurement enabling by positive sequence current component, and measurement blocking by

negative sequence component.
 comparison of the angle between voltage and current vectors of the two electrical systems
 asynchronous detection in open-phase operation with resulting blocking of the line circuit
breaker
 variation of pickup current value
 reliable distinction between power swing center being in the power system network and
generator unit area.
The protection function shall have 3 stages of detection. Each detecting stage shall have its own algorithm.
4. Auto-reclosing (79)
The function shall initiate a single-shot auto-reclosing cycle. Following programs shall be selectable:
 1-phase AR for 1-phase fault

 3-phase AR for 1-phase faults and lock-out trip for multiple faults
 3-phase trip for all kind of faults
 out of service
Closing pulse length and maximum wait time shall be settable. Dead times for 1-phase and 3-phase AR
cycles shall be independently and continuously adjustable. Following checking options shall be provided:
 deadline/live bus
 dead bus/live line
 synchronism check
The scope of supply includes all necessary time/auxiliary relays, etc. external to the protection terminal.
The AR function shall be externally blocked-in case of:
 manual closing of the line

 delayed trips (back-up zones)
 trip by busbar and breaker-failure protection
 circuit breaker interlockings.
Following local indications shall be provided:
 AR blocked
 AR initiated
 AR out of service
 1-phase AR in progress
 3-phase AR in progress
 AR count indication.
All inputs from external equipment shall be provided with opto-couplers.
5. Non-directional overcurrent backup (50/51, 50N/51N)
Two phase and earth overcurrent stages shall be included in each multifunction protection terminal. It shall be
possible to select a wide variety of time-dependent trip characteristics according to IEC and IEEE standards.
It shall be possible to select for each stage if the pick-up threshold measurement is based on peak or on RMS
current values.
The overcurrent back-up functions shall be automatically enabled in case of loss of voltage measurement.
6. Directional overcurrent and earth fault protection (67, 67N)
Two directional phase overcurrent stages (67) shall be provided, allowing for selection of any IEC and IEEE
current trip characteristics. Although not required by the present protection philosophy, provision shall be
included for a future signaling-aided directional comparison scheme.
Two time/trip threshold stages shall be provided for the earth fault directional protection (67N), featuring:
 One signaling-aided stage (permissive or blocking)

 IEC and IEEE overcurrent trip characteristics.
All necessary additional devices, plug connectors, hardwired or fiber optic short connections to the
communication equipment interface are part of the supply.
For MV system with isolated neutral treatment, special 67N functions shall be used whose specifications are
provided in the next paragraphs.
1. Transient Earth Fault Detection Method
This method shall be used for single phase to ground earth fault detection in isolated networks. This earth
fault should not necessarily lead to a trip command. However, upon detection of an earth fault by this
method, an alarm shall be triggered.
This function shall detect the earth fault in both directions. The reliable performance of the function shall be
also guaranteed in case of cold switching of cable systems. The threshold of the transient signals and residual
current as well as time delays shall be configurable.
2. Intermittent Earth Fault Detection Method
For detection of the intermittent earth fault resulting from insulation deterioration in cable, this method shall
be used. This function should not necessarily lead to a trip command. However, upon detection of an earth
fault by this method, an alarm shall be triggered.
Number of intermittent faults and repetitions shall be configurable. The selection of between intermittent
earth fault detection and transient earth fault detection shall be configurable.
3. Watt metric Earth Fault Detection Method
The Watt metric method shall be used for detection of single phase to ground earth fault in isolated cable
network. This earth fault should not necessarily lead to a trip command. However, upon detection of an earth
fault by this method, an alarm shall be triggered.
This function shall detect the earth fault in both directions. The threshold of residual voltage and current as
well as time delay shall be configurable. The time-current characteristics shall support both DMT and IDMT
modes.
7. Unbalance protection (46)
This protection shall detect asymmetrical loading or broken conductors, featuring:

 negative sequence current calculation
 insensitivity to frequency fluctuations
 alarm and trip stages.
8. Thermal Overload protection (49)
The thermal overload protection shall be according to IEC 60255-149 with two-time constants regarding
heating and cooling. The protection shall have alarm level that gives early warning using thermal model with
configurable time constants. Re-energizing of the feeder after the thermal overload operation shall be
inhibited when the cooling time is in progress. The cooling time shall be estimated by the thermal model.
The temperature shall be stored in a non-volatile memory and restored in case of relay restart. Proper
solution shall be provided for the remote resetting of the function memory.
9. 110kV Low Impedance Busbar and circuit breaker failure protection (87BB2, 50BF)
The busbar protection for the 110 kV switchgears shall be of low impedance decentralized type, unless
otherwise stated in scope of work. It shall provide fully discriminative fault clearance in all operational
configurations, without introducing sequential tripping.
Releasing of a trip command shall be based on at least two different criteria. Tripping shall be initiated to all
connected circuits to the faulty busbar, contributing or not to the fault infeed.
Stability for external faults shall be ensured:
 up to the short-circuit ratings of the switchgear, irrespective of the distribution of current between
individual circuits.
 under full CT saturation of any of the outgoing circuits.
Sensitivity setting shall ensure dependable operation for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults under
minimum system conditions. The operating time shall not exceed 30ms including the scheme’s own tripping
relays. Separate measuring elements are required for each phase.
The protection shall not operate for faults in the secondary wiring when any primary circuit is carrying full
load current. In case of open CT condition under rated primary load, the equipment shall not suffer any
damage.
The protection scheme and associated cubicle shall be capable of being extended in a later stage with a least
50% of the specified number of bays.
The breaker-failure scheme shall be started by the trip command of any protective relay and shall initiate, via
a settable breaker-dedicated time relay:
 selective tripping of all adjacent breakers (busbar protection trip logic)

 transformer inter-trip at all voltage levels
 remote-end circuit breaker trip by direct signaling channel.
The scheme shall be supervised by fast reset overcurrent relays, operating on all fault types and under saturated
CT conditions. It shall operate correctly in case of evolving faults (single-phase to multiple phase).
10. 110kV High Impedance Busbar Protection (87BB1)
The Protection IED used for the double bus bar protection should be an intelligent, phase selectable, numerical,
electronic device, with multiple protection functions, included in the same Protection IED unit and shall be
facilitated with; but not limited to the following Main multi functions:
 Phase segregated, circulating current high impedance protection (discrimination & check zones)
 Multi Characteristic Stepped; Phase & Earth fault over current protection.
 Instantaneous over current & Earth Fault protection (to be used on the bus couplers for
Energization)
 Circuit breakers fail Protection.
 Sensitive earth fault protection
 Dead Zone Protection- (this feature to be used in case of existing system where no CT’s overlap is
provided, in new systems it shall be ensured that CT’s overlap is provided).
Each phase of each section of the bus bar protection shall be individually protected by high impedance bus bar
protection relays. The Bus Protection shall remain stable for all kinds of external faults.
CT supervision shall be provided; CT open circuit shall initiate local & remote alarm.
The protection shall be facilitated with Metrosil unit having a nonlinear resistance characteristic to limit the
peak voltage appearing across the secondary differential circuits. Proper CT’s switching shall be provided as
well.
The bus bar protection System shall include Bus Discriminating Zone with Check Zone Protection.
11. Voltage protection function (27, 59)
The voltage protection shall include multi-stage, single-phase or multi-phase voltage detection with
independent voltage and time delay settings. It shall trip the local and / or the remote end circuit breaker.
This function shall be provided with a voltage selection setting for line or phase voltages. In addition, the
logic of voltage protection shall be able to be configurable. The function shall support DMT and IDMT
modes according to IEEE and IEC curves and shall be configurable. The voltage protection function shall
comply with IEC 60255-127.
12. Neutral Voltage Displacement (59N)
This function picks up if the residual voltage exceeds a threshold. The residual voltage shall be either
calculated or measured by the broken delta winding of the VTs if any. The calculation of the residual voltage is
however preferred. In the case of the calculation of the residual voltage, both phase voltage and line voltage
shall be supported for operation. The threshold and time delay shall be configurable in different stages. In
addition, both DMT and IDMT modes shall be supported for time delay configurations.
13. Frequency protection (81O, 81U)
The frequency protection shall include multi-stage over/under frequency and time delay. Upon voltage
collapse or in case of voltage dips, the frequency protection shall be automatically blocked.
The accuracy of the frequency measurement, number of stages and the operating time shall be in accordance
with SEC MoE Code.
14. Synchro check relay (25)
The synchronism and voltage check function shall be provided in the BCU and protection terminals for the
control of the auto-reclosing function initiated by the distance and line differential function. Enabling criteria
shall include deadline and dead bus.
Adjustable values shall be the operating mode, voltage difference, frequency difference, angle difference,
and supervision time.
15. 33kV High Impedance Busbar differential protection (87BB)
The busbar protection shall be provided with the following requirements:
 Phase segregated, circulating current high impedance protection.

 Multi Characteristic Stepped; Phase & Earth fault over current protection.
 Instantaneous over current & Earth Fault protection
 Circuit breakers fail Protection.
 Sensitive earth fault protection
 Dead Zone Protection- (this feature to be used in case of existing system where no CT’s overlap is
provided, in new systems it shall be ensured that CT’s overlap is provided).
Each phase of each section of the bus bar protection shall be individually protected by high impedance bus
bar protection relays.
The Bus Protection shall remain stable for all kinds of external faults. CT supervision shall be provided; CT
open circuit shall initiate local & remote alarm.
The protection shall be facilitated with Metrosil unit having a nonlinear resistance characteristic to limit the
peak voltage appearing across the secondary differential circuits. Proper CT’s switching shall be provided as
well.
16. Transformer differential protection (87T1 & 87T2)
The current differential based protection shall be applied for power transformers, featuring as a minimum:
 low impedance biased differential protection.
 phase selective measuring units and trip outputs
 separately adjustable sensitivity for phase and earth-faults
 several percentage bias slopes as mentioned in the Section II c.3 Technical Data Sheets
 CT saturation detection
 compensation of CT mismatching
 inrush blocking
 full zone busbar differential protection as backup
 optional cross blocking scheme
 harmonic blocking for preventing nuisance tripping.
17. 33kV Capacitor Bank/ STATCOM Protection
The Protection IED used for the capacitor bank feeders shall be an intelligent, numerical, electronic device,
with multiple functions, included in the same Protection IED unit. The capacitor bank feeder protection shall
be facilitated with; but not limited to the following Main multi functions:
 Time and Instantaneous Over Current & E/F Protection (Backup)

 Negative Sequence Directional Over Current & E/F Protection
 Thermal O/L Protection.
 Neutral Unbalance Current protection
 Compensated Neutral Displacement Voltage protection and voltage differential.
 Over Voltage protection
 Under Voltage Protection
 Under frequency
 Over frequency
 CBF Protection (1 per group)
 Other Protections recommended by manufacturer.
18. Current and Voltage Transformer Supervision (CTS, VTS)
Circuit supervision shall be provided for detection of faults in the transformer secondary circuits. Upon
detection of a fault, the function shall activate an alarm.
Fuse failure supervision shall be provided for detection of failures between the voltage measurement circuit
and the merging units. Upon detecting a fault, the function shall activate an alarm.
19. Inrush blocking (68F2)
The inrush blocking function shall be based on 2 nd harmonic blocking. The percentage of the 2 nd harmonic to
the fundamental harmonic as well as the time constant of the inrush shall be configurable.
The inrush blocking function shall differentiate between 2 nd harmonic in load and 2 nd harmonic in inrush
currents. The sympathetic inrush shall also be detected and blocked by the inrush blocking functions.
20. Over excitation protection (24)
The over-excitation protection shall be used for power transformers where the ratio of voltage to frequency
shall be monitored. The threshold for this ratio as well as the time delay for tripping shall be configurable.
21. Disturbance and event recorder
In multifunctional protection devices, each protection function shall be able to trigger the disturbance
recorder. The sampling rate of disturbance recorder shall be according to the Company Technical Data
Sheets. All analogue and digital channels shall be recorded.
In case of differential protection, the differential current and biased currents shall also be recorded.
The pre-trigger and post-trigger as well as the sampling rate shall be configurable.
The data shall be readable either from the front side of the device or remotely in COMTRADE format
according to IEC 60255-24.
Software shall be provided along with the unit for visualizing the recorded faults.
22. Fault and Event Recorder (SOE)
The record values shall at least include phase currents, phase voltages, zero-, negative- and positive-
sequence currents and voltages, differential and bias currents, the active setting group, and the absolute time
stamp.
To collect sequence-of-events (SOE) information, the unit must include a non-volatile memory with a
capacity of storing according to the Company Technical Data Sheets.
23. Protection coordination study by Contractor
In this study, the coordination of the unit and non-unit protection devices shall be studied with consideration
of security, dependability, selectivity and rapid isolation of faults. Based on the results, the setting of
protection devices shall be adjusted.
In this report, the Contractor shall also include calculation and checking of the settings of other existing unit
protections and MV and HV nodes in the remote substations and plants correspondingly, which have to be
changed in liaison with implementation of new calculating settings. This report has to contain the description
of all principles of these calculations as well as the entire calculations themselves. The report shall be
submitted for Company’s approval.
The available data required for preparation of the protection settings report will be provided by the
Employer, as far as available. This data have to be verified by the Contractor and the missing data has to be
calculated or estimated. The Contractor needs to provide in due time a list with the required data.
The minimum content shall be:

 CT/VT instrument transformer sizing
 fault current calculations
 protection setting principles and coordination with existing remote-end and adjacent equipment
protections.
 protection terminal configuration, communication interface and protection function settings
 Selectivity diagrams for overcurrent earth and phase fault and distance protections, preferably
using Power Factory DigSilent or Siemens CAPE software.
The reports shall be subject to review and approval by the Employer / Engineer.
24. Circuit Breaker Control
This control shall evaluate block conditions and different time supervision conditions. The function shall
perform an execution command only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed. This
function shall have an operation counter which counts the number of circuit breaker openings.
25. Measurements
This function shall include the measurement of the following characteristics:

 three-phase current and voltage measurement (RMS-based)
 zero-, negative- and positive-sequence current and voltage measurement
 power and energy measurement (P, Q, S, kWh and kVArh)
 power factor measurement.
It shall be possible to assign the measurement functions freely for current and voltage inputs within the unit.
The measurement functions shall be available also for received IEC 61850-9-2 based current and voltage
values.
26. Power Quality
The power quality function shall include the measurement of power quality characteristics according to EN
50160, unless otherwise specified.
The voltage-related power quality characteristics shall include the following:

 voltage variations
 frequency variations
 rapid voltage changes
 voltage imbalance
 DC voltage component
 individual voltage harmonics
 voltage THD
 voltage dips and swells and interruptions
 transient overvoltages.
The current-related power quality characteristics shall include the following:
 DC current component
 individual current harmonics up to 40th harmonic order
 current THD.
The above-mentioned characteristics shall be phase-segregated. The unit should be able to visualize the
harmonic distortion values of currents and voltages as well as individual harmonic content in the local HMI
and share it with station level.
27. Transformer Monitoring
The function with the ANSI 49HS is dedicated to calculation of the hot spot temperature of the transformer
winding, the aging rate of the insulation and the resultant loss of life caused by thermal stress.
The hot spot temperature and the aging rate shall be calculated based on the IEC 60076-7 or the IEEE
C57.91 standard, according to a user-defined setting. The cumulative loss-of-life of transformers shall be
stored in a non-volatile memory.
Quality Assurance
Type tests
Approved type tests, certificates and documentation shall be available for each functional assembly of the
proposed protection systems similar in all essential respects to the equipment included in the Contract.
The contractor shall submit all required test records. If not relevant for the actual service conditions, the
Employer reserves the right to require re-testing or additional tests to be included in the routine test
program.
Factory acceptance tests
Equipment for modular static protection systems (e.g., bus bar protection) pre-assembled in the relevant
boards/cubicles etc. shall be tested in the Contractor's workshops as far as wiring and proper function is
concerned. Simulated inputs (binary signals, current and voltage inputs from test power supplies) shall be
used for the tests.
The Employer/Company’s Representative reserves the right to attend the factory tests for the main protection
equipment.
Software updating
The Employer/Company’s Representative reserves the right to attend the factory tests for software
testing/updating of the main protection equipment. The Contractor shall provide certificate for software
safety requirements according to IEC 61508 upon request.
Commissioning tests
The commissioning test program shall be submitted to the Employer and the Company’s Representative for
approval. Minimum test requirements are as follows:
 insulation resistance of all secondary circuits (current and voltage transformers, control,
indication and alarm circuits, etc.), continuity tests of all secondary circuits (current and voltage
transformers, control, indication and alarm circuits, etc.)
 primary injection of current transformer circuits, including differential protection circuits, to
prove all connections and to check ratios, fault threshold, stability, and correct phase detection.
 stability tests and in-zone fault test for differential protection schemes
 secondary injection of AC and DC relays to check their operating characteristics, alarm, and
indication circuits.
 operation of relays and tripping elements at reduced DC supply voltage
 measurement of the end-to-end signaling channels latency
 simulation by secondary injection of the various protection transferred trips, and auto-reclosing
programs with associated circuit breakers.
 measurement of the end-to-end HF tele protection channels transmission times
 combined logic tests of HF signaling /protection /auto reclosing /schemes under various
simulated fault and operating conditions.
 fuses, overcurrent trips, short-circuit trips, time settings, relay settings.
32.4 Instrument Transformer Requirements
The rated burden of the protection cores indicated in the data sheets are to be considered as minimum
requirements for all possible ratios.
The Contractor is responsible for defining the final characteristics of the CT, VT and CVT cores for
protective relaying, to comply with the performance and functional requirements of the offered protection
terminals under the actual short circuit condition. Corresponding calculations shall be prepared and
presented for approval to Employer in a form of design calculation in which all the inputs and calculation
formulas or other methods used shall be clearly indicated.
The calculations shall be submitted for approval before the start of production.
Current transformers shall be of the low reactance type and with secondary taps in case of multiple ratios.
The performances shall not be inferior to that defined in the IEC Publications.
For class “PX” type, the knee-point voltage (defined as the point on the excitation curve at which a 10%
increase in the RMS value of the applied voltage results in 50% increase in the RMS value of the secondary
exciting current) shall be for each of the possible ratios above the secondary voltage for maximum short-
circuit conditions, actual secondary winding resistance at 75°C and 150% of the anticipated external burden.
The magnetizing current at knee-point voltage shall not be higher than 5% of the nominal secondary rated
current. For high impedance protection, scheme specific requirements shall be taken into consideration for
selecting knee-point voltage and magnetizing current.
For the electricity metering, based on the actual consumption of electricity meters proposed, the contractor
shall prepare and provide the following for approval:
 calculation of CTs secondary burden
 calculation of cross-section of secondary current circuits
 calculation of VTs secondary burden
 calculation of Voltage drops from VT’s secondary outlets to meter.
 calculation of cross-section of secondary voltage circuits.
The limits of voltage error and phase displacement error for high precision metering cores shall be in
accordance with the above-mentioned standards.
Means for checking the integrity of CT, VT and CVT circuits either automatically or manually shall be
provided. The integrity check shall be possible in service without inhibiting or jeopardizing the protection
function.
CT, VT and CVT terminals of the relay panels shall be equipped with links for forming star points and for
isolating or shorting the respective circuit as well as providing measuring points.
Each CT circuit shall be earthed only at one point. For protection circuits, the earthing shall be made at relay
side. The metering cores shall be earthed only at CT/marshaling kiosk sides. The CT circuits shall be
provided with earthing facilities at the CT boxes.
32.5 References
The protection equipment supplied under this Contract and the associated software shall have at least three
years of operational experience in HV/EHV substations.
The Contractor shall quantify the number of installations for the protection equipment and associated
software version which have been installed at similar voltage levels and environmental conditions over the
last three years.
32.6 Housing, Wiring, Identification
Protection equipment shall be grouped in the necessary number of fully wired, floor mounted, sheet steel
cubicle type panels. Where cubicles are installed internal to buildings in an air-conditioned environment, the
cubicles shall meet the requirements of the IEC Publication 60529, IP 54 class. All cubicles installed
external to buildings shall be IP65.
The Contractor shall ensure that adequate cooling of external cubicles is provided to compensate for the high
summer temperatures. Temperature within the cubicles shall stay ≤ 40°C where electronic modules are
installed, unless the equipment specification is such that the device proposed can cope with high
temperatures anticipated.
Each protection cubicle -except for cubicles for bus bar differential protection- shall be dedicated to one
single protected element.
The sequence of the cubicles shall be defined in detailed design. Cubicles shall be fitted with window type,
flame-retarding, protective full doors. Each cubicle shall be provided with an anti-condensation heater with an
internal thermostat/humidity sensor to prevent the formation of condensation within the cubicle.
Where protection cubicles are installed in air-conditioned relay rooms of control buildings, the protection
cubicles shall be of the self-ventilated type and shall comply with all construction requirements of the above-
mentioned sub-section of this Specification.
The final paint finish shall comply with the requirements of the General Technical Requirements and the
color shall be subject to Company’s /Company’s Representative’s approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that in the event of any failure of the air-conditioning system, the protective
relaying systems and their associated signaling, monitoring, control, and alarm equipment, remain in full
operating condition for a minimum of 24 hours without any detrimental effect to equipment performance,
taking cognizance of the outside ambient temperature and the maximum humidity possible for the Project
location.
Equipment identification shall include:
 feeder (bay) labels
 individual relay identification (device, ANSI designation numbers and functions)
 terminal identification of external relay connections to CTs, VTs, CVTs, DC and AC alarms,
trips and communication equipment
 control cable labels.
All internal and external wiring shall be identified using ferrules at each point of connection.
32.7 Testing Facilities, Indications
Unless otherwise stated, no provision for automatic test facilities is required. Each protection functional
assembly shall be provided with easily accessible field-testing terminal blocks/sockets for CTs and VT
circuits.
Where duplicated protection systems are provided, testing of one protection system shall be possible without
degrading the function of the other.
The protection schemes shall be provided with local and remote DC supply supervision and with following
minimum local indications, manually or electrically resettable, allowing for a reliable and precise
post-fault/test response analysis:
 faulty phase (where applicable) or general starting.
 operating time or time zone
 tripping (phase selective where applicable)
 receiving and sending of all associated HF signals (blocking/ permissive/ direct trip)
 associated fiber optic or PLCC channel(s) failure.
 test /in /off status, in conjunction with a lockable switch with remote position indication.
The operating indications shall not be lost in case of auxiliary supply interruption. Means for testing of the
indicators shall be provided at relay case or panel level.
The indications shall be clearly visible without opening of relay cases or relay cubicle doors. Resetting shall
be possible without opening relay cases.
32.8 Control & Protection System
The scope of supply shall be based on state-of-the-art Intelligent Protection Relays (IPR), including:
 interfaces to local and remote communication equipment
 Hard wired or fiber optic connections to SCMS, protection management, auxiliary supply,
stand-alone event- and -disturbance recorders
 time tagging systems.
 engineering, factory testing, installation, and site testing
 spare parts
 training on the job
 parametrizing and configuring software, manuals, special tools at each supply location.
Every power equipment shall be covered by redundant fast acting and overlapping protections, suitable for
operation in an HV substation environment. The specified protection functions and the assignment to different
IPR units must be basically considered as minimum requirements.
The Contractor may propose additional functionality and devices, if required for higher dependability and
security of the overall system.
The scope of supply for the end-to-end line differential protection over fiber optics includes:
 all required protection terminal interfaces, dedicated optical/electrical communication converters,

link integrity and end-to-end timing supervision, connectors, attenuators, accessories at both ends of
the protected OHL (redundant dedicated Single Mode or Mono Mode fiber optic pairs 9/125μm
ITU-T G.652D supplied by others)
 for short direct optical fiber links (from switchgear protection cubicle up to general purpose
multiplexer, supplied by others): redundant multimode optical fiber connection and all required
protection terminal interfaces, optical/electrical communication converters, connectors, attenuators,
accessories.
For the differential protection communication over general purpose multiplexer, the maximum
communication delay shall follow the requirements of the IPR type, as specified in technical data sheet.
The end-to-end protection signaling requirements are as follows:

 differential protection: direct fiber connection between main and remote end relays
 distance protection: two (2) permissive duplex signals
 busbar and circuit breaker failure protection: one (1) direct trip duplex signal for each busbar
section.
The preparation for transmission of the output to a Central Dispatching location, including SCMS protocol
conversion and local and regional data concentrator are included in the scope of the Project.
All Intelligent Protection Relay (IPRs) shall include transient disturbance recording functionality.
110kV Cable/ OHL protection
The contractor shall be responsible for implementation of differential, distance protection, Directional Earth
Fault etc. including end-to-end testing as per SEC requirements as per SPPC RFP “200.Part II_ Technical
Specifications” and “300.Part III_Technical Appendices”. Any modification required at remote ends, to
make the line fully operational, shall be part of this scope.
This is to be noted that modification work required at remote ends shall not disturb its own protection like
busbar, breaker failure etc.
33/110kV, 170/220 MVA for transformer feeder 33 kV side protection including Each but not limited to the
following:
 One (1) high impedance Check Zone busbar protection along with Metrosil Resistor, CT
supervision relay
 One (1) high impedance Discriminatory Zone busbar protection along with Metrosil Resistor,
CT supervision relay
 one (1) combined multifunctional protection and control terminal (BCPU), with phase and
neutral directional overcurrent protection, two-stage overcurrent phase and earth fault protection,
circuit breaker failure, over/undervoltage, BCU functionalities including P, Q, U, I, f
measurements, trip/close HMI, synchro check, trip coil supervision,
 one (1) revenue energy metering device
 one (1) lot software, documentation
 one (1) lot accessories, auxiliary relays.
33 kV Busbar protection for Each busbar including, but not limited to the following:
 one (1) high impedance check zone busbar protection cubicle/ panel along with Metrosil
Resistor, CT Supervision relay.
 one (1) high impedance discrimination zone protection cubicle along with Metrosil Resistor, CT
Supervision relay
 one (1) more cubicle
33 kV bus-coupler protections including Each but not limited to the following:

 one (1) combined multifunctional protection and control terminal (BCPU), with neutral
overcurrent protection, two-stage overcurrent phase and earth fault protection, circuit breaker
failure, over/undervoltage, including P, Q, U, I, f measurements, circuit breaker trip/close,
graphic HMI, synchro check, trip coil supervision.
supervision relay
 one (1) multifunctional meter for measurement of P, Q, U, I, f
33 kV bus-riser protections including each but not limited to the following:

supervision relay
 one (1) multifunctional meter for measurement of P, Q, U, I, f
33kV PV Collector feeder protection including Each but not limited to the following:
 one (1) multifunctional protection terminal with line differential protection, and line distance
protection
 one (1) combined multifunctional protection and control terminal (BCPU), two-stage directional
overcurrent phase and earth fault protection, two-stage overcurrent phase and earth fault
protection, sensitive earth fault protection, circuit breaker failure, over/undervoltage, including
P, Q, U, I, f measurements, trip/close HMI, synchro check, trip coil supervision.
 one (1) sensitive earth fault protection relay.
33 kV Auxiliary and Earthing transformer feeder protection including Each but not limited to the following:
 one (1) combined multifunctional protection terminal and BCU, two-stage overcurrent phase and
earth fault protection, sensitive earth fault protection, stand by earth fault, circuit breaker failure,
over/undervoltage, including P, Q, U, I, f measurements, trip/close HMI, synchro check, trip coil
supervision.
 one (1) revenue energy meter
 one (1) sensitive earth fault protection relay
33 kV Reactive Power Equipment feeder protection including Each but not limited to the following:
 one (1) combined multifunctional protection terminal and BCPU, two-staged directional
overcurrent phase and earth fault protection, two-stage overcurrent phase and earth fault
protection, sensitive earth fault protection, stand by earth fault, circuit breaker failure, including
P, Q, U, I, f measurements, trip/close HMI, synchro check, trip coil supervision,
 one (1) revenue energy meter
 one (1) sensitive earth fault protection relay
33 kV Reactive Power Equipment shall be protected with the following additional protection in a separate
panel:
 one (1) multifunctional protection terminal with voltage differential protection/ voltage
unbalance, under/over frequency, under/over voltage, standby earth fault, neutral current
unbalance protection
The above portion specifies the minimum basic protection criteria of capacitor banks in general. If stages/
steps of the banks are required as per detail design, then respective bank protection in segregation shall also
be considered under the scope.
32.9 Protection Relays
Relays are the backbone of the complete protection system. Project Company does not allow contractor to
supply relays of any make and type. The Contractor must submit the Make and Country of the Origin for
Protection Relays to be approved by Project Company (Plant Substation) and SEC. Any Chinese Make relay
shall be Rejected.
32.10 Protection Alarms
All protection alarms and signals that are required to be monitored at local level or SCADA level must be
from approved Protection Alarm List or SCADA/DCS Signal lists.
All main protection relays are integrated with Substation Control and Monitoring System (SCMS) using IEC
61850 protocol for SCADA/DCS alarms.
Protection Alarms from the relays that do not support IEC 61850 must be connected through Hard Wired.
32.11 DC Supplies
DC supplied to each main relay is directly from the DCDB with MCBs via a dedicated cable for each panel.
Main-1 Protection shall be supplied from DC System-1, while Main-2/Back Up Protection shall be supplied
from DC System-2.
DC Supply to each main protection panel shall be supplied directly from the DC distribution board via a
MCB through dedicated cable for each panel in accordance with the approved DC distribution arrangements.
Generally, DCDB1 shall supply dedicated DC circuits to the main 1 protection per bay and Fault Recorder
and DCDB2 shall supply dedicated DC circuits to the main 2 protection per bay and backup protection per
bay.
Under no circumstances, whatsoever may protection DC system1 and DC system 2 be connected together at
any point in the entire substation.
The MCBs in the DCDBs shall be of suitable rating to ensure that the full load is supplied without operation
of the MCB. The MCBs and the DC cables to the protection panels shall be suitably rated for the DC design
fault duty.
The contractor shall also install cables with 10% spare cores capacity in total between the DCDB and the
relay panel. These cables shall be clearly identified and be long enough to be extended to any of the
protection panels in the respective protection control room.
32.12 Protection of 110kV System
 110kV OHL/Cable Feeder Protection (High Impedance and Low Impedance)

110kV OHL/Cable feeder shall be provided with two sets of Main Protections i.e., M1FP and
M2FP, which shall be further in accordance with the SEC Protection Philosophy.
Main Protection (M1FP) shall be supplied from DC system-1 and Back Up Protection (M2FP)
shall be supplied from DC System-2.
 110kV Power Transformer Feeder Protection (High Impedance and Low Impedance)
Power Transformer feeder shall be provided with two sets of Main Protections i.e., M1TP and
M2TP, which shall be further in accordance with the SEC Protection Philosophy.
Main Protection (M1TP) shall be supplied from DC system-1 and Back Up Protection (M2TP,
REF, SBEF) shall be supplied from DC System-2.
 110kV Busbar Protection (High Impedance and Low Impedance)
110kV Bus Bars shall be provided with two sets of Main Protections i.e., M1BZP and M2BZP,
which shall be further in accordance with the SEC Protection Philosophy.
M1BZP shall be High Impedance Differential Protection, while M2BZP shall be Low
Impedance (De-centralized Busbar Protection).
32.13 Protection of 33kV Feeders in 35/110kV Substation
 33kV BMP (BCPU), Back-Up and Reactive Power Compensation Protection Relays
Inverse time Overcurrent, Earth fault and Circuit Breaker Failure protection shall be provided
and shall be included as a function of an approved BMP (BCPU) for the 33kV Incomer (LV
Side of Power Transformer), 33kV PV Collector Feeders and 33kV Reactive Power
Compensation feeders.
33kV Incomer (LV Side of Power Transformer) shall be equipped with the separate backup
feeder protection relay.
 33kV Incoming Feeders (LV Side of Power Transformer)
33kV Incoming feeder (33kV Side of Power Transformer) shall be protected by Main
Protection Relays (M1TP & M2TP) installed in 110kV Protection Panel.
A single Overcurrent and Earth fault Relay shall be provided as Back Up Protection. Main
Protection is supplied from DC system-1 and Back Up Protection is supplied from DC System-
2.
 33kV PV Collector Feeders
33kV Incoming feeder shall be supplied with Independent Bay Control Protection Unit along
with 87L Protection w.r.t. the feeder of PV Farm.
Core Balance Current Transformer (CBCT) shall be provided for 33kV Gas Insulated
Switchgear inside Plant Substation
 33kV Reactive Compensation Feeders subject to detail engineering
A single Overcurrent and Earth fault Relay shall be provided as Main Protection.
A separate and dedicated Reactive Compensation Protection Relay with Overload, Out of
Balance functions and others, in a separate Protection Cubicle, shall be provided for the
protection of FACTS Devices (STATCOM, SVG).
An adjustable external timer needs to be provided for close inhibit function for preventing the
close operation subsequent to a tripping or opening of Capacitor bank.
 33kV Bus Coupler or Bus Section Feeder
A Single Overcurrent and Earth fault Relay is provided as Main Protection.
 33kV Busbar Protection
Separate and Dedicated High Impedance Busbar Protection with separate Check Panel and
Discriminatory Zone Relay Panel, housed in separate Cubicle/Panel, shall be mandatorily
provided for each Busbar Protection of all 33kV Buses.
 33kV Core Balance Current Transformer (CBCT) Protection
Indoor equipment shall have a minimum Ingress Protection (IP) as mentioned below:
 400V LV Switchgear (IP42)

 33kV MV Switchgears, (IP42)
 110kV Control & Relay Protection Panel (IP42),
 Metering Panel (IP42),
 PPC Panel (IP42),
 Battery (DC) Charger Panel (IP42),
 Telecom Panel (IP42).
The alarms for all above 33kV system shall be connected as Hard Wired to the SCMS system.
Communication cable length between differential relays over 75m would be FO communication, otherwise
Ethernet IEC 102/103/104 and IEC 61850 to be adopted.
32.14 Protection of LVAC System

 LVAC system shall be protected by three functions O/C, SBEF and REF.
 Towards the Protection of Earthing Transformer, separate and dedicate Numerical Relay shall
be provided in the 400V LVAC Incomer cubicle, in addition to the existing new BCPU. i.e.,
in total on the LV Compartment of LVAC Incomer, there shall be two (2) BCPUs.
32.15 Transformer and Reactor Mechanical Protection
 Power Transformer Protection
Power Transformer shall be provided with following mechanical protection devices, but not limited to the
following:
 Main Tank Buchholz

 Tap Changer Surge Relay
 Oil Temperature Protection
 Winding Temperature Protection
 Main Tank Pressure Relief
 OLTC Pressure Relief
 Cable Box Pressure Relief
 Cable Box Buchholz (if applicable)
 Oil level Gauge (low / high) main tank/TC
 Bladder Rupture Alarm
 Earthing and Auxiliary Transformer Protection
Earthing and Auxiliary Transformers shall be provided with following mechanical protection devices.
Buchholz Protection
 Oil Temperature Protection

 Winding Temperature Protection
 Pressure Relief Device
 Oil level Gauge
32.16 Requirements of Protection System
The supply and services to be performed by the Contractor shall comprise the manufacture, factory testing,
packing, transport, insurance, unloading, storage on site, construction works and erection, corrosion
protection, site testing, submission of documentation, commissioning, remote end works, obtaining Permit-
to-work (PTW)/Entry Permits, preparation and submission of method statement, training of Project
Company & SEC personnel and warranty of the works.
The Contractor shall be providing the complete works, even if the equipment or services to be provided has
not been explicitly mentioned in this Company Scope of Work Requirements.
All protection, control and metering equipment, devices and components shall be approved by Project
Company during the design stage of the project. The protection and control facilities shall be suitable for the
system arrangement.
For all protection systems, following necessary components shall also be supplied as a part of contract:
i. Relay Software (one per contract for each relay with multiple licenses)
ii. Relay Communication Cables (one per substation for each relay)
iii. Test Plugs (two per substation for each type)
iv. Test Leads (20 No. (minimum 1 meter in length per substation))
v. Shorting links (20 No. per substation)
vi. FO Power meter (one per substation)
vii. Laptop (one per substation loaded with all necessary software)
The Contractor shall obtain the approval of all Protection Equipment Manufacturers from Project Company
and SEC for Plant Substation & Remote End Offtaker Substations, respectively.
The Contractor shall carryout all necessary cabling, wiring, terminal blocks and works required to integrate/
interface protection functions in substation control & monitoring system (SCMS)
The Contractor shall provide the interface equipment, necessary hardware and cables up to SCMS interface
point for communications between the numerical relays/Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) and the
Substation Control & Monitoring System (SCMS).
All main protection relays are to be integrated to the substation control and monitoring system (SCMS) using
IEC 61850 with Parallel Redundant Protocol (PRP) only. Refer Annexure SCMS Architecture
Relays that do not support IEC 61850 shall be integrated to BCU, BCPU through hard wiring for alarm
purpose.
All main protection relays shall be integrated to PRI (Protection Relay Integration) PC to facilitate remote
access to all the relays from a dedicated PC located at the substation control or protection room.
The Contractor shall be responsible for proper functioning of the system and shall demonstrate the
functionality of the system to Project Company prior to substation commissioning.
The Contractor shall carryout all necessary cabling, wiring and works required for Protection relay
integration with SCMS or PRI.
The Contractor shall submit the PRI architecture showing all the connections from protection relays to the
PRI PC along with other necessary information like type of protocol, connector types and make and type of
Ethernet switches for Project Company’s approval during engineering stage.
32.17 Protection Relays
All protection relays shall be manufactured by reputed Project Company approved manufacturers from
Western Europe, Japan or North America, China (Siemens, ABB, SEL, GE), Russia, CIS Countries,
Azerbaijan and the relays shall be manufactured in these countries.
Any Relays manufactured in other countries and Chinese Make Relays (NR Electric, CHINT, TBEA and
others, not explicitly mentioned herein) shall be Rejected.
Any supplier of the protection relays for Remote End Offtaker Substations to be approved by SEC.
Main-1 and Main-2 relays must be of a different make and type.
If the proposed relays do not have manufacturer’s certificate that the device are complying the X/R specified
by SEC, will be retested. The Contractor in conjunction with relay manufacturer shall propose the necessary
tests to prove the suitability of the relay for proposed function and submit the test procedures and test
formats to Project Company for review and approval.
The above may include RTDS (Real Time Digital Simulator) Tests, if required by SEC. The Substation main
contractor in co-ordination with the Relay Manufacturer shall arrange RTDS testing of the relay for the
proposed application in the Substation, if required by SEC.
All relays and their components shall be suitable for operation under the local climatic conditions specified
herein and be designed for the protection on 110 kV and 33 kV power transmission systems.
All proposed protection relays, devices and components shall be selected from the approved lists and to be
submitted to Project Company for approval during the design stage of the project.
 33kV BMP (BCPU), Back-Up and Reactive Power Compensation Protection Relays
Inverse time Overcurrent, Earth fault and Circuit Breaker Failure protection shall be provided
and shall be included as a function of an approved BMP (BCPU) for the 33kV Incomer (LV
Side of Power Transformer), 33kV PV & BESS Collector Feeders and 33kV Reactive Power
Compensation feeders.
33kV Incomer (LV Side of Power Transformer) shall be equipped with the separate backup
feeder protection relay.
A separate and dedicated Reactive Power Compensation Protection Relay (RPCBP) with
Overload, Out of Balance and other functions shall be provided for the protection of Capacitor
banks.
32.18 Protection Communications
The communications for Main-1 and Main-2 protection shall be direct fibre/OPGW.
The Main1 and Main2 communications shall be installed in separate fibre optic cables inside the Plant
Substation however in single OPGW for interconnection with Remote End Offtaker Substations.
A spare pair of fibre patch chord shall be installed for an alternate path for both Main1 and Main2 protection
in the event of damage to one of the FO cables inside Plant Substation.
The FO communications shall meet the requirements of the protection relay communications module. The
attenuation and receive power shall be measured and confirmed to be within the specified limits for each
relay.
Spare fibre patch chords/cores shall be maintained to divert and restore communications in the event of loss
of fibre cable.
Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one point only. Current
transformers circuits supplying protection relays shall be earthed in the protection panels (or in LV
compartment). The earth link shall be situated in an accessible position and suitably labelled.
The neutral point of each voltage transformer secondary circuit shall be earthed at one point only at the LV
compartment via a separate removable link of approved design. The earth link shall be situated in an
accessible position and suitably labelled.
32.19 Control Cables, Wiring and Cable Terminations
Main-1 protection Trip DC Supply wiring shall be segregated from the Main-2 Protection Trip DC Supply
wiring. Both Main-1 and Main-2 trip circuit shall not be connected in one control cable at any point of
substation.
The circuits for each main protection scheme shall be segregated in separate multi-core cables from the CT /
VT to the protection panels.
Separate Cables are to be used for AC and DC circuits. One multi-core cable shall not be used for AC and
DC circuits together under any circumstances.
Under no circumstances, more than two terminals must not be connected to the terminal lugs for CT and VT.
In case, any additional termination is requiring for AVR, PPC, PQM, then same shall be connected to
separate CT and VT Core.
32.20 Control Relays
 Auto Reclose Function

Although auto-reclose is not generally used, the feeder bays must be adequately equipped to allow auto-
reclose to be enabled if required for future use.
1.1.1 SF6 Gas Trip Inhibit Auxiliary Relays
Contractor shall provide SF6 Gas Trip Inhibit Aux. Relays with following attributes:
•SF6 Gas Trip Inhibit Auxiliary Relays to be located either in the LCC or GIS mechanism box.
•There shall be separate aux. relays for Trip circuit -1 and Trip circuit-2 per circuit breaker.
•DC Supply for the Trip Inhibit auxiliary relays shall be from the tripping supply.
•Aux. relays contact shall make/break the negative side of the respective circuit breaker trip coils.
32.21 Synchronising Check Relay
Synchronising facilities are required for 110kV circuit breakers controlling transmission lines, Power
Transformer feeders and bus coupler/section circuits and at circuit breakers controlling power transformers
on the (33kV) low voltage side.
It shall not be possible for voltage transformer secondary Windings to be connected directly in parallel,
except through interposing voltage transformers associated with the Synchronising scheme. To prevent any
possibilities of back energising a VT through secondary Winding via Synchronising circuits, circuit breaker
auxiliary contacts which are of the late make early break type shall be employed to isolate the secondary.
32.22 Digital Fault Recorders (DFR) for 33kV and 110kV System
Fault recorders shall be used to monitor the power system disturbances, to detect abnormal conditions and to
record detailed voltage current, frequency, operation status of protection relays and selected control devices
(CB Tripping), and other related information during abnormal situations.
For 110kV System, a dedicated Fault recorder and disturbance system shall be installed inside both the Plant
Substation and Remote End Offtaker Substations, as per SECDesign.
Fault recorder shall have enough memory for successful recording of all faults and transmitting/transferring
of fault data automatically, to permanent storing location (permanent storage unit, dedicated industrial PC,
master station and remote station (EI), even in case of temporary loss of communication channels, as per
SEC requirements.
Digital Fault Recorders (DFR) shall be from Western Europe, Japan, North America, Russia or Azerbaijan
and shall be manufactured in these countries. DFR manufactured in other countries shall not be used.
Separate and dedicated Disturbance and Fault Locator Unit (FLU) in the Digital Fault Recorders, must be
provided for following equipments must be considered: -
 Each and Individual Numbers of 33kV Incomers.
 Each and Individual Number of 33kV Bus Coupler.
 Each and Individual Numbers of 38.5/230kV Power Transformers.
 Each and Individual Numbers of Line Feeders.
 Each and Individual Number of 110kV Bus Coupler.
A minimum of two analogue and two digital spare channels per recorder shall be provided. All spare
channels shall be fully equipped and wired up to the terminal block.
Alarm contacts to indicate ‘fault recorder operated’ and ‘fault recorder faulty’ shall be available in the fault
recorder. The’ fault recorder faulty’ alarm contact shall be wired up to SCMS panel for the annunciation in
the control room as well as in SCADA.
Master Station and fault recorder Industrial PCs shall be used to set up the fault recorder configuration, set
up, retrieve and view the records, and on demand print the data (i.e., the substation name, feeder name and
precise time of the occurrence of the fault to the nearest millisecond, pre-fault signal level, post fault signal
level, fault current duration, designation of all channels, cause of triggering, length of record etc.).
The fault recorder shall incorporate all necessary output ports/cards (i.e., Ethernet, parallel, etc.) for
connection to permanent storage unit, industrial PC and master stations considering speed of data transfer
and location of substation industrial PC and communication equipment (multiplexer, etc.) relative to location
of fault recorder. Facility to download the data should be available.
All calibration adjustments shall be through software. The circuit board access shall be from the front of the
recorder for ease of repair/replacement, if necessary.
The communication port to access Hub from the front side (to connect laptop) shall be provided.
Permanent storage unit with remote monitoring facility shall be provided as redundant storage unit and may
be used for data transmission to Master Stations. The stored records are to be maintained in permanent
storage unit for at least two weeks.
Separate PCs shall be used for Protection Relays Interface (PRI) and DFR. PC for DFR shall be industrial
type and shall be provided along with necessary accessories under this contract.
The DFR PC shall have dual port for station LAN connection.
The DFR PC CPU shall be installed in a lockable compartment to prevent unauthorised access. Only the
monitor, mouse & keyboard shall be accessible.
All the supplied hardware is subject to the approval of Project Company.
There shall not be any interruption of the AC supply to the industrial PC. A suitably designed inverter fed
from station DC battery with a static switch to automatically transfer the load of the computer in the event of
AC supply failure without interruption of AC supply to PC shall be provided.
The system shall be designed such that simple and accurate input to output calibration may be performed
during initial installation and occasionally to change calibration or verify the accuracy of the overall system
calibration. Overall accuracy error shall be less than 1% of full scale overall operating environmental
conditions including temperature and electrical noise.
The Contractor under his scope of work shall provide all necessary software and hardware interfaces for
successful integration of fault recorders into the remote workstation as well as in the EI substations to the
satisfactory of SEC.
Fault Recorders shall be connected to EI through the communication available in the substation (i.e.,
Ethernet, Multiplexer, BDH, etc.). All interfaces shall be provided under this contract.
The detailed instruction for setting up of communication equipment for remote communication is to be
provided. There shall not be any password protection to be kept with the fault recorder manufacturer, if any
shall be provided to Project Company with proper instruction to maintain the equipment. If any user
programming required for any equipment while changing any component shall be provided to Project
Company with proper instructions.
Fault analysis software shall be compatible (as far as possible) with all versions of the same brand installed
in SEC’s system as well as any foreseen future development by the same manufacturer.
The fault recorders, where Local Storage Units (LSU) are required, shall be supplied with static type hard
drives.
33 400V LVAC Switchgear
33.1 Purpose and Objective
This specification applies to the design, engineering, manufacturing/fabrication, assembly, inspection, testing
before dispatch, packing, forwarding, supply and delivery at destination by suitable transport from foreign
origin, unloading at site and installation and commissioning of Low Voltage AC Switchgear on turnkey basis
and as specified in the following sections of this document. All the equipment and all their auxiliary
components shall be design and built for a minimum design life of ≥30 years.
33.2 Descriptions of the plant
The whole plant is divided in sub-plants or blocks with a central or string inverter and transformer each
(called power station), located in the centre of each PV field, that will collect the generation of the PV and
will convert to a suitable level of voltage (medium voltage AC), to reduce the losses during the transport to
the Substations of the plant, close to the boundary of the plant. In these substations, the voltage is elevated
again (High Voltage AC), to transport the energy to the Offtaker Substation (Point of Interconnection).
33.3 Scope of supply
Equipment and components

a) Low Voltage AC Switchboard
One 400V Low Voltage Air Insulated Switchboard with 4 incomers and two bus couplers. The switchboard
shall include all the necessary equipment, materials and activities for the construction, equipment
installation, commissioning, and operation of the Substation.
The switchboard shall include necessarily.
 Air Circuit breakers

 Moulded Case Circuit breakers
 CTs & VTs
 Protection/ Monitoring & Auxiliary Relays
 Terminal box to power, control, and communications cables.
b) Other components for the supply
 Recommended spares for start-up and guarantee tests.

 Recommended spare parts for 3 years’ operation.
 One (1) set of special tools which the Supplier deems necessary for plant maintenance and
erection. At minimum, will provide:
˗ Tools for circuit breaker. Set of freewheeling ratchets with hexagon socket to
manual charging of circuit breaker spring drives.
˗ Supply of transformer secondary neutral CT outdoor type with suitable IP class
(IP55 min).
˗ Protection relay shall be supplied along with necessary communication cable and
relay configuration software’s.
˗ Suitable test plug also to be supplied.
The Supplier’s scope of work will be including the supply of special tools. These tools and equipment shall
be used by the installation teams during the erection period. They shall be then handed over, complete and in
good working order at the completion of the installation works.
c) Services included.
 Engineering
 Packing Seaworthy (As applicable) and transport, in accordance with the requirements
included in the purchasing conditions.
 Performance of the tests indicated in this specification.
 Supply of the documentation required in this specification.
 Supervision of erection and commissioning.
 Training at site.
d) AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Working conditions
Service Indoor
Type of Service Continuous
Pollution Level III, strong (31.5 mm/kV)
Seismicity Minimum
Elevation < 1000m
33.4 Design requirements
33.4.1 Applicable Codes and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated in the corresponding paragraphs, the equipment and components to be supplied
must be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with all applicable International Codes and
Standards and local and national regulations of UAE, as indicated in the standard list below.
In the event of conflict between any of the codes and standards listed, the most stringent requirement shall
apply.
It shall be the Supplier’s responsibility to be, or to become, knowledgeable of the requirements of the codes
and standards set out below. Any changes or alterations to the equipment required for compliance with these
codes and standards shall be at the expense of the Supplier.
Should the Supplier wish to subcontract any of the work covered by this Specification, it is his responsibility
to ensure that his subcontractors are made fully aware of the relevant requirements of this Specification. The
Purchaser has the right of approval of proposed subcontractors.
 IEC 61869 Instrument transformers
 IEC 60051 (IEC 60051-1 until -9) Direct acting indicating analogue electrical – measuring
instruments and their accessories.
 IEC 60085 Electrical insulation – thermal evaluation and designation
 IEC 60255 (IEC 60255-6, -8) Electrical Relays
 IEC 61439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
 IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP-Code)
 IEC 60664 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage systems
 IEC 60715 Dimensions of low voltage switchgear and control gear
 IEC 60947 (IEC 60947 -1, -2, -3, until -8) Low voltage switchgear and control gear
 IEC 61810 (IEC 61810 -1, -2, -7) Electromechanical elementary relays
 IEC 61641 Enclosed low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
 IEC 60269 - Low-voltage fuses
 IEC 60571 - Control electronic and low current components, reactors, transformers
 BS 7671 IEEE - Wiring Regulation 17th Edition.
 IEEE Std 519-1992 - Recommended Practices and requirement for Harmonic control in
Electrical power system
 EN 27779 - Noise emitted by computer and business equipment. Method of measurement
of airborne noise.
 IEC 60812 - Analysis techniques for system reliability -Procedure for failure mode and effects
analysis (FMEA)
 IEC 60989 - Separating transformers, auto transformers, variable transformers and reactors.
 BS 381 C - Specification for colours for identification, coding, and special purposes.
 IEC 60445 - Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification
- Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and conductors.
The applicable issues of these standards shall be the latest published, including the corresponding
modifications, at the time of award of the order.
33.4.2 Main Characteristics
All the equipment and all their auxiliary components shall be designed and built for a minimum design life
of ≥30 years. This requirement is not a guaranteed value but shall be used to determine the wear and ageing
of components. This shall be used to establish the maintenance procedures and component replacements
The equipment shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of IEC Standards in their latest
editions and other relevant codes, along with the additional requirements of this specification.
33.5 LVAC System
33.5.1 Switchgear
Switchboards for supplies to substation and building services shall be of the single bus bar, air insulated
metal-clad type incorporating air circuit breakers with electrical control, air brake manually operated switch-
fuse units, or moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) suitable for operation indoors on 400 volt, 3-phase, 4-
wire, 60 Hz systems, having the neutrals solidly earthed.
The technical data of the Low voltage switchboard shall be in accordance with this specification requirement
and Single Line Diagram (SLD).
LV Switchgear shall be provided with three auxiliary supplies derived from the three earthing transformers.
A Standby supply connection facility shall also be provided as indicated in the Single Line Diagram.
Normally three sections of the LVAC switchboard shall be supplied via the associated main incoming circuit
breakers with both bus section breaker & standby DG incomer in open condition.
Auto Transfer System (ATS) shall be provided for incomer and bus coupler of main LV switchgear. Both
incomers and bus coupler of main LV switchgear shall be controlled from local and remote. Electrical
interlock shall be provided such that it shall not be possible to parallel two and more transformers both on
Auto and Manual mode of operations. In Auto mode, Interlocks shall be provided such that it shall be
possible to close the standby incomer only when all the three incomer CBs are open and there is no power
supply present in all transformer incomer feeders. When selection is on manual mode, no automatic
changeover shall occur.
Interlocks shall be provided such that it shall be possible to close the standby incomer only when all the three
incomer CBs are open and in test position. Interlocks shall also be provided to prevent the closing of any
incomer circuit breakers in service position, if the standby incomer is switched on.
No tripping should take place while changing over the auto/manual switch from auto to manual or manual to
auto. The incoming and bus section circuit breakers shall have facilities to enable them to be racked out and
locked out under maintenance conditions. Operation of circuit breakers in test position shall not affect the
status of any other circuit breakers.
All AC/DC auxiliary supply circuits shall be supervised by supervision relays. The supervision relays shall
be front mounted and shall have status indication facilities.
Independent DC circuit with separate fuse/ link for indication circuit, protection circuit, and tripping circuit
shall be provided.
Scheme shall be designed to prevent continuous energization of trip/close coils.
Following controls shall be provided for main LV switchgear from the Plant Control and Monitoring System
(PCMS)/DCS installed at the O & M building:
 Incomers (on / off)

 Bus coupler (on / off)
For monitoring from the Plant Control and Monitoring System the following signals shall be at least
provided:
 Circuit breaker “On”

 Circuit breaker “Off”
 Overcurrent / short circuit trip
 Earth fault trip
 Under voltage trip (only for incomers)
 No control voltage
 No bus bar voltage (only for incomers)
 Feeder line under voltage (only for incomers)
 Common alarm
 Service and test position.
The signals shall be wired to a common terminal strip. For remote control the respective signals shall be
wired to the circuit breakers, too.
33.5.2 Construction Requirement
All components shall be accessibly mounted in the switchboard and shall not impede access to wiring or
terminals.
The switchboards shall be built up of circuit-breaker units, isolating fuse-switches, isolators, contactors,
moulded case and miniature circuit breakers. All units, when built up into a complete switchboard, shall be
such that the completed switchboard is of flush fronted design having a neat and clean appearance and is
readily extensible.
All faults occurring within any individual unit shall be contained within that unit and except for bus bar
faults shall not cause shutdown of any section of board other than the unit itself. All equipment shall be
constructed of non-hygroscopic and non-flammable material.
LVAC circuit terminals shall be segregated from other terminals and shall be fitted with non-flammable
plastic covers to prevent contact with any live parts. They shall have warning labels, with red lettering,
mounted thereon.
The design shall cater for the interconnection of busbars, both primary and secondary, between adjacent
units. The apertures for secondary bus wires between adjacent units and for secondary wiring in individual
units shall be 'bushed' to prevent damage to wires on sharp edges of metal.
The enclosure protection shall be to level IP42.
The Manufacturer shall take care that all components and equipment are selected considering easy
maintenance, simple and quick diagnosis and long maintenance intervals.
All components and equipment shall be designed for continuous duty at rated load and under the given
climatic conditions. Standard industrial high-performance systems shall be used as far as possible.
Components and equipment of same kind and type shall be selected for equivalent functions. The
interchange ability shall be guaranteed.
All switchgears shall be designed for 45°C ambient temperature even though is located in air-conditioned
room and capable of withstanding the extreme saline environment.
At least 20% of spare circuit breakers and terminals shall be added to each LV switchboard and distribution
board. Cabinets shall be sized as to leave 30 % spare space after completion of all works.
The incoming and outgoing cable entry shall be from bottom and non-magnetic gland plate shall be supplied
for main I/C supplies & undrilled gland plate shall be provided for all outgoing cubicles. Suitable incoming
and outgoing terminals shall be provided for terminating all the feeder cables.
The internal and external surface shall be painted, and the minimum paint thickness shall be 70 microns and
average of 90 microns. The internal paint colour shall be semi-gloss white and external light grey RAL 7032.
Transparent Protective shrouds shall be provided for resistor or other equipment, which might be susceptible
to inadvertent damage during operation.
33.5.3 Primary Busbar
Primary busbars and connections between the several pieces of apparatus forming the equipment of a cubicle
shall be of electrolytic copper.
Each phase conductor, shall, in addition to being spaced to give the necessary air clearance for the rated
voltage, include secondary insulation in the form of PVC sleeve or other approved continuous coating to the
maximum extent practicable.
The bus bars and connections in individual circuits shall also be capable of carrying continuously the rated
current assigned without damage or overheating of any part. On determining the load current performance of
tiered switchboards, it shall be assumed that all circuits are carrying their rated current at site ambient
temperature.
All the joints and connections shall be tinned, or silver plated. The joint shall not make any difference in the
resistance value of the conductor. Primary bus bars and connections shall be clearly marked and shall be
displaced for standard phase sequence Red (R), Yellow (y), and Blue (b), from front to rear, top to bottom or
left to right as viewed from the switching device operating mechanism side. The neutral bar shall be
consistently disposed throughout the system. Bus bars shall be readily accessible for extension.
33.5.4 Equipment Earthing
All metallic parts other than the components of electrical circuit shall be connected to hard drawn copper
bus bar with high conductivity which runs in the full length of the panel and bolted to the main frame of the
switchgear.
The design and construction of the equipment shall be such that all metal parts, other than current carrying
parts, of withdrawable equipment are earthed before the primary connections are made.
Flexible braided earth wires of proper size shall earth panel doors.
Metal case supports and bases of all instruments, relays or other associated components mounted on the
switchgear shall be connected to the earth bus bar by conductors of not less than 2.5 mm2 cross-sectional
area.
33.5.5 Air Circuit Breaker (if applicable)
Primary circuit breaker units shall be of the metal-enclosed, horizontal draw-out breaker type and shall
comply with IEC 60947-2.
The withdrawable circuit breakers of the 4-pole type shall be used for switchgear incomers and, bus
couplers, and shall be standardized units with different sizes according to the requirements. A withdrawal or
an engage of the withdrawable circuit breakers shall only be possible with opened power circuit. To meet
this requirement a mechanical/electrical interlocking shall be provided.
The moving portion of each circuit-breaker unit shall consist of a four-pole circuit breaker with operating
mechanism, primary and secondary disconnecting devices, auxiliary switches, position indicators and the
necessary control wiring all mounted on a substantial steel framework. This framework and all metal parts of
the moving portion, apart from current carrying parts, shall be solidly earthed via the fixed portion at the
instant of inserting the moving portion into the fixed portion. The earthing of the moving portion shall be
approved.
Circuit breakers shall be withdrawable without use of special tools. The drawers shall be supported from the
frame as far as the whole unit could be lifted out. In case any special tools are required, the same shall be
supplied.
The switch position of circuit breaker shall be operable from outside, also if the front door is closed. For the
circuit breakers, a defined operating position, test position and withdrawn position shall be provided which
shall be visible from outside, too. In test position the main contacts shall be opened, but the control circuits
shall be in function.
The operation of circuit breakers shall be carried out via motor driven spring-loaded buffers. In case of
control voltage fault the buffers shall be manually operable.
Spring operated mechanism shall have the following additional measures: -

 If the circuit breaker is open and the springs charged the circuit breaker can be closed and then
tripped.  If the circuit breaker is closed and the springs charged the circuit breaker could be
opened, closed and then tripped.
 Mechanical indication and an auxiliary switch for remote electrical indication shall be
provided to indicate the state of the spring.
 Motor charged mechanisms should be provided with means for charging the springs by hand
and also a shrouded push-button for releasing the springs. An electrical release coil shall also
be provided.
 Under normal operation, motor recharging of the operating spring shall commence
immediately and automatically upon the completion of each circuit-breaker closing operation.
The time required for spring recharging shall not exceed 30seconds.
 It shall not be possible to close a circuit-breaker, fitted with a motor charged closing
mechanism, and whilst the spring is being fully charged and before the associated charging
mechanism is fully prepared for closing.
 The limit switch shall be provided for cutting off the spring charging power supply when the
spring is fully charged.
 Anti-pumping scheme for all CBs shall be provided.
 Failure of DC control supply shall not trip a circuit breaker, which is on.
 For the opening and closing of Main breakers and coupler, opening and closing coils shall be
indicated (YO opening YC closing).
Circuit breakers of the same current and voltage rating shall be fully interchangeable one with another and
no breakers of different rating shall be inserted into other slots. Provision shall be made for completing the
auxiliary circuits when the circuit-breaker main connections are isolated, to enable the function of the circuit
breaker to be tested off load.
The use of an integral device for this latter facility is preferred to an arrangement employing detachable
connections.
Each withdrawable circuit breaker unit shall be provided with separate miniature circuit breakers for the
following functions:
 Local control, interlocks, signals and faults indications
 Local power supply to motor drive.
Air circuit breakers shall be equipped as follows:
 Overload / short-circuit protection

For protection against overload a current-dependent, delayed release shall be used. The setting range shall be
from 0.2 to 1.0 of nominal current and the time delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds. For selective short-
circuit protection an independent releaser shall be used. The setting range shall be from 1 to 15 of the setting
range of overload releaser. The delay time of the independent releaser shall be adjustable.
 Earth fault protection

For protection against earth fault currents releaser for single pole earth short circuit for residual earth fault
shall be provided. The adjustable range of residual earth fault releaser shall be selected regarding the
quantity of connected consumers to the switchboard. For the circuit breakers of couplings residual earth fault
releasers are not foreseen.
 Under voltage protection

The under-voltage protection shall be realized with voltage relays. The relays shall have an adjustable
minimum operating voltage and an adjustable time delay (1-15 sec.). For the circuit breakers of couplings
under voltage protection is not foreseen.
In the front door of circuit breaker compartments/cabinets, the following devices shall be installed:
 One multimeter for voltage, current
 One push button “On”
 One push button “Off”
 Local/remote selection switch
 Auto/manual selection switch
 One indication light “On”
 One indication light “Off”
 One indication light “Control voltage fault”
 One indication light “Fault”
 One push button “Fault-receipting”.
 Indication lights shall be equipped with LED lamps and lamp test facility.
 Further details shall be defined and provided by manufacturer during detail design.
All circuit breakers shall be connected to their associated bus bars and cables through isolating devices of the
off-load type but suitable for operation whilst the bus bar or feeder circuits are live.
The design shall be such that it is impossible for the isolating devices to be opened by forces due to current
in the primary circuit and shall be interlocked with the circuit breaker so that it is impossible to make or
break current with the isolating device. Attempted isolation shall not trip the circuit breaker.
Metal shutters shall be provided to completely shroud fixed isolating contacts of the circuit breaker bus bar
and feeder circuits. These shutters shall be opened and closed automatically.
By the movement of the circuit breaker carriage and shall prevent access to fixed isolating contacts when the
circuit breaker is withdrawn.
Self-aligning plug and socket isolating devices of an approved design shall be provided for all auxiliary
circuits. The position of these devices shall be such that individual circuits on different units are in the same
relative physical positions.
33.5.6 Interlocking Gear
Interlocking shall be of the mechanical or key operated type and shall be provided to prevent the following
operations: -
 A moving portion from being withdrawn from or inserted into the isolating contacts when the
circuit breaker is closed. Attempted isolation shall not trip a closed-circuit breaker.
 The closing of the circuit breaker unless the movable portion is correctly plugged in or
isolated from the equipment.
 The circuit breaker being closed in the "service" or "earth" location without completing the
appropriate auxiliary circuits.
 Rack-in/out of any CB should not disturb other CBs, which are in service.
 Control supply isolating switch for all CBs at the front side of the panel to be provided.
When key interlocking is employed, any attempt to remove the trapped key shall not cause closing or
opening of the associated equipment. Where a circuit breaker or other switchgear is fitted with means for
mechanical and electrical operation, interlocks shall be provided so that it is impossible for the electrical and
mechanical devices to operate simultaneously. The earthing devices shall be provided with interlocks to
ensure correct operation in conjunction with the associated circuit breaker.
33.5.7 Motor Starting Units (if applicable)
Each motor circuit below 30 kW shall be controlled by a direct-on-line contactor starter and shall be
provided with a contactor, isolator, set of HRC fuses and overload device, or a moulded case circuit-breaker
(MCCB), to from a contactor starter unit. The contactor shall be the normal means of stopping and starting
the motor. Each unit shall be contained in an individual compartment having a front access door.
The starters, in addition to complying with this Specification, shall comply with IEC 60947-4-1 and shall be
capable of dealing with normal and fault conditions. The starter units shall be of the air insulated, metal-clad
type and be designed to ensure safety of operating personnel. The contactor starter units shall be of air
insulated type formed where appropriate into metal-clad tiered panels. Starters and their component devices
shall comply with IEC 60947-4-1 except as modified or extended by this Specification. Multi-tiered starters
for use on a.c. shall preferably be of the horizontal draw-out type having automatic shutters. Starters of fixed
or semi-draw-out pattern having adequate and safe access for maintenance may be offered for consideration.
Interlocks shall be provided to ensure that the unit access door can only be opened when the associated
starter is open and that it cannot be closed in the service position until the access door is closed. The
operating characteristics of the protective device and the overload device shall ensure that the protective
device always operates before the overload relay at all values of current in excess of the contactor's
maximum breakage capacity.
Curves showing evidence of this shall be provided by the Contractor for each type of starter. Test evidence
proving the maximum breaking capacity assigned to each size of contactor shall be provided. Where starters
are specified for operation with a.c. closing supply the scheme for deriving such supply shall be approved.
33.5.8 Contactors (if applicable)
Contactors shall be of the air break form and unless otherwise specified shall be of the mechanical latch in
type for essential supplies and electrical hold-in type for general purpose auxiliaries. Contactors shall comply
with their rated duty, utilization category and mechanical endurance class.
In addition, contactors shall be capable of making and carrying current equivalent to the specified fault
capacity as limited in magnitude and duration by the cut off characteristic of the associated fuse-links
without damage.
Each contactor shall be fitted with an isolating switch for two duties,
 To isolate the contactor or starter from the bus bar the permit maintenance. It shall not be
possible to gain access to fuses unless the isolating switch is open.
 Energized motor isolation duty in the case of stalled rotor current switching for motor starters.
For this duty isolating switches shall have a breaking capacity not less than that of the
contactor with which it is associated.
The contactor isolating switch shall be capable of making the system prospective symmetrical fault current
when limited in magnitude and duration by the cut off characteristic of the largest HRC fuses that may be
fitted to that unit.
Starter isolating switches shall be capable, with the fuses replaced by copper links of negligible impedance,
of carrying for a period of 60 seconds and breaking the stalled rotor current of the associated motor. If the
starter is withdrawable, it shall be interlocked to ensure that off-load isolating contacts do not make or break
current.
33.5.9 Fuse & Fuse Switches
Units shall be of the air break, air insulated, metal-clad type and be designed to ensure safety to operating
personnel. The fixed contacts shall be shrouded so that maintenance of the units can be carried out in safety
with the bus bars live.
Switch mechanisms shall be spring assisted to ensure a definite and high-speed opening and closing action
which cannot be interrupted once it has been initiated. The units shall preferably comprise fuse-switches
having integral fuses, but manufacturers may offer the alternative of switch-fuses in which the air break
switch and connections from it to the associated fuse shall be designed to minimize the possibility of a
phase-to phase short-circuit.
In either case the switch shall be capable of breaking 3 times the normal rated current at .3 power factor and
110% rated voltage and making and carrying the system prospective symmetrical fault current as limited in
magnitude and duration by the cut off characteristic of the largest HRC fuse which may be fitted to that unit.
All fuse-links supplied shall be in accordance with IEC Publication 60269 for industrial application and shall
comply in every respect with this standard.
Type Test Certificates giving time/current characteristics of all fuse-links shall be provided.
33.5.10 Isolators (if applicable)
Isolator units shall be capable of dealing with normal operating and through fault conditions. The isolator
units shall be of the air insulated air-break metal-enclosed type and be designed to ensure safety of operating
personnel.
The isolators shall be of the double-break, off-load type with the fixed contacts shrouded so that maintenance
of the unit can be carried out in safety with either the busbars or the incoming circuit live.
They shall be of the three or four pole type as appropriate. When four-pole isolators are specified all four
poles shall be coupled to, and operated by one operating mechanism, Bolted type links will not be acceptable
for this duty.
The isolators are generally for bus bar isolation purposes on the secondary side of transformers or as one end
of a tie feeder. In either case the remote end, primary side of transformer or remote end of tie feeder, is
controlled by a circuit-breaker or fuse-switch and a key interlock shall be provided on the isolator which is
interlocked with the remote end switching device so as to prevent operation of the isolator unless the remote
end switching device is open.
33.5.11 Moulded Case & Miniature Circuit Breakers
The MCCB are meant for use as feeder protection and shall be manually operated with trip-free operating
mechanism of the quick-break type with de-ionizing type arc shuts and fitted with adjustable thermal release
and instantaneous magnetic release. The MCCBs shall comply with IEC 60947-2.
The MCBs are meant for protection of control circuits and shall comply with IEC 60898. Multi-pole circuit
breakers shall be contained within a common dust-proof moulded case of high mechanical strength.
A common operating lever shall operate all poles of such circuit breakers simultaneously. Clear indication
shall be given on each circuit breaker to show whether it is in the closed, open or tripped condition and also
each circuit breaker shall be provided with one set of alarm contacts for remote signalling.
These contacts shall close in the event of an automatic trip. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for use in ac
system up to the maximum fault current levels available on the system. Attention is drawn to the relationship
between the over-current characteristics of the circuit breaker and any preceding HRC fuse which is
providing short-circuit backup protection.
The characteristic of the circuit breaker and that of the fuse shall be so related that the maximum rupturing
time of the fuse is at least 10ms less than the minimum operating time of the circuit breaker for currents in
excess of the maximum breaking capacity of the circuit breaker.
The MCCB shall be operable from the front of the unit. The control circuit shall be equipped with control
miniature circuit breaker, auxiliary relays, indication lights and all necessary devices for local and remote
monitoring. Trip units connected with MCCB of fire pump feeder shall be suitable for motor application.
33.5.12 Residual Current Circuit breakers (if applicable)
Residual current circuit breakers shall comply with the requirements of BS 4293/IEC 61008, and shall be
complete with current transformer, ON/OFF switch, test button and trip free mechanism.
Each shall be of suitable rating and sensitivity for its application. The residual current devices of circuits for
humid locations shall be of 30 mA type, for dry locations a 300mA type may be used as indicated in the
approved SLD & Load Schedule.
33.5.13 Current Transformers
The thermal withstand capability of the current transformers shall be based on a disconnection time of min. 1
sec. in the outgoing feeders to consumers and min. 1.0 sec. in the incomers.
The transformer shall have the following data:
 Measurement class 0.5 FS 5 or 10

 Protection class 5P XX & PX
 Secondary current 1A
 Primary current according to the requirements
Cast-resin insulated; corona-free transformers shall be used. The current transformers must withstand the
dynamic and thermal short-circuit stresses. For protection and measurement separate cores shall be provided.
Current transformer terminals shall be equipped with short-circuiting links.
Further details shall be defined and provided by Manufacturer during detail design. REF CT which will be
provided as a spare for neutral shall be of outdoor type.
33.5.14 Overvoltage Protection
For protection against overvoltage from network side the incomers of switchboards shall be equipped with
overvoltage protectors. For all electronic devices inside the switchboards additional overvoltage protection
shall be provided.
33.5.15 Cable Termination
The terminal strips shall be equipped with terminals for power cables, cables for control and signal voltage
supply and cables for signal connection. The terminals shall be selected according to nominal current and
conductor cross section, but shall be at least for a conductor cross section of 4 mm² and a nominal current of
16 A.
For all incoming or outgoing feeders, which require more than two parallel cables, parallel connection bars
or parallel terminal shall be installed.
For signal connection, copper shielded, or copper screened cables shall be used. By means of suitable
measures shall be ensured, that the shields/screens of these cables are adequately grounded.
33.5.16 Control and Monitoring
The control and monitoring of the main LV switchgear shall be from the Plant Control and Monitoring
System. The interface signals shall be hardwired to an Electrical Interface Unit (EIU) that shall be used to
collect all signals and exchange them with the DCS.
33.5.17 Anti-Condensation Heaters
Each cabinet of switchboard and distribution boards shall be equipped with an anti-condensation heater,
which shall be fed from the 230/400 V, 50Hz voltage level.
Each bus bar of the respective low voltage switchboard shall be provided with one power supply, protected
by means of a 16A miniature circuit breaker situated in a low voltage distribution board.
The heaters shall be humidity controlled; a failure of heaters shall be annunciated, locally with an indication
lamp and remotely by an alarm.
33.5.18 Lighting and Maintenance sockets
Each cabinet shall be equipped with interior lighting, switched by a door contact. The feeding of the lighting
fixtures shall be provided via the power supply for anti-condensation heaters. One 13A sockets shall be
provided for maintenance purpose.
33.5.19 Protection Functions
The system of protection shall be selected and coordinated in line with the feeding network data and the
connected equipment requirements:
 To guarantee personnel and plant safety.
 To ensure a sufficient protection against damages of the equipment, that could arise from the
internal and external short circuits as well as from possible atmospheric discharges.
33.5.20 Distribution Boards
Distribution boards shall be industrial type, metal enclosed, and factory assembled boards with self-standing
or wall mounted cabinets. The cabinets shall be equipped with hinged doors and fix mounted units and
devices.
The cabinets shall be accessible from the front only. Hinged front doors shall be swing out more than 90°. If
cabinets will be mounted on false floor or cable cellar, the bottom shall be covered with galvanized steel
sheets. Wall mounted cabinets shall be equipped with cable glands.
For distribution boards located in ventilated rooms or outdoor the cable glands shall only be located in the
bottom. The cable termination compartments shall be located in the lower part of the distribution boards. If
for special boards (only for indoor dry rooms with air conditioning) a part of the cables shall be carried to
upwards, a cable compartment in the upper part can be provided, too.
The cable termination compartments shall be sized in a manner such that an easy cable lying is possible and
all cables can be sufficiently fixed. All nuts for fixing of units/ devices shall be welded on the steel structure
or threads will be cut in the steel structure. The use of loose nuts or self-cutting screws is not allowed.
Screws, nuts and washers shall be galvanized, or cadmium plated.
The bus bars shall be selected according to the electrical requirements and shall be of high-conductivity
electrolytic copper. The cabinets shall be equipped with bus bar systems consisting of 5 conductors. All bus
bars shall be located inside the bus bar compartment and shall have the same cross sections throughout all
cabinets.
Vertical bus bars (with exception of PE) shall be completely insulated and shall be run about the full length
of the section. For each cabinet with outgoings, an additional PE bus bar shall be provided. These bus bars
shall be suitable for PE conductor termination of outgoing and incoming cables and shall be mounted in the
lower part of the cabinets in horizontally direction.
The connection with the PE bus bar in the main bus bar compartment shall be performed via bar, Separate
for each cabinet. The PE bus bar for cabinet and the connection to the main PE bus bar shall be of adequate
size to withstand single pole short circuit currents.
Regarding the function either one or two bus bar sections shall be provided, or the switchboard shall be
divided into three bus bar sections. Each bus bar section gets a separate power supply. Between the bus bar
sections a coupling shall be used. The bus bars shall be equipped with an adequate number of earthing studs.
The distribution boards shall mainly consist of the following:

 Bus bars (copper) in the upper part of the cabinets
 Neutral bus bar (copper) in the lower part of the cabinet
 Grounding bus bar (copper) in the lower part of the cabinet
 Arrestors for all incoming feeders from the network and for bus bars
 Terminal strips for power and control cables connection
 Installation channels for internal wiring
 Fix installed equipment, mounted on supporting frames and rails.
 Operation and supervision devices, mounted in the front door.
 Flexible wires protected with flexible pipes from fixed part to the front door.
 Drawing pocket in the door.
 Incoming power supply indication Completion and wiring of the distribution boards shall be
carried out according to the requirements.
For main switches on-load isolator switches shall be used. Outgoings to the consumers shall be equipped
with miniature circuit breakers (up to 63 A) or moulded case circuit breakers. If necessary for special
circuits, leakage current switches shall be provided.
For external control and monitoring the respective potential free contacts shall be foreseen and shall be wired
on terminal stripe. In most of the cases, the tripping of circuit breakers and leakage current switches shall be
transferred, only.
Other signals shall be provided according to the requirements (e. g. lighting panels). All live parts within the
cabinets, which will be entered during normal routine maintenance, shall be protected by means of suitable
covers.
The distribution boards shall be designed under consideration of spare place of at least 20% of the fully
equipped boards.
33.5.21 Painting
All components and devices shall have a resistant, long-term stable, high-quality painting. At least two
layers shall be applied. Damages, caused by transport, installation, cabling or commissioning shall be
repaired in a way, that the original quality is restored. Any additional painting at location of installation is
not allowed. The Colour and finish of the paint shall be as instructed during detailed engineering.
33.5.22 Engineering
The engineering comprises the complete basic and detail engineering in respect of the scope of supply, as
well as design documentation required in the following scope:
 Constructional design drawings or constructional data (requirements on the construction of the
switchgear room).
 Checking the suitability of the switchgear room for the intended purposes, and approval of
customer's civil-engineering drawings.
 Terminal diagrams, parts lists and low-voltage cable lists required for the switchgear offered.
 Submission of circuit diagrams in accordance with contractually agreed conditions for
approval.
 Supply of “as-built” documents.
 Preparation and delivery of operating and maintenance instructions in accordance with
contractually agreed conditions for the systems in English.
The documentation is draw up according to IEC standards:

 Documentation language: English
 Graphical symbols: conform to IEC 60617
 Plant and device designation complies to IEC 61346 -2
 Basic engineering drawings
 Single line
 Plan view
 Section drawings
 Constructional data showing load points and geometrical requirements for the civil
construction work.
 Earthing drawing showing the connecting points to be provided.
 Steel bracing drawings
 Detail engineering drawings
 Typical documentation structure of wiring diagrams
 Logic & Circuit diagrams
 List of equipment: list of used equipment showing ordering number and short description.
 Location diagram showing location of equipment.
 Terminal diagrams.
33.5.23 Packing & delivery
The delivery, installation and commissioning of the low voltage switchboards shall include, but not limited
to the following items:
 Transport to location of installation (if necessary, storage), and the complete mounting.
 Cable connections between the different cabinets of switchboard.
 Grounding and potential equalization for the cabinets, including connection with the next
grounding bus bars.
 Termination of all cables at the switchboards.
 Closing of entries through the floor below the cubicles using standardized, fireproof sealing
system.
 Commissioning of the functioning switchboards, including voltage feeding of the bus bars and
adjustment of all relays, protection devices, etc.
 Briefing of the operation personnel in operation and maintenance during commissioning phase
and during training on site.
33.5.24 Testing & commissioning requirements

33.5.24.1 Factory Tests
All components of the factory-assembled low voltage switchboards shall be tested completely as per IEC
standards. All tests required by the codes and standards as well as all manufactures tests shall be performed.
The test program for the factory test shall be submitted at least 3 weeks prior to start of the tests.
The following tests shall be carried out, as a minimum:
 Visual inspection
 Inspection of painting
 Check of degree of protection.
 Electrical test on the main circuits
 Mechanical operation tests on all equipment
 Circuit breakers interchangeability check
 Check of circuit breaker identification label
 Test of auxiliary electrical devices
 Verification of wiring and terminal blocks.
 Functional operation test detailed test protocols of all tests performed shall be submitted for
Employer/Engineer’s approval.
33.5.24.2 Type Tests

All valid type tests certificates shall be submitted according to IEC 61641.
33.5.24.3 Site Tests

The site tests shall include the following steps:
 Pre-commissioning (including “loop testing”)
 Commissioning and test on completion
 Performance test.
The aim of the tests is to ensure the proper function of the complete scope.
33.5.25 Warranty
The LVAC switchgear mentioned in the above specification will be supplied in accordance with the
Contract.
33.5.26 Quality assurance plan
The Manufacturer shall implement a quality management system in accordance with the stipulations of the
General Purchasing Conditions.
34 CYBER Security Requirements
The Plant communicates to utility, aggregators, and transmission system operator (TSO) over the public
internet. Any remote access to the whole Plant from any kind of unauthorised access must be restricted. The
energy system is equipped with a range of grid-support functions, and if it is controlled or programmed
improperly, can present a risk of power system disturbances and the security to connected computer systems.
Refer Annex-5 Cybersecurity Architecture
Towards Real-Time Simulation, Power System hierarchy needs be protected from any Cyber Threat but not
limited to the followings: -
 Human Layers – Operators

 Application Layers – SCMS, DCS, PPC and others.
 Communication and Network Layers – Infrastructure, Protocols
 Control, Sensor and Actuator Level – Local Control, Application, HMI, Relays,
BCUs/BCPUs, Revenue Meters
 Physical Layer – PV Generation Sources, Substations, Transmission Lines, Inverters,
Loads
Cyber Security Requirements of Level-3 shall not be restricted to
 Demilitarized Zone
 Critical Infrastructure Cybersecurity. ...
 Network Security. ...
 Cloud Security. ...
 Internet of Things Security......
 Application Security, but is not limited to adherence to the following standards, norms
and codes:
 International Electrotechnical Committee (IEC) 62351, Power systems management and
associated information exchange - Data and communications security – ALL PARTS,
 ISO/IEC 27000:2018, Information technology -- Security techniques -- Information
security management systems -- Overview and vocabulary
 ISMS ISO/IEC 27001 family of standards on Information security management systems
The following standards and working groups contain references to cybersecurity and must be considered
during design, manufacturing, installation and operation:
 IEC 62351 series
 ISO/IEC 15408 Common Criteria
 ISO/IEC TR 19791 Security assessment of operational systems
 ISO/IEC 27001 and 27002 information security management system standards
 International Society for Automation (ISA)/IEC 62443 (formerly Industrial Automation
and Control System Security standards)146
 UL 2900 Software Cybersecurity for Network-Connectable Products Standards
Technical Panel
 NIST working groups including NIST Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
 IEEE 1547 and IEEE 1547.1 DER Interconnection and Interoperability working groups
 ISO/IEC 19790 Security requirements for cryptographic modules
 IEEE 1711 Cryptographic protocol for cybersecurity of substation serial links
 Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
 CIGRE (International Council on Large Electric Systems) SC B5 Protection and
Automation working group, e.g., JWG B5/D2.46147
 European Commission Smart Grids Task Force Expert Group 2 Regulatory
recommendations for privacy, data protection and cyber-security in the smart grid
environment
 IEEE 2030.5-2018 - IEEE Standard for Smart Energy Profile Application Protocol
The Bidder shall demonstrate to the Project Company that the Plant is designed, installed, operated, and
maintained to survive a cyber-incident while sustaining critical functions.
The five strategic areas are as follows:

 Building a culture of security
 Assessing and monitoring cybersecurity risks
 Developing and implementing new protective measures to reduce risks
 Managing incidents
 Sustaining security improvements
CYBERSECURITY ARCHITECTURE/BLOCK DIAGRAM (BUT NOT LIMITED TO)
35 Grid integration
A detailed grid impact study (static/dynamic) shall be performed by the Contractor during detailed
engineering phase. If any additional equipment is deemed necessary as result of the detailed grid impact
study, the Contractor shall install the extra equipment’s and comply with the Design provided by the
Contractor without cost or schedule impact to the Company.
The static/dynamic study shall take in consideration the following studies:
 The approved power evacuation scheme for the connection of the PV power plant in the
connection of project region; and
 Available Technical Conditions and Grid Code by SEC.

The Contractor shall provide the following services and install the following features in order to allow the
PV Plant to comply with the Grid Code and as per the Design provided by the Contractor:
 Plant’s active power control at the Delivery Point including frequency control as specified in the
applicable Grid Code.
 Plant’s fault ride-through capability as specified in the applicable Grid Code.
 Plant’s voltage and reactive power and power factor control at the Delivery Point as specified in
the applicable Grid Code.
 When requested, submission of all required technical information to the Competent Authority
including but not limited to the detailed PV Inverter and associated controller models as
specified in the Grid Code, subject to a non- disclosure agreement to be signed by all receiving
parties.
 When requested, submission of technical information to a third party including but not limited to
the detailed PV Inverter and associated controller models in a black-boxed encrypted version,
subject to a non- disclosure agreement to be signed by all receiving parties.
 Control system performance tests on Site up to final test report validation with the Company and
the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall install the gird integration works as per the Project specific design report of PPC
prepared by the Contractor which shall include the description of control loops, maximum performances of
the regulation, communication protocols, available signals to be exchanged with other SCADA/Control
systems/terminal units, procedure of communication and functional tests on site, auxiliaries, installation
requirements interfaces.
The Contractor shall install the Plant’s active power control at the Delivery Point, which shall include the
following frequency response:
 PV Inverter’s active power shall be continuously managed by the PPC as specified in the Grid
Code.
 The PPC shall be able to operate in two regulation modes (active power and frequency response)
and shall be based on real time regulation of PV Inverter’s active power independently of data
flow in the SCADA.
The Contract shall install the Plant’s reactive power control at the Delivery Point, which shall include the
following voltage control features:
 PV Inverter’s reactive power shall be continuously and dynamically managed by the PPC as
specified in the Grid Code
 The PPC shall be able to operate in three regulation modes (voltage, reactive power control,
power factor) and shall be based on real time regulation of PV Inverter’s reactive power
independently of data flow in the SCADA.
36 Substation Control and Monitoring System (SCMS)
36.1 General System Requirements
The 33/110kV PV Plant Substation Control and Monitoring System, further on along this document named
as SCMS, shall comprise full station and bay protection as well as control, monitoring and communication
functions and provide all functions required for the safe and reliable operation of the substations.
It shall enable local station control and monitoring via operator workstations by means of a human machine
interface (HMI) and control & monitoring software package, which shall include a comprehensive range of
system control and data acquisition (SCADA) functions.
Additionally, it shall include communication switches and gateways, station-bus, intelligent electronic
devices (IED) for bay control and protection as shown in the general system architecture.
Furthermore, the SCMS shall also include an engineering workstation for configuration as well as
parameterization tasks.
All materials and parts which are not specifically mentioned hereinafter but are necessary for erection,
assembly and operation of the equipment shall be furnished and are deemed to be included in the scope for
this subsection.
The minimum requirements for the SCMS are as follows:

 proper and trouble-free operation and support maintenance of each Substation through the
corresponding operator control station
 proper and trouble-free operation from the bay control and/or protection units (IEDs) with
position indicators for all circuit breakers, disconnectors and earth switches
 all alarms and indicators associated with protection and remote-control activation and tripping
 all items for control, monitoring, remote control, protection and interlocking circuits
 communication links to remote control centers via international standard protocols
 protection and control management from local and remote
 event recording including sequence of events with real time information
 disturbance analysis
 archiving of commands, events and alarms on non-volatile storage media for medium and long-
time range.
In order to meet the requirements of this specification the detailed design of the SCMS is within the
Contractor’s responsibility, but subject to approval by the Employer.
Only experienced and technically capable manufacturers of digital control and protection systems for
electricity generation and transmission and distribution applications will be accepted.
In order to establish their technical capabilities, the Contractor is required to present the following
documents with his bid:
 block and functional diagram showing the proposed control, protection and monitoring schemes
 technical data and description of system
 digital control and monitoring system layout
 catalogues of equipment and devices to be used
 material list of equipment contained in the cubicles
 certificate of conformity with the communication protocol IEC 61850 for each type of the
components
 brochures and references of manufacturer supplying the control, protection and monitoring
system.
Preferred manufactures will be those who have experience in deliveries of the full scope of station
automation systems and services.
Within the Project, a new SCMS system shall be provided (hardware and software, as necessary) to cover the
new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation Furthermore, the new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation SCMS shall be
capable to be connected to the PV Plant Control System DCS. Within the Contractor’s responsibility, the
new system shall be tested and commissioned.
The new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall be operated at the Substation level as an independent/separate
new SCMS from the new HMI, to be located in the new Substation Control Building. Necessary preparation
for interfacing & interconnection works of the new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation SCMS to the new PV
Plant Control System DCS are included in the Contractor obligations.
The scope of supply and services associated with the Substation Control and Monitoring System comprises
the design, manufacture, inspection, testing at manufacturer’s work and at site, packing for export, shipment,
insurance, transport and delivery to site, installation, commissioning and maintenance during guaranty period
of a microcomputer-based digital substation control and monitoring system (SCMS) suitable for proper and
trouble free operation and support maintenance of the Project related 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
The scope of supply and services shall include all hardware, necessary works, accessories, patch cords, duct
cables FO, terminals, strips, cabling, connection, software and parameterization (including data entry and
display configuration-HMI mimic diagrams), Ethernet switches etc., so as to ensure the full establishment of
new relays and circuits in the new SCMS and in order to fully cover the control and monitoring requirements
of the Substation by the new SCMS.
Compatibility and interoperability with MoE SEC and/or other applicable SEC Grid Service Providers existing
equipment and systems shall be ensured.
Compatibility and interoperability with the Substation related equipment and protocols shall be ensured.
New SCMS common BCU shall be provided.
For interfacing with the SEC MoE Transmission TSO National Control Center/Regional RCC/Central Cyber
Security Operation Center/ Offtaker SCMS, the new substation control and monitoring system shall be
equipped with a set of two (2) redundant gateways channels for connection towards and from the NCC
/RCC/Cyber Security CC/ Offtaker SCMS via international standard protocols IEC 60870-5-104 &101
(main and back-up gateways, each of them with minimum 2 channels, 104 and 101).
The list of SCADA/SCMS signals and alarms, titles/designation etc., provided by the Contractor shall be
subject to the Company’s/Engineer’s approval.
The new Project related Substation shall be integrated into the existing SCADA/EMS System at SEC MoE
NCC/RCC and also to the Cyber Security CC (if any) and Offtaker SCMS (if needed).
For interfacing with the superordinate CCs, the substation control and monitoring system shall be equipped
with a set of two (2) redundant gateways and two (2) redundant ethernet switch channels for connection
towards and from the CCs via international standard protocols IEC 60870-5-104 and IEC 60870-5-101, as
described above.
Integration of the new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation installed under the project into the above-mentioned
remote-Control Centers/ remote Systems including related database, display generation, point-to point tests
etc. is included in the current Project, as follows:
 For the MoE NCC/RCC/Cyber Security Control Centers/Offtaker SCMS, remote side,
MoE/MoE separate Contractor will perform the work.
 For Substation SCMS Gateways side, the Contractor will perform the works (including - but
not limited to-commissioning protocols/tests to verify point by point all the Substation
signals and the required interfacing protocols).
The Contractor is required to coordinate with MoE/MASDAR/ their Contractors for the interfacing works.
The relevant input data for parameterization, configuration, testing and putting in operation of SCMS will be
coordinated among the Contractor and the Employer/Engineer during the design stage of the project.
The SCMS system shall cover control and supervision of all substations primary, secondary, control and
protection, auxiliary equipment, etc. The architecture of the system shall consider and support bay level,
substation level and gateway level-NCC/RCC/Cyber Security Control Center/Offtaker SCMS (if needed).
The new 110 kV bay control and protection cubicles shall be installed in the respective control buildings.
For the 33 kV switchgear, the bay control units shall be installed in the control compartment of the
switchgear.
In the following paragraphs, the respective scope for the new SCMS to be established at the new 33/110kV
PV Plant Substation is addressed.
Scope of supply and services (New 33/110kV PV Plant Substation)
A new State of the art digital full redundant Substation Control and Monitoring (SCMS) for the monitoring
and control of the new extension (110 kV, 33 kV) with redundant scheme and possibility for future extension
shall be implemented at the new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
The new 33/110kV protection and control units shall be connected in Parallel Redundant Protocol (PRP)
connection utilizing IEC 61850 standard. The design shall be subject to FINAL approval by
Employer/Company’s representative, as per Company’s Requirement.
The provided equipment and systems shall be compatible/interoperable in every respect both with the
interconnected substations equipment and systems as well as with the relevant National NCC/RCC/Cyber
Security CC/Offtaker SCMS operated by MoE SEC and/or its Service Providers.
For interfacing with the MoE SEC Remote Control Centers, the substation control and monitoring system
shall be equipped with a set of two (2) redundant gateways channels with two (2) redundant ethernet switch
for connection towards and from the related existing National NCC/RCC/Cyber Security CC/Offtaker SCMS
via international standard protocols IEC 60870-5-104/101 (main and back-up).
In this regard, the Contractor shall also take into consideration that the MoE SEC Transmission network is
operated on National Dispatch/regional level by the following systems:
 main control system NCC located at XXXX (SCADA/EMS System
manufacturer/model/version/year of commissioning xxxxxx) and
 Regional Control Center (RCC) for the Southern Area of SEC located at xxxxxx (SCADA/EMS
System manufacturer/model/version/year of commissioning xxxxxx)
The relevant National NCC/RCC SCADA/EMS systems are already existing and already equipped with the
Telecommunication systems and related Software capabilities for interfacing via international standard
protocols according to IEC60870-5-104 and/or IEC60870-5-101.
The redundant gateways protocol and Ethernet Switch shall be according to IEC 60870-5-104/101 (main and
backup medium).
Control and protection panels shall include as a minimum the following equipment:
 mimic diagram with position indicators (semaphores) for circuit breakers, isolating switches,
earthing switches located in the local control cubicle of the equipment.
 all alarms and indicators associated with protection tripping.
 integration of state-of-the-art cyber security equipment
 all auxiliary relays, switches, contactors, MCBs with the necessary auxiliary contacts, fuses, etc., for
the control, monitoring, remote control, protection and interlocking circuits.
The Contractor must ensure that after handing over, a minimum of 20% spare capacity in terminal strips for
future extensions is available.
For the HV/MV Transmission Network voltage levels, the Project related 110 kV control, the control and
protection shall be accommodated in separate control panels and protection panels and shall be equipped
with BCUs (Bay Control Units). Control (BCU and mimic panels) shall have additional spare space for
extensions.
For the 33 kV switchgear, the control and protection can be accommodated in the LV/control compartment
of the switchgear and shall be equipped with BCPUs (Bay Control and Protection Units). LV/Control
compartments shall have additional spare space for extensions.
The number of BCU/BCPUs and digital protection devices to be interfaced with the SCMS can be taken
from the relevant chapters of the present document, where details on the various bays of the substation and
the necessary equipment are indicated.
In addition, a sufficient number of common BCUs, acquiring data from the substation auxiliaries and other
common substation elements, shall be included in the scope.
For 110 kV BCUs measurements shall have at least 0.2sFS5 class accuracy.
The new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation SCMS equipment shall be fully integrated on Substation SCMS
HMI and Substation Gateways level.
The following 110 kV and 33 kV system control operations shall be possible:

1. local control: from the individual bay equipment at each 110 kV, 33 kV switchgear cubicles. The
mimic scheme on the local control cubicles shall be provided only for indication (semaphores)
related to HV/MV equipment positions.
2. remote control level 1: from BCU/BCPU on 110 kV, 33 kV.
3. remote control level 2: from the SCMS local HMI in the substation control room (110 kV, 33
kV)
4. remote control level 3: from the responsible NCC/RCC (TSO National Control Centre/Regional
Control Center) SCADA/EMS System operated by SEC MoE or its Transmission Service
Providers, for 33/110kV, as applicable.
Remote control levels shall be interlocked against each other according to parameterizable interlocking rules
as per the switching authority.
The 110 kV and 33 kV control panels shall be equipped with the following main equipment for each bay:
1. mimic diagram with position indicators (semaphores) for all circuit breakers, isolating switches,
and working earth switches.
2. bay control unit (BCU) for 110 kV and BCPU for 33 kV
3. 1–20 way alarm facia with accept/test/reset push button
4. Numerical automatic voltage regulator suitable for parallel operation for transformer bay.
Master Trip/Lock out relays (high burden fast operated trip relays) shall be included for all Line, transformer
breakers (HV and LV side) for all voltage levels.
The SCMS to be implemented at the new Project related 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall be equipped
with the following, but NOT limited to:
 two (2) redundant servers (computers), with sequence events recording (SER)
 all related LAN and IT security equipment
 one (1) main GPS synchronized time system, including antenna, cabling and time
synchronization equipment.
 one (1) back-up GPS synchronized time system, including antenna, cabling and time
synchronization equipment.
 two (2) operators workstations HMI, equipped with two (2) LED flat monitors per
workstation.
 one (1) emergency HMI and maintenance service laptop with interface connection for
engineering/protection relay interrogation
 one (1) A4 and one (1) A3 color laser printers
 one (1) set of all necessary cubicles.
 one (1) set of main Ethernet switches.
 one (1) Engineering Workstation with interface connection for engineering/protection relay
interrogation and equipped with two (2) LED flat monitors.
 one (1) Emergency HMI and maintenance service Laptop
 computers furniture (such as desks and chairs)
 redundant supply, UPS (included under Auxiliary Systems)
 2 redundant gateways for interfacing NCC/RCC/Cyber Security CC/Offtaker SCMS
 1 gateway for interfacing PV Plant DCS/PV Plant Control System SCADA
 two (2) operator desks with four (4) chairs.
In addition, all necessary interfacing with the telecommunication systems is deemed to be included in the
present scope of supply and services.
The Contractor shall transport, install, test and commission the Plant Substation DCS/SCADA according to
Design provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall connect the Plant Substation SCMS with the Plant Substation Telecom panel (SDH/IP-
MPLS) which provides the interfaces with the Remote End Offtaker Substation and DCS.
The Contractor shall integrate the monitoring and control elements of the Plant Substation, the Power
Transformer, HV switchgear, MV switchgears, earthing transformer, auxiliary transformer and protective
relays with the Plant Substation SCMS.
To integrate all these systems with the PV Plant DCS, the Contractor shall connect the DCS system with the
Telecom panel (SDH/IP-MPLS) installed in Plant Substation by means of the PV Plant communication box.
The Contractor shall install and integrate the Plant DCS system with the Plant Substation SCMS System
The Contractor shall install a master-clock system with GPS interconnection to ensure time-synchronization
of the systems.
36.2 SCADA server and HMI
The Contractor shall install the redundant SCADA server to be considered for PV DCS/SCADA and Plant
Substation SCMS System.
36.3 Gateway
The Contractor shall install, test and commission the redundant gateway and redundant Ethernet switches
which should be integrated to allow interfacing the PV Plant DCS/SCADA with Plant Substation SCADA
and Remote End Offtaker Substation SCADA.
Data format, address list, scale factor must be approved by the Company.
The gateway data mapping should be documented and should be tested by the Company or the Company’s
PMC during the commissioning.
36.4 Cyber Security Requirements
The Contractor shall adherence to the following standards, norms and codes while installing the cyber
security system:
 International Electrotechnical Committee (IEC) 62351, Power systems management and
associated information exchange - Data and communications security – ALL PARTS,
 ISO/IEC 27000:2018, Information technology -- Security techniques -- Information security
management systems -- Overview and vocabulary
 ISMS ISO/IEC 27001 family of standards on Information security management systems
36.5 Auxiliary systems Monitoring
The Contractor shall install the following I/O modules in the DCS/SCADA system to monitor, report, alarm
performed measurement of the auxiliary system:
 HVAC
 Fire Alarm System
 UPS
 Battery charger
 Auxiliaries’ transformers
 AC panels
 DC panels
 Main Meter and applicable part of the Metering System
 Diesel Generators
36.6 Metering System
The Contractor shall install the Metering System and Main Meter at the Delivery Point of the Plant, which
shall be connected and integrated with the DCS/SCADA to meter the Metered Energy. Metering system
should be complaint with requirements with grid code/ITB/Project agreements.
The Contractor shall install the entire required infrastructure to enable the metering values and Metered
Energy are viewed on SCADA HMI and are recorded in the server.
Metering data required are:
10 mn 24 hours From last reset
Active energy exported to the grid x x x
Active energy imported from the grid x x x
Reactive energy exported to the grid x x x
Reactive energy imported from the grid x x x
The Contractor shall consider the requirements of the Grid Code and Technical Specifications in
the installation of the Metering System.
Within the Contractor’s responsibility, the new system shall be tested and commissioned.
The list of SCMS signals and alarms, titles/designation etc., updated, prepared and provided by the
Contractor shall be subject to the Company’s/Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that the auxiliary power services are monitored from SCMS.
Engineering and parameterization as well as construction of mimic diagrams for display on the LED
monitors shall be included in the services.
Design of the SCMS System and the HMI/ mimic diagrams shall be subject to further approval by the
Employer/Engineer.
The SCMS/SCADA system shall cover control and supervision of all substations primary, secondary, control
and protection, auxiliary equipment, etc. The architecture of the system shall consider and support bay level,
substation level and gateway level-NCC/RCC.
The new bay control and protection cubicles shall be installed in the respective control building.
The relevant input data for parameterization, configuration, testing and putting in operation of SCMS will be
coordinated among the Contractor and the Employer/Engineer during the design stage of the project.
Substation control and monitoring system (SCMS)
The substation control and monitoring system shall provide all control and signaling amenities required in
the substation such that the status of the substation can be ascertained and all the necessary control and
switching operations can be carried out from the control room.
Substation control and monitoring system shall fulfil the functions and amenities described in the Bidding
Documents Technical Specifications”.
Substation control level
Central system for future substation control and supervision will be located in the control room.
Substation control and monitoring system shall fulfil the functions and amenities described in the Bidding
Documents Technical Specifications”.
Bay control level
Distributed (bay oriented) microprocessor devices, hierarchically linked with central substation control unit,
shall be foreseen for bay control.
Interlocking system
Interlocking system on a 33/110kV switchyard/switchgear-level shall be carried out by software using

distributed (bay oriented) microprocessor devices. This interlocking system between bays should be
independent of local SCMS system running.
Interlocking system on a 33/110kV bay-level, shall be also managed through conventional (hard wire)
interlocking, in parallel at all times with the software interlocking.
Miscellaneous
Tele-communication diagram shall be agreed with National NCC of MoE SEC & Company.
All monitoring and control actions on station level as well as on remote level (from NCC/RCC) shall be
managed from the SCMS central system to be established at the new Substation.
Full compatibility and interoperability with the existing SEC MoE SCADA/EMS systems, SCMS system,
Telecommunication Networks shall be ensured by the Contractor on the new SCMS at 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation side.
New 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall monitor environmental climatic indicators (as a minimum
Temperature, Humidity. Luminosity (Lightness shall be measured), Wind Speed, Wind Direction, Rainfall).
This data will be received from the PV Plant Weather Station and shall be integrated by the Contractor in the
PV Farm DCS HMI and Gateways towards remote control centers.
The above-mentioned requirements are preliminary only and the final list of equipments and final technical
data are subject to design approval.
Interconnection with the new PV plant control system/DCS
It is assumed that the PV Plant Contractor will do the works and bring up all the connections up to the
common interface with the Substation SCMS.
Both PV Plant Contractor and Substation SCMS Contractor shall coordinate at the common interfaces.
Boundaries of area of responsibility shall be the gateway/interface towards the PV Plant.
This experience has to be substantiated by means of reference installations having been in service under
similar functional requirements and environmental conditions for at least 2 years.
36.7 System Design
36.7.1 Design Principles
The SCMS to be established shall be a microcomputer based digital control and monitoring system suitable
to supervise and operate the switchgears in each Substation complete in every respect for monitoring and
control inclusive all facilities, e.g. of the power transformers which will be equipped with OLTC (on-load
tap changer) and AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator).
SCMS shall be suitable for supervision, operation and maintenance of the complete Substations including
future extensions.
Design and arrangement of the system offered shall be state-of-the-art compliant with international standard
IEC 61850 for operation under electrical conditions (including electrical discharge and disturbance level)
prevailing in high voltage substations, follow the latest modern engineering practice, ensure optimum
continuity and reliability of supply and ensure the safety of equipment and the operating staff. The highest
degree of uniformity and interchangeability shall be provided.
Design of the hardware and software shall be suitable for all voltage levels used by the Employer to enable a
standardized technical concept.
SCMS shall be designed in such a way that personnel without any computer background will be able to
operate the system with ease and shall incorporate user-friendly features without causing undue operational
delay.
The whole equipment shall be pre-assembled and pre-programmed at the supplier’s workshop. It is
understood that all auxiliary facilities/devices and services necessary are to be provided, i.e. for generation of
data base, of displays, programming and for testing, adjustments, parameter settings etc., even if not
specified in detail.
The whole equipment shall be designed for indoor installation, installed in steel sheet cubicles with hinged
frames and glass door having a protection degree of IP-54.
All components shall be suitable for the local climate and environmental conditions prevailing on site.
SCMS shall be designed for easy modification of hardware and software and for easy extension of the
33/110kV PV Plant Substation. Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not force a shut-
down of the whole SCMS.
Self-monitoring of single components, modules and communication links shall be incorporated to increase
availability and reliability of the equipment and minimize maintenance.
Failure of any component of the system shall not force a total system failure.
36.7.2 Hot stand-by redundancy
As the SCMS to be established serves for monitoring & control of 33/110kV PV Plant Substation with major
operational importance for the countrywide power system, the design of the system must be in a fully
redundant hot stand-by configuration, as described below.
As a minimum requirement the station computers as well as the operator stations must operate in a redundant
hot-stand-by configuration. The same requirement applies for the gateways to the higher level
National/Regional Network Control Centers.
The Contractor shall clearly state, to the Company’s satisfaction, how the required hot-stand-by redundancy
is being achieved with the offered SCMS System.
In addition to the above, Contractor shall explain in the bid, how continuous operation without any down
time will be ensured in the event of loss of one of the redundant equipment such as server, operator station or
database.
The Contractor shall ensure that after handing over, a minimum of 50% spare function capacity (hardware
and software, number of I/O to be handled by the SCMS) and 20% spare parts for future extensions are
available (for each type of component at-least one).
36.7.3 Availability and Reliability
The SCMS shall be designed to satisfy the very high requirements concerning reliability and availability as
set out with international standard IEC60870-4, as follows:
 reliability Class R3 (MTBF > 8760 hours

 availability Class R3 (>99.95%).
In order to meet specified requirements, the SCMS shall comprise:

 solid mechanical and electrical design
 security against electromagnetic interference (EMI)
 high-quality components and boards
 modular, well-tested hardware
 thoroughly developed and tested modular software.
 easy-to-understand programming language for application programming.
 detailed graphical documentation, IEC 1131-3, of the application software.
 built-in supervision and diagnostic functions
 after-sales service
 security:
 experience of security requirements
 process know-how
 select-before-execute at operation.
 process status representation as double indications incl. indication of intermediate state
 distributed solution
 independent units connected to the station bus.
 back-up functions
 cubicle design appropriate to any harsh electrical environment and ambient conditions
 cubicle grounding immune to transient ground potential rise.
The SCMS shall provide an MTBF (mean time between failure) and a MTTR (mean time to repair) rate. The
offered values are to be indicated by the Contractor. In order to provide this availability, some main (or
weak) components shall be of redundant design e.g. the power supply of the fiber-optic coupler.
The outage of one communication link from an individual device to the central components shall not affect
any other communication link between the central components and all other devices.
The Contractor shall clearly define how the offered architecture meets the availability requirements. A
system block diagram shall therefore be submitted with the offer.
36.7.4 System Capabilities
SCMS shall provide full operation of each station corresponding to Project’s requirements.
Security of control selections is of paramount importance and every precaution must be taken in the software
and hardware design to ensure that false selection or execution of a control is rejected. Failure of a
communication, either partial or total, intermittent or permanent, shall not lead to a false control action.
Noise, either spuriously occurring or injected manually into the communication link shall not lead to a false
control action.
The system software shall be a standard software as per actual mainline product. The software structure shall
be specifically designed for the important requirements of switchgear and 33/110kV PV Plant Substation
operation in high voltage applications.
The system hard- and software shall consist of basic modules and standardized supplementary function
modules, which are subject to parameterization/customization depending on the layout and operation concept
of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
The system shall restart automatically after halt or loss of supply voltage, all necessary information shall be
kept in memory in case of supply voltage outage.
After automatic restart the displays shall present the same displays as before system hold, operator
workstations (HMI) shall be in “display only” level.
It shall be possible to test the system without any hazard of unwanted influence to the 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation. Test facilities shall include both function and data.
36.7.5 System performance
Time for updating and refreshing information on the screens of the operator station in the 33/110kV PV
Plant Substation shall be as follows:
Table 1: Required System Performance

Function Required response time
Exchange of display after manual request (first reaction) <1s
Presentation of a binary change in the process display < 0.5 s
Presentation of an analogue change in the process display <1s
Time from manual command to process output < 0.5 s
Time from manual command to updating the display < 1.5 s
36.7.6 System behaviour
When auxiliary voltage is restored after an auxiliary voltage failure, the entire system shall perform
automatically a start up on its own (automatic restart time < 5 min).
After each restart, an automatic general interrogation with old/new comparison shall be carried out and
changes shall be communicated to all functional modules that require the new information.
In addition to securing the parameter values in each functional module, the process data base including
manual entries shall also be secured against failures in order to avoid new inputs during restarts.
Each action by the operator shall be logged as an event and result in a reaction from the system. System
reaction shall be parameterizable whether visible/audible and to be acknowledged. Operator actions rejected
by the system must contain an explanation with easily understandable error messages.
The starting and ending of an operator input shall be user friendly at all control levels. System reaction shall
be parameterizable whether visible/audible and or to be acknowledged.
If a local/remote transfer switch is operated, an acknowledgment and cancellation procedure shall
automatically be initiated.
36.7.7 Compliance with standards
Technical data, dimensions, quantities etc. shall be given in the SI-System of units (International System of
Units). Protection designation shall be carried out in ANSI.
For design and type testing of the protection and control equipment, the following standards shall be
applicable.
General

IEC 60038: IEC Standard voltages

IEC 60068: Environmental testing

IEC 60255: Electrical relays

IEC 60664: Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems

IEC 61000: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

IEC 60073: Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, making and
identification- coding principles for indication devices and actuators.
CE-marking
 EN 61000-6-4 Emissive (Industry)
 EN 61000-6-2 Immunity (Industry)
General for Substation Automation

 IEC 61850: Communication Networks and Systems in Substations
 IEC 60870-5-101: Communication with remote control centers
 IEC 60870-5-103: Communication with third party devices having no IEC 61850-Interface
 IEC 60870-5-104: Communication with remote control centers
IT Cyber Security
ISO/IEC 27k group of standards (generic standard defining an information security management system) and
IEC 62443 (generic standard defining among others a cyber security management system taking into account
best practices from industrial automation)
IEC 62351 “Power Systems Management and associated information exchange” (technical standard
designed to secure the control communication within energy automation systems) series.
Data Integrity
The data integrity classes apply to the information transfer from the source to its destination and refer to:
 the probability of undetected falsification of information and
 the probability of undetected information loss.
The SCADA/EMS system and SCADA/SCMS systems shall comply with data integrity class and residual
information error probability.
36.8 Principle System Architecture
For safety and availability reasons the SCMS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept
of bay-oriented, distributed intelligence.
Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the process. The main
process information shall be stored in distributed databases.
Principally the architecture of the SCMS is structured in the following levels:
 Remote level:
System control operations shall be possible from the remote-control centers.
 Station level:
System control operations shall be possible from the operator workstations.
 Bay level:
System control operations shall be possible from the bay control and/or protection units (IEDs).
 Apparatus level:
System control operations shall be possible by local control from the individual equipment.
The 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall be controlled and supervised from up to two remote control centers
or from the operator workstations while individual bays are supervised and controlled from the bay level
devices in the control cubicles.
Interlocking between the levels shall be possible by customization. SCMS shall prohibit carrying out the
control at the same time from different control levels.
It shall be possible to control and monitor the individual bays from bay level in case the communication link
fails. The station wide interlocking shall also be available when the station computer fails.
At station level, the entire 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall be controlled and supervised from the
operator workstations (HMI).
The station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be realized at bay levels, e.g. alarm
list or event list related to the entire substation. Communication with remote control centers via a gateway
shall also be a part of the station level.
To provide highest reliability, the station computer, the operator workstations (HMI) and the gateway shall
work completely independent, meaning retrieving the process data directly from the bay level devices.
A dedicated master clock for the synchronization of the entire system shall be provided for the complete
33/110kV PV Plant Substation. The master clock shall be independent of the station computer and of the
gateway and shall synchronize all devices via the station bus. The deviation of the different internal clocks
shall not be more than 1 µs.
The master clock shall be synchronized by a satellite receiver (GPS). While running without GPS signal
maximum time deviation shall be less than 50 µs per day. The master clock in the substation shall be battery
buffered.
Data transmission between the devices on station and bay level shall take place via the station bus, realized
by using fiber-optic cables in a ring configuration, thereby guaranteeing disturbance free communication.
To increase system performance and availability, the system shall support several physically separated
networks for the station bus e.g. separate networks for different voltage levels.
At bay level, the bay and/or protection units (IEDs) shall provide all bay level functions regarding control,
monitoring and protection, inputs for status indications and outputs for commands. IEDs shall be directly
connected to the switchgear without any need for additional interposition or transducers.
IEDs shall be installed in the local control cubicles independent of each other and the operation shall not be
affected by any fault occurring at the station level or in other IEDs of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
The SCMS shall contain the following main functional parts:

 Station Computer System
 Human Machine Interface (HMI) with process data base
 gateway for remote supervisory by control centers
 gateway for interfacing the PV Plant
 master clock (e.g., GPS receiver)
 protection fault processing
 service, analysis and engineering system
 data exchange between the different system components via serial bus utilizing fiber-optical
links.
 collection of the relevant data concerning the substation and distribution of the data where
needed.
 bay and station level devices for control, monitoring and protection.
 process interface parallel wired or connected by a process bus.
1. IEC 61850 Communication Profile
Application of IEC 61850 communication profile shall assure compliance of the offered solution with the
minimum requirements requested in the international standard of the IEC 61850 and also shall ensure that
the offered architecture can be realized with the offered products and their implemented services.
For interoperability, not only data shall be standardized but also access to these data called services.
Relevant areas to be covered by the profile are:
 Communication services
abstract communication services (ACSI) (7-2)
 data modeling
common data classes (7-3), Nodes (7-4).
The data modeling is not specifically listed but the supplier shall fully comply with the logical nodes
described in the standard. As a minimum requirement all mandatory data of the used logical nodes shall be
supported.
As a guideline the following picture shall give a better understanding of what communication services shall
be supported by which devices.
The system architecture of SCMS shall be based on a completely distributed approach. To support the
distributed approach as a minimum the below shown communication services between the particular system
devices shall be supported as a minimum:
Figure 2: IEC 61850 Communication Profile
1. Time synchronization
2. File transfer
3. Reporting
4. Commands Execution.
2. Ethernet Topology
The station bus according IEC61850-8-1 is mapped to MSS/Ethernet (with priority tagging and with 100
MBit/s). The standard is not making any provision on the Ethernet communication infrastructure.
Suitable state-of-the art and managed routers or switches based on Ethernet data transfer technology that
fulfill the hardened requirements concerning temperature, EMC and power supply in accordance with data
sheets suitable to be installed in substations shall be provided, i.e., the same data as common for numerical
protection.
To ensure a certain level of quality, performance and availability at least the following described criteria
shall be fulfilled concerning the Ethernet switches and the topology:
 The switches shall be equipped with a double supply input. If there is an existing redundant DC
system in the station (2 different batteries with 2 supply systems), the switches shall also be
redundant, for example. each switch’s supply input has to be connected to a different supply
system.
 compliance with the IEC 61850-3 standard for high level of immunity to electromagnetic
interference
 compliance with IEEE 1613 (power substations) standards for error free communications
performance under EMI stress
 a rapid network fault recovery (less than 20 milliseconds) and redundant power supplies for
higher network availability (ideally isolated redundant power inputs with universal 24/48 VDC
or 110/220 VDC/VAC power supply range)
 fan less design in order to enhance the overall reliability of devices.
 extended temperature tolerance to withstand climate extremes (within -40 to +85°C)
 RSTP/STP for network redundancy
 compliance with IEEE1588 for a precision Clock synchronization protocol for networked
measurement and control Systems to synchronize real-time clock.
 configuration recovery adapter
 sufficient number of optical ports as specified in the datasheets.
 Port Monitoring RMON (Remote Monitoring).
The compliance of the Ethernet switches with IEEE802.1x is preferred.
In this case, if some of the network components are not able to authenticate on the network using IEE802.1x,
the MAC-Bypass functionality shall be provided as a minimum solution.
The use of Ethernet hubs is not permitted as they do not provide collision free transmission. The switches
shall support priority tagging and open standards for ring management like fast spanning tree to ensure that
e.g. for later system extension utility has not to rely on one switch supplier only.
External switches are preferred as they have the advantage that there is no interruption or reconfiguration of
the Ethernet network if one or several bay devices are taken out of service.
The system architecture shall be based on completely distributed approach also concerning the connection of
any device to the system. Meaning any device, control as well as protection and station level devices shall be
connected to the Ethernet network via a corresponding switch (two switches for one bay).
The distribution of the IEDs on the switches shall be designed by the Contractor so that the IEC61850
properties of the station bus are not compromised.
To ensure maximum performance also for large systems it shall be possible to have more than one physical
separated network. The network shall be designed that the number of switches used keeps the latency for
time critical applications to a minimum.
Protection and control devices shall be MANDATORILY connected in PRP topology.
The proposed design will be subject to Employer/Company’s Representative approval during further
implementation design phase.
36.9 IT Security Requirements
The SCMS systems to be supplied under the Project shall comply with security standards as per:
 ISO/IEC 27k group of standards (generic standard defining an information security management
system) and
 IEC 62443 (generic standard defining among others a cyber security management system taking into
account best practices from industrial automation).
In addition to the above, the new SCMS systems shall comply with the IEC Security Standards for “Power
Systems Management and associated information exchange” as laid down in the IEC 62351 (technical
standard designed to secure the control communication within energy automation systems) series, in
particular with:
 IEC 62351-3: Data and Communication Security – Profiles Including TCP/IP
 IEC 62351-4: Data and Communication Security – Profiles Including MMS
 IEC 62351-5: Data and Communication Security – Security for IEC 60870-5 and Derivates
 IEC 62351-6: Data and Communication Security – Security for IEC 61850 Profiles
 IEC 62351-7: Data and Communication Security – Security Through Network and System
Management (NSM) data object models.
 IEC 62351-8: Data and communications security - Role-based access control for power
system management (RBAC).
In addition to the above, the following requirements shall be fulfilled:
For IT-security reasons all servers with access from external networks shall be located in a separated part of
the network, called the “De-Militarized Zone” (DMZ). The DMZ shall be redundantly connected to the
process LAN via firewalls/routers.
Any communication between SCMS system and users/applications located externally shall be decoupled via
the DMZ and the related firewalls.
All settings of the firewalls have to be closely coordinated with the Company’s IT department.
The firewall cascades for decoupling the different zones shall be of different type and make to enhance
security against intrusion and hacks.
Any communication to the external networks (Corporate IT, Office LAN if any) shall be secured and encrypted
wherever possible. All kind of services provided shall be highly secured, for example using secure ftp instead
of simple ftp, https instead of http etc.
All servers and workstations shall be hardened by removing or disabling any unnecessary services.
The software shall provide security mechanisms meeting at least the following requirements:
 protection against unauthorized access and intrusion

 Creation of new users shall be done according to the four-eye-principle; the user account
shall be created by the administrator and shall be activated only after confirmation by top
management.
 check of utilization rights
 check of access rights
 check of registration
 check on user- and group- passwords.
 attack detection and prevention
 security settings of applications.
The results of the security checks shall be alarmed and documented in a detailed security protocol.
The system shall have the capabilities to disable any process/service at any time.
In order to protect the SCMS system from malwares such as viruses, Trojans, spy ware etc. all incoming
traffic shall be scanned by suitable antivirus software of a reputed vendor. The definition files of this
software shall be updated automatically on a daily basis. The Contractor shall provide necessary licenses for
the lifetime of the system.
36.10 Functional Requirements
All control and monitoring functions necessary for a secure and reliable operation of the 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation shall be provided.
The following are the minimum functions required:

 acquisition of binary signals (single and double indication)
 acquisition of analogue signals
 initiation and monitoring of execution of commands and set points to the process.
 automatic chronological control of standard switching routines.
 station and bay interlocking
 tap changer control of power transformers inclusive automatic voltage regulator AVR.
 supervision of the entire Substation
 station control via operator workstations
 alarm handling
 sequence of event recording
 tagging
 analogue value processing
 display of trend values
 archiving, display and evaluation of historical data.
 fault indication
 disturbance analysis
 all hardware, software and telecommunication facilities for remote control
 emergency control of each bay from the related bay units and local control cubicles
 ALC (Automatic Line Coloring)
 during command execution in the event list should clearly show from which system the
command was executed (from National LDC/ECC, from SCMS or from Switchgear (not
SCMS)).
The different voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different places:
 from the remote-control centers (up to two control centers simultaneously)
 from the operator workstations
 from the bay control and/or protection units (IEDs)
 from the individual equipment.
It has to be ensured, that operation is only possible by one operator at a time. Clear control priorities shall
prevent that operation of a single switch can be initiated at the same time from more than one various control
levels, i.e. remote level, station level, bay level or apparatus level.
Priority shall always be on the lowest enabled control level but shall be possible to adopt other philosophies
by parameterization.
36.10.1 Station level functions
For supervision of the entire 33/110kV PV Plant Substation on station level as a minimum a redundant
server station computer and two operator workstations (HMI) shall be installed. The number of operator
workstations shall be possible to be extended to up to four in future.
The position of switching devices (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches, transformer tap
changers etc.) shall be supervised permanently. Apparatus positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary
switches, normally closed (NC) and normally open (NO).
An alarm shall be initiated if these position indications are inconsistent or if the time required for operating
mechanism to change position exceeds a predefined limit.
Every detected change of position shall be immediately visible in the single-line diagram on the screen of the
operator workstations (HMI), recorded in the event list and a hard copy printout shall be produced as
required by the operator. Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes.
The Bid shall include complete operation workplaces (including desk, chair, etc.) for each operator
workstations and engineering workstation. Also, interface connection for engineering notebook and
protection relay interrogation shall be envisaged.
The operation workplaces desk shall be 75 cm high, double pedestal type of reinforced and stiffened steel
construction with flush paneling. The desk shall be ergonomically designed and shall contain the following:
 concealed power outlets in adequate number for supply of workstations, monitors, printers, etc.
 concealed communication ports in adequate number for connection of workstations, monitors,
printers, etc.
 conveniently arranged power outlets and communication ports in adequate number for
connection of mobile equipment such as notebook, mobile phones, etc.
 concealed wiring ducts to accommodate all wiring of workstations, monitors, printers, etc.
 adequate number of drawers for writing utensils, paper and documents.
 Chairs for operator desk shall be ergonomically designed and robust type for industrial
environment.
36.10.1.1 Station Computer
The station level of SCMS shall include a redundant station computer in a hot stand-by configuration,
equipped with high performance microprocessor and real time operating system.
The station computer shall have access to all subsystems at the bay level, collect signals and information,
issue commands and perform the signal processing required for the connected 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation.
LEDs shall indicate the status of the respective circuits on the front of the station computer.
The station computer shall be accommodated together with all necessary input/output equipment in cubicles in
the control room. The station computer shall be supplied from the station battery power supply.
36.10.1.2 Workstations (HMI)
Operator and Engineering workstations (OWS and EWS)
The engineering workstation shall be able to act also as an operator workstation. In normal cases it shall be
used for system configuration and software implementation. The specifications of the engineering and
operator workstation are given below.
The operator workstation (OWS) is emblematic for Human Machine Interface (HMI) and shall provide
supervision of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation on station level:
 presentation of user defined displays (switching status and analogue values), standard displays,
trend curve displays and reports.
 effective and safe dialogues for manual control of the substation and for release of control
sequences including select-before-execute.
 tagging
 presentation of alarms and events on the operator’s video display units and printouts on the
printer
 archiving, retrieval, display and evaluation of historical data
 hardcopy facility for printouts of any screenshots.
The OWS and EWS shall be high performance operator workstations, based on high performance and
maintenance-free computer systems equipped with two LED monitors each. The LED monitors shall have a
size of at least 32” diagonal, with a resolution of 3840 × 2160 pixels (UHD 4K)
Two high speed color printers (one A4 and one A3) shall be supplied for graphic hardcopies of the displays
and for reports. Page-sensitive printing shall be provided.
One high speed color printer shall be supplied for graphic hardcopies of the displays and for reports and the
other printer shall be supplied for printing logs of all the events and alarms reported from the bay control
units.
The AC power for the EWS and OWS, the monitors and printers shall be supplied by the station UPS power
supply.
The operator shall have access via the operator workstation to the distributed intelligence. For control of the
33/110kV PV Plant Substation the operator will use a functional keyboard and a graphical locator (trackball,
mouse, etc.). The keyboard shall be designed to meet Company’s specific requirements.
The operation procedure needs to be easily used and understood and must be designed in a user-friendly way.
Switching status of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation in terms of actual measured values (currents, voltages,
active and reactive power) as well as positions of transformer tap changers shall be displayed.
The OWS and EWS shall give the operator and/or engineer access to the equipment of the high and medium
voltage levels.
Display selection, parameter setting, alarm acknowledgment, selected printouts of reports and command
outputs shall be performed from the operator/Company’s Representative’s keyboard.
The system has to distinguish between alarm lists and event lists selectable on the monitor by the operator.
Beside of these lists on the screen, there shall be a chronological print out of any alarm or event in an event
log.
In addition, a historical archive-file including the events of at least the past 30 days shall be generated and
stored on the hard disc.
An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities and all unacknowledged alarms shall be presented on any
screen selected by the operator.
As a minimum, the following items shall be presented on the operator & Engineering workstations (HMI):
 status diagrams showing switching status and measured values of:
 the entire Substation
 each voltage level of the Substation
 each busbar section of the Substation
 each bay of the Substation
 user authority levels
 command procedures
 control dialogues
 tagging
 control inhibits.
 permit to work.
 grounded
 event list:
 station – oriented
 bay – oriented
 SCMS-internal
 alarm list:
 station – oriented
 bay – oriented
 SCMS-internal
 event and alarm log
 system status diagram
 reports
 curves from actual measured values
 curves from archived and historical values
 trend values.
Status diagrams
The station diagrams displayed on the operator workstations (HMI) shall include as a minimum a diagram of
the entire 33/110kV PV Plant Substation, an individual diagram for each voltage level of the 33/110kV PV
Plant Substation and individual diagrams for each busbar sections and bays of the 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation.
A diagram shall be able to show a single line with all relevant data (at least 50 switching devices like circuit
breakers/disconnectors/earthing devices, 20 measuring values, 40 additional indications).
New displays shall be designed in an interactive dialog without taking the total 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation control system off-line.
Layouts of the displays are subject to the approval by the Employer.
User authority levels
It shall be possible to restrict activation of the station diagrams within a certain user authorization group.
Each user shall then be given access rights to each group of objects. At least the following authority levels
shall be provided:
 display only
 normal operation (e.g. open/close apparatus)
 restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking)
 system administrator.
For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following authorization levels shall be
available:
 no engineering allowed
 engineering/configuration allowed
 overall entire system management allowed.
The access rights shall be defined by passwords or, alternatively, by key card readers etc. assigned during the
log-in procedure. Only the system administrator shall be able to add/remove users and change access rights.
Command procedures
To ensure a high degree of security against unintended operation, a special operation procedure select-
before-execute shall be provided.
After selection the operator shall be able to recognize the selected device at the screen and all other
switching devices shall be blocked.
The operator shall only be in a position to execute a command if the switch is not blocked and if no
interlocking condition is going to be violated. The interlocking statements shall be checked by the
interlocking scheme implemented at bay level.
After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new switching position has been
reached or an indication that the switching procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for
non-functioning.
Control dialogues
The operator shall give commands to the equipment of the high voltage and medium voltage via mouse
clicks on soft keys located on the diagram. Data entry shall be performed with the keyboard. Dedicated
control dialogues for controlling at least the following devices shall be available:
 circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches
 transformer tap-changers.
 output of set points
 device of control sequences
 device of load shedding.
 devices for single command outputs such as reset of protection devices etc.
Event list
The 33/110kV PV Plant Substation event list shall include events that are important for the control and
monitoring of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation, sample for event: “Circuit Breaker closed”. The time shall
be displayed corresponding to the event in real time with a resolution of at least 10ms.
The operator shall be able to call up the chronologically sorted event list on the monitor at any time for the
entire 33/110kV PV Plant Substation or sections thereof.
A printout of each displayed event list shall be possible on the printer. Features for page-sensitive printing
shall be provided.
The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of event and its time of
occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the operator workstations (HMI). The
information shall be obtainable also from a printed event log.
The chronological event list shall contain:

 position changes of circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing devices and tap changer operations.
 indication of protective relay operations
 fault signals from the switchgear
 indication when analogue measured values outside upper and lower limits
 loss of communication
 operator’s commands and tagging.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters shall be designed to
enable viewing of events grouped per:
 date and time
 bay
 device
 function
 alarm class.
Alarm list
Faults and errors which may occur in the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall be tabulated in the 33/110kV
PV Plant Substation alarm list and shall be available to be simultaneously transmitted to the remote-control
centers. The alarm list shall replace a conventional alarm tableau and shall constitute an actual evaluation of
all station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults.
Date and time of the occurrence of alarms shall be indicated. The time shall be displayed corresponding to
the alarm in real time with a resolution of at least 10ms. The sequence of alarm indication in the alarm list
shall coincide with the occurrence of the alarms.
The alarm list shall consist of a summary display of the present alarm situation. Each alarm shall be reported
on one line that contains:
 date and time of the alarm
 name of the alarming object
 a descriptive text
 acknowledgement state
 Alarm class
 Alarm priority
 Related bay (as applicable).
The operator shall be able to select displays which contain only a section or subsection of the 33/110kV PV
Plant Substation overall alarm list.
The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms at the keyboard, acknowledged alarms shall be marked in
the list.
Faults which appear and disappear without being acknowledged shall be specially marked in the alarm list.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events.
The alarm list shall be presented on the display screen. It shall be possible to obtain hardcopies of the alarms
on the printer. Features for page-sensitive printing shall be provided.
SCMS internal alarm list
The SCMS shall constitute an actual evaluation of internal SCMS alarms, e.g. of defect SCMS input/output
boards or defect SCMS communication nodes. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults
as mentioned before.
Event and alarm log
The event and alarm log shall be the spontaneous listing of events and alarms displayed on the monitor.
This log shall contain the same alarms and events as mentioned above, but chronologically listed as soon as
they occur.
Each alarm shall be configurable in this way that a second message can be listed if the alarm disappears.
System status diagram
The SCMS shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults are immediately indicated to the
operator, possibly before they develop into serious situations. The system status diagram shall cover the
entire SCMS configuration and the status of all devices of the SCMS including bay level devices, 33/110kV
PV Plant Substation level devices and communication links.
Reports
The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and calculated values. The data displayed
shall comprise:
Trend reports
 day (mean, peak)
 month (mean, peak)
 semi-annual (mean, peak)
 year (mean, peak)
 selectable periods.
Historical reports
 day
 week
 month
 year
 selectable periods.
It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in the process display on-line. Scrolling
between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall be indicated. It shall be possible to select the time
period for which the specific data are kept in the memory.
It shall be possible to print out the report on request and automatically at pre-selected times.
Trend display (historical data)
A trend is a time-related follow-up of process data. It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data
as trends (binary and analogue data). The trends shall be displayed in graphical form as column or curve
diagrams with a maximum of 10 trends per screen.
It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum or difference) on-line in the
window. It shall also be possible to change the update intervals on-line in the picture as well as the selection
of threshold values for alarming purposes.
Common bay unit
The station level shall include a common bay unit for acquisition of inputs/outputs not assigned to dedicated
bays.
The common bay unit shall be placed together with all necessary input/output equipment in cubicles in the
control room. The common bay unit shall be supplied from the station battery power supply.
System service and analysis
For fault evaluation and monitoring as well as integrated disturbance monitoring and analysis a service and
analysis system shall be implemented with each SCMS.
Automatic disturbance file transfer
For the bay level devices with integrated disturbance recorder as well as for dedicated disturbance recording
systems, all recorded data shall be automatically uploaded (event triggered or once per day) to the station
computer or a dedicated computer and be stored on the hard disk.
Disturbance analysis
The SCMS shall provide all relevant information for fault-finding, analysis, and troubleshooting on a
dedicated disturbance analysis system. Suitable and user-friendly fault evaluation software shall be included
in the scope of supply, providing short fault summaries and automatic printouts of the fault history and fault
location.
For the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder, all recorded data shall be automatically uploaded (event
triggered or once per day) to the disturbance analysis station and be stored on the hard disk.
The protection engineer may have his own PC-based system to evaluate all the required information for
proper fault analysis, independent of the network control centers.
The disturbance analysis system shall be a workstation, based on a high performance and maintenance-free
computer system equipped with one LED flat screen monitor. The LED flat screen monitor shall have a
minimum size of 32” with a resolution of 3840 × 2160 pixels (UHD 4K).
The scope of supply includes all required equipment, communication lines and installations to enable the
disturbance analysis workstation for the proper connection and communication with the protection units.
Parameter setting
Under this function it is understood the capability of reading out and writing information from/to the IEDs,
in particular parameterization, setting, visualizing and analyzing disturbance and event records through the
service and analysis system:
 from the operator workstations (HMI), by use of standardized IEC 61850 protocols
 from the remote-control centers
 from a modem-connected evaluation station situated at a remote location.
Setting of parameters or activation of parameter sets shall only be allowed after entering a password.
It is proposed to include under the scope of this Project all required modems and software licenses for the
remote evaluation station.
Load shedding
The choice of feeders to be shed shall be shown at station level and shall be modified remotely.
The load shedding functionality shall be realized by combining frequency functions at bay level and priority
settings downloaded from the station level to the bay.
36.10.1.3 Service, Analysis and Engineering Unit
For each SCMS a portable service, analysis and engineering unit based upon a standard personal computer
shall be foreseen for on-site modifications of the control and protection devices. This service unit shall be
used for documentation, testing and commissioning.
The service unit shall permit the user to study changes in the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation. The service unit
shall be able to monitor data in the running SCMS and to present changing variables on the display screen,
selectable in tabular form or in graphic representation.
The service unit shall be used for the following purposes:

 system configuration
 system testing
 help functions.
 program documentation
 down and uploading of programs
 system commissioning
 data base management
 changing peripheral parameters program entry
 on-line parameter setting features.
 other subjects depending on the requirements during engineering stage.
The service unit shall be integrated into the IT security regime to be established.
The service unit shall be used for detail engineering of the SCMS.
As the result of the design process for IEC 61850 based systems shall formally be described in an SCD
(System Configuration Description)-file, which contains the logical communication connections between
IEDs within sub-networks and routers between sub-networks.
The detail engineering on system level has to determine the communication addresses and the detailed data
flow between the IEDs in terms of data sets and signal inputs to clients. This signal-level data flow
engineering replaces to a big extent the engineering of the conventional wiring.
Due to the inherent semantics of the IEC 61850 data model, this step can also be supported with object based
or even automated signal engineering. The resulting SCD file contains individualized IED descriptions for
the system under design.
These descriptions shall be downloaded via the service unit to the IEDs to make them aware of their place in
the system and their connections to other IEDs.
The service unit has to be supplied at the beginning of the commissioning period and shall be available for
training of the Company’s personnel.
Software development tools and maintenance
Program development editing, compilations and linking shall be available on the workstation and laptop.
This implies that all source files containing source programs shall be supplied to enable future software
development and modification.
All program development and support functions to be supplied shall be described in detail to enable the
trained personnel to use the system.
The programming languages supported by the system shall be stated.
Any apparatus that enables testing, configuration and diagnosis of bay control units, gateway and 33/110kV
PV Plant Substation LAN e.g. laptops, communication devices is to be included in the offer.
36.10.1.4 Interface to Remote Control Centres
Communication to the remote-control centers shall be provided by data communication, utilizing

international standard protocol IEC 60870-5-104 & IEC 60870-5- 101.
It is the obligation of the Contractor to coordinate and parameterize settings with the existing SCADA
interfaces of the relevant Control Centers in order to ensure interoperability.
It must be possible to interface redundantly with more than two remote Control Centers simultaneously by
using dual port capability, while protocols must be possible to be different on both ports (e.g. IEC 60870-5-
101 on port 1 and IEC 60870-5-104 on port 2).
Change of the protocol on both ports shall not require any change of software or firmware but need to be
selectable via parameterization.
Minimum transmission speed shall be

 9600 bit/s for IEC 60870-5-101 ports
 64k bit/s for IEC 60870-5-104 ports.
From control centers all related voltage apparatus of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall be possible to
be remotely controlled and monitored.
All signals of each substation required for the control and monitoring from the remote-control centers shall
be made available for data transmission via redundant gateways.
The scope of supply includes all required equipment and installations to enable the 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation for the proper connection of the required control and monitoring signals towards and from up to
two higher level remote-control centers SEC MoE Transmission TSO National Control Center/Regional
RCC/Distribution Control Center/Central Cyber Security Operation Center (if existing)/Offtaker SCMS (if
needed) (as applicable in the related National/Regional TSO/DSO Grid network).
Substation Gateway
The communication gateway to be provided by the Contractor shall be a network node capable to interconnect
both the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation and the remote-control center(s) SEC MoE Transmission TSO National
Control Center/Regional RCC/Distribution Control Center/Central Cyber Security Operation Center (if
existing)/Offtaker SCMS (if needed) (as applicable in the related National/Regional TSO/DSO Grid network)
networks together by performing a protocol translation/mapping necessary to ensure system interoperability.
The gateway shall be based on high performance and maintenance-free computer equipped with a real-time
operating system. The access to all subsystems at the station level shall be guaranteed.
The Bidder shall state in his offer all the protocols that are supported by the gateway.
The gateway to be provided shall include at least the following features:
 Process communication
1. IEC61850-8-1
2. Modbus serial
3. Modbus TCP
4. IEC 60870-5-103
 Remote communication
1. IEC 60870-5-101
2. IEC 60870-5-104.
Furthermore, the communication gateway shall also have:

 an efficient and intuitive configuration tool (Gateway management tool)
 a drag-and-drop protocol mapping to map complete structures from the source data
 an efficient handling of large amounts of data in list views
 tooltips
 remote configuration and administration.
Additionally, at least the following security features shall be included:

 user authentication
 individual user accounts
 password authentication.
All licenses shall be provided by the Contractor and specifically the license for a gateway management tool
to be installed at the engineering workstation. The gateway management tool shall enable the engineer to
transfer the configurations of the objects to the gateway computer.
The gateway management tool shall display at least the following license information for the device in a
window:
 owner of the license
 product revision
 protocols supported by the license
 number of servers supported by the license
 number of clients supported by the license.
The updating of the license as well as the downloading of the configurations shall be easily executable.
36.10.1.5 Station Protection Functions
The protection system is described in a separate subsection. However, the following items are also important
for SCMS as the protection functions are an integral part of the SCMS.
Station protection functions are protection functions which are normally not allocated to the particular bay.
This concerns essentially busbar and breaker failure protection schemes (by busbar protection the part of
equipment can be allocated in the particular bays, which are connected with central part via a proprietary
bus).
All protection functions realized in the station level shall be based on numerical technology. Remote access
to the protection devices shall be made available from SCMS.
The station protection units shall be serial integrated for data sharing and meet the real-time communication
requirements for automatic functions. The data presentation and the configuration of the various station
protection units shall be compatible with the overall system communication and data exchange
requirements.
The operation shall depend on the conditions of other functions, such as interfaces, local HMI, event and
disturbance recording, data-storage, self-supervision, etc. (see description in chapter “Bay control functions”).
36.10.2 Bay Level Functions
In a PRP architecture the functionality shall be as close as possible to the process.
In this respect, the following functions shall be allocated at bay level:

 bay control functions
 bay protection functions
 data collection functionality.
In application for:
 high voltage levels:
bay control functions and bay protection functions shall be carried out in separate units
 medium voltage levels:
bay control functions and bay protection functions may be carried out in a combined unit.
All bay internal programs, command sequences, collection of signals and information, outputs of commands
and signal processing required for the different switchgear units of the corresponding bays shall be
performed by the IEDs.
The protection and controls IEDs shall be linked in double ring FO connections.
Power supply to the IEDs shall come from the station battery and shall be redundant.
The IEDs are placed together with all necessary input/output equipment in the local control cubicles in the
control room of the control building. The bay level devices shall be supplied from the station battery power
supply.
36.10.2.1 Bay Control Functions
Control mode selection
The different high voltage and medium voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different
places:
 from the remote-control centers
 from the operator workstations
 from the bay control and/or protection units (IEDs)
 from the individual equipment.
It has to be ensured, that operation is only possible by one operator at a time. Clear control priorities shall
prevent that operation of a single device can be initiated at the same time from more than one various control
levels, i.e. remote level, station level, bay level or apparatus level. The priority shall always be on the lowest
enabled control level.
OFF mode
It is not possible to operate any object, neither locally nor remotely.
EMERGENCY mode
The position indication shall be directly from the primary equipment circuit breaker.
On the mimic board, the selection push button and either the ON or OFF push button has to be pushed
simultaneously in order to close or open the circuit breaker.
To control in the emergency mode requires a special key. Control operation from other places (e.g. from
REMOTE) shall not be possible if the emergency select key is in the emergency operation position.
LOCAL mode
On the local HMI on a display at the IEDs (and local mimic on the control panels, if any) it the object has
first to be selected. In case of blocking or interlocking conditions, the selection will not be possible, and an
appropriate alarm annunciation shall occur. If a selection is valid, the position indication will show the
possible direction, and the appropriate ON or OFF button shall be pressed in order to close or open the
switching device.
Control operation from other places (e.g., REMOTE) shall not be possible in this operating mode.
REMOTE mode
Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (station or remote level) and the installation can be
controlled only remotely. Control operation from lower levels shall not be possible in this operating mode.
It shall be possible to adopt other philosophies by parameterization.
36.10.2.2 Interfaces
All IEDs shall be provided with an optical interface for connecting the station bus and communication to
station level devices and remote level devices according to IEC 61850.
Additionally, the IEDs shall be provided with an optical front interface for connecting a personal computer
or a laptop.
The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical signals, all binary inputs and
relay outputs for all built-in functions and signals shall be possible both locally and remotely.
36.10.2.3 Local HMI
A local HMI at the IEDs shall permit controlling and monitoring the individual bays from bay level.
The local HMI shall be front-mounted and based on a user-friendly, menu-structured program and performed
with the use of a permanently installed HMI-unit, type tested together with the IED.
The diagram of the individual bay shall be showing the switching status and measured values.
Service values of current and voltages as well as active and reactive power shall be available. Also,
characteristic analogue values related to the activated functions (e.g. impedance in case of distance
protection) shall be available.
Additionally, an alarm annunciation for bay alarms shall be included in the local HMI.
Command supervision
Perfect collection and processing of all switchgear positions of the entire 33/110kV PV Plant Substation
must be ensured at all times. Unclear information, such as intermediate switchgear positions, switchgear
fault, faulty data transfer etc. must never allow switching operations.
Control, regulation and synchronizing functions shall require perfect collection and processing of all
information of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation. The information has to be up to date and valid.
Maloperation of control and regulation facilities such as on-load switching of a disconnector, switching on in
asynchronous state etc. shall be avoided.
If remote and/or station level control and regulation facilities are failing, back-up control shall be possible.
Interruption of drive latching in case runtime is exceeded.
When the runtime is exceeded, the command has to be cancelled.
Pole discrepancy monitoring
A pole discrepancy function, based on the measurement phase over currents and current differences between
phases shall be provided.
Select-before-execute-procedure
Select-before-execute-procedure shall be applied for the operation of circuit breakers. For safety reasons the
command is always given in two stages: selection of the object and command for operation. These two
stages are realized with one contact each and only when both contacts are closed will the final command
(open or closed) executed.
36.10.2.4 Station Interlocking
Interlocking facilities shall be installed in the switchgear to prevent damages and accidents in case of false
operation.
Within the bay itself, software interlocking controlled via bay control units shall be used. The station
interlocking systems shall be provided via station bus, double FO ring configuration, followed with redundant
number of Ethernet switches.
The arrangement of FO links and Ethernet switches is subject to the Company’s/Company’s Representative’s
approval. The provided number of Ethernet switches shall allow the separate connection of 110 kV controls,
110 kV protections, 33 kV controls, 33 kV protections etc.
The separate Ethernet is needed for station common signals. The bid shall describe the scenario while an IED
of any bay is switched off or fails.
The primary interlocking of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation feeders shall be provided via hardwired
parallel cabling as specified.
The station interlocking system shall make it easy to add new feeder (lines, transformers etc.) and future
modification and extension of the station control shall be possible without interference to the operation of
other parts of the installation (e.g. moving of existing feeders including all parameters and settings to enable
installation of new feeders).
It shall be a simple layout, easy to test and simple to handle when upgrading the station with future bays.
Modifications shall be possible to be carried out by the Company’s staff without the presence of the
Contractor.
The function and design of the switchgear interlocking systems shall be a hardware interlocking with parallel
copper cabling as specified and shall be extremely reliable and safe.
For the switching and operation of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation, the following interlocking concept
shall be applied:
 The disconnector shall be operable only when the relevant circuit breaker is in the off-position
and all the relevant earthing switch have been removed.
 The earthing switch is operable only when the disconnectors have been opened and the relevant
location is free of voltage.
 Closing of circuit breaker shall only be possible when the relevant earthing switches have been
removed and the protective relays and corresponding lock-out relays are not actuated or if they
are actuated, the faults have been cleared and the respective lock-out relays have been reseated.
 Busbar change-over shall be possible with the busbar disconnectors and bus coupler in closed
position without power supply interruption.
 When a pressure drop signal is received from gas monitoring device for a SF 6 circuit breaker, the
tripping and the closing signal shall be locked out.
 other interlocks as found necessary during engineering stage.
An override function shall be provided which can be enabled to bypass the interlocking function.
Service interlocks shall be provided for future remote operations and maintenance interlocks shall be
provided for local operations.
The interlocking system is to be designed in such a way that testing is possible during normal operation.
36.10.2.5 Synchro check
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be distributed to the control and/or protection devices
and have the following features:
 adjustable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference
 energizing for deadline-live bus, live line-dead bus or deadline–dead bus
 Settings for manual close command and auto reclose command shall be adaptable to the
operating times of the specific switchgear.
Synchro check function shall be applicable for all breakers.
Voltage selection
The voltages relevant for the synchro check functions are dependent on the station topology, i.e. on the
positions of the circuit breakers and/or the disconnectors. The correct voltage for synchronizing is derived from
the corresponding voltage transformers or from bus voltage image with special relay control and shall be
selected automatically by the control and/or protection IEDs.
36.10.2.6 Auto reclosing
The auto recloser should be settable for the modes of operation detailed in this specification.
36.10.2.7 Transformer Tap Changer Control
Voltage regulation for transformers with on-load tap changer shall be either included in the numerical
control unit for the power transformer bay or located in a separate on-load tap changer control device which
is associated with the power transformer. In case of utilizing a separate tap changer device, this shall be an
integral part of the SCMS like any bay-oriented device.
36.10.2.8 Event and Disturbance Recording
Each IED shall contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 256 time-tagged events.
Having bay protection functions, the IEDs shall provide the user, either locally or remotely, with complete
information on the last ten disturbances.
A disturbance recorder with a minimum of 5 s recording time for at least 10 disturbances shall provide the
user with time-tagged disturbance records. At least the analogue inputs as well as 16 binary signals must be
recorded with a sampling rate that guarantees the presentation of a fifth harmonic component of any recorded
analogue signal.
The pre-fault and fault currents and voltages shall be recorded for each disturbance and be made available
for further evaluation purposes.
Data-storage
Data storage of at least 500 events (cyclical buffer).
Self-supervision
The electronic system shall be provided with functions for continuous self-supervision and test. Each circuit
board shall contain circuits for automatic testing of its own function. These circuits shall interact with a test
and diagnostic program controlled by the central unit.
Faults in a unit shall be indicated by the illumination of a red LED on the front edge of the unit and reported
to the higher operation levels. The error indications/messages to be generated shall allow fault localization
down to the card level.
Time for fault tracing and replacement of a faulty unit shall be reduced to a minimum.
Self-supervision shall also comprise the power supply system, the internal system bus and the ability of the
central unit to communicate with different circuit boards.
36.10.2.9 Bay Protection Functions
The protection system is described in a separate subsection. However, the following items are also important
for SCMS as the protection functions are an integral part of the SCMS.
All protection functions realized in the bay protection units shall be based on numerical technology. Remote
access to the protection devices shall be made available.
The bay protection units shall be serial integrated for data sharing and meet the real-time communication
requirements for automatic functions. The data presentation and the configuration of the various bay
protection units shall be compatible with the overall system communication and data exchange
requirements.
The operation shall depend on the conditions of other functions, such as interfaces, local HMI, event and
disturbance recording, data-storage, self-supervision, etc. (see description in chapter “Bay control
functions”).
36.10.2.10 Data Collection Functionality
Generally, the following basic data collection functions shall be performed by the IEDs:
 signal acquisition
 acquisition of measured and counted values.
 monitoring of execution of commands
 calculation of derived operational measured values
 generation of group signals.
The position of each switching device (e.g. circuit breaker, disconnector, earthing switch, transformer tap
changer etc.) shall be supervised permanently.
Every detected change of position shall be immediately visible in the single-line diagram on the local HMI
and reported to the station and remote level.
Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes.
The positions of each switching device shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches, normally closed (NC)
and normally open (NO), which shall give antivalent signals. An alarm shall be initiated if these position
indications are inconsistent or if the time required for operating mechanism to change position exceeds a
predefined limit.
Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements with high accuracy of 0.5% shall be provided. The
values of active power (W), reactive power (VAr), frequency (Hz) and the rms values for voltage (U) and
current (I) shall be calculated.
The measured values shall be displayed locally on the station HMI and reported to the higher levels.
Threshold limit values shall be selectable for alarm indications.
Additionally, digital inputs for acquisition of active and reactive power in line and transformer bays shall be
ensured.
IEDs shall be provided within a process interface for acquisition data directly from the high voltage and
medium voltage apparatus:
 binary inputs and outputs
 analogue input and outputs:
 0 – 100 (110) V
 0 – 1/5 A
 0/4 – 20 mA.
The provided quantity of inputs and outputs in the bid shall be based on the single line diagrams of
33/110kV PV Plant Substation to consider the quantity of binary and analogue inputs/outputs as indicated in
the IEDs.
The quantities of binary and analogue inputs/outputs as indicated are minimum requirements. Any further
requirements as per the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation manufacturer and identified during engineering stage,
site testing/commissioning stage shall be included.
In order to meet the requirements of this specification, the detailed design of the SCMS is within the
Contractor’s responsibility, but subject to approval by the Employer. The following important requirements
should be guaranteed in any case:
 Distributed architecture that allows the placement of bay level devices in a cubicle and the
station equipment in a central building.
 Bay level devices like IEDs are directly connected to the station bus also the protection
equipment of other manufacturers.
 In the case of Main 1/main 2 protection schemes, the two protection terminals shall be of
different hardware and software.
 Back-up protection functions can be allocated in the bay control unit.
 Station-oriented protection functions (busbar and breaker failure protections) may be integrated
into one system.
 Reclosing and associated synchro check or voltage check functions can be considered as control
functions.
 A separate control unit has to be associated to each circuit breaker.
The Contractor shall present the layout of the different cubicles used in the Project, following a bay-oriented
arrangement.
36.11.1 Station Level Design
Station level devices like switches, gateways, station computer, operator workstations, etc. are directly
connected to the station bus also the protection equipment of other manufacturers.
The Contractor shall present a detailed schematic and the drawings of the station level and the bus
connections.
36.11.2 Bay Level Design
For each type of bay (line, transformer and coupler bay) the Contractor shall present the principal
arrangement of the cubicles within type of hardware units and associated functions.
The protection scheme is an integral part of the SCMS system, and the protection relays shall therefore be
directly connected to the station bus, in order to provide unrestricted access to all data and information stored
in the relays and for changing protection parameters remotely. Back-up protection schemes can be allocated
in one or the other units already mentioned.
In some applications or voltage levels a higher degree of integration is acceptable, e.g., integration of control
and main protection functions or integration of busbar and bay protection functions.
A high integration of functions and a low number of units is permitted under consideration of the method of
fulfillment of the reliability requirements.
Line bay
Cubicle with:
 the already mentioned control unit (control, recloser, synchro check) per breaker with the associated
bay mimic (position indication) and depending on voltage level also with protection schemes.
 the already mentioned main and back-up protection schemes for the line.
 the protection unit for the busbar and breaker failure protection functions per set of current
transformers (in the case of a double-busbar scheme, the breaker failure protection may be
associated with the line protection)
 the dedicated disturbance recorder unit (depending on the required sampling rate).
Transformer bay
Cubicle with:
 the already mentioned control unit per voltage level (control, recloser, synchro check) with the
associated bay mimic (position indication)
 the already mentioned main protection for the power transformer.
 the protection unit for the busbar and breaker failure protection functions (in the case of a double-
busbar scheme, the breaker failure protection may be associated with the line protection)
 the back-up protection in one separate unit or in the control unit
 the units for dedicated disturbance recorder (depending on the required sampling rate).
Coupler bay
Cubicle with:
 the already mentioned control unit (control, recloser, synchro check) per breaker with the associated
bay mimic (position indication) and depending on voltage level also with protection schemes.
 the protection unit for the busbar and breaker failure protection functions. Normally one set of
current transformers is sufficient, because the busbar protection is designed to work correctly even if
only one set of current transformers are available.
 the protection functions (normally overcurrent functions) can be mounted in one of the units already
mentioned or in a separate unit.
36.11.3 Quantity of Inputs and Outputs
The Bid shall be based on the number of necessary BCUs, and digital protection relay devices as indicated in
the single line diagrams and the tables given in the protection section of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
The Contractor shall consider the quantity of binary and analogue inputs/outputs as indicated below for the
bay control units. The quantities of binary and analogue inputs/outputs, as indicated, are minimum
requirements.
In addition to the quantities as indicated, the Contractor shall include a reserve in the amount of 20% in their
offered scope.
Any further requirements as per the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation manufacturer and identified during
engineering stage, site testing/commissioning stage shall be included.
Minimum binary inputs (counted as single indications) but NOT limited to:
 8 per circuit breaker
 5 per disconnector
 4 per earthing switch
 16 per line feeder from protection
 6 from busbar protection
 50 general/auxiliaries for the whole Substation
 8 for status of transformer operation.
Minimum binary outputs (single commands) but NOT limited to:

 2 per circuit breaker
 2 per disconnector
 2 per earthing switch
 2 per tap changer lower/raise
 2 per tap changer automatic/manual
 2 as a reserve per AVR.
Minimum analogue inputs (11 bits + sign bit measuring) but NOT limited to:
 3 voltages per busbar section
 3 voltages per transformer bay
 3 currents per coupler bay
 3 currents per transformer winding
 1 active power per transformer
 1 reactive power per transformer
 tap changer position per transformer
 winding temperature per transformer
 oil temperature per transformer
 hot spot temperature per 33/110kV cable system
 4 analogue inputs per Substation as a reserve.
The SCMS shall have at least one serial interface for meter data. Protocols shall be selectable as per the
relevant protocols mentioned in the relevant section of the present document.
Furthermore, the SCMS shall have Signals for data exchange with the associated PV Plant and further
data exchange with the required remote-control Centers, as per MoE Requirements and related Grid
Codes.
36.12 Other Requirements
36.12.1 General
During the project implementation phase the following activities shall be considered:
 engineering
 FAT
 site installation
 commissioning
 SAT
 training
 operation
 service, after sales and maintenance.
36.12.2 Engineering
The specific functionality and boundary conditions of the SCMS shall be adapted to the requirements which
are related to the particular voltage level and specific 33/110kV PV Plant Substation layout.
During the engineering phase, at least the following items are very important and shall be supplied for
approval by the Employer:
 overall single-line diagram, including position of the different objects (CTs, VTs, isolators, etc.),
which is the basis for the engineering work.
 general system architecture of the entire SCMS for substation
 functional design specification of SCMS, which describes in detail the equipment and the
functionalities.
 layouts of the displays at station level and bay level as single-line diagram, event list, alarm list,
etc.
 lists of events and alarms (including their names) with the indication of the particular signal to
be sent (station event list, remote, etc.)
 data transmission towards and from the remote-control centers
 station interlocking
 cubicle layout
 IT security risk assessment according to IEC 62351 and the IEC 27k group of standards
including appropriate recommendations for mitigation measures. The IT security measures
applied shall be fully compliant with any requirement generated from outside systems, like the
SCADA system in the connected NLDC/ECC.
36.12.3 FAT and SAT
36.12.3.1 General
The Contractor shall submit a test specification for the factory acceptance test (FAT) and the site acceptance
tests (SAT) of the SCMS for approval. For the individual devices applicable type test certificates shall be
submitted.
The manufacturing phase of the SCMS shall be concluded by the FAT. The purpose is to ensure that the
Contractor has interpreted the specified requirements correctly and that the FAT includes checking to the
degree required by the Employer.
All (100% of the subject units, but not only sampling) shall be subject to factory routine test. The relevant
routine test for each specific unit shall be submitted before any delivery. The general philosophy shall be to
deliver a SCMS to site only after it has been thoroughly tested and its specified performance has been
verified, as far as site conditions can be simulated in a test lab.
FAT shall be done for 100% of the subject panels/equipment. If the FAT comprises only a certain portion of
the system for practical reasons, it has to be assured that this test configuration contains at least one unit of
each, and every type of equipment incorporated in the delivered system.
If some parts of SCMS are already installed on site, the FAT shall be limited to subsystem tests. In such a
case, the complete system test shall be performed on site together with the site acceptance test (SAT).
36.12.3.2 FAT and SAT Requirements
All materials and equipment used in the Contract Works are subject to inspection by the
Employer/Company’s Representative in order to determine whether the material and equipment comply with
the required properties.
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense execute shop and field tests of all materials and equipment
supplied by him or his Subcontractor required in accordance with the applicable IEC standards. This shall
not preclude the Company’s/Company’s Representative’s right to call for further tests, if he considers them
necessary.
All equipment and materials necessary for execution of the tests shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Measuring apparatus and their calibration certificates shall be approved by the Employer/Company’s
Representative.
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer/Company’s Representative for approval the test results showing
conditions of tests performed, the test circuits and oscillograms, etc.
High temperature operation tests shall be performed at the maximum ambient temperature.
The Contractor shall submit a test specification for the factory acceptance test (FAT) and the site acceptance
tests (SAT) of the SCMS for approval. For the individual devices applicable type test certificates shall be
submitted.
The manufacturing phase of the SCMS shall be concluded by the FAT. The purpose is to ensure that the
supplier has interpreted the specified requirements correctly and that the FAT includes checking to the
degree required by the Employer.
All (100% of the subject units, but not only sampling) shall be subject to factory routine test. The relevant
routine test for each specific unit shall be submitted before any delivery. The general philosophy shall be to
deliver a SCMS to site only after it has been thoroughly tested and its specified performance has been
verified, as far as site conditions can be simulated in a test lab.
Workshop test, the shop assembled units shall be completely assembled, adjusted and tested at the shop.
After assembly the complete units shall, as far as possible, be tested for operation under design conditions to
assure the proper functioning of the equipment.
Type tests shall be performed on each type and rating of the specified equipment with the purpose of
proving its properties. If evidence is available of successfully carried out type test on identical apparatus or
apparatus which is for practical test purposes similar, in a recognized independent testing laboratory or
independently witnessed, this may be accepted in lieu of these tests.
FAT, the complete 33/110kV PV Plant Substation control system (e.g., substation level equipment while
communicating with all bay level equipment) shall be tested. FAT shall be performed to verify the
performance of the system. The test shall apply to all aspects of the system, including communication to
other systems, all Inputs/Outputs and the complete processing of all events, alarms, measuring and other
information’s.
Factory acceptance tests (FAT) shall be performed in presence of Employer/Company’s Representative in
manufacturer laboratories before shipment.
The Factory Acceptance Tests shall commence by switching on power to all equipment bootstrapping and
loading the software system for each computer terminal, verifying that each step is properly described in the
operating instruction manual the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation control system shall be tested with all
software loading and running.
The test shall include:
 checks of proper functioning of all hardware, software and firmware by a thorough exercise of
all system functions
 verification of compliance with operating speed requirements
 verification that orderly computer system shutdown procedures are initiated following an
interruption of the DC supply.
 verification that system performance is not affected by DC power source abnormalities
involving voltage variations (+10%; -20%)
 demonstration of all required performances. This demonstration shall include verification of
functional requirements and verify that programs are (not unduly) interdependent, and
furthermore that incorrect manipulation via HMI is properly identified and causes no system
lockups.
 test of all discrete input points
 test of all control outputs
 test on bay interlock units
 test on assembled interlocking system.
 check of analogue measurements accuracy
 test of SOE buffering, retrieval, and local logging
 demonstration of techniques and methods for modifying the database, including point additions
and deletions
 demonstration of techniques for changing a communications port to use another protocol.
 test of communication within protection monitoring system, and dialogue with distributed
protection demonstration
 test of communication towards and from the higher-level Control Centers (SEC MoE
Transmission TSO National Control Center/Regional RCC/Distribution Control Center/Central
Cyber Security Operation Center (if existing)/Offtaker SCMS (if needed) based on verification
of correctness of the exchanged data traffic between SCMS and the related Control Centers)
SCADA/EMS/DMS System under application of suitable test equipment (e.g. test program for
monitoring and exchange of IEC101 and/or IEC104 telegrams and frames, SCADA/EMS/DMS
33/110kV PV Plant Substation SLD Displays).
SAT, on arrival at Site and during and after completion of erection, all items of control, SCMS, local
33/110kV PV Plant Substation SCADA equipment shall be inspected and tested so to ensure that there shall
be no delay in commissioning due to supply of incorrect or damaged equipment.
The commissioning of the primary equipment and the wiring between the primary equipment and cubicle
terminals of the SCMS system is not part of the commissioning of the SCMS and has to be finished before
commissioning of the secondary equipment.
The site tests are subdivided into:
 test during and after erection

 commissioning tests, site acceptance test – SAT
 hot test, test after energizing of the facilities.
 guarantee tests.
The Contractor shall be responsibly to carry out the site acceptance tests including secondary tests of the
protection equipment, the station control unit, local SCADA operation and remote control.
The site acceptance test will exercise all functions of the system and duplicate selected factory acceptance
tests to the extent possible. The Contractor shall issue the site acceptance test certificates.
The following requirements related to the SAT are to be checked by Contractor:
 The control system is properly integrated into the entire system of 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation and SCADA/EMS/DMS/ other Systems at SEC MoE Transmission TSO National
Control Center/Regional RCC/ Distribution Control Center/Central Cyber Security Operation
Center (if existing)/(if needed) Offtaker SCMS
 The control system is suitable and functions correctly in its environment.
 The protective and control devices operate properly, as required.
 The interfaces with other systems (if applicable) are compatible and function correctly.
This testing will include, but not be limited to, the following conditions:
 each subsystem initialization

 diagnostics of primary equipment and self-diagnostic
 checks of proper functioning of hardware, software, and firmware by exercising of selected
subsystems functions
 system communication interfaces including failure modes
 database modification and expanding
 inspection and approval of the VDU presentations
 test dialogues
 operation of HV/MV/LV apparatus
 test of interlocking system
 test of event list
 test of measuring functions (including trends)
 test of operation of tap changer
 test of alarms
 test of substation monitoring system (SCMS)
 Test of proper communication between SCMS and higher-level Control Centers via IEC101
and/or IEC104 standard protocol
 Test of proper integration between SCMS and higher-level Control Centers SCADA/EMS/DMS
System.
Also, during this test the reliability of hardware and software shall be checked. Tests may include checks of
drawings and lists, as well.
Procedures and methods for each commissioning/acceptance site tests, including those to be performed on-
load, as well as formats of site test reports for each test, are subject of the Employer/Company’s
Representative approval.
The commissioning is concerned as complete when the relevant equipment is energized and loaded and the
necessary tests, measurements and checking done.
36.12.4 Commissioning
The commissioning of the primary equipment and the wiring between the primary equipment and cubicle
terminals of the SCMS system is not part of the commissioning of the SCMS and has to be finished before
commissioning of the secondary equipment.
After SAT, the Point-to-point test to prove the adequate integration of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation
SCMS into the SCADA/EMS/DMS/Other System at SEC MoE Transmission TSO National Control
Center/Regional RCC/ Distribution Control Center/ Central Cyber Security Operation Center (if
existing)/Offtaker SCMS.
36.12.5 Service, after-sales and maintenance
In order to reduce maintenance, training and commissioning costs, it is required to use the lowest number of
different hardware platforms as possible.
A guarantee period including replacement of defective material for a period of 60 months, starting from the
date at which the system has been taken over or for a period of 66 months after the last delivery by the
factory supported by performance guarantee, shall be agreed upon.
The Contractor shall assure long-term maintenance and availability of spares. Moreover, a guarantee shall be
submitted for the availability of spares during the lifetime of the SCMS (not less than 10 years).
Spare parts shall be foreseen for all the main equipment. A complete list of spare parts recommended by the
Contractor shall be submitted.
The Contractor shall provide spares considered necessary for the bay control units, gateway and other
equipment that the Employer may require to replace damaged components in order to bring the system to full
operation.
All special tools and test equipment required for maintenance of the system shall be included in the offer.
The complete spare parts list recommended and submitted by the Contractor shall be subdivided into:
 Short-term spare parts that are necessary for two (2) years of operation as mentioned above.
These spare parts shall be included in the contract and shall comprise at least one spare module
for supplied equipment and basic tools for system maintenance.
 Long-term spare parts necessary during the lifetime of the SCMS (not less than ten (10) years of
operation).
36.12.6 Training
Before and during erection, commissioning and trial operation, the Company’s selected operating&
maintenance staff is to be familiarized with the functions of the SCMS. The contractor shall arrange
appropriate training in the operation and maintenance of the SCMS equipment for the Company’s personnel
at site as well as at the Manufacturer premises.
A tentative training program shall be submitted by the contractor. The training program shall consider the
availability of the “shift personnel” and shall be structured accordingly. The training shall be performed
before installation, during installation as well as during commissioning.
The training sessions shall be conducted by for this purpose specially trained personnel of the Contractor,
which are employees of the related systems Manufacturers.
The training sessions shall be performed in English language.
The focus of the training shall be on the general and basic structure of the SCMS and its components as well
as configuration and setting of parameters respectively the maintenance and error correction.
The training shall include as a minimum Training at the Manufacturer premises and field training of the
Company’s Operation &maintenance staff so that the following tasks can be executed:
 knowledge of the structure of the SCMS and its components

 design, configuration, parametrization and operation of the SCMS
 maintenance& operation of the facility including troubleshooting and error correction.
 testing& commissioning of the SCMS.
On-job training shall be regularly performed during the erection and commissioning of the equipment in the
33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
In order to safeguard that the selected staff of MASDAR/MoE will be sufficiently skilled and trained for
such data engineering works, a series of on-job-training to be performed by the Contractor System Vendors
at the MASDAR/MoE premises on-site. A series of 3 consecutive training sessions with duration of 3 weeks
each is considered adequate to cater for such data engineering capabilities.
Before energizing, a series of three (3) consecutive training sessions with duration of three (3) weeks each,
one (1) series for Operation staff and the other two (2) series for the Maintenance staff (configuration,
parametrization, troubleshooting, error correction, testing etc.), separated into different sessions shall be
performed. The Contractor shall provide comprehensive training documents. Furthermore, particular
attention shall be paid to maintenance and repairs.
36.12.7 Documentation
The hardware and software documentation shall comprise but is not limited to the following:
 list of drawings
 control room layout
 assembly drawing
 single line diagram
 block diagram
 circuit diagram
 list of apparatus
 list of labels
 Functional Design Specification (FDS)
 test plan and specification of Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) and of Site Acceptance Test
(SAT)
 standardized IED capability description (ICD) files written in SCL according to IEC 61850-6
 standardized substation configuration description (SCD) file written in SCL according to
IEC 61850-6
 front view and side view of all different cubicles
 circuit diagrams for cubicles
 connection tables for cubicles
 logic diagram
 list of signals
 product manuals
 operator’s manuals
 IT risk assessment
 description of IT security measures applied.
The size of all documents and drawings shall conform to ISO standard, and be of size of A1, A2, A3 or A4.
Larger sizes than A1 shall be avoided. All documents in size A3 and A4 shall bound in hard covers. The
schematic diagrams, apparatus and cable lists shall be size of A3 or A4. All drawings shall be carried out in
the latest version of AutoCAD, or a similar computer aided drafting software package. Scales to be used
shall be 1:10, 1:20, 1:40, 1:50 and multiples of this series.
All system hard- and software documentation, the application hard- and software documentation and the
operating instructions shall be provided in English language.
During the project, the contractor shall maintain a list of documentation to be updated whenever needed.
This list of documentation shall include the date of the original issue of each document submitted as well as
the date of each revision. A time schedule for the submittal of the documentation shall also be included in
this list.
37 PV Plant DCS
37.1 General description

The Contractor shall install the required DCS/SCADA for monitoring, control and information exchanges
between the distributed Plant equipment.
The Contractor shall install the following items alongside the DCS/SCADA:
 A Plant specific number of microprocessor-based protection relays (IED)
 A Plant specific number of on-load tap-changer controllers
 A Plant specific number of PV Inverters
 A Plant specific number of Meteorological stations
 A Plant specific number of PPC
 A time server
 A project specific number of bay controllers
 A server computer fitted with DCS/SCADA server software installed in the Plant Substation
control room.
 A gateway allowing remote control of the Plant substation.
The Contractor shall install the following equipment’s alongside the DCS/SCADA:
 Data acquisition
 Controls
 HMI
 Alarm signaling
 Sequential event recording
 Historical data archiving
 Management reporting
 Gateway
The Contractor shall install the DCS system which is consist of three different control systems where each
one is responsible for the control of different subsystems of the Plant:
 PV Plant SCADA: System responsible for the control and monitoring of meteorological station,
PV Inverters (through the PPC), MV switchgear, LV/MV Transformers and auxiliary systems of
the PV Plant. This system shall also communicate with the Plant Substation automation system
to acquire the relevant data (from the metering for example) for Plant Performance Ratio
calculations.
 The Power Plant Controller (PPC) performs the control of the PV Inverters and Transformers
Station, controlling the energy generated according to Grid Code and the protective elements
involved.
 The SCMS performs the control of the Plant Substation, including the protection schemes and
all requirements for grid interconnection and Grid Code. In this element is performed the signal
exchange with EI and the LDC. It shall be performed through the Telecom panel (SDH/IP-
MPLS) of Plant Substation. This system shall be described in the Plant Substation document
package. In the following scheme is described the different systems and subsystems which
constitute the DCS system.
37.2 General requirements
The Contractor shall install the SCADA and shall make sure that the SCADA system is, at least:
 Capable of reading and show the monitored values from PPC which integrates all PV Inverters,
in reference of current, voltage, instantaneous DC power, DC energy, status and alarms (surge
protection) at least at each of the PV Inverter´s DC input cables. DC currents for no more than a
combined measure of 18 parallel strings.
 Capable of reading and show the monitored values from PPC which integrates all PV Inverters,
in reference of the status and alarms of each inverter, status and alarms of the master/slave
system, instantaneous AC power, AC energy, input voltage and current measurement, frequency,
energy and working hour counter for each inverter´s running mode.
 Ability to change internal parameters of the PV Inverters, MPP tracking parameters (by PV
Inverter manufacturer through the applicable communication network)
 Ability to change PPC parameters (voltage and frequency set point, active and reactive power set
point).
 Ability to monitor and store the data from the meteorological stations into the Plant Substation
communication box through the communication box units in Transformer Stations.
 Feature a sufficient openness and interoperability to allow integration of third-party devices and
sensors.
 Ability to monitor its own failures.
 Enable troubleshooting and data loss management.
 Ensure the PV Plant meets Grid Code requirement especially concerning generation and
consumption of reactive power. This shall be feasible through the PPC.
 The Plant DCS shall be interconnected to the utility remote dispatch system to allow monitoring
of the Plant at limited access level. Consider that the utility remote dispatch system shall be
connected to the telecommunication panel of the Plant Substation and EI.
 Allow PV Plant calculation of Performance Ratio regarding power generation.
 Ability to produce reports for evaluation of availability of PV Inverters.
 Ability to collect signals and alarms from emergency diesel.
 Provision of a remote monitoring system and software with supervisory role and access to
historic values.
 Integrate into DCS system, weather forecasting data from external web services.
 Point of control philosophy shall be implemented in order to avoid simultaneous control of the
same device from different locations/users.
 Remote access shall be allowed for maintenance and backup purpose.
 Have the function of remote internet access via a high-speed broadband connection to permit
remote monitoring (and supplied with associated software).
The Contractor shall install the SCADA system in a way to make sure that data shall be recorded from the
PV Inverters, Transformer Station, transformers, meteorological stations and every system added that would
be required. The installed system shall be capable of data recording for both regular time series data (e.g.,
irradiation, temperature, power, energy, etc.) and event data (faults, warnings, errors). The time-based data
shall be recorded with an average period of minimum at least ten minutes mean, min, max and standard
deviation.
The Contractor shall install the plant DCS which shall display an “easy-to-read” summary of the Plant status
and performance at any time and shall also be able to display more detailed information about individual
inverters/blocks. The monitoring system shall be able to process the data and to sort the data necessary for
the presentation.
The Contractor shall make sure that the meteorological status is showing the Site mean irradiation,
temperature, PV speed and moisture. The grid status shall show the grid power and energy output for the
Plant and position of the circuit-breakers.
The Contractor shall make sure that the current Site events shall be clearly shown with event code, event
description, response status and times. There should be easy access to detailed information screens on
individual inverters, meteorological stations, Plant Substation and EI.
37.3 System architecture
The Contractor shall install the SCADA system in a way to allow control and operation of the Plant based on
a 4 levels architecture:
 Level 0 consists of a system that produces and transmits electricity from the PV Plant process, it
can be a Transformer Station that communicates with SCADA units or sensor, status switch
wired to SCADA unit input. They are:
 PV Inverters
 LV and MV board LV/MV Transformer
 Auxiliaries
 Met sensors.
 Level 1 consists in monitoring units i.e. RTU, PLC or Data logger, which acquires data from
level 0 system. These units transmit control and command issued from level 2 to Level 0.
 Level 2 consists of SCADA software that collects data from each level 1 unit and each inverter.
It runs on a server computer. It offers all the functionality of a SCADA such as HMI, alarm
management, remote alert, process database and reporting.
 Level 3 is the interface to third party equipment such as Purchaser’s RTU or the Company
SCADA server, which are excluded from the Contractor’s scope of installation. However, it
shall be installed by the Contractor on Site and shall be interfaced with SCADA.
The installation works for each one of the control systems that forms the DCS system shall include:
 Plant Substation SCMS:
 The contractor shall integrate the Plant Substation Control system elements (protection
relays, fault monitoring and disturbance system) and install the interface with the EI and
Purchaser remote dispatch system.
 The contractor shall install the interface between the PPC and PV Plant SCADA.
 The contractor shall install the communication network of the Plant Substation
equipment, which should be integrated and communicating with the DCS system.
 Installation works for complete assembly, commissioning and start-up of the elements
mentioned previously which shall be performed through certified and approved
company by the Purchaser.
 PPC:
 Contractor shall integrate the PPC with the PV Inverters and Transformer Stations
control system elements necessary according to the Grid Code requirements and Prudent
Utility Practice.
 Contractor shall install, program and test of all necessary devices, converters, switches
and communication box to integrate all elements of this system as well as proper
terminals for equipment wiring connection.
 The contractor shall install and test the communication network for all equipment that
should be integrated and communicated with the DCS system.
 The Contractor shall install, integrate, test and commission the controller devices in the
Plant listed below:
- MV switchgear.
- HV switchgear
- Transformer Stations and LV/MV Transformer
- PV Inverters and local boxes.
- Protection relays
- Metering devices.
 SCADA PV Plant:
 The Contractor shall install, test and commission the redundant central server in the
control room of the O&M Building.
 Software development and integration for central server
 The Contractor shall configure the PV Plant SCADA communication network
(communication boxes and SCADA rack network devices).
 The Contractor shall install the needed equipment needed to integrate data from external
forecast system (web services) with the Plant.
 Sensor supports and communications boxes anchoring elements, including suitable
screws
 Installation, testing and commissioning of the following devices: Sensors,
meteorological stations communication boxes, O&M building SCADA rack and
SCADA clients, data cables for the PV Plant SCADA communication network,
integration of the devices listed below: Inverters meteorological Stations.
37.4 Monitoring strategy
The Contractor shall install one monitoring cabinet each PV Inverter area, depending on the Site layout. The
Contractor shall install and integrate the internal parts of the monitoring cabinet which shall be composed of:
 Industrial hardened PLC with the appropriate memory, IO and communication ports for the data
acquisition and processing
 Industrial grade managed ethernet switch equipped with FO modules to allow connection to the
FO loop
 All necessary hardware for power supply, cable connection, protection against electrical injuries,
over-voltage protection, FO patch panels and accessories, terminal blocs, heating and / or
cooling systems
 Metal or plastic enclosure IP 65 at a minimum, fit for outdoor installation
 UPS powering the cabinet during 30min with PLC programmed to orderly shutdown prior to
back up power loss and reboot upon power up
The Contractor shall install the infrastructure needed for the cabinet to be able to handle the data acquisition
from:
 PV Inverters
 LV-MV transformers safety devices
 Switchgear positions
 MV cubicles
 LV boards
 Tracking system control units
 Security system
Data buffering for 48h in case of loss of communication.
37.4.1 Meteorological station
Refer to meteorological station specifications.
37.4.2 Communication boxes

The Contractor shall install a communications box near each Transformer Station and the Plant Substation
and shall integrate the different devices into the communication network.
The Contractor shall connect the communication boxes to the specified devices (Tracking system controllers,
meteorological stations, diesel generators), plus an additional 20% (minimum) of free ports as spare
capacity.
The Contractor shall install one communication box per each Transformer Station, and it shall be placed next
to the transmission box position. The switch for the field optical fiber ring shall be fast ethernet (or higher).
The communication box shall be powered at 230Vac single phase from the secondary panel board located at
Transformer Station, fed from the auxiliary services transformer.
To integrate this communication system into the DCS of the PV Plant, one FO ring which unites all the
communication boxes as a common network shall be installed by the Contractor. When two cables of the
rings are routed in parallel, Contractor shall lay FO cables on either side of MV cables, maintaining
appropriate distance to ensure no disruption in communication for all the PV Fields. Contractor shall
perform all the integration works needed to make sure that all data is transferred to the DCS by means of a
communication box located in the Plant Substation which shall be connected to switch of the O&M building
through a Gigabit network (ring topology).
37.4.3 SCADA server

The following requirements apply for the SCADA Server:
Hardware
Contractor shall install the SCADA Software on servers provided by the Contractor in a 19-inch rack
including:
 Servers with hard disks RAID 5 with hard backup disk
 Backup devices such as DVD or blue ray writer
 Redundant network cards
 Redundant power supply
 1 KVM monitor and switch
 In rack keyboard, trackball and display
 Optical fiber drawer to connect optical fiber coming from the plant
 Backbone switches
 Redundant Scada Servers
 Redundant SCADA Clients
The Contractor shall install the cabinet in the SCADA room of the Plant Substation.
Software
The Contractor shall install a SCADA software with its required infrastructure in a way to provide
monitoring, and control to O&M controls:
 PV Inverters
 Monitoring cabinet of Transformer Stations.
 Plant Control System.
 Meteorological station
 PV MV feeder’s meters
 Diesel generator
 Security System
The Contractor shall install a SCADA software, which shall include:

 HMI for real time processing monitoring and control
 Alarm management (acknowledgment, mask, clear, etc.)
 User management
 Automatic reporting
 Printout
 Data acquisition
 Data exchange
 Event and measurement database of SQL server type.
 Back-up devices with software for automatic backup, backup management and restoration
 Allow connection of remote SCADA client workstation (at least 1)
 Alert management by SMS and email
HMI
The Contractor shall install the HMI, which shall include screens as follows (non-exhaustive list):
 Converter’s area (DC network, MV network, PV Inverters,
 PPC (functions, regulation loops diagrams, parameters)
 Real time and historical alarm and event
 Real time and historical trends for measurements
 System and communication (SCADA self-monitoring)
Data recording
The Contractor shall install the SCADA software and perform integration works to make the SCADA be
able to record all data from sensors, Transformer Stations, Main Meters, and meteorological stations, in a
SQL database on site. Storage duration is the PV operation life.
The Contractor shall install all the features needed to make the Database open and a third-party system can
query it.
The Contractor shall make all the integration works so the length of the history shall be at least 1 year for the
main variables.
The Contractor shall install a query tool alongside the SCADA software to allow the Company to proceed to
report.
Event Database
The Contractor shall make sure that the event and alarms table shall include events and triggers from:
 Transformer Stations area monitoring cabinets.
 PV Inverters.
 Diesel generator.
Measurement Database
The measurement tables shall include 1-minute values from:
 Met sensors connected to converter’s area monitoring cabinets
 AC and DC electrical measurement from PV Inverters
 Tracker position control
SFTP Tool
The SCADA shall include a Secure File Transfer Protocol through Graphical User Interface (GUI) SFTP
transfer capability; based on the Company query to the SCADA database (both events and measurement
table) the SFTP tool shall allow downloading from selected devices and data from date to date. The data
query and the SFTP transfer may be at operator demand or automatic on a scheduled basis. If data are stored
on the cloud the web portal must include the same tools.
CSV files
In parallel SCADA software shall record data in CSV files.
Every measurement collected by the SCADA from:
 Meteorological stations
 PV Inverters
Are recorded every 10minutes with timestamp and MIN/MAX/AVG/STD DEV values. CSV files are stored
on the server’s hard disk.
Key performance indicators calculation tool.
The SCADA software must include key performance indicators calculation tool based on database data.
Example of Indicators:
 PV Inverter efficiency
 PV Inverter availability
 Plant Performance Ratio
 Plant Availability
 Tracking system availability
The complete list of key performance indicators shall be agreed during engineering phase.
The calculation of the Plant Performance Ratio shall be based on the meteorological stations data.
Real-Time Data
The SCADA shall offer real time communication openness in order to collect data from devices and to
connect a third-party SCADA server used by the Purchaser.
The SCADA shall support the following communication protocol:
 OPC DA
 Modbus over TCP/IP
 IEC 61850
 IEC 60870-5-101 and 104
Time synchronization
The SCADA shall use a GPS clock to synchronize all devices.
Following devices must be synchronized by the same clock:
 SCADA servers
 PLC in monitoring cabinet of converter’s area
 Plant Control System Meteorological stations
 Tracking system control unit
 PV Inverters
 CCTV system
 Firefighting, alarm and protection system
37.4.4 Network and remote communication

LAN Requirements
The Contractor shall, installs, test and commissions:
 Managed ethernet switches
 Ethernet networks
 Optical Fiber networks
Static IP addresses for SCADA hardware component are defined by the Contractors.
The network equipment used shall be capable of VLAN tagging and the Contractor shall discriminate the
network into multiple VLAN to ensure both the data safety and priority.
Ethernet networks
Ethernet cable must be at least of CAT6. Cables must be shielded. Length must not exceed 75 m.
Optical fiber networks
Mechanical Requirements:
 The Contractor shall bury the optical fiber cables in trenches protected by tube or can be directly
buried if shielded armored cable is used, pulling chamber shall be ideally located to allow the
installation of the fiber by blowing or pulling
 Coat in polyethylene, 100% waterproof, adapted for buried installation
 Contains at least 12 fibers
 Equipped with a traction reinforcement
 Protected against rodents by a non-metallic protection
Optical Requirements:
 Multimode fiber
 50/125 µm multimode fiber with a gradient factor
 At 1310 nm the attenuation must not exceed 1 dB/km
 The kind of cable should be in accordance with the ITU-T G.651, as all the relevant IEC
specifications
If the cable length between the Transformer Stations and the Plant Substation exceeds 1 km , Contractor
shall use single mode optical fiber.
 Single mode fiber shall be defined as:
 9/125 µm single mode fiber
 At 1550 nm the attenuation must not exceed 0.4 dB/km
The kind of cable should be in accordance with the ITU-T G.652, as all the relevant IEC specifications
For the cable installation the following points should be respected:
 Any manufacturer specification on the cable datasheet in relation to the implementation, such as
the minimal radius of curvature, the tensile strength, or the temperature condition, etc. should be
followed by the Contractor.
 Each installed cable should be marked in a visible way at both tips: « From X to Y».
 No splice is allowed out of the FO patch panels.
 FO patch panels are installed in monitoring cabinet in each Transformer Station area.
 Connectors are of type SC duplex or LC duplex.
Network topology
The Contractor shall install the optical fiber cables in conduits inside the trenches along with MV AC cables.
The cable network installation works shall be carried out on the base of a star arrangement from the Plant
Substation to the Transformer Station area. This star network topology is made of single mode optical fiber;
optical fiber loops shall connect every converter Inverter Transformer Station area. These loops are made of
multimode optical fiber.
In each network, optical fiber shall be spliced to create 3 loops:
 Monitoring loop (converter area PLC, inverter monitoring, meteorological stations).
 Inverter control loop.
 CCTV loop.
37.5 Integration of PV Plant Substation SCMS system with PV Plant DCS
The Contractor shall install all power supplies, communication cables, sitting and necessary accessories and
works for the installation of the PV Plant DCS.
The Contractor is responsible of the integration of the required signals coming from the PV Plant DCS and
exposed to the Remote End Offtaker Substation through Plant Substation.
The Contractor shall install the redundant communication gateways and data exchange servers in the PV
Plant DCS Room to allow communication in open protocols with PV Plant Substation SCMS.
The Contractor shall assist the both PV Plant DCS provider and PV Plant Substation SCMS OEM, during
integration of the signals in the system and during the commissioning.
38 Interface with Remote End Offtaker Substation

The Contractor shall design, supply, install, test & commission the SCMS at Remote End Offtaker
Substation and shall integrate it into the Plant Substation SCMS system through telecommunication panel
installed in the Plant Substation.
The Contractor shall perform all the integration works such as all the following data from outgoing feeders
to the REMOTE END OFFTAKER SUBSTATION shall be received/stored: active power (kW), reactive
power (kVAr), power factor, phase current voltages and Plant Substation 110 kV feeder switchgear status.
The interface between the SCMS system with the Remote End Offtaker Substation and all the subsystems
which constitute the DCS system, shall be installed by the Contractor through the telecom panel SDH or IP-
MPLS located at the Plant Substation. It’s the bidder’s sole responsibility to ensure the compatibility
between SDH and IP-MPLTS (if installed) at Offtaker Substation.
It shall be performed by means of dedicated Redundant Gateways and Redundant Ethernet switches on both
sides, telecom panel of the Remote End Offtaker Substation and telecom panel of the Plant Substation SDH
interconnected via duplicated fiber optic-based data communication links (A and B) or OPGW,
communicating to each other by means of suitable media converters or through MUX.
All FO Cable/OPGW links between Plant Substation and Remote End Offtaker Substation shall be installed
by the Contractor. All interlocks from Plant Substation and Offtaker Substation shall be hard wired or
through FO Cable/OPGW, depending upon the distances.
Contractor shall perform end-to-end testing between Remote End Offtaker Substation and Plant Substation
which shall be done in close coordination with the Purchaser (SEC), Project Company, Remote End Offtaker
Substation subcontractors and shall be witnessed by all parties.
The communication protocol shall be IEC 60870-5-101/104.
In general, the Contractor shall, without limitation, the following:
 Install the wiring for all the signals from Plant Substation to equipment in the Remote End
Offtaker Substation (for information required from PV Plant side).
 Install the wiring for all the information from field to Plant Substation (for information to be sent
to PV land side).
 The contractor shall install all the wiring works for all needed signals as per the list provided in
Design performed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall install, integrate with the rest of the Plant and test the following:
 The termination and end to end testing of UG FO/OPGW cable for connection from the Plant
Substation to the EI.
 FDP panel at the Plant Substation and Remote End Offtaker Substation.
 IEC 60870-5-104 channels meant for DCS purpose including appropriate media
converters/cabling up to MUX at Plant Substation side. Once the DCS side is ready, end to end
testing of signals as per the approved SCMS-DCS signal list shall be mutually done between the
Purchaser, the Company and the Contractor.
 Communication equipment for transfer of data (PDM, DCS, Metering, voice etc.) from the Plant
Substation.
 All the works required for integrating Plant Substation multiplexers, PABX as applicable into
the Remote End Offtaker Substation, including configuration and testing of SCMS DCS
communication from Plant Substation to Remote End Offtaker Substation.
 Configuration of respective interface for various services from Plant Substation to Remote End
Offtaker Substation as well as SCADA and telecom interfacing with the Purchaser equipment to
achieve the desired connectivity from Plant Substation shall be responsibility of the Contractor.
38.1 Interface with the Purchaser
Any interfacing with the SEC Substation and Grid Operator in terms of new supply, upgradation,
modification, design, installation, testing and commissioning, not explicitly mentioned herein, but also not
limited to the following: -
a) Metering,
b) Control & Protection,
c) SCADA and Telecommunication,
d) Addition and Extensions of Busbars
e) Any additional Requirement as per the “Technical Conditions” issued from SEC and Load
Despatch Center.
shall be completely executed by the Contractor, to the final Satisfaction and approval of SEC, without any
additional price implication.
38.1.1 Remote operation
The Contractor shall design, newly supply, install, test and commission the following equipments (not
explicitly mentioned herein) but not limited to the following, at the Remote End of the Offtaker Substation,
as per the Design approved by the SEC: -
 SCADA
 Control & Protection Panel
 Line Differential Protection
 Busbar Protection
 Repeater Relays
 Emergency Control Automatics (ECA)
 Telecom Panel
 AC & DC Auxiliaries System
38.1.2 Logical Interlock
The Contractor shall install the logical interlock which shall be implemented in the DCS/SCADA to
warranty the PV Plant safety as per the logical interlock architecture prepared by the Contractor and
approved by the Company.
39 Telecommunication Systems
39.1 General
This section deals with the telecommunication system and equipment concerned of the new 33/110kV PV
Plant Substation under the Contract.
The latest editions of international standards mentioned in relation to telecommunication equipment:

SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS equipment for Transport and Access, IP-PBX, OPGW, underground optic cables/PLCC
etc. (as applicable) and accessories are the minimum requirements.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary UGFO/PLCC cables & associated equipment matching the
final characteristics of the LILO OPGW/PLCC to be provided by the OHL requirements. In case is necessary
the Microwave connection shall be also provided.
This specification describes the functional and performance requirements of the system and covers only
those general aspects that are meant to ensure a minimum standard of quality and performance.
The Contractor shall include the provision of all communication equipment at the 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation for whatever telecommunication media is required. Contractor shall provide:
a. Design of communication equipment terminal ends as part of a total link.
b. Design, manufacture, delivery to site, installation, commissioning, testing and guarantee of items
of equipment as detailed for the specific substation.
c. Contractor shall coordinate all aspects of the work with the suppliers of the remote ends
Telecommunication link equipment to ensure that the complete installation operates correctly
and complies in every respect with the Telecommunication specifications/requirements.
The Contractor shall investigate and assess accordingly regarding the final Telecommunication media to be
used for the LILO towards the existing Offtaker Substation.
Also, the Contractor shall investigate and assess accordingly regarding the final Telecommunication media
to be used for the Telecommunication towards the interconnected 33 kV remote end substations.
The Contractor shall provide a complete and functioning telecommunication system ready for use, even if
equipment, services or quantities to be provided are not explicitly mentioned.
The new telecommunication system equipment will be subject to approval during the design stage.
Contractor shall provide all the necessary UGFO/PLCC cables matching the final characteristics of the LILO
OPGW/PLCC to be provided by the OHL requirements.
The Contractor shall investigate and assess accordingly regarding the final Telecommunication media
alternative to be used for the LILO towards the existing Offtaker Substation.
Also, the Contractor shall investigate and assess accordingly regarding the final Telecommunication media
alternative to be used for the Telecommunication towards the interconnected 33 kV remote end substations.
The scope of supply and services shall be based on state-of-the-art Optical Line Terminal Equipment for
Transport and Access, IP-PBX and underground fiber optic cables (UGFO)/FOC/PLCC and accessories,
including the provision of:
 Fiber optic based SDH/PDH equipment designed for digital transmission using single mode
optical fibers or PLCC based Telecommunication (as applicable)
 All the data, voice, and video facilities will be communicated up to NCC, or regional control
center and shall be covered by the new provided communication equipment.
 a state-of-the-art IP-PBX in a reasonable size/capacity, providing reasonable features and with
suitable telephone sets to be provided/installed at the related substations.
 simultaneous data transfer for a more than enough telecommunication channels over the fiber
optics/PLCC/Microwave communication network, each with ample bandwidth and quality
 all substations’ communication requirements, data transfers, voice communication, video, access
control, metering, SCADA etc.
 enough bandwidth, suitable ports, SFPs and interfaces (at least providing approx. 50% reserve)
 relevant data and cyber security
 proper communication of the concerned substations over the fiber optics/PLCC/Microwave
communication network with the National Control Center as well as with the remote
Regional/Area Control Centers for Iraq TSO/DSO, Cyber Security Control Center as well as
Offtaker SCMS (if needed)
 NCC/RCC as well as with the telecommunication network management system TNMS
All OPGW and UGFO/FOC shall incorporate the required number of single mode fibers of identical type
and characteristics (according to ITU-T G.655). No joints shall be allowed in any fiber in any drum length.
All new fiber optic links shall always and in any case be installed from ODF to ODF, ready for use.
In any case and at any place, always all available optical fibers that are hosted in an OPGW or UGFO/FOC
shall be spliced, measured, tested and ODF-mounted completely and properly ready for use, even if they are
not needed in the moment. No blind fibers will be accepted.
For any fiber, its attenuation always shall be measured along its course professionally and in both directions
at the ODFs and clearly to be documented together with its associated (CD). Deviations in the course of
curve to the normal shall be clearly/plausibly commented.
For optical connections from the joint box at the towers to the substation’s building respectively to the ODF
suitable underground FOCs shall be used. In general, UGFOs shall always be laid in suitable ducts that are
suit DT able for the concerning particular environmental conditions.
All optical fibers of OPGW, UGFO/FOC, patch cords and pig tails shall be of the same type and shall have
identical fiber optical characteristics like fibers of OPGWs and underground FOCs installed in this project.
Before installation on site, all UGFOs, fiber optic patch cords and pigtails shall be individually tailored so
that there are no overlengths. They shall be documented and installed professionally and with respect to their
permissible minimum bending radius.
All UGFOs, patch cords, pigtails and ODF ports shall be labelled suitable (if applicable, as per Employer’s
standards), professionally and consistently at both ends. All patch cords, pigtails or UGFOs/FOC fibers shall
be terminated with one consistent plug/connector type as described.
As far as applicable, as per Employer’s standards, the Contractor shall investigate the type of optical
connector (e.g., SC, LC, E2000, …) that is predominantly installed/used at Employer’s sites and shall as far
as possible exclusively use this type of optical connector for the installations.
In telecommunication rooms ODFs can either be integrated as an all-in-one solution into the
equipment’s/routers’/switches’ racks or as a separated solution in dedicated ODF cabinets. ODFs shall be
capable to host all single mode fibers of the concerned FOC.
The ODFs shall be protected against dust and humidity by IP64 or better.
In general, ODFs shall be planned/installed in a way so that one ODF is dedicated for one (1) optical
line/cable that is related towards one (1) adjacent site/substation.
The fiber optic/OPGW/PLCC network shall be extended to interconnect the Offtaker Substations.
Optical line terminal equipment for SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS
New state-of-the-art Optical Line Terminal Equipment for SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS shall be provided and
installed at the new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation and shall be integrated as a new SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS
node into the existing MoE SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS network.
Fiber Optic Cables
Two different types of FOCs shall be provided.

 Six (6) FOCs incorporating 36 single-mode fibers each.
Both types of FOCs shall comply with IEC 60793 and IEC 60794 standards and with ITU-T G.655.
OPGW
With the new LILO/110 kV double circuit OHTL 33/110kV PV Plant Substation - Offtaker Substation– TL
will provide (2) OPGW with 36 optical fibers.
The new 33 kV connection from the new PV Plant DCS to new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation will provide
two (2) FO/UGFO with 36 optical fibers each to be connected to the new 33/110kV PV Plant Substation at
the interfacing gateway/ SDH node.
UGFO/FOC
Two UGFO cables with 36 optical fibers shall be provided and installed between the Gantry of the new
LILO from the 110 kV double circuit overhead transmission line 33/110kV PV Plant Substation - Offtaker
Substation and the telecommunications room in the substation control building.
The 36 optical fibers of the OPGW shall be spliced to the 36 optical fibers of the UGFO cable providing the
connection between the new SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS node at 33/110kV PV Plant Substation and the
SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS node at the Offtaker Substation.
Two UGFO cables with 36 optical fibers shall be provided and installed between the Gantry of the new
LILO from the 132 kV double circuit overhead transmission line 33/110kV PV Plant Substation –Maysan
Substation and the telecommunications room in the substation control building.
The 36 optical fibers of the OPGW shall be spliced to the 36 optical fibers of the UGFO cable providing the
connection between the new SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS node at 33/110kV PV Plant Substation and the
SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS node at the Offtaker Substation.
Two (2) UGFO/FOC cables with 36 optical fibers each shall be provided and installed between the PV Plant-
Substation Gateway& SDH node/other related Telecom interfaces and the telecommunications room in the
substation control building.
The related 36 optical fibers shall be spliced to the 36 optical fibers of one dedicated UGFO/FOC cable
providing the connection between the new Gateway/&SDH node at the new Amarah PV Plant DCS/SCADA
and the new Gateway/new SDH Node at the New 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
Patch cords
A sufficient number of patch cords shall be provided to establish the connections between
 the optical fibers terminated in the ODFs and the SFP ports of the SDH& gateways equipment
 the optical fibers terminated in different ODFs.
Fiber Optic Cables Accessories
Optical distribution frame

Optical distribution frames (ODF) shall be provided and installed in the telecommunication room of the
substation:
 Two (2) ODFs with 36 connectors/ports for fiber optic cables to terminate the 36 optical fibers of the
UGFO cable running to the Gantry of the LILO 110 kV double circuit overhead transmission line
Offtaker Substation-new PV Plant 33/110kV Substation
Connectors and plugs
A sufficient number of appropriate state-of-art optical plug/connector type shall be provided for new
installations in the Project.
Power Line Communication Carrier (PLCC)
PLCC shall be installed on all three 110 kV phases.
For PLCC cables connectivity, similar approach shall be followed by the Contractor for PLCC like for the
new UGFO/FOC, if the final provided solution on 110 kV LILO and/or other 33 kV interconnected lines is
PLCC.
Telephony
A new state-of-the-art IP-PBX and appropriate telephone sets shall be installed, ready for use.
39.2 Power Line Carrier Equipment
The Power Line Carrier Equipment (Line Traps, Line Coupling capacitors, PLCC Terminal Equipment,
PLCC Transmission Equipment, Line Matching Units, Converter/MUX Units, coaxial cable, Integrated Tele
protection Devices, Integrated FSK Modem, Universal AF Interface Modem Coupling Filters etc.) is
specified under this Technical Specifications and MoE Specifications, which are integral part of this
document.
39.3 Optical Fiber based PDH/SDH/IP-MPLS Equipment
The new communication equipment shall be integrated into the existing fiber optic communication network
consisting in all respects (hardware wise/software wise/management wise) to be an integral part of overall
network and any hardware/software required at intermediate / end stations shall be provided & implemented
by the Contractor.
The related equipment shall be capable of interfacing to the existing Telecommunication Network
Management System (TNMS) to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the overall fiber optic
communication network.
For all services, applications and all types of communications required, or to be provided, the Contractor
shall provide a suitable state-of-the-art turnkey solution, to be integrated entirely and properly into the
existing overall telecommunication systems including their Telecommunication Network Management
System, ready for use. Major characteristics of the solution to be provided shall comprise but not be limited
to:
 low latency
 highest availability and reliability
 1 + 1 hardware redundancy
 traffic protection concepts
 data security, IT-security and safety according to current standards
 sustainability
 convertibility and technical flexibility
 expandability, upgradeability
 interoperability and compatibility with existing systems, incl. TNMS
 state-of-the-art transmission technology and features.
The PDH/SDH Aggregate Optical Fiber Equipment and Fiber Optic Transmission System is specified in
Section II c.3 Technical Data Sheets and in the Section II c.4 Annexures/ c.4_MoE Specifications and this
Tender Document Specification, which is integral part of this specification.
39.4 IP-Privat Branch Exchange (IP-PBX)
State-of-the-art IP-Privat Branch Exchanges shall be provided and installed in the communication network.
The IP-PBX shall be preferably a self-hosted on-premises solution using dedicated HW and SW or
alternatively a Software-based PBX running on a computer.
System requirements
The IP-PBX shall support:

 CTI-Applications (Computer Telephony Integration) and provide.
 Telephony Application Programming Interface TAPI and drivers for Email and CMR system
integration.
The IP-PBX shall be compliant to the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) according to RFC 3261 and shall
provide VoIP channels for intern and external telephone communications.
Voice over IP (VoIP) security by Session Initiation Protocol Security (SIPS) shall be supported with
encrypted signaling with TLS/SSL and Secure Realtime Transport Protocol (SRTP).
SIP-Trunking and SIP-DDI (Direct Dial In) shall be supported by the IP-PBX.
The IP-PBX shall support the integration/migration to Unified Messaging and Unified Communications. The
IP-PBX shall support multiple site operation via Virtual Private Network (VPN).
A soft migration from analogue to IP-Telephony shall be supported by the IP-PBX.
VoIP terminal equipment
The IP-PBX shall support the use of:

 IP phones
 DECT phones
 Conference phones
 Softphones
 Smartphones via SIP-Client
 analogue devices via Gateway.
39.5 Fiber Optical Cables
The fibers of optical ground wires (OPGW) and underground fiber optic (UGFO) cables need to have the
same physical and optical transmission properties. Hence, they need to be of the same fiber type.
In order to limit necessary spare parts, all connections preferably shall be realized by the same OPGW and
UGFO cable types. Two types of UGFOs incorporating 36 single-mode fibers (matching the respective
number of single-mode fibers from OPGWs), which shall comply with IEC 60793 and IEC 60794 standards
and with ITU-T G.655 shall be provided.
In general, the OPGW, the UGFO cables, the splice boxes and the complete optical distribution frame (ODF)
with all components like pigtails, connectors etc. need to be compatible to each other.
Characteristics and Performance
Optical fibers to be provided and installed in the Project shall at least comply with following fiber
characteristics:
Table 2: Characteristics of optical fibers
Characteristics Values/limits
Complying standard ITU-T G.655
1550 nm (wavelength 1460-1625 nm, optimized for
Transmission wavelength
1530-1565 nm)
Cut-off wavelength < 1450 nm
Mode field diameter 8.8 µm @ 1550 nm, tolerances of ± 0.8 µm
Optical cladding diameter 125 µm ± 0.8 µm
Concentricity error ≤ 0.6µm
Cladding non-circularity ≤ 0.7%
Optical attenuation for any fiber in every drum, to ≤ 0.21 dB/km @ 1625 nm,
be measured from both ends for wavelengths ≤ 0.20 dB/km @ 1550 nm
≤ 0.15 dB per fiber @ 1550 nm, to be measured
Optical attenuation @ mechanical splice
from both ends
≤ 0.04 dB per fiber @ 1550 nm, to be measured
Optical attenuation @ fusion splice
from both ends
Optical attenuation per connector pair ≤ 0.5 dB @ 1550 nm
Insertion loss @ connector ≤ 0.1 dB per fiber @ 1550 nm
≤ 0.15 dB per fiber @ 1550 nm, measured and
Optical attenuation @ joint calculated on the fully installed joint from both
ends
1460-1565 nm: ≤ 2.6-6.0 ps/(km x nm), tolerance of
Chromatic dispersion (CD)
1ps
1565-1625 nm: ≤ 4.0-8.9 ps/(km x nm), tolerance of
Chromatic dispersion (CD)
1ps
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) ≤ 0.1 ps/√km
Operational temperature range -60 °C to +85 °C
Life span ≥ 30 years
No joints shall be allowed in any fiber in any drum length.
The Contractor shall supply a graph of attenuation versus wavelength over the range of 1460-1625 nm
Discontinuities will only be acceptable if:
-Optical time domain reflectometry (OTDR) traces from both ends of the cable at 1550 nm wavelength
shows a difference of less than 0.04 dB/km for every fiber in every drum.
The Contractor shall state the refractive index of the optical fibers @ λ = 1460 nm, @ λ = 1625 nm and @ λ
= 1550 nm.
The Contractor shall present details about dispersion measurements at the installed fibers, at least about
chromatic dispersion (CD).
CD measurement method shall be according to ITU-T G.650.1 (3.1), (4.5), the calibration of the test
instrument shall be according to IEC 61744.
Details about polarization mode dispersion (PMD) for each deployed fiber are desired but at least for each
deployed fiber PMD shall be as good as 0.1 ps/√km (respectively ≤ 80 ps @ STM-4 and ≤ 120 ps @ STM-1)
or better.
New OPGWs shall be of the same type as the existing OPGWs, and their electrical and mechanical
characteristics shall be better than required for the given electrical and mechanical circumstances. The
OPGW construction shall be suitable for incorporation of a number of 36 optical fibers as per ITU-T
Recommendations G.655 and shall be equivalent to aluminum clad steel (ACS) conductor with a minimum
cross-section of 95 mm2.
Underground Fiber Optic Cables
To mitigate the risk of high induced voltages or earth potential rise, the fiber optic cables (FOC) shall be free
of any metallic components.
The fiber optic cable shall be circular in cross section and free from pinholes, joints, and other defects.
The FOC shall be adequately designed and manufactured not to affect the physical or optical properties of
the optical fibers.
The optical fibers shall be contained within color coded loose tubes, arranged in a circular configuration and
filled with a water-blocking compound to prevent water penetration. The underground fiber optic cables
(UGFO) shall have Rodent Protection.
The individual optical fibers shall be uniquely identifiable through a color-coding scheme in accordance with
ITA/EIA-598-C.
In case duplicate colors are to be used, the fibers shall be uniquely identifiable through black tracers.
The fiber optic cables with fiber count up to 36 fibers shall include sufficient peripheral strength members to
withstand a tensile load of 2100 N during pulling and 1200 N in operation (permanent), in accordance with
IEC 60794-1 E1 without deteriorating the performance of the optical fibers.
Similarly, for cables with more than 48 fibers the peripheral strength members shall withstand a tensile load
of 3000 N during pulling and 1700 N in operation (permanent).
The glass yarn layer will be designed, manufactured and tested to cope with the required strength efforts and
simultaneously to efficiently protect the cables against rodents.
The fiber optic cables shall be designed, manufactured and installed to operate with temperatures with the
range: -20°C to +70°C.
Figure 3 shows an example for the required fiber optic cable cross-section for fiber counts up to 36 fibers (6
active tubes each with 12 fibers):
Figure 3: Fiber optic cable cross-section
For higher fiber count additional loose tubes will be required.
The outer sheath of the fiber optic cables shall be marked, including:
 Employer name
 cable type/manufacturer
 metric marking.
Fiber optic cable test
The Contractor shall provide evidence - through suitable type tests -that the proposed cable complies with
the cable test requirements depicted below.
Table 3: Fiber Optic Test
Test Test Method Required values
IEC 60794-1-2 E1.
Maximum fiber strain < 0.33 %.
For cables up to 36 fibers: 2100 N.
Tensile strength No attenuation change @ 1550 nm (<
For cables from 36 to 144 fibers:
0.05 dB)
3000 N.; Length > 50 m
IEC-60794-1-2-F1
Sample length≥ 500 m
Temperature Attenuation change, @1550 nm
 Temperature step:
cycling ≤0.05 dB/km
TA=-20°C, TB=+70 °C
 6 cycles, min 8 hours/step
IEC-60794-1-2-E3
 Load: 1200 N  No damage in cable element
Crush  Length of plate: 100 mm  No attenuation change
 Time: 15 minutes - Test @ 1550 nm (< 0.05 dB)
point: 3 points
IEC-60794-1-2-E4
 Impact energy: 5J with R =
10mm  No attenuation change
Impact  Impact point: 3 points @ 1550 nm (< 0.05 dB)
 Impact distance: 500 mm  No damage in cable element
 Impact times: 1 time for each
point
IEC 60332-1
A parameter control:
Propagation of flame for  Ignition temp and time
a cable isolated  Burning time after stopping
vertically the ignition
 Begin of the propagation of
the flame
Emission of corrosive IEC 60754-1  The quantity of gas ≤0.5%
and toxic gases IEC 60754-2  Smoke acid pH > 4.2
IEC 61034-1 Min. 50%
Smoke density
IEC 61034-2 No of samples: 4
Underground optical fiber characteristics
The optical fibers shall comply with the minimum requirements set out in the table below.
Table 4: Underground Fiber Optic Cables
Fiber Characteristics Required Values
Fiber Type ITU-T G.655
Max. Attenuation at:
1625 nm 0.21 dB/km
1550 nm 0.20 dB/km
Chromatic dispersion
Max. Chromatic dispersion at 1530-1565 nm ≤ 2.6-6.0 ps/nm.km
Max. Chromatic dispersion at 1565-1625 nm ≤ 4-8.9 ps/nm.km
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD):
Max. individual fiber 0.1 ps/km
Cable Cut-off wavelength (λcc) ≤ 1450 nm
Mode field diameter, IEC 60793-1-C9A 8.8 ± 0.8 µm @1550 nm
Optical cladding diameter, IEC 60793-1-A2 125 ± 0.8 µm
Cladding non-circularity, IEC 69793-1-A2 ≤ 0.7%
Point discontinuity @1550 nm in the OTDR
≤ 0.05 dB
trace
Bending test, additional loss, 100 turns on
0.05 dB @ 1550 nm
60mm mandrel
Bending test, additional loss, 1 turn on 32mm
0.5 dB @ 1550 nm
mandrel
Proof test ≥100 kpsi
Fiber Patch Cords

Fiber equipment cables and fiber cross connecting cables shall be single fiber installation cables consisting
of one tightly secondary coated fiber (tight buffer), strength element and flame retardant LSZH-sheath in
accordance with 60332-1.
The maximum outer diameter of the cable shall be 3.0 mm and the nominal thickness of the sheath shall be
not less than 1.4 mm.
The mean value of the thickness shall be not less than 1.4 mm and any individual value shall be not less than
1.0 mm.
The cables shall withstand following installation properties:

 tensile strength 200 N
 minimum allowed bending radius = 40 mm.
The fibers shall meet the geometrical, optical and transmission requirements of the ITU-T Recommendation
G.655.
The fibers shall have tight secondary coating (tight buffer).
Fiber optical cables accessories
Optical distribution frame
The optical distribution frames (ODF) with FC/PC/as applicable connectors for Fiber Patch Cords shall have
the following characteristics:
 The fiber optic cable gland shall accept metal free optical cable with min 36 and max 72 single mode
fibers and loose buffered construction.
 Two types of optical distribution frames (patch-panels) shall be provided:
1. to accept 36 single mode fibers to be spliced with pigtails with E2000/FC/PC/as
applicable connectors.
2. to accept 72 single mode fibers to be spliced with pigtails with E2000/FC/PC/as
applicable connectors.
 Maximum optical attenuation shall be 0.10 dB per splice.
 The housing of the box shall be standing type, tamper-proof sealed and of rugged construction.
 the appropriate optical connectors and plugs.
Connectors and plugs
The appropriate state-of-art optical plug/connector type shall be provided for new installations in the
Project.
The Contractor shall also respect and consider appropriate connectors& plugs for the concerned new
components and installations (e. g. ODF, ports etc.), as feasible. Compatibility with the existing connectors
and plugs shall be ensured.
39.6 MoE/Offtaker’s Telecommunication Systems
General
The Employer operates a fiber optic based SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS, PLCC communication and microwave radio
Telecommunication network in TSO/DSO MoE Iraq. The related Telecommunication network is used to for
data (SCADA, metering, protection, CCTV etc.) and voice communication.
The basis of this telecommunication system is an SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS network as well as PLCC network.
The existing SDH network mainly operates on PDH/SDH Synchronous Transfer Modules STM-1/STM-4
(1+1 MSP).
The new fiber optic network shall be based on Hybrid technology which has the functionality of both
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) as well as PDH technology. The network shall consist of overhead
fiber optic links with a minimum bit rate for SDH shall be STM-1 (155 Mbps) / (STM-4 (622 Mbps).
The Contractor can propose a system based on higher bit rate systems and SFPs, if required, so as to meet
the link budget requirements or any other specification requirement.
The Contractor can propose equipments which can be accommodated in a single sub – rack or a multiple sub
– racks but the total nos. of MSP protected direction (1+1) for SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS must be fulfilled. The
fiber optic-based communication equipment shall have 4 MSP protected direction for SDH at STM-1/STM –
4 level.
If the contractor proposes multiple sub – rack, then the interconnection between such sub – racks in any bit rate
(not less than above mentioned level) will not be considered as separate MSP protected directions.
Furthermore, the PLCC/fiber optic-based communication network is used for protection communication, and
voice and video communication.
Telecommunication network
The existing SDH network shall be extended with new Telecommunication equipment to insert the new PV
Plant 132/33 kV Substation.
The fiber optic/OPGW/PLCC network shall be extended to interconnect the Offtaker Substations.
Compatibility and interoperability shall be ensured by the Contractor with the existing equipment at the
neighbor interconnected Substations& PV Power Plant and Control Centers at interfaces.
The optical fibers OPGW/PLCC are provided by the Project OHL running between the 33/110kV PV Plant
Substation LILO towards existing MoE Grid Network existing OHL (existing Stations Offtaker Substation
and Offtaker Substation).
New redundant UGFO cables containing 2x36 optical fibers shall be provided between the new 33/110kV
PV Plant Substation and the new PV Plant. The UGFO cable shall be terminated in new ODFs installed in
the telecommunication rooms in both locations (Substation and PV Plant).
New PLCC/UGFO cables containing 36 optical fibers/PLCC Cables shall be provided for the Offtaker
Substations.
The 36 optical fibers of the UGFO cables shall be spliced with the optical fibers of the OPGW cables in the
corresponding Junction Boxes at the Gantries and shall be terminated (spliced with the pigtails) in new
ODFs installed in the telecommunication rooms.
The Substations with access to optical fibers and provided with SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS/PLCC equipment as
described above shall be connected at the existing Offtaker 33/110kV PV Plant Substation and existing
Offtaker Substation as well as the 33 kV remote end substations via SDH/ PLCC/ Other links and from there
to the NCC/NRCC/DCC/Cyber Security Control Center/Offtaker SCMS.
Timing, Synchronizing and clock system
Timing and synchronization shall conform with ITU-T G.783, G.811, G.812, and G.813. Timing references,
number of timing references available, switching time to a different timing reference, type and level of
clocks shall be stated. Formation of timing loops shall be avoided.
The equipment shall automatically switch over to another clock source if the reference timing is lost and
shall automatically revert upon restoration.
The accuracy of the internal clock as well as of the details of the clock distribution shall be stated.
IT security requirements
The new telecommunication equipment and its installation shall be protected by currently relevant IT
security standards like IEC 27011, IEC 27019, IEC 62351, and NERC CIP in their latest release.
The Contractor shall perform a Project related IT Risk assessment workshop together with the Client in order
to identify all risks and to define the required mitigation measures for state-of-the-art protection.
Electromagnetic compatibility and safety regulations
All Telecommunication equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject
to rises in earth potential at times of system faults. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to
the equipment.
The system shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provision for the safety shut-off of the optical
source to prevent exposure to laser light during installation, maintenance and repair work.
The Telecommunication equipment shall be suitable for operation in substations with harsh environment
with high electromagnetic interference, be highly reliable and provide secure communications for real time
signals.
It shall comply with the latest ITU-T recommendations as well as with the following standards:
 Electromagnetic compatibility and insulation shall comply with requirements for emission and
immunity EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2, EN50022 class A and IEC 61000.
 Electrical safety shall comply with the safety requirements according to IEC 60950.
Requirements for software licenses for the telecommunication systems
All the required software licenses for operation, configuration and management of all devices and systems of
the telecommunication systems shall be supplied.
Software licenses shall be provided:
 for new Substation Telecom SDH/PDH/IP-MPLS/PLCC equipment and for extension of existing
SDH multiplexer in the remote ends telecommunication system, if required for additional cards
 software for operation, configuration, management etc. of switches of the telecommunication
systems for data communication (SCADA, SCMS, metering, etc.) and voice communication
 software extension for the central PABX systems, if required
 software extension for the Telecommunication Network Management Systems, if required
 and other required operation, configuration, management and supporting software for systems
required.
The following shall be fulfilled:

 The licenses shall be timely unlimited throughout the lifetime of the device or system.
 failure rectifications and upgrades shall be implemented by the Contractor until the end of the
warranty period within the contracted version.
 Safety relevant failures rectification patches shall be provided until the end of the lifetime of the
device or system.
39.7 Telecommunication Network Management System
The new communication equipment shall be capable to be monitored and managed by the existing
Telecommunication Network Management System (TNMS) at MoE/Offtaker SCADA/EMS CC
Telecommunication Network Management System to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the overall
fiber optic transmission system.
As already mentioned, the scope shall include the implementation and integration of the new
telecommunication equipment to the existing TNMS as well as its adaption, if required (including all
required services, integration, adaptations, configurations, upgrades (if required), hardware equipment,
software, customer service).
After the integration one TNMS shall be capable of managing the entire telecommunication network and
shall support all features provided by the new telecommunication equipment.
39.8 Telephony
In the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation new state-of-the-art and appropriate telephone sets shall be installed,
ready for use.
The new telephone sets shall be fully compatible and interoperable with the existing IP PABX in the NCC.
System languages of telephone sets shall be English.
Documentations of telephone sets shall be provided in English.
39.9 Revision Levels and Modifications
All equipment, firmware and software delivered as part of the communications network shall be at the most
current revision level. All modifications and changes necessary to meet this requirement shall be completed
prior to the start of the factory tests.
All field modifications required to update the hardware, firmware and software to a later revision level
occurring after the above-specified testing, shall be disclosed, fully documented and presented to the
Employer for his consideration. The intent is to provide the Employer with documentation and opportunity
to consider negotiating their implementation.
All field modifications of the hardware, firmware and software that are required to meet installation and/or
performance specifications, shall be fully documented as part of the deliverables, both as separate field
modifications records and as corrected equipment/configuration documentation.
39.10 Expandability
The equipment shall include provision for expansion such that the expansion is accomplished by the addition
of plug-in modules, and cables.
Equipment supplied shall be sized (though not necessarily equipped) to support expansion to full capacity
according to the specified aggregate transmission rates. The equipment units provisioned for unequipped sub-
unit expansions shall be terminated at appropriate patching facilities or termination blocks.
Power supplies and remote monitoring shall be sized for maximum equipment capacity.
39.11 Telecommunication Power Supply Equipment
The power supply system shall consist of a storage battery and a charging rectifier system. The system shall
serve the power supply requirements of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation’s telecommunication equipment
and shall have a control & monitoring unit, main switchgear and a DC distribution panel.
The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in
performance for a supply voltage variation. The power supply input to individual items of equipment shall be
individually fused.
The 48 V DC system shall meet the power requirements of the connected telecommunication equipment at
each site with 50% spare capacity.
The positive pole of the 48 V DC power supply system shall be earthed. All terminal strips shall be easily
accessible for maintenance or rewiring.
The terminals for high voltage wiring shall be protected by a non-metallic cover and carry a conspicuously
marked warning. Screw-type terminals of an approved type shall be permitted.
Fire resistant insulation for all wiring shall be utilized.
Overvoltage protection must be very strong.
Performance requirements
The equipment shall also comply with the following requirements:

 availability
 >99.9999% for 48 V DC supply
 >99.999 for UPS
 Electromagnetic compatibility and insulation shall comply with requirements for emission and
immunity (EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2).
 Electrical safety shall comply with the safety requirements according to IEC 60950.
 Seismic conditions- All telecommunication power supply equipment shall be designed to resist
earthquake loadings resulting from accelerations specified in Part I -General Technical
Requirements.
 ambient conditions for normal operation:
 temperature range: – 0°C to 50°C
 relative humidity: – 5% to 95%.
39.12 Equipment Life Span
All equipment supplied shall have a minimum expected life of 25 years from the date of final acceptance, if
not specified otherwise. Extended liability period should be for a period of 60 months, starting from the date
at which the system has been taken over or for a period of 66 months after the last delivery by the factory
supported by performance guarantee.
The Contractor shall certify that spare parts will be made available for 10 years and shall notify the
Employer, in writing, whenever equipment supplied under this Contract, including equipment purchased
from subcontractors, will no longer be supported with either spare parts or repair services.
Notice shall be given half a year in advance of the end of production of any subassemblies (such as printed-
circuit boards, modular power supplies, custom integrated circuits, etc.) to permit the Employer to purchase
additional spares.
Additionally, the Contractor shall agree to make available at no extra cost to the Employer the pictorial
diagrams, manufacturing drawings and rights to manufacture those subassemblies declared by the Contractor
as no longer supported.
For each subassembly, the specific parts supplied shall be identified and referenced in supplied
documentation.
39.13 Cubicles/Cabinets
The general design of telecommunication cubicles shall be subject to approval, but they shall in general be of
fabricated steel construction provided with shelves on which mounting plates can be accommodated. Cubicles
shall be free standing and shall permit anchoring to the floor.
The following dimensions shall not be exceeded:

 width: 800 mm
 height: 2200 mm
 depth: 800 mm.
Hinged doors shall be provided and arranged to open 180°so as not restrict access to the apparatus contained
within the cubicle. Hinged doors shall be of the lift-off type unless there is wiring on the door. They shall be
secured with integral handles and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket of rubber or other approved
material to prevent the ingress of dust.
Provision shall be made for locking, with two keys provided for each lock. Cubicles and doors shall be
structurally sound and not liable to distortion. The door of the cabinet shall have a see-through window as an
option finally defined during design phase.
Each item of equipment in a group (i.e., a cubicle in a suite of cubicles) shall be individually fused and shall
provide an alarm indication on loss of supply. Power supply bus bars in cubicles shall be carefully routed
and each bus bar shall be shrouded. It shall not be possible to inadvertently short bus bars either between
themselves or to earth.
It shall be possible to remove/replace cards without damage and without interfering with the operation of the
rest of the equipment or system.
If necessary, consideration shall be given to switching off the supplies locally to a card to prevent
inadvertent interference to the equipment or system when removing/replacing a card.
The environmental requirements of the specification shall be considered when considering ventilation
arrangements. Heat dissipation of cubicle mounted equipment shall be kept as low as possible. For
equipment, which will be supplied to this specification, the average dissipation per cubicle shall be stated.
Natural cooling is preferred.
The approval of the Employer must be obtained in all cases where it is intended to incorporate forced
cooling. Where the use of forced cooling has been approved, means shall be provided for indicating and
alarming any significant reduction in air flow, and the equipment shall be so protected that no damage occurs
due to failure of the forced cooling. Air blown through equipment for cooling purposes shall first be passed
through an efficient dust filter. Multi-stage filters, arranged to permit individual filters to be removed for
cleaning, are preferred.
The cubicles and all alarm lamps shall be clearly labelled. All modules shall be identified as to their shelf
location, and it shall be preferable to use coded key slots in the edge connectors in order that modules cannot
be plugged into the wrong position.
At least 1 earthling strap shall be available in each rack, bond all the different parts of cabinet together.
40 Power Plant Controller (PPC)

The Contractor shall install the PPC, and all infrastructure works needed to make sure the PCD is
responsible to control the PV Inverters, Transformer Station and specifically to ensure the Plant’s electrical
performance are compliant with the Grid Code. The Contractor shall install one PPC.
The Contractor shall install the PPC at the Plant Substation and shall integrate it into the DCS system for
monitoring and control of the PV Inverters and Transformer Station, through the Plant Substation telecom
panel system (SDH/IP-MPLS).
PPC needs to be connected with dedicated 110kV CT and VT core from Plant Substation.
The Contractor shall perform all the installation works needed to ma e sure that each Transformer Station
shall have its local communication box to control and collect all data from PV Inverters and Transformer
Stations, which ones shall be integrated into its respective PPC.
The Contractor shall install in cabinet the following beside the PPC:
 PLC/IPC for data acquisition, control loop processing, setpoint calculation and actuating,
 Grid value metering,
 Ethernet/PLCC communication with Transformer Stations
 All necessary hardware for power supply, cable connection, hardware and people protection
against electrical injuries, over-voltage protection, terminal block, heating and cooling, optical
fiber to ethernet conversion ...,
 Metal or plastic enclosure IP 54.
The Contractor shall perform all the installation and integration works needed to the extent that the PPC are
Performing the various control modes of the PV Plant at the Delivery Point by actuating the following
equipment’s:
 Main Meters
 Plant real power curtailment.
 Plant real power ramp rate.
 Grid over frequency droop control.
 Plant power factor regulation.
 Plant voltage regulation.
 Line drop compensation for remote voltage or power factor control.
 Controlled plant starts up and shut down.
 Segmented curtailment control.
 VAR Bank Capacitor control
The Contractor shall perform all the installation and integration works needed for the EI interfaces listed
below:
 Interface to PT/CT measurement at Delivery Point
 Mode selection/set point management.
 Interface to Purchaser
 Discrete analog and digital hardwired I/O to substation devices.
 Discrete Internet Access (screens, HMI, etc.)
The Contractor shall connect all the CTs, VTs and associated cabling to the PPC cabinet. The Contractor
shall install, test and commission a dedicated optical fiber loop between PPC and PV Inverters and
Transformer Stations.
40.1 Power Quality Monitoring (PQM)

Power Quality Monitoring shall be design, supply, install, test and commission as per Project Company SLD
and Company’s Approved Vendor Lists.
PQM needs to be connected with dedicated 110kV CT and VT core from Plant Substation.
41 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)
41.1 PV Plant
The Contractor shall install a Plant CCTV system shall be compliant with local regulations and standards
and as a minimum comply with the following requirements:
Cameras for Works progress and promotional activities
The Company requires provision for temporary ten (10) CCTV camera overseeing the whole Site during
construction. The shooting shall start as soon as the fence completed on Site and shall be stopped at Phase
One Operation Date. The Cameras shall have remote control and web viewing to authorized persons. The
Company also requires a high-quality monthly video submission, lasting approximately 5 minutes, of all
major activities on Site including, but not limited to, Site establishment, loading and unloading at dock, road
transport to site, unloading and storage at site and all construction activities progressed on a month-by-month
basis. Additionally, it is also required to have a footage of the construction in time-lapse format as well as
normal images of the construction stages. The cameras shall take one picture every 30 minutes for each
camera. The Cameras must have Ingress Protection (IP) 65 rating. Regular routine and preventive
maintenance of its equipment is to be provided for trouble free performance throughout the duration of the
construction activities.
Cameras
Cameras and cameras enclosure shall be suitable for outdoor installation. The cameras shall be infrared IP
cameras. They shall provide a minimum of two independent video streams, each one can be set
independently in term of resolution and cameras shall record in 30 or 60 frame per second (FPS), by
providing even smoother motion.
They shall have an embedded web interface for settings and video view. The cameras can be set with motion
detection. The resolution shall be at least 640 x 480. The codec is either H.264 or MPEG-4 in order to
minimize network traffic (H.264 preferred). They shall have infrared illuminators in order to have the ability
to record when lights are turned off.
Cameras shall be PTZ with preset position defined in accordance with the Company. PTZ can be controlled
remotely either from the camera web interface or from the NVR web interface.
Cameras have zoom capability which allows long range view of the PV arrays. The cameras shall have the
ability to run video patrol in automatic mode. Any mast or support for camera shall be arranged to minimize
shading on closest PV modules.
The cameras shall be installed around the PV Plant along with the surveillance of access gates to the Site.
The final camera’s locations shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by Company.
The Contractor shall connect the signal from the individual cameras to NVR. The Contractor shall install the
NVR in the Plant Substation SCADA room.
NVR
The Contractor shall install the NVR in a 19” rack in the PV DCS room. Any storage should be either a flash
card or a solid-state disk with redundancy (raid system).
The Contractor shall perform all the installation works needed to make sure that the NVR can be remotely
monitored and operated via a web interface or similar and be able to record from all PV arrays’ cameras
simultaneously with at least 24 frames per second.
The data from the installed cameras should be available at least three days (72 hours) before being
overwritten. The Contractor shall install and integrate the NRV with UPS 2 hours duration backup system.
The NVR shall be able to:
 Search function in the recorded videos.
 Video copy and export in one of the common formats, .avi or .wmv.
 Access from the SCADA network to both video feeds and NVR configuration
41.2 Plant Substation
The Contractor shall install, test and commission the Plant Substation CCTV system in accordance with the
local regulation and standards and as a minimum comply with the following requirements:
Cameras
Cameras and cameras enclosure shall be designed for outdoor installation. The cameras shall be infrared IP
cameras. They shall provide a minimum of two independent video streams; each one can be set
independently in term of resolution and fps. They shall have an embedded web interface for settings and
video view. The cameras can be set with motion detection. The resolution shall be at least 640 x 480. The
codec is either H.264 or MPEG-4 in order to minimize network traffic (H.264 preferred). They should have
infrared illuminators in order to have the ability to record when lights are turned off.
Cameras shall be PTZ with preset position defined in accordance with this Contract. PTZ can be controlled
remotely either from the camera web interface or from the NVR web interface.
Cameras have zoom capability which allows long range view of the PV arrays. The cameras shall have the
ability to run video patrol in automatic mode. Any mast or support for camera shall be arranged to minimize
shading on closest PV modules.
The cameras shall be installed near the Plant Substation at each corner covering the full plant substation area.
Final camera’s locations shall be proposed by Contractor and approved by Company.
The signal from the individual cameras must be connected to NVR. The NVR is installed in the Plant
Substation SCADA room.
NVR
The NVR (NVR) is installed in a 19” rack in the Plant Substation SCADA room. Any storage should be
either a flash card or a solid-state disk with redundancy (raid system).
It can be remotely monitored and operated via a web interface or similar.
It shall be able to record from all PV cameras simultaneously with at least 24 frames per second.
The data from the cameras installed should be available at least three days (72 hours) before being
overwritten. The NVR shall be provided with a UPS with 2 hours backup duration.
The NVR allows:
 Search function in the recorded videos.
 Video copy and export in one of the common formats, .avi or .wmv.
 Access from the SCADA network to both video feeds and NVR configuration
The Contractor is allowed to supply one separate & dedicated CCTV system for both the PV Plant and the
Plant Substation.
41.3 Anti-Intrusion System for Plant Substation
Perimeter Security
Traditional Security Solution shall be provided by installing PIR Detector at the Corner of the Substation
Fence for Intrusion Detection. Alarm shall be sent to Alarm Controller or FSU and send Alarm Out during
intrusion.
Access Control
Substation Rooms:
 Door Controller Manages doors in the Substation.
 Open the Door with Cards
 Make Linkage with Camera.
42 Lighting and Small Power Systems
42.1 General
This section introduces one of the main principles involved with 33/110kV PV Plant Substation control
building and switchyard services, which is internal and external lighting design. The scope of supply and
services related to the lighting supposed to be complete even if the equipment or services to be provided are
not explicitly mentioned in this specification.
Detailed calculations and layouts shall be submitted for approval before any order placement or site work is
undertaken.
Any exclusion to the complete and satisfactory performance of the design and installation must be clearly
indicated in the offer submitted before award of the Contract. It will be otherwise assumed that everything
necessary is included in the Contract price.
During the design stage, the Contractor shall submit adequate and full supporting documentation
(calculations, schematics, schedules, general arrangement drawings, technical and descriptive manufacturer's
data, samples of equipment, etc.) to reveal that the requirements of this specification are being fully
complied with. The calculations shall identify all assumptions made and which must be agreed upon before
the detailed design is finalized.
Location of the lighting equipment shall be reviewed at site before installation so that satisfactory co-
ordination with pipe and ductworks, power cables and other plant and equipment shall be assured.
For plant areas where hazardous areas may exist, as defined by IEC 60079, all relevant equipment shall be
rated for the respective hazardous area classification.
This specification shall also be applicable to temporary site installations.
The lighting system shall include, without being limited to the following:
 distribution boards
 cable trunking, containment systems
 socket outlets and plugs
 luminaires
 lighting switches
 external lighting control systems
 earthing and bonding
 all standard equipment and accessories which are normally included in the supply schedule,
which are not separately listed.
 spare parts
 special tools and equipment for maintenance, inspection and repair
 complete documentation.
42.2 Standards
Materials, workmanship and tests shall conform, at least, to the latest versions -including all relevant
amendments- of the following standards:
 IEC 60061 Lamp caps and holders
 IEC 60064 Specification for tungsten filament lamps for general service (BS 161)
(batch testing)
 IEC 60081 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service
 IEC 60188 High-pressure mercury vapour lamps
 IEC 60227 PVC - insulated cables of rated Voltage up to and including 450/750
 IEC 60227-1 Electric cables. PVC insulated, non-armored cables for voltages up to and
including 450/750 V, for electric power, lighting and internal wiring
 IEC 60227-5 Electric cables. Flexible cords rated up to 300/500 V, for use with
appliances and equipment intended for domestic, office and similar environments.
 IEC 60309 Plug and socket outlets
 IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installations (all relevant parts)
 IEC 60502 Specification for 600/1000 V armoured cables having thermosetting
insulation and low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire.
 IEC 60598 Luminaires (all relevant parts)
 IEC 60898 Specification for circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for household
and
similar installations
 IEC 60921 Specification for ballast for tubular fluorescent lamps
 IEC 60923 Specification for performance requirements for ballasts for discharge lamps
(excluding tubular fluorescent lamps)

 IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
 IEC 61347 Lamp Control gear (all relevant parts)
 IEC 62031 LED Modules for general lighting - Safety specifications
 IEC 62035 Discharge lamps (excluding Fluorescent Lamps)
 IEC 62444 Cable glands for electrical installations
 IEC 62471 Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems
 IEC 62560 Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting services
 IEC 62717 LED modules for general lighting - Performance requirements
 IEC 62722 Particular requirements for LED luminaries
 IEC 63220 LED light sources - Safety requirements
 IEC 63221 LED light sources - Performance requirements
 ISO 30061 Emergency lighting
 EN 50171 Central safety power supply systems
The design of the electrical building services shall be in accordance with IEC 60364 - Low Voltage
Electrical Installations. Individual items of equipment shall be in accordance with the latest issue of the
relevant IEC Standards.
42.3 Equipment Requirements
All fixings shall be of a type approved by the Employer. All supporting metalwork used in surface
installations shall be galvanized. Fixing to structural steelworks shall be with brackets or clamps, especially
made to serve such a purpose. Drilling of structural steel works will not be permitted.
Switches and pushbuttons for lighting circuits shall be mounted 1300 mm above finished floor level. All
lighting switches shall have a minimum continuous rating of 16A.
Luminaires shall be secured to ceilings, walls, trunking systems, roof steelwork or suspended, as required by
the approved design.
Final connections to all suspended luminaires shall be by flexible cable terminated in connectors in the
ceiling or junction box which shall also terminate the final sub-circuit cable. The cable length shall be such
that the suspension unit supports take the full weight of the luminaires.
Where luminaires are mounted fixed on to walls or ceilings the final sub-circuit cables may be connected
into the luminaires own terminal block provided that the cables are routed to avoid any heat generating
components inside the luminaire. Where terminal blocks are not provided as part of the luminaire flexible
cable shall be used and connected to a separate external junction box.
In the battery room, explosion-proof lighting fittings and socket outlets (Exd II CT2) are to be provided.
42.4 Lighting System Particular Requirements
1. General System Requirements
The indoor and outdoor lighting equipment and systems shall provide adequate lighting intensities and
systems, for safe and efficient operation within entire 33/110kV PV Plant Substation area under normal and
emergency operating situations.
For satisfactorily monitoring and safe operation of the indoor and outdoor 33/110kV PV Plant Substation
equipment at normal and emergency situations, adequate intensity/glare and reflection free lighting system is
considered essential.
The lighting system shall be designed and implemented for the following 33/110kV PV Plant Substation
areas:
 indoor and outdoor lighting schemes for substation buildings under both normal and
emergency (loss of AC supply) conditions
 floodlighting and emergency lighting schemes for outdoor area as well as all substation
doors and gate access
 access road lighting as well as any supplementary lighting for security video camera
surveillance
 emergency lighting.
All exterior lighting shall be designed so that it shall be automatically switched by photo-sensitive switches
(photocells) and the Contractor shall arrange that there is a time delay between the various groups of circuits
being energized to compensate the switching peaks. Manual override facilities shall also be provided so that
each circuit can be controlled individually.
The Lighting Uniformity describes the ratio between the minimum to average or minimum to maximum
ground illuminance of the yard. The Lighting Uniformity shall be 0.4 at least.
The lighting shall be designed to provide visual performance, safety and economical usage of power.
Indoor and outdoor normal lighting systems shall be fed via local lighting panels that are fed from the
33/110kV PV Plant Substation Main Lighting Switchboard.
Lighting/power systems shall be distributed at different phases. Maximum permissible voltage drop at the
last point shall not exceed 5%. All lighting switches shall have a minimum continuous rating of 16 A. Visual
performance shall be free of excessive stroboscopic effects and flicker.
Replacement of lighting bulbs or tubes shall be possible without the need to disconnect any part of 33/110kV
PV Plant Substation HV equipment.
Where visual display units are to be installed, the design shall take account of the need to avoid glare which
could cause fatigue to the operators.
The Contractor shall establish the parameters for the lighting design and ensure that the latest definition of
maintenance factor is applied in the calculations.
This includes considering all losses associated with the luminaires including lamp lumen maintenance,
anticipative switching and lighting operation. The Contractor shall assume that the luminaires will be
cleaned once a year.
The design shall ensure satisfactory operation over the life of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
The lighting design shall take full account of the drop-off in performance of lamps and luminaires over their
expected working life and shall indicate required maintenance to maintain these minimum lighting levels.
Portable torches shall be installed in areas where it is practically not possible to have power supply for the
emergency lighting system.
The torches shall be equipped with built-in rechargeable battery. The torch will be fixed in an accessible
visible area and connected to its battery charger in normal operating condition. The torch shall suit outdoors
tropical environment and be suitable for prolonged use with minimum maintenance. The built-in battery
shall be rated for 6 hours for the 2x20 W load torch lamps with ON/OFF switch. The Contractor shall
consider the appropriate number of torches to be provided.
2. Illumination levels
Minimum illumination levels shall be in accordance with the regulations of the country of the Employer, but
not less than stated in Table 5 below. The below levels shall be based on measurements being taken after
lamps have been operated for not less than 100 hours. The method of measurement shall be in accordance
with International Commission on Illumination (CIE) Publication No. 29. Measurements shall be taken 0.85
m above the floor level in control and relay rooms, electronic equipment rooms, and offices. Otherwise,
measurements shall be taken at floor level.
Table 5: Typical substation illumination levels

Standard illuminance Limiting glare
Substation Area Type of control
(lux) index
Indoor switch rooms 400 25 L
Control rooms 400 25 L
Telecommunication rooms 300 25 L
Battery rooms 200 25 PB
Cable tunnels and basements 50 - L
Cable distribution room 100 - -
Offices 500 16 L
Workshop (General) 300 22 PB/L
Entrance halls, lobbies, etc. 200 19 L
Corridors, Passageways, stairs 200 25 L
Messrooms, kitchen 200 22 L
Storerooms 100 10 L
Lavatories 200 25 L
All indoor areas not specially listed 200 25 L
Perimeter lighting 50 - -
Exterior building lighting 20 - -
Transformers’ area 100 - PB/L/PC
Main entrance 100 -
Roadway, Access roads, Vehicle yard
30 - PC/L
and Parking
Access ladders, stairways and 50 - L
platforms
Local control cabinets 200 25 L
Outdoor plant areas not especially
50 - PC/L
listed
The following symbols are used in the table:

 L Single-pole local switch
 PB Push-button for remote control
 PC Photocell.
3. Luminaires
Luminaires for interior and exterior use shall be LED type and shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC 60598 or equivalent and, together with all components, shall be consistent for service
and operation in the environmental and climate conditions apparent in the Project area.
Each luminaire shall be complete with lamp holders, control gear, internal wiring, fused terminal block, earth
terminal and reflectors or diffusers as specified. The design of each fitting shall be such as to minimize the
effect of glare, and such that the ingress of dust, flies and insects shall prevented.
Internal connections shall comprise stranded conductors not less than 0.75 mm2 covered with heat-resistant
insulation to IEC 60245-3 or equivalent. All internal wiring shall be adequately secured inside the luminaire
casing with an approved form of cleat. The finish of fittings for interior use shall have a vitreous enamel,
natural aluminium or galvanized finish according to the manufacturer's standard product.
Lamp holders shall be suitable for the lamps specified. Luminaires shall be of the type specified.
The lighting installations shall be designed to give the standards of service illuminations specified in this
specification.
The number of different types of luminaires shall be rationalized by the Contractor to keep the number of
different types of luminaires down to a minimum.
42.5 Indoor lighting
An AC lighting system shall be used to provide an average horizontal illuminance at floor level as per Table
5.
Indoor lighting can be operated manually and/or using automatic motion detecting devices where suitable.
On local measuring, control stands, and instrument panels 200 lux shall be provided.
Illumination shall be of uniform intensity free from glare.

Illumination levels at controls in instrument panels shall be measured in a vertical plane at the panel
position.
Inside GIS switchgear rooms, high bay luminaires suitable for the height of the room shall be provided.
Stair lighting shall be positioned to provide good visibility of the stair risers and treads and to facilitate
access for maintenance/replacement.
Light fittings shall be kept free from obstructions such as cable trays and control panels. Additionally, light
fittings must not be installed below items such as cable ducts.
Where fittings are installed in areas where it is possible to be damaged such as the basement, they shall be
protected mechanically. Appropriate forms of protection include wire guards or vandal proof light fittings.
All enclosures for indoor lighting equipment shall have at least IP 20 Degree of Protection if located in areas
with low humidity and no dust such as offices, control rooms, etc. Nevertheless, IP54 shall be considered for
other indoor areas prone to more environmental exposure, such as the workshop.
42.6 Outdoor lighting
Lighting design shall be provided for all outdoor areas, including the water tanks, transformer bays and
access roads, so that the required levels of lighting will be achieved as indicated in Table 5.
Wherever practical light columns that can be tilted or have a mechanism that allows the light fittings to be
easily lowered to ground without allowing the fittings to swing as it is being lowered, shall be used. Both the
lowering mechanism and the fittings shall be easy to maintain.
All yard lighting shall be arranged by appropriate work clearances from live parts in accordance with IEC
61936. The installation and maintenance shall be possible without the need for a high voltage outage.
All light columns must be located within the direct protection zone of 33/110kV PV Plant Substation
lightning protection.
Security lighting shall be installed around the perimeter fence to illuminate the external area and shall be
controlled automatically and from the gatehouse. Lighting shall not affect adjacent properties adversely.
The outdoor switchyard lighting fixtures shall be waterproof and dust-proof and IP66.
42.7 Emergency lighting
An emergency lighting system shall be provided to allow for the safe movement of personnel in the event of
a failure of the normal lighting system. Emergency lighting shall also be provided at the entrances of the
switchgear rooms and in the transformer areas.
The emergency lighting system shall comply with ISO 30061, IEC 60598 and with the applicable local
standards.
Escape Lighting
Escape routes, exit lighting and associated signs shall be clearly marked and lit to facilitate emergency
escape in safety. At least one emergency light must be visible from every point in every room. “Exit” signs
shall be provided throughout the buildings, at appropriate places in the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
Safety Lighting
Safety lighting shall be provided for all locations with a high accident risk potential, such as e.g., electrical
equipment rooms, battery rooms, etc. and for areas where work must be possible to continue in case of loss
of the normal supply, such as e.g. control rooms.
Safety Lighting shall have an average emergency luminance of 50 lux.
Power source Emergency Lighting
Luminaires for escape and safety lighting shall be powered from central battery supply systems compliant
with EN 50171.
Self-contained battery packed shall be used only in particular applications subject to the approval of the
Employer and shall comply with IEC 60598.
The batteries shall be sized for a three-hour minimum emergency duration.
All self-contained emergency luminaires shall have a minimum guaranteed life of 4 years.
A method of testing the emergency lighting shall be provided if it is not part of a maintained system which is
directly connected to the distribution boards.
The battery packs may be mounted remotely if the temperatures within the luminaires will not allow the
Contractor to guarantee the minimum life required.
42.8 Photocells
Photocells shall be mounted within a waterproof and dustproof enclosure to IP65 which shall be fully
corrosion resistant.
Means shall be provided for on-site adjustment of the ambient light threshold levels at which the photocell
actuates the lighting systems.
42.9 Lighting Switches
Switches for use in AC circuits shall be rated for 16 or 20 A and shall be single pole type provided with an
earth terminal.
Switches for use in areas designated for surface installation shall be quick-make quick-break fixed grid
industrial types mounted in sheet-steel weather-proof boxes with protected dolly and arranged where
necessary for multi-gang switching.
Switches for use in areas designated for flush installation shall be micro-break types fixed to white plastic
cover plates and mounted in galvanized steel flush type boxes.
Switches for external use shall be of the surface mounting 16 A rotary quick-make quick-break pattern
housed in a cast iron galvanized weatherproof box to IP 65.
Push-button switches shall either be flush or surface types, contained in galvanized steel boxes and be single
pole rated for 5 A. Push-button shall be made of non-hygroscopic material, be non-swelling and so fitted as
to avoid any possibility of sticking.
The terminals for all switches shall be adequate to accommodate 2 conductors, each 2.5 mm2 in area.
Battery Rooms, shower rooms, toilets and toilet blocks shall have light switches mounted outside the
entrance doors.
Light switches shall be installed such that the operating dolly shall be pushed up for OFF and down for ON.
Similarly, rocker-operated switches shall be installed such that the upper portion of the rocker is pushed for
OFF and the lower portion for ON.
42.10 Distribution Boards
The distribution boards and all component parts shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC
61439 and with the requirements for Electrical Cubicles and Panels, and be capable of withstanding, without
damage, the mechanical and electrical stresses that can exist by any fault current. The withstand shall be for
twice the period required to disconnect such fault on any circuit.
The lighting and small power distribution boards shall be rated 230/400 V, 60 Hz , shall be metal-clad, and
shall be suitable for flush or surface mounting. Distribution boards located externally or in damp areas shall
be surface mounted and shall be rated as a minimum IP54, unless being installed in areas where are prone to
be exposed to firefighting system water nozzles, where IP55 shall be considered. Supplies shall be taken
from corresponding LV boards or safe AC supply boards.
Separate local distribution boards shall be provided depending on the service as follows:
 panel to feed all normal lighting circuits.
 panel to feed all emergency lighting circuits, and
 panel to feed all AC socket outlet circuits.
The panel for normal and emergency lighting shall be equipped at least with following components:
 four-pole incoming circuit breaker with residual current protection
 single-pole outgoing circuit breakers
 three-pole outgoing circuit breakers with residual current protection
 three-phase + neutral busbar system
 earthing bar, and
 push-button, contactors, auxiliary relays, time relays, etc. as necessary.
The panel for socket outlets shall be furnished with following components:
 four-pole incoming circuit breaker
 four-pole outgoing residual current circuit breakers, and
 two-pole outgoing residual current circuit breakers.
Outgoing circuits for socket outlets require residual current protection with tripping sensitivity 30 mA and
air conditioning equipment with 100 mA.
Where a distribution board feeds critical equipment individual residual current protection shall be used to
avoid loss of all power supplies. The cables feeding the distribution boards shall be connected directly to the
incoming isolator or neutral bar as appropriate.
Neutral bars shall have an appropriate number of ways relative to the size of the board.
The metal surface adjacent to any live part and all spaces between phases shall be protected by barriers made
of fireproof insulation material.
The current rating of the busbars in each distribution board shall not be less than the sum of maximum
current rating of all outgoing circuits. The neutral connection for each circuit is to be direct to the neutral
busbar.
Air break switches, disconnectors and MCCBs shall be designed and rated in accordance with IEC 60947-3
and IEC 60898 as appropriate for expected symmetrical fault rating and shall be capable of breaking rated
load current.
All moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) and miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall be constructed in
compliance with IEC 60947. Circuit breakers shall be of the high-speed fault limiting, thermal/magnetic type
with quick-make and quick-break trip free mechanisms which prevent the breaker being held-in against
overloads of fault conditions. Breakers shall have silver tungsten contacts and be derated to suit the
environmental nature of the enclosure and/or load.
Tripping arrangements shall ensure simultaneous opening of all phases. Each distribution board shall have a
dustproof metal case of sheet steel with an enameled finish and shall have hinged doors. The doors shall
incorporate a gasket and have a push-button handle incorporating a cylinder type lock.
Each lock shall be unique and shall be supplied with 3 keys.
The color of the enamel finish shall match the color of other switchgear installed in this substation. The
distribution board metal casing shall be provided with a gland plate for cable entry corresponding to the
cable size required for the overall design circuit capacity of the distribution board. It shall also incorporate a
suitable screened brass earthing stud.
Approved type labels shall be fitted externally on the front cover of each distribution board giving details of
the points controlled by each circuit. The circuit list shall be typed or printed stating the location of the
equipment served, rating of the protective unit and the circuit loading.
The lists shall be mounted on the inside of the cover door and shall be protected by an acrylic sheet slid into
a frame over the circuit list, the list and cover to be easily removable to permit circuit modifications.
Each panel shall be equipped with 20% spare feeders. All equipment for lighting shall be suitable for 50°C
ambient temperature and 100% humidity.
42.11 Cables
Cables shall comply with the requirements for Low Voltage Power and Control Cables. The cables for
lighting systems and socket systems installed between distribution boards and final connections and all
cables up to distribution boards shall be 3 and 5 cores or 4 cores (P+N+E and 3P+N+E or 3P+N with earth
conductor separate), with copper conductor, PVC sheathed and 0.6/1 kV. Outdoor cables shall be steel wire
armored. All cables shall include an adequately sized neutral and earth continuity conductor.
Cables and cable installation for emergency and safety lighting must be fire resistant.
All cables shall be protected from direct sunlight.
The Contractor shall select conductor sizes for the respective final circuits to meet the following conditions:
 The minimum conductor size for lighting and socket outlet circuits shall be 2.5 mm 2.
 The size shall be adequate for the current to be carried as set out in the cable manufacturer’s
specification taking account of the site ambient temperature.
 The conductor size shall be sufficient to keep the voltage drop in the phase and neutral conductor to
the farthest lighting or power point under normal full load conditions to the final circuit limit
specified in IEC 60364. No diversity is to be applied in any calculations.
Cables shall run at least 150 mm clear of all plumbing and mechanical services. The space factor for cables
installed in trunking or conduit shall not exceed 40%.
42.12 External lighting
1. Lighting levels
Switchyard lighting shall be sufficient to provide illumination to allow employees to move around the
switchyard safely and be able to see the operating equipment from ground level at night easily and clearly.
Control of this lighting shall be with multiple way switching, with each switch located as close as practical to
the entry point to the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation and/or switchyard; within the area lit by the security or
entry/exit lighting.
The switches shall be labelled “Switchyard Lights” and must not be accessible to persons outside of the
33/110kV PV Plant Substation.
2. Lighting equipment
All luminaires for external lighting shall be suitable for outdoor duty and shall be adequately earthed and all
earth terminations and fittings, fixing brackets and supports shall be included.
In general, such the outdoor luminaires shall emit no upward light.
3. External lighting poles
Lighting poles shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel of octagonal shape and shall be approved by the Employer.
Poles for roadway lighting shall support the lanterns at a normal 10 m above ground level and poles for
floodlighting may exceed 10 m. The maximum spacing between poles shall be 50 m. Hinged type poles for
access to the light fitting shall be provided where floodlights are required to be installed at high level.
Each pole shall be equipped with a weatherproof base section of sufficient size to house an inspection trap,
lockable door, fused cut-out, cable entry and terminations for both the incoming and secondary cables
feeding the light source. Facilities shall be included for cable looping.
All luminaires for external lighting shall be suitable for outdoor duty and shall be adequately earthed and all
earthing terminations and fittings, fixing brackets and supports shall be included.
The Contractor shall ensure that each pole is provided with foundations suitable for the ground conditions
existing at the site.
The 33/110kV PV Plant Substation site boundary perimeter wall/fence shall be provided with a lighting
system that shall be mounted 10 m above ground level at the wall/fence line and shall be placed 1m inside
the perimeter wall/fence boundary.
Due consideration must be given to outdoor lighting outside of the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation fence to
avoid transfer of excessive step and touch potentials. Lighting poles for outdoor lighting outside of the
33/110kV PV Plant Substation fence shall be FRP/GRP type. The distance between lights shall provide the
illumination levels specified.
All external doors of the building, including switch rooms and stores shall have external luminaires installed
above the doors to provide illumination outside entrances. This is in addition to the requirements for any
roadway or other external lighting.
4. Entry/Exit lighting
Sites with inadequate security or street lighting shall be equipped with automatic passive infra-red (PIR)
detector-controlled entry/exit lighting.
The automatic passive infrared (PIR) detector operated lighting shall illuminate towards the gate lock or door
lock, to enable them to be opened and the yard light manual control switch to be reached without using a
torch or any extra equipment.
When PIR detectors are used, they shall activate the entry/exit lighting immediately and keep it on for five
(5) minutes. The PIR detector and associated lights shall be mechanically protected or mounted in a box in
which mechanical protection is not required.
The control switch must be located on the distribution switchboard and be labelled “Entry Lighting -
Normally On”.
5. Security lighting
Security lighting shall be operated from sunset to sunrise and in cases that the daylight shall not be sufficient
to detect any possible security issue. If required, external security lights shall use pole-mounted lighting that
shines light onto the exterior of the building. Lighting attached to the building shall be avoided because of
insects and spider nets on the exterior of buildings, results in deduction of their visual sights and additional
maintenance.
Control for this lighting shall be automatic through either time clocks or external photoelectric (PE) cells.
The bypass or override switch shall be installed in the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation to allow manual
switching of the security lights for lighting operation checks. This switch shall be located on the building
distribution switchboard, and it shall be labelled “Security Lighting – Normally Off”.
42.13 Socket outlets, power outlets and plugs
The complete small power installation includes all power outlets, containment systems, trunking and relevant
accessories.
All external outlets shall be metal-clad rated IP65. All cables to external outlets shall be bottom entry. A
plug shall be provided for each power outlet.
Illustrations and/or Samples of all socket outlets and plugs that the Contractor proposes to use on the Project
shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.
1. Socket Outlets
Unless specified otherwise all generally purpose receptacles shall be mounted at 0.3 m and 1.4 m above final
floor level, as deemed applicable for that particular case.
16 A, 230 V AC single-phase, neutral and earth socket outlets of the type commonly used as power outlet for
domestic application in the country of the Employer shall be provided as follows:
 At each entrance door of a room (including cable basement if applicable) one (1) 16 A, 230
V AC socket outlet shall be provided below the lighting switch.
 for each room (including cable basement if applicable), additionally one 16 A, 230 V AC
double socket outlets shall be provided at strategic locations along the perimeter of the
walls, with a distance of maximum 5 m between two outlets, and a minimum of two (2) per
room, installed 30 cm above finished floor.
 at each desk, 16 A, 230 V AC socket outlets shall be provided at convenient position and in
adequate quantities as required for the equipment stationed at the location (e.g. monitors,
printers, etc.) plus an adequate number of additional outlets for power supply of portable
equipment, such as e.g. notebooks, mobile chargers, etc.
 at other locations where necessary, e.g. for copiers, hand tools, etc., 16 A, 230 V AC socket
outlets shall be provided as required.
Socket outlets shall not be provided inside shower rooms and inside battery rooms. Socket outlets inside wet
rooms, e.g. kitchens, washrooms, etc. shall be installed with the required safety distance to water outlets.
Socket outlets installed in electrical equipment rooms, storerooms, workshops, etc. shall be industrial type
with cover. Socket outlets installed in office rooms and at desks shall be robust domestic type. Socket outlets
shall be of a flush fitting pattern where the wiring installation is concealed.
32 A, 230/400 V AC three-phase, neutral and earth power outlets in accordance with IEC 60309 shall be
provided as follows:
 near each entrance door of switchgear rooms (except battery room), cable basements and workshops
at strategic locations along the perimeter of the walls, with a distance of maximum 10 m between
two outlets, and a minimum of two (2) per room, installed 130 cm above finished floor
 at any other locations where necessary, e.g. for tools.
Each main step-up power transformer bay shall be equipped with a separate heavy-duty power receptacle 3
phase, 4 wires, 400 V, 63 A.
The heavy duty 16 A and 63 A receptacles shall be of cast steel or aluminium heavy-duty enclosures suitable
for fixing on wall/column and complete with individual isolating switch. The heavy-duty 16 A and 63 A
receptacles shall be provided complete with their associated plug.
The receptacle enclosure shall suit the degree of protection for outdoor or indoor locations. For receptacles
installed in the areas where firefighting water spray nozzles are provided, the degree of protection shall be
considered accordingly. All receptacles metal enclosures shall be equipped with suitable earthing terminals
for connection to the substation-earthing grid.
The receptacles shall be fed from relevant lighting local panels, which are fed from the Main Lighting
Switchboard.
Connections to the phase and neutral conductors shall be carefully made in accordance with the
manufacturer’s markings and the earth pin shall be effectively earthed.
All socket and power outlets shall be fed via Residual Current Devices (RCD). They shall have a tripping
sensitivity of 30 mA and a maximum operating time of 30 ms.
2. External Power Outlets

External power outlets shall be provided for switchyards, transformer bays and other outdoor equipment (e.g.
capacitors, diesel generators, etc.) to provide power for e.g. portable electrical tools, portable welding
equipment, mobile oil purification plant, etc.
3. Industrial type Power Outlet Combinations
Industrial type power outlet combinations shall be provided to provide for e.g., portable electrical tools,
portable welding equipment, etc. as follows:
 inside switchgear rooms with a distance of maximum 20 m between two outlet combinations, but a
minimum of two (2) per switchgear room
 for switchyards at strategic locations, with a distance of maximum 50 m between two outlet
combinations
 at each transformer bay and other outdoor equipment locations (e.g. capacitors, diesel generators,
etc.)
 Power outlet combinations shall be robust type for outdoor installation comprising the following:
 one (1) 32 A, 400 V AC three-phase, neutral and earth power outlet
 one (1) 16 A, 400 V AC three-phase, neutral and earth power outlet
 two (2) 16 A, 230 V AC single-phase, neutral and earth industrial type socket outlets
 one (1) RCD 63 A, 30 mA
 one (1) MCB 32 A, 3 pole.
 one (1) MCB 16 A, 3 pole.
 two (2) MCB 16 A, 1 pole.
The power outlet combinations shall be mounted on pedestals or attached to steel structures or concrete walls
at a bottom height of 900 mm. When mounted externally, the power outlet combinations shall be provided
with an additional galvanized sheet steel enclosure cover top, rear and sides, as additional protection against
weather impact.
4. Power Connection Point
Power connection points shall be provided for connection of mobile oil purification plants and shall be
installed at convenient locations as follows:
 one (1) power connection point at each power transformer bay, reactor bay (if any), etc.
 one (1) power connection point for every two auto transformers installed next to each other.
 Power connection points shall be robust power cubicles in accordance with IEC 61439 and the
general requirements for Electrical Cubicles and Cabinets, for outdoor installation comprising the
following:
 galvanized sheet steel enclosure, with door, mechanically interlocked with the incoming
MCB (to be opened only when MCB off)
 one (1) four pole MCB, 125 A, with RCD 300 mA
 one (1) outgoing supply terminal block 3xL/N/PE suitable for 35 mm2 flexible cable
 one (1) cable gland for incoming supply cable
 one (1) cable entry for outgoing supply cable, which provides proper closing of the inlet in
both cases, with connected and disconnected outgoing supply cable.
The power connection points shall be mounted on pedestals or attached to steel structures or concrete walls
at a bottom height of 900 mm.
43 Mechanical Design Requirement for Plant Substation
43.1 High Velocity Water Deluge or Sprinkler System
The Contractor shall install the firefighting systems as per NFPA 850 and NFPA 15, but not limited to the
following: -
 Water Deluge or Sprinkler System for Power Transformer, Earthing Transformer, Auxiliary
Transformer
 Water Deluge or Sprinkler System for Earthing Cum Auxiliary Transformer
 Water Deluge or Sprinkler System for Cable Basement
 CO2 20kG gas Cylinders
43.2 Fire protection system
A fire detection, alarm and firefighting system shall be provided for the complete 33/110kV substation. The
system shall cover the switchgear and control building, transformer bays and outdoor located systems such
as the diesel generator and the capacitor banks.
The system shall be such that, in case of fire detection, an alarm shall be able to be signaled to the local
firefighting emergency service. Fire alarms shall be wired to the Common Bay Unit in order to be signaled to
the substation control and monitoring system (SCMS).
The fire detection system shall include the following items:

 one (1) central fire alarm panel
 one (1) fire alarm repeater panel
 one (1) lot of fire detectors
 one (1) lot of manual alarm pushbuttons
 one (1) lot of audible and visual alarm devices
 fire detection cabling system, including cable trunking and cable containment systems.
 all accessories necessary for the satisfactory operation of the system but which are not
separately listed.
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided inside the buildings in all electrical equipment rooms, in call
corridors and at strategic outdoor locations, such as e.g., transformer bays and other locations with risk of
fire, such as the diesel generator and the capacitor banks.
They shall include the following items:

 one (1) lot of handheld fire extinguishers including the following types:
1. dry chemical powder ABC rated type
2. carbon dioxide type
 one (1) lot of wheel/trolley mounted fire extinguishers mechanical foam type.
A firefighting water deluge system shall be provided and shall include the following items:
 one (1) fire pump unit including:
1. electric jockey pumps (1 set - 2x100%),
2. electric driven main pumps (1x100%),
3. diesel engine driven main pump (1x100%),
4. expansion tank arrangement,
5. control panel.
 two firefighting water tanks
 one firefighting water supply pump with well and all accessories
 two (2) transformer deluge systems for main power step-up transformers
 one (1) lot of fire hydrant network, around the periphery of plant substation.
 one lot of cabling system, including cable trunking and cable containment systems
 all accessories necessary for the satisfactory operation of the system but which are not
separately listed.
43.3 Fire Detection, Alarm and Fighting Systems
General
This section deals with the technical requirements for Fire Detection, Alarm and Fighting System to be used
in the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation. This system shall be designed to comply with the requirements of ISO
7240 and EN 54 to provide early warning for personnel evacuations and to allow action to be taken to limit
damage to the plant.
This system shall comprise fire detectors to be installed in the operational plant rooms, control and indicating
equipment, as well as linear heat detection systems to be designed and installed in all concrete cable
trenches, cable distribution rooms and tunnels and below raised floors in the Control Building, so as to
provide early detection of any possible fire which might occur to the cabling system.
The 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall be divided into zones. The number of zones and number of devices
shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with the applicable standards and regulations, as well as
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Standards and codes

The systems shall be based upon the standards listed below:
 ISO 7240 Fire detection and alarm systems - All relevant parts
 EN 54 Fire detection and fire alarm systems - All relevant parts
 NFPA 1 Fire Code
 NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
 NFPA 11 Standard for Low-, Medium-, and High-Expansion Foam
 NFPA 12 Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
 NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
 NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
 NFPA 15 Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
 NFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray
Systems
 NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
 NFPA 22 Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
 NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances
 NFPA 25 Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems
 NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
 NFPA 551 Guide for the Evaluation of Fire Risk Assessments
If it is proposed to use fire safety facilities and systems for which no suitable standard exists, the Contractor
shall submit full technical details and the use of such facilities and systems shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall also comply in all details with local rules and regulations on the Fire Detection, Alarm
and Fighting Systems, which shall prevail.
Fire Detection and Alarm System Design
The fire alarm and detection system shall comply with the requirements of the above-mentioned standards in
all respects.
The fire alarm system devices shall be wired to the fire alarm control panel located adjacent to the main
entrance to the 33/110kV PV Plant substation building and shall repeat on a mimic panel in the control
room.
Wiring for the fire alarm system shall be in accordance with the specified standards and it shall be surface
mounted.
All devices and cables that belong to the fire alarm system and line type (linear) heat detection system shall
be properly labeled.
System to be zoned, open circuit, supervised, electronically monitored type, with facilities for selective zone
alarm initiation from key positions for evacuation purposes.
The control panel is to be divided into a number of zones. The number of zones required shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Connection to the control panel with the fire alarm devices, including
cabling, relay, etc. shall be provided by the Contractor.
A 'SILENCE ALARM' blue colored push button shall be incorporated in the control panel which shall
silence the alarm.
A 'RESET' green colored push button shall be incorporated in the control panel which shall restore the
system to normal non-alarm mode.
All rooms and areas throughout the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation shall have a system installed which shall
contain a sufficient number of detectors and manual alarm call points. In the case of fire, the fire control
panel that monitors all automatic fire detectors shall generate commands to:
 shut-off ventilation and air conditioning systems and
 activate alarm bells or siren on the substation site.
In addition, the relevant alarms shall be sent to the SCADA and sound alarms shall be activated in the
building/control room.
Fire Detection and Alarm Control Panel
The control and indicating equipment panel shall be of the flush mounting pattern with the alarm and fault
indication by illuminated numbered panels, cross referenced to adjacent mimic diagram.
Panel facilities to comprise:

 'Power On' lamp
 'Battery Fault' lamp
 'Earth Fault' lamp
 'System Fault' lamp
 'Reset Alarm' push button
 'Silence Alarm' push button
 'Test' key switch and supervisory lamp. This test shall permit testing of zone detectors and
break glass stations without activating plant alarm relays.
 ‘Lamp Test' bush button
The control panel shall provide:

 The required number of zone alarm and fault lamp displays for the panel shall be a minimum
number of zones as determined by the Contractor.
 facilities for individual simulation of alarm and fault conditions, located inside the control panel
enclosures
 output terminals for each ring wired zone sounder circuit and a supervisory trouble sounder within
the control, enclosure
 monitored output terminal and the necessary control modules for repeating of all zone alarm and
fault conditions to the control engineers at the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation Control Room.
A zone legend and schematic diagram/general layout of fire alarm and detection system, as well as the line
type heat detection system should be provided and installed near the respective control panel.
All outside cable trenches (troughs) installed with the line type heat detection system shall be marked in red,
zone-wise for proper identification.
A separate control panel, located next to the main fire alarm control panel, shall be provided for the line type
heat detection system provided for high voltage and low voltage cables in cable trenches and below raised
floors.
This shall connect into the main building fire alarm control panel on a zone-by-zone basis. Fault and fire
indication signals shall be sent from the line type heat detection panel to the main fire alarm panel.
A “Fire Action” signboard shall be provided on the wall in the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation control room.
2. Battery Charger
A battery/charger unit for powering all systems components shall be provided. The battery/charger unit shall
consist of a single-phase main operated battery charger unit and a standby battery, housed in a metal clad
compartment separated from the associated control panel.
The battery bank shall be of a suitable (gas tight or similar) type, requiring minimal maintenance attention.
The sizes of battery and charger units shall be determined by the equipment supplier and shall allow for
adequate derating of the batteries. This shall allow for the standby load, alarm load, de-rating for ageing,
temperature derating and the non-linear standby and alarm conditions.
3. Automatic Detectors
Automatic detectors (optical and heat type) shall be suitable for a ceiling mounting box fitted with terminals
and contacts. The mounting box shall be fixed in position and fully wired before the detector head is plugged
in and locked into position. All detectors shall operate on the open circuit monitored circuit principle.
Detectors should not be sited within 2 m of air-conditioning supply or extract grilles and should be located
away from the direction of airflow.
All detectors shall have encapsulated electronic circuitry.
The body of each detector shall have a visible red light emitting diode in the side which shall illuminate
when the head is in an alarm state.
The detectors shall require no replacements after initiating an alarm to re-store it to its original quiescent
condition, when the alarm condition has been reset.
All detectors shall be suitable for reliable operation within the environmental temperature and humidity
ranges given in this specification.
Duct mounted smoke detectors shall be provided as required for the heating ventilation and air conditioning
systems and provide alarm/fault indication on the main panel.
Thermal rate of rise type detectors shall meet the following requirements:
These shall be electronic combined rate of rise and fixed temperature type detectors complying with EN 54.
The detectors shall have an electronic temperature responsive element of heat detection and shall be suitable
for operating continuously in up to 95% R.H. The rate of rise sensing circuitry shall be calibrated to respond
to an increase in ambient temperature of 3°C per minute.
All cables trenches and raised floors within the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation building shall be protected by
line type heat sensing cables. These cables require are to be resistant to rodent attack and installed over the
cables throughout the areas. If rodent resistant cables are not provided, protection against attack should be
provided by mechanical means.
4. Manual Call Points
All manual call point units shall be of open circuit monitored type and shall be generally flush red enamel
surface pattern. Breaking the glass shall operate the contacts and raise an alarm.
All call points shall be complete with a glazed, hinged front covering fascia labeled. The glass element shall
incorporate a translucent plastic coating to eliminate loose fragments of glass when broken. It shall be
possible to break the glass element of station without the use of a hammer.
The frangible glass elements shall be easily replaceable. Call points installed indoors shall incorporate a key
test facility and outdoor units shall be weatherproof and come complete with a hammer. These shall be
protected from exposure to direct sunlight.
5. Alarm Bells and Sounders
Notification of a fire shall be by either alarm bells or electronic sounders The notification device shall have a
unique sound that is different from any other used on the Project.
If a similar sound is found and is used on the site an electronic two tones sounder shall be used.
Bell mechanisms shall be contactless, totally enclosed type, polarized and suppressed, so that operation does
not interfere with radio or television. There shall be automatic compensation for plunger wear.
Bells, when located outdoors, shall be weatherproof type suitable for mounting to surface conduit box.
Elsewhere bells shall be suitable for internal application and mounting to a flush conduit box.
For the Line Type Heat Detection System, a separate sounder shall be installed just above the Heat detector
cable Sensing Control Panel.
4. Portable Fire Extinguishers
The portable apparatus to be provided under this contract is to be used for dealing with outbreak of fire in
areas where oil filled transformers are protected by fixed installations as well as in electrical equipment in
control and equipment rooms.
All apparatus shall be of suitable type for operation by one person and shall be easily rechargeable.
The content of extinguishers shall be non-corrosive and free of toxic gases when heated.
Equipment for dealing with oil fires shall be of foam generating type.
Portable wall mounted, hand-held extinguishers shall be of 12 and 6 kg size, with a multipurpose powder of
ABC rating or carbon dioxide type
The contract shall include the supply and installation of all wall brackets and fittings for small units, as well
as of wheeled trolleys for units which cannot be carried easily.
Where extinguishers are provided in external positions or other areas where they may be exposed to the
weather, they shall be provided with protective cabinets. The protective cabinets shall be of red color and
marked in white as ‘FIRE EXTINGUISHERS’ in both English and local language. The cabinet shall provide
adequate protection against rain, wind blows and dust.
Where extinguishers are provided internally, they shall be wall-mounted, adjusted on the wall in a manner
affording quick release from the supporting bracket.
5. “Wet” Firefighting System
1. General
Water based firefighting systems shall be provided for the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation as a minimum as
described herein. The firefighting system shall generally follow the NFPA codes as well as national and
company specific regulations if applicable. In case of any conflict the more stringent requirement must be
applied. All equipment and pumps must be approved by FM or listed by UL.
It shall be assured that a dedicated fire water supply to cover the system design flow rate is available for the
facility in accordance with NFPA.
The Project shall be provided with a firefighting water storage tank.

The firefighting pumps shall be provided as a prefabricated containerized unit and shall include the
following:
 electric jockey pumps (1 set - 2x100%),
 electric driven main pumps (1x100%),
 diesel engine driven main pump (1x100%), and
 expansion tank arrangement.
The fire pump container shall be furnished with a distribution and control panel for auxiliary control,
ventilator fan and internal light. The panel shall be furnished with a sprinkler alarm connected to the fire
alarm panel for remote supervision. It comprises the three pumps described below.
The fire alarm system shall be integrated in the operation and monitoring system. An own monitor and
operation station with alarm printer shall be provided. General alarm, general fault, in operation and locked
signals shall be visualized on the SCMS.
2. Firefighting water storage tank
A GRP firefighting water storage tank shall be provided, designed and manufactured in accordance with
BSEN 13280. The tank shall be installed on a foundation allowing self-drain.
3. Firefighting pump system container
The firefighting pump system shall be provided as a prefabricated containerized unit for outdoor installation.
The dimensions of the container shall be suitable to host the firefighting pumps, expansion tank and control
panel.
The containers shall be rugged and constructed for long-term operation (> 30 years). They shall be equipped
with all necessary equipment and facilities, e.g. lighting, air inlets and outlets, etc., to keep the container
devices functional and operable.
Container structural components

 Supports seating underside points at the four corners.
 Double acoustic door set for personal and equipment access ~1800/2400 mm (width/height) with
inside panic bolts.
 Access stairways.
 Steel structures of stainless steel or adequate corrosion protection.
 Roofs consisting of two weather roofs to reduce heat loading allowing the ventilation under the outer
roof.
 Walls shall be made as double wall (clearance between walls ~60 mm, filled with insulations
material and min. thickness minimum 1 mm inner/outer sheet, provided that a sufficient stiffness is
guaranteed by the structure of the walls.
 Floors steel construction shall be designed to withstand all anticipated loads on the structure
including that of transportation of completed already installed equipment.
 Fixed points for panels/boards/etc. on walls/floors.
 Earthing connections points between the containers and the 33/110kV PV Plant Substation earthing
grid (at least four connections).
The design of the container shall allow the operation without running cooling or heating under normally
expected weather conditions. The utilization of a second roof (sun shield) is required.
The design of the container shall also avoid the entrance of small animals into the container. Special devices
shall be provided.
It is mandatory that the complete container with all inside installed equipment shall be factory tested before
shipped to site. The design of the container shall also take into consideration the aspects related to the lifting
(lifting lungs), permanent position operation requirements transport to site and permanent position operation
requirements.
Electrical Driven Pump (Main Fire Pump)
The electrical driven fire water pump supplies the fire system with water.
The pump shall be controlled autonomously by a local control panel. The panel shall be provided with
auto/manual selection.
A pressure control shall be provided in the discharge line for automatic control of the pump. The pressure
sensor shall be connected to the pump control panel. In case of low pressure combined with a small time
delay the pump is started. The pump can only be stopped manually at the local control panel. Running signal
and fault signal shall be transmitted to the DCS for remote alarm and supervision. An alarm shall be raised
when the pump is in operation.
Diesel Driven Fire Pump
The diesel driven fire water pump will supply the fire system with water in case no electricity is available.
The pump shall be controlled autonomously by a local control panel. The diesel motor shall start from
battery powered starter. The panel shall be pro-vided with auto/manual selection.
sensor shall be connected to the pump control panel. The start pressure for the pump shall set to be below the
start pressure of the main pump and combined with a time delay in order for the electrical driven pump to get
in operation first. The pump can only be stopped manually at the local control panel. Running signal and
fault signal shall be transmitted to the DCS for remote alarm and supervision. An alarm shall be raised when
the pump is in operation.
Jockey Pump
The jockey pump shall secure pressure to the firewater system at all times.
The pump shall be controlled autonomously by a local control panel. The panel shall be provided with
auto/manual selection.
sensor shall be connected to the jockey pump control panel. In case of low pressure, the pump shall start.
When the normal pressure is obtained, and a delay timer has elapsed the pump shall stop. Running signal and
fault signal shall be transmitted to the DCS for re-mote alarm and supervision. An alarm shall be raised when
the pump is in operation.
Fire Water Demand Calculation
The water demand of the Project shall be calculated considering a worst-case scenario for a single fire event
based on NFPA standards and proofed by a Fire Risk Assessment. A safety factor of approximately 1.15
shall be added. The new firefighting water storage tank, pumps and distribution system shall be designed and
installed accordingly.
Fire Water Distribution System
All the pumps and pipework sizing is based on the fire water requirements of the Project. The pipework
distribution system feeds hydrants, hose reels, and deluge systems.
A main above ground fire header shall be provided to serve strategically placed (not more than 50 m apart)
outdoor hydrants and supply water to the indoor hose reel and sprinkler/spray systems. In areas where roads
are crossing the main fire header, the fire header shall be underground.
The fire water distribution system shall incorporate sectionalizing valves so that a failure in any part of the
system can be isolated while allowing the remainder of the system to function properly (2 way feeding).
A sufficient number of drain valves at low areas and venting valves on high areas, which allow a
sectionalized flushing/drainage/venting of all water and foam pipes shall be installed.
The water distribution system is mainly an above ground system and comprises of different circuits. Shut-off
valves shall be foreseen to isolate parts of the system, if and when required; however, these valves have to be
‘kept and locked normally open’.
Function
An air/water accumulator (expansion tank arrangement) and electric jockey pumps shall have the function to
maintain the water circuit pressurized compensating possible water leakages from piping arrangement.
In case of an air pressurized expansion tank provision for service air pressure control arrangement or
dedicated compressors shall be provided. The jockey pump is controlled by means of a pressure switch (low
pressure).
In the case that the firefighting system is in operation the required delivery and pressure for the worst
condition are ensured by the main duty electric pumps; diesel engine driven is stand-by, for the case of mains
supply failure or extra low pressure in the network.
The starting of the main duty pumps is controlled by a pressure switch (low pressure) adjusted for a pressure
value lower than of the jockey pump.
Another pressure switch controls the starting of the diesel engine driven pump in the case of failed starting of
the electric pumps.
Proper starting sequence of the pumps is accomplished, also, by time delay relays.
Once started, the firefighting pumps can only be stopped manually, and a return valve shall be installed to
flow the water back to the tanks.
Proper starting sequence of the pumps is accomplished by means of a suitable adjustment of the pressure
switches and of the time delay relays.
The FF- system of the Project shall be complete with pump test facilities in the form of a calibrated test loop
around the pump set.
Fire Hydrants
Hydrants shall be installed at strategic locations. The quantities and types of the hydrants shall be dictated by
the relevant standards (such as NFPA 24: Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and
Their Appurtenances), applicable local regulations and the relevant calculations of the Contractor, subject to
the Employer’s/Engineer’s approval.
Fire hydrants shall be provided with a weather cap and an epoxy or bituminous-coated shoe. The hydrants
shall be set on concrete slabs.
Connections shall be mechanical joints with proper fittings.
The main hydrant valves shall be of the compression type (i.e. the water pressure shall hold the main valve
closed, permitting easy maintenance of the barrel assembly from above the ground without shutting off the
water supply).
All working parts shall be bronze or non-corrosive metal in accordance with the relevant standards.
All external steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove rust, scale etc. before applying a primer (of
color in accordance with the relevant NFPA 291). All underground piping shall be provided with protective
wrapping.
All other technical details with regard to hydrants shall be defined during design stage.
Transformer Spray water system
Fire protection for Transformers and Rectors shall be of the fixed water spray type with a minimum running
pressure of 50 psi at any spray nozzle and suitable for automatic operation and manual operation by means
of a deluge valve and approved detectors.
Water coverage and application should be in accordance with NFPA 15. (10.2 l/min/m2). Water storage
should be sufficient to maintain a one hour of fire pump run.
All devices & pipes should be minimum 1.5 m away from the body of the transformer / reactor (if any) and 2
m above the floor level to have clear access. All the pipe installation in front of transformer / reactor (if any)
shall be easily re-movable.
The spray circuit, which operates as control circuit, is normally under pressure. High temperature causes
breaking of one or more of the spray water circuit bulbs. As a result, pressure in this circuit falls, causing the
pilot valve to open and consequently the water is delivered to the nozzles. This continues until the valve is
closed.
The water output may also be actuated by operating the manual emergency release or by a confirmed fire
signal from detectors.
Inspection and Testing
1. General
Inspection and testing of fire detection and firefighting equipment, piping, valves and fittings shall comply
with relevant clauses of the respective NFPA regulations in particular with NFPA 25 and with national
standards of the country of the Employer.
All instruments used for the purpose of carrying out reliability, function or certification tests must have an
in-date test/calibration certificate. All instruments must be recalibrated and certified in the time period
regulated by the relevant standards, but not less than every six months.
2. Workshop tests
The fire detection and firefighting system shall be subjected to the following tests at the shop:
 visual inspection of all components

 functional tests of the fire alarm panel
 functional test of the complete firefighting pump system
 performance test of the firefighting pumps
3. Site tests
1. Fire detection system
After completion of erection all items of equipment shall be inspected and tested in order to check quality,
correct operation and correct installation of the equipment. The following tests shall be performed:
 visual inspection for completeness, proper installation and consistence with installation documents
 functional test of the complete fire detection system with activation of each individual detector
2. Fire Fighting system.
The Contractor shall perform all required acceptance tests and complete the " Material and Test Certificate"
as specified in NFPA.
Before commissioning the system, the entire lines shall be flushed thoroughly under pressure through
hydrants and other outlets.
Therefore, sufficient vents on high points and drains on pipe low points and system low points have to be
installed.
 The flushing rates shall be as specified in NFPA.
 For purposes of flushing, suitable temporary connections may be made from a firewater tank.
 A " Material and Test Certificate" as specified in NFPA shall be supplied to the Engineer for each section of
pipe tested/flushed.
The pipework shall be hydrostatically tested before trenches have been backfilled.
The allowable leakage rates shall be measured at specific test pressure points by pumping from a calibrated
container.
For purposes of testing, suitable temporary connections and test pump shall be provided.
After successful hydrostatic testing and flushing of the pipes any temporary connections to the (sub-) system
tested shall be removed, permanent connection shall be installed.
Performance Tests
Each firefighting pump and other fire-fighting equipment shall be Performance tested to demonstrate that the
operation complies with the performance requirements and to provide base data for the assessment of
performance throughout the operating life of the equipment. The extent of and procedures for performance
tests shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified the program of performance test shall include at least the following:
 Determination of maximum continuous rating,

 Determination of normally operation rating data and performances,
 Leak test, and
 Tests as recommended within NFPA 25
 Functional test of the complete firefighting pump system.
7. Training
Works to be done under this section include training of Employer’s personnel to operate and maintain
equipment efficiently and safely. The training shall be provided as classroom training and hands on training
and shall include system operation, system maintenance and trouble shooting.
43.4 Clean Agent FM-200 Suppression System
Clean Agent FM-200 Gas Suppression System must be provided for 33kV MV Gas Insulated
Switchgear inside the Plant Substation and must comply with NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent
Fire Extinguishing Systems, relevant and applicable Local & International Standards.
Refer below Architecture for Illustrative Purpose but shall never be construed as FINAL from
Company.
44 Centralized Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning System for Plant Substation
44.1 Purpose And Objective
The purpose of this specification is to establish the general technical requirements for design, construction,
supply and installation of HVAC System and equipment for fully operational in accordance with the
requirements outlined in this specification.
The Supplier shall execute the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a Centralized
Package Air Conditioning heating, ventilation and Air Conditioning System ONLY with Roof-top Air
Compressor and Air Handing Units, including power/control panels, automatic control and related
cabling and wiring.
Any Single Package, VRV, VRF, Multi Package Type Air Conditioning, Split Type Air Conditioning and
any other mode, not explicitly mentioned herein, shall be REJECTED.
HVAC systems with HVAC ducts, piping, electrical raceway/fixtures, and other similar items will be
installed to maintain and control the environment in the power plant to a level suitable for personal comfort
and to support the continuous operation of the plant mechanical and electrical systems.
Areas but not limited to the following are for the installation, testing and commissioning of Heating,
ventilation and air conditioning system:
 Plant substation area,
 33kV Switchgear Room
 Battery Room
 Control and Relay Room
 LV and Charger Room
 Telecom Room
 SCADA Room
 Guard house,
 Fire Pump Room,
 Water pump house, etc.
44.2 Codes And Standards
All air conditioning and ventilating equipment forming parts of the work shall be designed and constructed
according to the latest edition of the relevant international codes and standards. All rules and regulations of
the local Authorities shall apply to the execution of works. However, any requirement detailed in this
specification shall be given priority and followed accordingly.
In case of conflict between this specification and the below mentioned standards then the more stringent
requirements shall be applicable.
ANSI American National Standards Institute

AMCA Air Movement & Control Association, International
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
ASHRAE Conditioning Engineers, Inc. – Handbooks, Guides and
Standards
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National
SMACNA
Association, Inc. CIBSE
IMC International Mechanical Code
IPC International Plumbing Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association Chartered
HVCA (DW/143/144) guides
Institute of Building Services Engineers
UL Underwriters Laboratories
44.3 General Design Considerations
44.3.1 External Design Conditions
The below external conditions shall be considered for the design calculation of HVAC System.
Summer (max) °C DB +50 °C
Winter (min) °C DB -34.2 °C
Winter (min) RH 60%
All HVAC equipment in the substation building shall operate without malfunction up to a maximum ambient
condition of +50°C D.B. and a minimum ambient condition of -34.2°C D.B., with instances of 100% R.H.
All air conditioning and ventilation systems shall be designed for continuous operation.
44.3.2 Indoor Design Conditions
The following areas / room shall be air conditioned. The indoor conditions and internal sound level of each
room and system given in the below table shall be considered for design, testing and construction of the air-
conditioning systems and shall be guaranteed by the Contractor.
Required Internal Sound

System Area/room
temperature Level
110kV GIS Room 22 ± 2°C NR 45

Control & Relay Room 24 ± 2°C NR 45
SYSTEM-1 LVAC Room 24 ± 2°C NR 45
HVAC Panel Room 24 ± 2°C NR 45
Battery Room 24 ± 2°C NR 50
SYSTEM-2 33kV GIS Room 24 ± 2°C NR 45
FIRE PUMP ROOM Fire Pump Room 24 ± 2°C -
44.3.3 System Design Concept and Components
Heat load calculations shall be done using Carrier HAP Load Program. Design calculations shall include
heat gains and losses under the specified conditions for each part of each building, taking into account solar
radiation, thermal transmittance through roofs, walls, floors and Windows, fresh air requirements, heat
emission from installed electrical equipment and lighting, personnel, infiltration and any other sources.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the heat transfer coefficients for all materials used in
building construction. In the event of any change in materials, design or method of building construction, the
contractor shall at all-time be responsible for rechecking the design of all systems to ensure that they are
capable of meeting the specified design requirements.
Air conditioning systems shall be arranged to introduce a fresh air quantity equivalent to a minimum of 10%
of the total air volume handled. Mechanical ventilation as specified elsewhere should be included in system
sizing summary of load calculations.
Sensible and Latent heat factor of safety should be 10% on system sizing summary.
HVAC System shall be fully automatic via HVAC Control Panel.
Roof shall be provided with lighting; domestic water bib taps and 13 Amps small power weatherproof
sockets near to the Packaged Units for service and maintenance purpose.
The below table show the type and classification of air-conditioning and ventilation systems in different
areas / room.
Air Conditioning System:
Required Internal Sound

System Area/room
temperature Level
110kV GIS Room

Control & Relay Room 2nos x 100%
Roof Top
SYSTEM-1 LV Room (1 Duty + 1
Packaged Unit
HVAC Panel Room Standby)
Battery Room
2nos x 100%
Roof Top
SYSTEM-2 33kV GIS Room (1 Duty + 1
Packaged Unit
Standby)
3nos x 50%
Decorative Type
Fire Pump Room Fire Pump Room (1 Duty + 1
Split A/C Units
Standby)
Ventilation System:
Description Air Change Per Hour Unit Quantity

2nos x 100%
Battery Room Ventilation 4 ACH
(1 Duty + 1 Standby)
Fire Pump Room Extract Fan 4 ACH 1 No.
Battery room shall be maintained at slight negative pressure. Supply air for battery room exhaust shall be
provided by the packaged AC units. No return air to be considered for battery room.
Fire pump room extract fan shall operate only in case of Diesel Fire Pump Operation.
Basement Ventilation / Smoke Extract System:
Fire Case/Smoke Extraction

Normal Ventilation Condition Remarks
Condition
Description
Air Change Air Change Quantity
Quantity
per Hour Per Hour
9 ACH 4.5 ACH Same Fan shall
Basement 2nos x 100% be used for
2nos x 50%
Smoke (1 Duty + 1 Smoke Extract
(Both Duty)
Extract Fan Standby) Fan & Normal
Ventilation Fan
Fire Case/Smoke Extraction

Normal Ventilation Condition Remarks
Condition
Description
Air Change Air Change Quantity
Quantity
per Hour Per Hour
Same Fan shall
2nos x 100% be used for Fresh
Basement 2nos x 50%
8 ACH 4 ACH (1 Duty + 1 Air Fan for Fire
Fresh Fan (Both Duty)
Standby) Case & Normal
Condition
On the time of smoke extraction in Basement Rooms, Basement Smoke Extract fans shall extract air at 9 air
changes per hour, while Basement Fresh Air Fan shall supply air at 8 air changes per hour. Each basement
room shall have (2) two Smoke Extract Fans each of 50% capacity, and (2) two Fresh Air Fans each of 50%
capacity. Both fans shall run by switching ON manually via override switch from the HVAC control panel.
During normal operation, (1) one out of (2) two smoke extract fans shall run as normal extract fan with
duty/standby arrangement, similarly for fresh air fan, (1) one out of two shall run as normal fresh air fan with
duty/standby arrangement. Automatic sequencing of fans shall be done by HVAC Control Panel.
44.3.4 Diesel Generator Room Ventilation System
Diesel Generator Room shall be provided with Louvers on the wall as much as possible, in order to have
proper air ventilation for combustion and cooling purpose. However, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to
verify with approved Generator Manufacturer the ventilation requirement of the generator
44.3.5 Air Conditioning Equipment
44.3.5.1Packaged Air Conditioning Units
The cooling medium for Air conditioning shall be direct expansion Refrigeration provided by Air cooled
(Packaged) Air conditioning Units located externally. Environmentally friendly refrigerant shall be used
such as R407C/R410A/R134a.
Provision for individual faults indication to be made on Air conditioning units Control panel. The
manufacturer shall ensure that sufficient auxiliary contacts are made available in the packaged units for
interfacing with HVAC control panel.
Each Unit shall be a one-piece Packaged Air cooled AC unit, to achieve the following functions and features:
-
 Dual Refrigerant Circuits.
 Vibration isolation for internal operating components.
 Heating of compressors during standby mode.
 Sight glass to monitor the refrigerant circuit.
 Filter drier replacement shall be without loss of refrigerant and cutting of copper pipes.
 Electric Isolation and protection for compressors, blower and Condenser fan motors.
 Under Voltage Monitoring.
 Low ambient pressure control by fan cycling switch.
 Low- and High-Pressure Switches for each circuit.
 Electrical and Control Panel with weatherproof enclosure with internal partitions.
The evaporator and condenser coils shall be copper plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes,
with all joints brazed. Anti-corrosion coating should be provided to condenser coils. Condenser coil guard
shall be provided.
The Unit cabinet shall be constructed of suitable material for outdoor installation with weatherproof
corrosion resistant coating. Evaporator panels should be double skin. The cabinet panel shall be easily
removable for service to all operating components. Unit shall be designed to easily drain out the condensate
water.
The blower supply fan shall be selected to achieve the design air flow with belt driven type. Fan motor shall
be with permanently lubricated bearing. The condenser fan shall be of the propeller type with direct driven,
totally enclosed, permanently lubricated motors. The condenser fans shall discharge upwards. Condenser fan
motors shall be suitable for operation in an ambient air temperature of 55°C.
44.3.5.2Decorative Split A/C Units
Condensing coil of split unit should be made of copper coil with aluminium fins.
 “Heresite” Coating shall be provided for Condenser Coil.
 Refrigerant shall be environment friendly such as R407c / R410A.
44.3.5.3Refrigerant Piping
All pipework for refrigerant systems shall be of refrigeration quality copper tube. Refrigerant pipe size shall
be as per approved Split Unit manufacturer recommendation.
Liquid lines shall be insulated where they are in direct sunlight or where they pass through non-air-
conditioned areas. Suction lines shall be insulated over their entire length. Insulation for refrigeration pipes
shall be flexible closed cell elastomeric rubber, tube type with 19mm thickness.
Refrigerant pipes should be properly supported, insulated and duly finished with canvas cloth and sealant.
The same shall be run through GI trunking.
44.3.6 Fans
44.3.6.1Battery Room Extract Fans
Battery room should be provided with (2) two numbers Axial or Centrifugal inline ducted fan (1 duty + 1
standby) mounted on the roof. Motors shall be explosion proof version in accordance with ATEX Directive,
and IP55 protection rating. Fans shall be suitable for outdoor installation.
Control and auto changeover of fans will be done by HVAC Control Panel provided in the project.
44.3.6.2Basement Smoke Extract Fan
Smoke extract fans shall be roof mounted axial or centrifugal type, the fan and motor shall be suitable for
high temperature and rated for 400˚C for 2 hours, with minimum IP 55 protection and shall be suitable for
outdoor installation.
Smoke extract Fan shall have Local Authority approval. Control and auto changeover of fans will be done by
HVAC Control Panel provided in the project.
44.3.6.3Basement Fresh Air Fan
Fresh air supply fans can be twin fans, axial fan, or centrifugal fan to be mounted on the roof. Fans shall be
suitable for outdoor installation with minimum IP 55 protection. Control and auto changeover of fans will be
done by HVAC Control Panel provided in the project.
44.3.6.4Fire Pump Room Extract Fan
Extract fans shall be heavy duty wall mounted with back draft dampers and fan blades guard. Fan motor
shall have minimum IP 55 protection.
44.3.7 Air Distribution System
44.3.7.1Duct Works
The Contractor shall supply, deliver and erect ranges of ductwork, complete with hangers and supports, etc.,
in accordance with SMACNA or DW/144 Duct Construction Standards. Ductwork shall be constructed from
best quality steel sheets continuously hot dip galvanized ASTM, zinc coating G90 (Z27-275 gm/m²).
All ductworks shall be manufactured by an approved firm of ductwork specialists to site. The ducts gauges,
thickness and method of jointing shall be following the ASHRAE standards and handbooks.
All ductwork sizes indicated on the drawings shall mean the clear internal dimensions of the manufactured
ductwork unless otherwise stated on the drawings. Whenever internal acoustic lining is indicated on the
drawings, the duct sizes have to be increased to accommodate the lining. Access door shall be provided
wherever required for inspection and maintenance of HVAC equipment and devices installed in the project.
Duct Support shall be made of hot-dipped galvanized steel. Smoke extract ducts shall be Fire Rated comply
with BS 476 -24 and shall have local Authority approval.
44.3.7.2Duct Thermal Insulation
All ducting carrying air-conditioned air shall be thermally insulated with foil faced rigid fiberglass
insulation.
Duct insulation shall have minimum density of 48kg/m³ and thickness 50mm for ducts installed externally
and 25mm thickness for internal ducts.
Duct insulation shall be fixed to the duct with suitable adhesive and duly finished with 8oz canvas cloth and
coatings. Additional Vapour Barrier shall be applied on duct installed externally.
Smoke Extract and Fresh Air duct riser passing through air-conditioned area shall be provided with gypsum
bulkhead or shall be insulated with fire rated thermal insulation and aluminium cladding, to prevent
condensation.
44.3.7.3Duct Acoustic Liner
Acoustic Liner shall be provided for supply and return air duct plenums on roof. Acoustic Liner shall be of
25mm thick, 24 kg /m³ density rigid fiberglass, complete with self-tapping screws covered with perforated
sheet.
44.3.7.4Aluminium Cladding
All air conditioning ducts installed on the roof and ducts exposed within substation building shall be
provided with 0.9mm plain aluminium cladding.
44.3.7.5Flexible Duct Connector
Flexible Duct Connector shall be provided between HVAC equipment and duct works, in order to isolate the
vibration and noise from the source.
44.3.8 Fire Damper
Curtain Type Fire dampers shall be installed in all supply / return duct penetrations / openings through walls
and roof. Frame and blades of the fire damper shall be made from galvanized steel and blade should be out
of air stream.
Fire damper shall have fusible link rated at 72˚C temperature and electric limit switch (micro- switch) sealed
type with IP55 protection rating for remote indication on HVAC Control Panel.
Fire dampers shall have UL Labelled and Local Authority approval with minimum 2 Hours fire rating.
44.3.8.1Motorized Smoke Damper
Motorized Smoke Damper shall be installed on ground floor (basement slab), where the basement smokes
extract duct and basement fresh air duct is passing.
Motorized smoke damper shall be constructed with galvanized steel frame and galvanized steel blade. It shall
be factory installed with spring return actuator with maximum 15 seconds closing time and auxiliary contacts
for interfacing with HVAC Control Panel.
Motorized smoke dampers shall have UL labelled and Local Authority approval with minimum 2 Hours fire
rating.
44.3.8.2Motorized Volume Control Dampers
Motorized Volume Control Dampers shall be provided on inlet and outlet of A/C Package Units. This shall
be made from galvanized steel with double skin aero foil blades and should be airtight.
Damper Actuator shall be supplied by HVAC Control Panel manufacturer and shall be two positions
(ON/OFF type) with spring return and auxiliary contacts for interfacing with HVAC Control Panel. Actuator
Torque shall be selected and suitable according to damper area.
44.3.8.3Volume Control Dampers
Volume Control Dampers shall be provided whenever necessary for proper balancing of the system. Volume
control dampers shall be made from galvanized steel with double skin aerofoil blades with external locking
quadrants with clearly marked closed and open positions.
The blades shall be mounted on suitable bearings to be operated by an exterior linkage. The damper frame
shall include an integral flange for connection to the ductwork.
44.3.9 Air Terminal Devices (Diffuser, Grilles, And LOUVERS)
The types and sizes of all air terminal devices shall be as noted in the Drawings. However, it is the
Contractors responsibility to ensure that the selected grilles, diffusers, louvers are suitable for the air volume
flow rate, air diffusion and noise rating indicated. All air terminal devices shall have a concealed fixing
arrangement. All grilles and louvers finish shall be as per architectural approval.
44.3.9.1Ceiling Diffusers
Ceiling diffusers shall be four-way throw to discharge air equally in four horizontal directions. Frame and
blades shall be made of high-quality extruded aluminium profile construction. Supply air diffuser shall be
with opposed blade multi leaf type damper for air flow regulation purpose.
44.3.9.2Double Deflection Register /Grilles
Double deflection register / grilles shall be of extruded aluminium construction and have two sets of
separately adjustable blades, one set horizontal and one set vertical. Each supply air grille shall be fitted with
opposed blade multi leaf type damper for airflow regulation purpose. All blades and air flow rate controllers
shall be adjustable from the front of the grille or register.
44.3.9.3Gravity Air Louver
Gravity air louver shall be provided to prevent air circulation between two fans. Louver frame shall be made
of high-quality extruded aluminium profile construction.
Gravity air louver shall present a minimum resistance to air flow under running conditions and take up a
stable position in operation. Maximum resistance shall be present under reverse air flow conditions. Resilient
strips or other purpose made devices shall be provided to prevent the blades rattling and as an aid to air
sealing under reverse flow conditions.
44.3.10 Non-Return Dampers
Non-return damper shall be provided to prevent air circulation between two fans.
Non-return damper shall present a minimum resistance to air flow under running conditions and take up a
stable position in operation. Maximum resistance shall be present under reverse air flow conditions. Resilient
strips or other purpose made devices shall be provided to prevent the damper rattling and as an aid to air
sealing under reverse flow conditions.
44.3.11 Sand Trap Louvers
All fresh air intakes shall be provided with sand trap louver, and shall be sized such that the face velocity
does not exceed 1 m/s.
Sand trap louver frame and blades shall be of high-quality extruded aluminium profile construction. Louver
shall be composed of two sets of inverted U-channels mounted vertically on the opposite rows and shall have
sufficient depth in direction of inflow so as to remove maximum sand possible. Sand trap louver shall be
provided with aluminium wire mesh and removable Washable Filters (25mm Aluminium + 25mm
Synthetic).
44.3.12 Condensate Drain
Condensate drainpipe shall be uPVC High Pressure Pipe, Class-E. Size shall be as per A/C Unit
manufacturer recommendation.
Condensate drains should be properly supported, insulated and duly finished with canvas cloth, coatings and
cladding. Condensate drains must be routed directly into the drainage system or individual soak ways as per
approved drainage drawings.
44.3.13 HVAC Control & Power Panel
Centralized HVAC Control & Power Panel shall be provided in the project, for fully automatic system
designed and continuous operation. The Centralized HVAC Control
Power Panel, will feed power, control, and monitor all HVAC equipment and devices of 110kV GIS Room,
33kV Switchgear Room, LV Room, Control & Relay Room, Battery Room, Telecom Room, HVAC Panel
Room, and Fire Pump Room.
It should be DDC based control system, with main HMI (Human Machine Interface) and shall be via a
keypad mounted on the fascia of the HVAC control panel. The HVAC control panel shall be located in the
HVAC Panel Room in the substation building. As an option, the power and control cabinet can be
independent cubicles / panels, either wall or floor mounted. All technical parameters described elsewhere
shall be adopted in these panels too.
The Panel shall be floor mounted Form – 2 type construction, with minimum IP54 protection. The control
panel sheet thickness shall be 2 mm and the mounting plate thickness shall be a minimum 2.5 mm. The
HVAC control panel be in cubicles and panels accommodating a complete set of controls alarms, indication
lamps, circuit breakers, fuse switches, MCCB’s, DDC controller, common operator terminal for all HVAC
systems, instrumentations to control all air conditioning and ventilation equipment’s, associated ancillary
equipment shall be provided.
All package unit feeders (MCCB) trip status shall be monitored by DDC Controller. All MCCB’s shall have
sufficient number of auxiliary contacts (NO and NC contacts) for status / alarm indications. The MCCB trip
alarm shall be wired to the common fault signal.
All motor starters shall be provided with individual combined isolating thermal overload latched tripping and
auxiliary contacts shall initiate alarms. The ventilation fan starter trip alarm shall be wired to the common
fault signal.
Alarm annunciator fascia with adequate ways for all air conditioning and ventilation alarms shall be
provided with associated alarm relays acceptance, cancellation and test buttons and provision of repeat
facilities for remote alarm indications. the annunciator shall be switched off after 2 – 3 minutes (if not
manually reset). The necessary timer circuit shall be included for this function. However, the common fault
indication lamp shall remain until the field alarm is manually reset from the field / DDC controller.
The HVAC control panel shall have link busbar for each section of the terminals. Anti-condensation heaters
with suitable humidistat shall be provided. The humidistat supplied shall be adjustable type. The required
humidity shall be adjusted during commissioning. Ventilation fans / louvers shall be provided for proper
cross ventilation of the panel. The ventilation fan shall be switched on when the humidity inside the panel is
below the set point. The ventilation fan shall be controlled by the thermostat and anti-condensation heater
will be controlled by hygrostat. The ventilation fans are required in all the cubicles of the HVAC control
panel. The anti-condensation heater “ON” indication shall be provided on the panel fascia. Interior panel
fluorescent lights with door switch shall be provided.
The following minimum indications but not limited to shall be provided in the incomer section of the HVAC
control panel. The lamp test facility shall also be incorporated.
 One voltmeter scaled 0 – 500 V, with voltmeter selector switch.

 One Ammeters with selector switch and suitable scaled to read the incoming current in R, Y
and B phases.
 Current transformers of suitable ratio with class of accuracy 0.5 for connecting the
ammeters.
 All CT terminals shall have shorting, isolation and injection test facilities.
 All indication lamps shall be LED type and the indications shall not glow because of the
induction voltage from nearby lamps.
 Incomer R, Y, B indications.
 Indication light for Incomer Power Supply (Duty and Emergency).
HVAC control panel shall have bottom entry for incoming as well as outgoing cables. All power wiring
inside the cubicle shall be carried out with suitably rated power cable, multi stranded copper conductor, PVC
insulated, single core cable up to 105°C, 0.6/1kV with minimum cross section of 2.5 mm².
All control wiring inside the cubicle shall be carried out with suitably rated control cable
multi stranded copper conductor PVC insulated, single core cable up to 105°C, 0.6/1 kV with minimum
cross section of 1.5 mm². Joints in cable are not permitted.
In the control section the wiring for different purpose must be supplied in different colour cables to avoid
errors and faults. The wiring shall be labelled with legible ferrules.
Power and Control cables should be identified and must be laid separately in cable tray / trunking or shall be
provided with partition. The contractor should ensure and make all necessary protection that there is no
power cable induction voltage on the control cables as well as the field terminals of the DDC control section.
The external cables used for analogue / digital signals shall be screened with 1.5 mm² up to 75 meters. If the
cable length is between 75 meters and 200 meters 2.5 mm screened cable shall be used and if the cabling
distance between the HVAC control panel and field peripheral is more than 200 meters, the DDC
manufacturer’s recommendation for the cabling shall be followed.
The DDC control section:
All air conditioning and ventilation system controls shall be fully automatic in operation and shall be capable
of maintaining the internal conditions within the bands of temperature and humidity specified in the
respective clauses of the specification.
The control system shall preferably be of the electronic type (microprocessor based DDC controls with
BACnet protocol) capable of providing the degree of thermostatic control specified. The control system shall
incorporate all necessary safety interlocks for the successful operations of the plant. All status indication of
AC and ventilation units and temperature & humidity in all areas shall be indicated in the operator terminal
mounted on the control panel fascia. At least 10% spares input / output modules of both analogue and digital
signals shall be provided. 10% spare terminals and installation space shall be provided.
The DDC control section of the control panel shall include, but not limited to the followings:
The DDC should be with BACnet certification. Panel fascia mounted text-based operator terminal for
operating, monitoring and controlling the DDC controller and necessary parameters for the HVAC system.
The operator terminal shall be common for all systems. The DDC fail / power fail indication lamp has to be
derived from the digital outputs of the DDC. DDC shall receive, record & store all alarms and operator shall
be able to view all alarms on the operator terminal / display screen by touching the alarm tab. Alarms shall
be categorized in the controller based on the criticality / importance of the alarms on the functioning &
performance of the air conditioning and ventilation system. Alarms due to reasons which do not affect
system’s functioning and performance shall be categorized as simple / basic alarms and these alarms shall
get cleared automatically once the cause of the alarms are cleared but shall remain in the alarm log.
Alarms due to reasons which do affect system’s functioning and performance shall be categorized as critical
alarms and these alarms shall not get cleared automatically once the cause of the alarms are cleared but shall
be cleared only if the operator resets it from the display screen / operator terminal. These alarms also shall
remain in the alarm log.
44.3.14 Sequence Of Operation
44.3.14.1 Packaged Unit Controls
There are (2) two A/C Systems in the project; each system consists of 2 package units with 100% Capacity,
mounted on the roof.
Start / Stop
Out of two package units, one is duty and other is standby. When the system “Manual/Auto” selector switch
is in Auto position, one unit is selected as duty and other unit is as standby by the DDC controller
automatically. The duty selection will be cycled by the DDC controller automatically on weekly basis. The
two-duty package unit will start automatically, if the O/A switch for all the units is in Auto position. Before
the start-up of the package units, the respective supply and return air damper will be opened first. Only after
confirming the opening of the supply and return air damper, the package unit fan will be enabled.
When the system Manual/Auto switch is in the Manual position, the units are selected manually through the
duty selector switch. The unit supply and return damper will open first and then only the fan will be enabled.
In the Manual position the DDC will switch on one stage of compressor and the duty/standby selection is not
done by DDC but by the separate manual duty selector switch provided. Depending upon the position of the
selector switch the duty unit will continuously operate. But in case the working unit trips the standby unit
will not be switched ON automatically but can be switched ON manually.
Interlock has been provided such that the Packaged Unit will start only when main duct fire dampers are
open.
In Auto position, after power failure the duty unit will start automatically after a time delay to minimize the
peak inrush.
Temperature Control
Return air temperature sensor and return air humidity sensor should be mounted on the return air duct. The
desired temperature set point should be set using the operator terminal mounted on the panel fascia.
When the return air temperature measured by the sensor mounted on the duct is above the temperature set
point, the compressor stages of the running unit will be enabled in steps by the controller to meet the set
point.
Air Flow Monitoring
The airflow across each package unit shall be monitored through a differential pressure switch. When the
controller gives command to run the package unit and if it does not sense the airflow status within 1 minute
(adjustable time delay), an airflow fail alarm will be generated by the controller. The alarm should also
indicate on the panel fascia.
The controller will enable the compressor stages only when the controller senses the airflow status for that
package unit. In case of airflow fail alarm of the duty, the standby unit is started automatically with first
opening of the supply and return air damper of the standby unit and closing of the supply and return air
damper of the faulty unit.
Dirty Filter Indication
A dirty filter differential pressure switch shall be fitted across the filter of each package unit. When the filter
becomes dirty it should be indicated on the HMI.
Change Over
A change over from duty to standby unit will take place automatically in case of following alarm conditions.
 In case of Airflow fail alarm
 In case of Blower trip alarm
 In case of PU MCCB/ELCB trip alarm
 In case of duty unit supply air high temperature (after specified delay).
 If supply/return air damper fails to open.
 Common fault of the duty unit’s compressors.
Minimum indication for each packaged unit to be shown in HMI:
 Package unit fan run.

 Package unit off
 Package unit trip
 Fan air flow fail indication.
 Package unit compressor trip / common fault
Package unit filter dirty
 Motorized volume control dampers

 open Motorized volume control
 dampers close Compressor ON
 Supply Air High Temperature Alarm
 Return Air High Temperature alarm.
 HVAC system common fault (in panel fascia)
 HVAC system common fault reset push button (in panel fascia)
 HVAC system duty selector switch (in panel fascia)
 Individual Package unit Hand / Off / Auto switch (in panel fascia)
44.3.14.2 Battery Room Extract Fans Control
Battery room shall be provided with 2 nos. Extract Fan located on roof. The extract fans are with 1 duty + 1
standby arrangement.
Air Flow Monitoring
The airflow across both fans will be monitored through differential pressure switch. The controller will give
command to run the duty fan, and if it does not sense airflow status within 1-2 minutes, an airflow alarm
shall be generated by the controller. The alarm should also be indicated on the operator terminal on the panel
fascia.
Change Over
In case of Airflow failure or Thermal Overload Relay Trip of the duty fan the standby fan shall be enabled.
The duty selection of the extract fans shall be cycled by the DDC Controller automatically on weekly basis.
44.3.14.3 Basement Smoke / Extract Fans Control
Basement is provided with 2 nos. Smoke Extract Fans mounted on the roof. In normal condition, fans are in
1 duty + 1 standby arrangement as normal extract system, and during smoke extraction condition both fans
will work as duty.
Motorized smoke dampers are fitted in the common extract air duct of the extract fans at Ground floor. The
motorized smoke damper open status is interlocked with the fan start up in Hand and Auto mode.
When both extract fans H/O/A switch is in the HAND position the HVAC Control Panel will open both the
common extract duct smoke dampers. The duty extract fan shall be selected via duty selector switch. The
duty fan start up is interlocked with the smoke damper open status so that the extract fan will start only when
extract duct smoke damper is opened. But in case the working unit trips the standby unit will not be switched
ON automatically but can be switched ON manually.
When the extract fans H/O/A switch is in the OFF position the extract fans shall be off.
When both extract fans H/O/A switch is in the AUTO position the HVAC Control Panel will open the
common extract duct smoke damper. The duty extract fan shall be switched ON by the DDC and the fan start
up is interlocked with the smoke damper open status so that the extract fan will start only when the extract
duct smoke damper is opened. When the duty extract fan is ON, DDC will ensure that duty basement fresh
air fan is also switched ON.
At the same time if any one of the H/O/A switches is in HAND or OFF position, the DDC will disable
output for both the fans and the fan which is in hand mode shall run.
Air Flow Monitoring
The airflow across both the fans shall be monitored through one differential pressure switch. When the
controller gives command to run the duty fan and if it does not sense the airflow status within 1-2 minute, an
airflow fail alarm shall be generated by the controller. The alarm shall also be indicated on the operator
terminal in the panel facia.
In case of airflow fail alarm of the duty fan, it will be disabled by the DDC, and the standby unit shall start
automatically
Automatic Change Over

In case of Airflow failure or Thermal Overload relay trip from any of the duty fan, the standby fan will be
enabled.
The duty selection of the extract fans will be cycled by the DDC controller automatically on weekly basis.
44.3.14.4 Basement Fresh Air Fans Control
Basement is provided with 2 nos. Fresh Air Fans mounted on the roof. In normal condition, fans are in 1
duty + 1 standby arrangement, and in smoke extraction condition both fans will work as duty.
Motorized smoke dampers are fitted in the common supply air duct of the fresh air fans at Ground floor. The
motorized smoke damper open status is interlocked with the fan start up in Hand and Auto mode.
When both fresh air fans H/O/A switch is in the HAND position, the HVAC Control Panel will open the
common fresh air duct smoke dampers. The duty fresh air fan shall be selected via duty selector switch. The
duty fan start up is interlocked with the smoke damper open status so that the fresh air fan will start only
when the fresh air duct smoke damper is opened. But in case the working unit trips the standby unit will not
be switched ON automatically but can be switched ON manually.
When the fresh air fans H/O/A switch is in the OFF position the fresh air fans shall be off. When both fresh
air fans H/O/A switch is in the AUTO position, the HVAC Control Panel will open the common fresh air
duct smoke dampers. The duty fresh air fan shall be switched ON by the DDC and the fan start up is
interlocked with the smoke damper open status so that the fresh air fan will start only when the fresh air duct
smoke
damper is opened. When the duty fresh air fan is ON, DDC will ensure that duty basement extract fan is also
switched ON.
At the same time if any one of the H/O/A switches is in HAND or OFF position, the DDC will disable
output for both the fans and the fan which is in hand mode shall run.
Air Flow Monitoring
The airflow across both the fans will be monitored through one differential pressure switch. When the
controller gives command to run the duty fan and if it does not sense the airflow status within 1-2 minute, an
airflow fail alarm shall be generated by the controller. The alarm shall also be indicated on the operator
terminal in the panel facia.
In case of airflow fail alarm of the duty fan, it will be disabled by the DDC, and the standby unit shall start
automatically.
Automatic Change Over
In case of Airflow failure or Thermal Overload relay trip from any of the duty fan, the standby fan will be
enabled.
The duty selection of the fresh air fans will be cycled by the DDC controller automatically on weekly basis.
44.3.14.5 Fire Dampers Monitoring
The close status of all shutter / curtain type fire dampers shall be monitor and indicated on the HVAC control
panel fascia.
44.3.14.6 Decorative Split Units - Fire Pump Room Controls
There shall be 3 nos. Split Units in the Fire Pump Room which are working in 2 duty + 1 standby
arrangements.
When the Manual/Auto switch is in the Manual position, the units are selected manually through the duty
selector switch. But in case the working unit trips the standby unit will not be switched ON automatically but
can be switched ON manually.
When the Manual/Auto selector switch is in Auto position and the H/O/A switch for all three split units are
in Auto position, two units are selected as duty and third unit as standby by the DDC controller
automatically. The duty selection will be cycled by the DDC controller automatically on weekly basis and
also the standby unit shall be switched on by the DDC Controller via common fault signal or MCB/ELCB
trip signal of the split unit.
The temperature of room will be controlled by the split unit thermostat supplied by the Split A/C supplier.
The split units and the extract fan installed in the fire pump room are interlocked with operation of diesel fire
pump.
44.3.14.7 Fire Pump Room Extract Fan Controls
There shall be 1 no. Extract fan for Fire Pump Room.
When the Auto/ON switch is in ON position, the fire pump room extract fan shall be interlocked with the
motorized damper, upon confirmation of the open status of the damper, the extract fan will start.
When the Auto/ON switch is in Auto position, the fire pump room extract fan shall be interlocked with the
motorized damper, upon confirmation of the open status of the damper, the extract fan will start once HVAC
control panel receives a diesel fire pump run status from fire alarm control panel and at the same time split
A/C Units in fire pump room shall be stopped by control panel.
44.3.14.8 Temperature & Relative Humidity
The temperature and humidity shall be displayed on operator’s terminal mounted on the panel fascia.
 110 kV GIS Room Temperature and Humidity

 33 kV GIS Switchgear Room Temperature and Humidity
 LV Room Temperature and Humidity
 Control & Relay Room Temperature and Humidity
 HVAC Panel Room Temperature and Humidity
 Package Unit supply air Temperature
 Package Unit return air Temperature and Humidity
 Ambient Temperature
44.3.14.9 Fire Alarm Interface
On receipt of volt free contact from Fire Alarm Control Panel, the HVAC Control Panel shall shutdown all
Package Units, Fans, and will close the motorized dampers in the system. Upon clearing the alarm from the
Fire Alarm Panel, only then the HVAC System will return to its normal working operation.
Each set of Basement Smoke Extract duty fan and the Basement Fresh Air duty fan shall run together when
their respective fan H/O/A switch is in Auto Position. On the receipt of a volt free contact from the fire alarm
panel, the HVAC Control Panel shall witch off both the duty fans of basement smoke extract and basement
fresh air fan. The MSDs for smoke extract fans and fresh air fans shall be closed, and it shall be able to
switch ON each set of both duty and standby smoke extract fans and fresh air fans manually via override
switches installed on the HVAC Control Panel fascia.
During the time of override, if any one of the smoke extract fans is tripped, both fresh air fans shall still ON.
But if both smoke extract fans are tripped, both fresh air fans shall be witch OFF.
44.3.14.10 DCS / Scada Interface
Provision for Volt Free Contact shall be provided on HVAC Control Panel for DCS / SCADA interface for
remote monitoring.
 A/C System-1 Common Fault Alarm

 A/C System-2 Common Fault Alarm
 Ventilation System Common Fault
 110 kV GIS Room Temperature and Humidity
 33 kV Switchgear Room Temperature and Humidity
 LV Room Temperature and Humidity
 Control & Relay Room Temperature and Humidity
 HVAC Panel Room Temperature and Humidity
44.3.15 Engineering
The engineering works shall comprise the complete basic and detail engineering in respect of the scope of
supply, as well as design documentation required in the following scope:
44.3.15.1 Heat Load Calculation:
Contractor shall arrange Heat Load Calculation using Carrier HAP Load Program, and verify according to
latest / approved Architectural drawings, Equipment’s Heat Dissipation, Lighting Load, U-values of door,
Window, walls, floor and roof.
44.3.15.2 Shop Drawings and As-Built Drawings:
Contractor shall arrange HVAC shop drawing and as-built drawings such as but not limited to the
followings:
 Basement Floor HVAC Layout

 Ground Floor HVAC Layout
 Roof Floor HVAC Layout
 HVAC Section Drawing
 HVAC Installation Drawing & Equipment Schedule
44.3.15.3 Technical Submittal
Contractor shall submit Technical Submittals for all the HVAC equipment and materials to be installed in
the project.
44.3.16 Packing & Delivery
All HVAC equipment and materials shall be packed and delivered as per manufacturer’s recommendation
and standard, ensuring that all equipment and materials will reach the site in good condition and free from
any damage.
44.3.17 Testing, Commissioning and Maintenance Requirement
Upon completion of installation all systems shall be tested, and balanced and the correct air quantities,
pressures and temperatures obtained. Each system shall be tested and adjusted thermally. The contractor
shall adjust, balance and regulate each system as necessary until the required conditions are obtained.
On completion of the system adjustment and balancing, the contractor shall carry out tests to demonstrate
that each part of the installation is adjusted and regulated correctly to fulfil the function for which it has been
designed, e.g., room temperatures and pressures to be maintained and air quantity to be handled etc. A
summer test shall be carried out during the month of July and August when ambient temperature is high.
Initial start-up of roof top Packaged AC units should be carried out by the manufacturers’ representatives.
The contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all installations covered by this section of
specification for period not less than 1 year.
44.3.18 Warranty
HVAC System shall be supplied in accordance with the technical part of the tender and shall be guaranteed
by Twenty-Four (24) months from the provisional acceptance of the plant.
44.3.19 Quality Assurance Plan
The Manufacturer shall implement a quality management system in accordance with the stipulations of the
General Purchasing Conditions.
44.3.20 Inspection Test Plan
The Supplier shall submit to the approval of the Purchaser an Inspection Test Plan that explicitly and
correlatively develops each and every one of the phases of the procurement, manufacture and testing, and
preparation for shipment. The inspection points to be carried out by the supplier shall be indicated.
For each test the Supplier shall indicate the internal procedure that is applicable. He shall also indicate
whether a report or protocol will be generated for each point, or whether other associated documentation will
be provided (quality certificates, reception reports, etc.).
The Purchaser shall select the points on this Plan which they or their representatives shall witness.
During the inspection visits, the Purchaser reserves the right to review applicable documentation that has not
been presented for his approval (reception procedures, manufacturing procedures, etc.).
45 CIVIL DESIGN Requirements for Plant Substation
The Contractor shall be responsible for the civil and architectural design, obtaining permit and approval and
construction of the Plant Substation building.
The Plant Substation building shall be MANDATORILY conventional Reinforced Concrete Cement (RCC)
buildings solution and cast-in-situ (on-site building solution) only and any other proposed design
(prefabricated, containerized, and other design in any forms, not explicitly mentioned herein) shall be
REJECTED, no matter for whatsoever technical and contractual reasons.
The PV Plant Substation Building shall be mandatorily separated from the Administrative Building and
Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Building.
The Contractor shall provide the internal layout of equipments within the Plant Substation building, which
should be designed by the Contractors and agreed with the Company.
The Contractor is required to receive the Company acceptance prior to the commencement of the
construction.
The Contractor shall provide alongside the Plant Substation building at least the following rooms and area:
 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgear Room (As Applicable)

 110kV Outdoor air insulated switchgears (Outdoor Switchyard) along with Gantry
 33/110kV Power Transformers Foundation with Oil Collection Pit
 33kV MV Gas Insulated Switchgear room.
 Complete Cable Basement for all PV Collector Cables, MV & LV Power Cables, Control Cables,
FO Cables inside the Plant Substation
 Control room which shall include:
 110kV HV protection panels
 Telecommunication Panels,
 Power Plant Controller Panel,
 Power Quality Monitoring (PQM) Panel
 Battery Charger Panel,
 SCADA Panels
 HMI System (Engineering and Operator Workstation)
 Metering panel
 LVAC Switchgear Room
 Clean Agent Cylinder Room for 33kV Gas Insulated Switchgears.
 Battery Room
 Fire Pump Room and Fire Water Tank.
The Cable basement shall Mandatorily cover the complete Plant Substation but not limited to the following:
a) 110kV GIS Room (As Applicable),
b) 33kV GIS Room,
c) Control & Relay Room,
d) Clean Agent Room,
e) Battery Room,
f) SCADA Room,
g) LVAC Room,
h) Telecom Room and
must be suitable to accommodate all PV Incoming Collector Feeders, MV, LV, Control and FO Cables of
Plant Substation. It must be suitably sized to permit all MV and LV cables installation.
All PV Collector Feeders entering inside the Plant Substation shall be through RCC Duct with HDPE
Pipes only.
The relevant civil works shall include, without being limited to, the following:
45.1 Buildings /Rooms
 one (1) 110 kV GIS building / room (As Applicable)
 one (1) control & relay room / building, including furniture as required to fulfill the function
of the respective room.
 one (1) 33kV GIS SWGR room / building
 one (1) LV AC & DC room / building
 one (1) telecom room
 one (1) IG cylinder room
 two (2) battery rooms
45.2 Transformer Foundations
Transformer reinforced concrete foundations with oil catch and collection pits and fire separation walls shall
be foreseen as per technical specification typical layout:
 33/110kV transformer foundations with oil catch and pits and fire separation walls.
 Earthing transformer, auxiliary transformers (outdoor) with sunshade and oil catch and pits.
 one (1) common oil collection pit with oil separator.
 capacitor banks
45.3 Outdoor foundations - HV equipment

 One (1) lot Foundations for the outdoor equipment, supports and gantries shall be provided,
including but not limited to:
1. 110 kV gantry foundations
2. 110 kV GIBs (As Applicable)
45.4 Foundation for Diesel generator

 one (1) foundation for the diesel generator and fuel storage shall be provided, supply of diesel
generator and fuel storage plus one full tank is within the scope.
45.5 Foundation for Fire Fighting Pump room and Fire Water Tank
 one (1) foundation for the firefighting pump system.
 one (1) foundation for the fire water tank
45.6 RCC Cables Ducts, trenches

 One (1) lot reinforced concrete RCC DUCT and Trenches, as per Company Requirement shall
be provided for the connection of the new equipment to be installed, including but not limited to
equipment shown in typical substation layout.
45.7 Roads, pavings and gravel bed surfacing
Roads, pavings and gravel bed surfacing shall be provided for the 33/110kV substation extension and its
connection to the existing parts as defined in the drawings and described in the Technical Requirements
Civil Works.
The access road connections between the relevant external main roads and the substation are deemed to be
included in the scope of the Contractor. These access roads shall be suitable for the transportation of all
equipment foreseen under the Contract.
The Contractor’s scope shall also include any rehabilitation or improvement of existing infrastructure (e.g.,
roads, bridges etc.) so as to allow the access to site, as well as the transport of all foreseen equipment.
45.8 Site Preparation, levelling and compacting
Before starting the main civil works for the substations, the Contractor shall execute all necessary levelling
and grading works on the substation site. The +/-0.00 level is subject for the approval of the
Employer/Engineer and shall be fixed by means of a marking/fixing control point. These marks shall be
always visible and accessible during the construction period.
The Contractor shall clear all materials, debris, etc. from the areas required for the temporary and permanent
works and accesses.
The first earthworks operation shall be the removal of topsoil, to a depth as agreed with the Employer. The
topsoil shall be kept separate from other material and stock-piled for re-use on the site in the landscaped
areas, if required. If not, it shall be disposed of by the Contractor to an approved location.
45.9 Water supply system (domestic)
The 33/110 kV PV Plant Substation shall be provided with the following:
 One (1) water treatment plant includes the following main components.
 one (1) pump with capacity of 0.5 liter/s
 one (1) storage tank of 10m3
 one (1) well
 one (1) filter unit
 one (1) pressurizer unit
 one (1) lot of pipes, valves, etc.
 One (1) Internal water supply system (including water pipes, pumping stations etc.)
45.10 Drainage and sewage systems
Storm water drainage system
A complete storm water drainage system shall be provided for the substation and the Contractor shall carry
out any possible works so as to ensure the proper storm water drainage of the complete substation.
The storm water drainage system shall collect only clean storm water which shall be discharged into the
rainwater soak away pit. The system shall be substantially maintenance-free, and the installation shall be
operationally safe. The surface water drainage shall include all necessary gutters, down pipes, gullies, traps,
catch pits, manholes etc.
45.11 The storm water drainage system shall include three distinct parts:
 the drainage system not permitting the entrance of external stormwater to the substation site.
 the internal drainage system, which shall collect and discharge the water collected in the
substation site; and
 the external drainage system, which shall convey the water collected in the substation to an
adequate collector system.
45.12 Landscaping
The free area inside the extended substation, where no roads or gravel is provided, shall be landscaped using
low to medium-high growing plants and grass. Plantations shall be provided along the main roads and
buildings, as indicated in the layout drawings, subject to the approval of the Employer.
45.13 Fencing and gates
A substation fencing system shall be provided for the substation. The fencing system shall comprise robust
fences of rigid steel type, with a height of 2.5 m + 0.5m Barbed Wires above the concrete foundation. An
adequately dimensioned entrance gate, along with a separate personnel entrance, shall be provided for the
substation extension.
45.14 Centralized air-conditioning, ventilation and heating systems
Air conditioning, ventilation and electrical heating system shall be provided as follows:
 one lot of independent ventilation system for the GIS hall, with air inlet filters, in accordance
with the requirements of the GIS manufacturer to keep slight overpressure within the hall.
 one lot of independent ventilation system for each battery room designed in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 62485
 one lot of independent ventilation system for corridors and toilets
 one lot of air-conditioning system for each switchgear room and control / protection /
telecommunication and metering cabinet rooms
 one lot of air-conditioning system for the control rooms.
 one lot of air-conditioning system for each office
45.15 Overhead Traveling Crane (As Applicable)

 one (1) set of overhead traveling crane, minimum 6t lifting capacity, for 110 kV GIS building,
minimum height of crane shall be 8.0 meters or as per actual requirement whichever is higher.
 one (1) set of monorail cranes, 1 t lifting capacity, for workshop building / room.
45.16 Other works

 cleaning of the site from gravel or other type of surfacing
 execution of backfilling works
 execution of grouting layers between foundations and steel base plates
 execution of all necessary earthing works
 final surfacing works.
45.17 Other works

 cleaning of the site from gravel or other type of surfacing
 execution of backfilling works
 execution of grouting layers between foundations and steel base plates
 execution of all necessary earthing works
 final surfacing works
The Contractor shall mechanically seal all cable duct entries with an appropriate product to prevent the
ingress of water, fire, and vermin to each room of the Plant Substation building. Particular attention shall be
put on the cable room entries.
The Contractor shall install all necessary heating, internal and external lighting, and small power for the
Plant Substation building.
The installation of the electrical equipments inside the building shall consider the safety of personnel in the
event of an electrical fault.
The Contractor shall install the outside and inside covering walls of the building in accordance with the
specifications of local building code, norms and standards.
All civil works shall be carried out as per design/drawings provided by the Employer/ Contractor and as per
this specification provided by the Employer. In case design/drawings are prepared by the contractor then
these shall be approved by the employer before execution.
In case, any item is not covered under specification then the same shall be carried out as per local laws and
regulations, local Utility Specification and applicable International Standards and Codes.
Any item for which specification is not provided herein and is not covered under specification/Standards, the
same shall be executed as per manufacturer guidelines with the approval of employer. All materials shall be
of best quality conforming to relevant International Standards and Codes.
In case of any conflict between Standards/Code and Technical Specification, then the most stringent
conditions shall prevail. The decision of Company’s/Owner’s Engineer in charge in this regard shall be final
and binding.
The Contractor shall arrange all labour, tools, equipment, materials, temporary works, constructional plant &
machinery, fuel supply, transportation and all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may be
required for complete performance of the Works in accordance with drawings, specifications, and direction
of Company. All materials including cement, reinforcement steel, structural steel etc. shall be arranged by
the Contractor.
The bidder shall fully apprise himself of the prevailing conditions at the proposed site, Climatic conditions
including monsoon patterns, local conditions and site-specific parameters, soil parameters, availability of
construction material and shall include for all such conditions and contingent measures in the bid, including
those which may not have been specifically brought out in the specifications.
The material specification, workmanship and acceptance criteria shall be as per approved standard Field
Quality Plan. In case certain item is not covered in FQP, it shall be constructed as per Local Specification/
relevant International Standards.
45.18 Geotechnical investigation
The Contractor shall perform a detailed soil investigation to arrive at sufficiently accurate conclusion
regarding general as well as specific information about the soil profile and the necessary soil parameters of
the site, in order to design and construct the foundation of the various structures safely and rationally. A
report to the effect shall be submitted by the Contractor for Employer’s specific approval giving details
regarding data proposed to be utilized for the design.
45.19 Scope
This specification covers all the work required for detailed soil investigation and preparation of a detailed
report.
The work shall include mobilization of necessary equipment, providing necessary engineering supervision
and technical personnel, skilled and unskilled labour etc. as required to carry out field investigation as well
as, laboratory investigation, analysis and interpretation of data and results, preparation of detailed Geo-
technical report including specific recommendations for the type of foundations and the allowable safe
bearing capacity for different sizes of foundations at different founding strata starting from 0.5M from
existing ground level for the various structures of the substation.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for locating the co-ordinates and various test positions in
field as per the information supplied to him and also for determining the reduced level of these locations
with respect to the benchmark indicated by the Employer.
45.19.1 Bore Holes
Bore holes of 200 mm diameter in accordance with the provisions of International Standards at the rate of
minimum one number bore hole per hectare up to 15meter depth into virgin soil or to refusal whichever
occurs earlier shall be drilled.
Total area of substation plot (including of Switchyard, Township and Future area) shall be considered for
arriving at number of bore holes to be drilled.
In any case number of boreholes shall not be less than five and shall not exceed twenty.
In case rock is encountered within five meters from existing ground level, coring in all the boreholes shall be
carried out up to 3 meter in rock.
The Contractor shall carry out Standard Penetration Tests at approximately 1.5 m interval in the borehole
starting from 0.5 m below ground level onwards and at every change of stratum. The disturbed samples from
the standard penetrometer shall also be collected for necessary tests.
The depth of Water Table, if encountered, shall be recorded in each borehole. In case the soil investigation is
carried out in winter/summer, the water table for rainy season shall be collected from reliable sources and
recorded in the report.
All samples, both disturbed and undisturbed, shall be identified properly with the borehole number and depth
from which they have been taken.
The sample shall be sealed at both ends of the sampling tubes with wax immediately after the sampling and
shall be packed properly and transported to the laboratory without any damage or loss.
The logging of the boreholes shall be compiled immediately after the boring is completed and a copy of the
bore log shall be handed over to the Engineer-in-charge.
45.19.2 Trial pits:
Trial pits shall be carried out at minimum one location per hectare as directed by the Employer. In case hard
rock is encountered in trial pit, test need not be carried out. Total area of substation plot (including of
Switchyard, Township and Future area) shall be considered for arriving at number of Trial Pit to be
excavated. Minimum number of trial pits shall be five and maximum number shall be ten. The trial pits shall
be 2 m x 2 m in size extending to 4 m depths, or as specified by the Employer. Undisturbed samples shall be
taken from the trial pits as per the direction of the Employer.
45.19.3 Electrical resistivity test:
The resistivity of earth varies over a wide range depending on its moisture content, temperature, salt content
and compactness. Therefore, earth resistivity test shall be conducted preferably during the dry season in
order to get conservative results.
In the evaluation of earth resistivity for the substations, at least eight test directions shall be chosen from the
centre of the substation to cover the entire area including the future area. The number of test points shall be
as per approved drawing.
46 Structure electromechanical and Civil Works

This document provides minimum functional requirements for the construction of all the civil works and
tracking system.
46.1 Corrosion protection
The Contractor shall take into account the conditions found at the Site and in the subsurface in order to avoid
any corrosion problems, especially with equipment installed outdoors. In addition, all galleries, handrails,
stairs, ladders and other miscellaneous steelwork excluding the fence shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
However, the Contractor can propose other corrosion protection materials like Magnelis or Posmac and shall
provide the necessary justifications. C3 corrosion resistance shall be considered as minimum to comply with
design life of ≥ 30 years from Provisional Acceptance.
All material not naturally corrosion-resistant shall be treated or finished to protect surface and functional
integrity under the ambient conditions prevailing at the Site.
Standards listed in Table 1 shall be applied in their latest version.
Standards Description
ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles
ISO 12944 Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel structures by

protective paint systems
Table 1: Corrosion protection Standards

46.2 Design
For Document Release, Contractor shall not start; Site Works until the Designer provide all design notes,
drawings, justifications to be validated by Company.
46.3 Structures
46.3.1 General requirements
The Contractor shall guarantee a design lifetime of ≥30 years considering local ambient conditions and in
respect of all standards for the PV modules support structures and foundations and a product warranty as
defined in this Contract.
Tracking system shall be suitable with the Site climatic conditions and seismic loads, soil characteristics and
chemical aggressiveness ratio, retaining maximum wind speeds recorded in the region and thermal loads
caused by expected fluctuations of materials and ambient temperatures.
The Contractor shall ensure that the proposed structures comply with the requirements described in the
following sections as well as the standards and Site extreme environmental conditions contained in the
Contract.
Tracker shall be design and installed considering the module cleaning robots, contractor shall manage all the
requirements to manage the proper working of module cleaning robots.
46.4 Civil works
46.4.1 Design loads
Civil design shall consider proper loading (Dead/Live/Erection/wind/snow/ seismic and all the other
applicable loads) according to site condition and local/international codes. In case of any conflicts between
codes most stringent shall apply.
46.4.2 Earthworks
Contractor is fully responsible to perform all preparation earthworks required to comply with inspection plan
for roads and platforms requirements.
To reach slopes requirements, where backfill is required, backfill shall be made by layers with materials
approved by the Company. Each layer shall be laid by 25 cm layers and properly compacted.
Contractor is fully responsible for land development for operation tracker and cleaning robotic solution
Contractor is required to perform all the tests to justify proper works completion.
46.4.3 Water management and Drainage
The Contractor shall assess the risk associated with each meteorological phenomenon in order to implement
solutions required to mitigate their impact. Based on the climatic data and especially the rainfall data, and the
Site’s configuration and topography, the Contractor shall build a drainage system in order to protect the
Plant’s infrastructures against erosion and flash floods. The Contractor shall evaluate the need for such
works. This drainage works shall be located within the area secured for the Site. No additional area outside
of the Site shall be provided.
The installed tracking system Contractor shall particularly comply with following requirements:
 All electrical components must be 10cm above the maximum historical flood level, inverter
station shall be elevated at least 50 cm above the maximum historical flood level
 The foundations, structures and roads must withstand flooding, hydrostatic and hydrodynamic
loads.
Moreover, Contractor shall install a complete drainage system which shall ensure the PV Plant operation,
maintenance and production, including suitability of roads and platform, during the Project lifetime.
All drained and liquids discharged from the PV Plant shall be disposed of in manner in accordance with the
Environmental Impact Assessment approved and the Contractor Consents issued by the relevant authority.
There are no existing wastewater systems on the Site. The Contractor shall make its own arrangements
relating to the disposal of sewage subject to approval by the Company.
A drainage system shall be based on a drainage study, which shall be provided during design phase by the
Contractor.
Drainage system shall be at least complied with:
 Applicable standards,
 Hydrological survey,
 In situ permeability tests to be performed on site,
 Water rainfall with a return period of 50 years,
 Natural water path,
 Topography before and after earthworks,
 Existing drainage system.
The Contractor shall install the ditches in a way to allow the collection of water and conduct the flow to the
edge of the Site.
46.4.4 Access road, PV Plant road and platforms
Contractor shall build all accesses, internal roads and platforms required for the construction and operation
of the PV Plant.
Roads shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO, and Local standards based on the traffic volume
loads, CBR and other relevant parameters provided in Geotechnical report.
Roads shall be built to allow for circulation of exceptional convoys driving cranes, transformers, inverter and
any other equipment.
The Plant Substation roads (i.e., inside the substation to access the key substation equipment), shall be of at
least 4.0m width with a 0.5m shoulder and the turning radius is 9 m. The roads of Plant Substation shall be in
asphalt concrete road and the road of solar filed shall be in crush stone road.
The internal road within the PV field shall be of at least 3.5m width with a 0.5m shoulder, suitable for large
vehicles. These internal roads shall provide access to inverter stations and shall be of compacted with
suitable soil properties.
The access roads (i) from main gate of the plant to substation gate and (ii) from public road to main gate,
both shall be of at least 6.0 m with 1.5m hard shoulders and the turning radius is 9m. The access road shall
be in asphalt concrete road.
The roads of PV Plant apart from the Plant Substation roads shall be in gravel pavement and the compaction
coefficient is required to be not less than 95%.
Roads and platforms and associated drainage system shall be constructed in order to drain and eliminate the
water from the roads and platforms avoiding any water accumulation, especially in places where the finished
level is not above field level.
Contractor is responsible to ensure the sustainability of access road and platforms all along PV Plant
construction and operation. Contractor shall ensure that these road and platforms shall not be degraded by
weather conditions and erosion.
The Contractor shall consider the following while constructing:
 Earthworks including the removal of the waste produced,
 Rainfall and wastewater collection systems,
 Entrance to existing roads
 Borders and sidewalls
 Painting of the different works (gates, portals, etc.),
 Signs, posters, safety regulation displays, car parks, etc.
Arrangement of storage areas for residues and waste, including regulation containers.
The Contractor is responsible to implement road indicator, driving plan and any safety notice for onsite
driving rules which shall be validated by the Company.
For native soils difficult to compact, a layer of geotextile or geofabric of adequate characteristics may be laid
between the sub-grade and the base in order to allow a proper compaction of the layers.
Table 5: minimum requirement of main rooms and internal finishes
No Name of Room Floor Wall Ceiling
1 DC & UPS room, MV switchgear Ceramic Inorganic paint Inorganic paint

room, communication room, tiles
2 Relay room, control room Anti-static Inorganic paint Aluminium

floor alloy False
ceiling
3 Battery room Acid /Alkali Acid /Alkali Acid /Alkali

resistant tiles Resistant paint Resistant paint
Meeting room,
4 Ceramic Emulsion paint Mineral fiber
Engineers/technicians room, tiles boards False
offices, reception area ceiling
5 Toilet Anti-skid Glazed ceramic PVC False

ceramic tiles tiles ceiling
46.4.5 Security system and fencing

The perimeter fence shall be galvanized chain link with galvanized steel pipe poles with a minimum height
of 2.5 m. The top of the fence shall be installed with a minimum height of 0.5m. Special attention shall be
given to choosing the design of the fence and the mitigation measures mentioned in Critical Habitat
Assessment shall be taken into consideration if required by the Project Company.
Fencings shall be designed according to norms and standards in order to ensure their integrity all along the
design life.
The minimum functional requirements for the fencing are:
 Materials for all fencing shall be galvanized with adequate corrosion protection.,
 Fences poles and foundations shall be adapted to the ground condition and at an interval of 3m
maximum,
 Struts shall be installed every 20m maximum and at each angle,
 Fences shall be 2.5 m high,
 Diameter of wire shall be shown on plans,
 Remote alarms shall be installed,
 The security concept must be in line with the Applicable Laws.
The Contractor shall study the need for sand blocking structures and install such measures if deemed
necessary and required due to the local soil and wind conditions.
A gate shall be installed at the entrance of the site, onto the main access road:
 Steel tubular structure 60x60 – Steel vertical bars 25x25,
 Width of 6,00m and height of 2,00m, and secured with barbed wire on top
 two Panels of 3x2m,
 Metallic pillars with a minimum section of 120x120mm,
 High-resistance lock and a lockable switch to enable the alarm system from outside of the Plant,
 Opening gate sensors.
Contractor shall install Transformer Station internal lighting and a lighting system covering the entire Site
perimeter, including but not limited to access, gate and fencing.
The masts shall be:
 Type of bevel helical,
 A height of 8 meters,
 With a diameter of 60cm head.
The minimum level of illumination to obtain 0.80 m from the ground must be 300 lux for buildings and 50
lux outside in the Site.
46.4.6 Storage area
The temporary building shall comply with foreseeable climatic and seismic loads at Site, retaining maximum
wind speeds recorded in the region and thermal loads caused by expected fluctuations of materials and
ambient temperatures.
The storage platforms must be flat, free from any obstacles (rocks, heaps of soil), and accessible with lifting
means (no overhanging obstacles).
The platforms should be designed to ensure the drainage of runoff. For this, a minimum slope shall be
respected. The direction of these slopes has to be specified by Contractor.
46.4.7 Training
The Contractor is required to design a project specific training program and perform an initial training
program for the Plant personnel to ensure safe and reliable operation of the Plant. It is the Contractor’s
responsibility to perform all required training on a regular basis during the operation phase of the Plant.
The Contractor shall organize the following handover training measures provided under the organization of
the Project Company with the O&M Contractor in order to facilitate the handover of the Plant from to the
O&M Contractor. A full set of O&M manuals (electronic and paper) shall be available at site.
Training on-site aims to familiarize the O&M Contractor’s and Project Company’s personnel with the PV
plant’s components and main equipment and their operation. Indicatively, the training will include the
following (but not limited to):
 Overview of the PV Plant and its components and main equipment

 Medium Voltage switchgear operations (emergency shutdown procedures, opening and closing
breakers and switches, interlocking procedures, only to qualified MV electricians)
 Overview of HV substation and its components and main equipment (only to qualified
electricians)
 Advanced operations on inverters (only to qualified electricians)
 Advanced operations on transformers (only to qualified electricians)
 Advanced operations on trackers (only to qualified electricians)
 Advanced operations on combiner boxes (only to qualified electricians)
 Advanced operations on the Cleaning Robots
 Surveillance and Security system operations
 Regular visual inspections and checks (monitoring equipment, UPS units, electrical panels,
combiner boxes, cables, mounting structures, PV modules etc.)
 Recommended Personal Protective Equipment and safety instructions
 SCADA platform.
 Management of the Spare Parts
The training plan details shall be communicated to the Project Company at least 3 months prior to Initial
Provisional Acceptance Date. The Project Company shall have the right to nominate additional people to the
training up to the limit of 20 people.
46.4.8 Operation and Maintenance

Plant and structures shall be installed with easy operator access to all the modules.
Plant and structures shall be installed to ensure the highest reliability and the lowest maintenance, due to the
remote area and extreme conditions.
The Contractor must provide a reliability analysis of its products, based on the return of experience and/or
theoretical models, comprising at least (but not limited to):
 Method and hypothesis: in-field measured data, volume and starting time of data, theoretical
models’ hypothesis, etc.
 The Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the main critical components.
 Real in-field availability experience, especially with similar remote area project.
The Contractor must include:
 An operation & maintenance manual.
 A preliminary preventive maintenance plan with the frequency and estimated time of each
task/components;
 Its specific equipment and/or design for promoting easy access for the PV module cleaning,
especially concerning the transmission drive line (if applicable).
Over the lifetime of the plant, the spare parts (or technically equivalent) and associated technical support and
logistics must be remain available.
The installed structure shall comply with an easy maintenance and access to the PV modules, the structure
system and control and for the cleaning of the PV modules, in relation with special tools for PV module
cleaning.
46.4.9 Site Clearance Final Acceptance
The Contractor shall make the site free from any construction leftover materials at Commissioning, and upon
Final Acceptance. Disposal of materials and equipment shall be carried out in accordance with the best
industry practice, in a safe manner and at least according to the applicable laws and regulations.
Annexure 1 – Plant Substation Approved Manufacturer’s Lists
KEY COMPONENTS
1. Power Transformers
Transformers must be sourced from the Manufacturer as per SEC Approved vendor list.
2. 110kV Gas Insulated Switchgears for Plant Substation

Gas Insulated Switchgears must be sourced from the Manufacturer as per SEC Approved vendor list.
Refer: “SDW_Part III_Annex 5.3 SEC Approved List of HV Connection Equipment_08Feb2024_R00”
3. 33kV (36kV) Indoor Type Gas Insulated Switchgear

Gas Insulated Switchgears must be sourced from one of the following OEM’s.
Optio
Manufacturer Country of Origin Type Model
n
1 Siemens Energy Europe, China, India Indoor 8DA10, 8DB10
2 Hitachi Energy Europe, China, India Indoor ZX0.2, ZX1.2, ZX2
3 General Electric India, EU, China Indoor OEM To Propose
CG Power and Industrial
4 India, EU, Belgium Indoor OEM To Propose
Solutions Ltd.
Toshiba Transmission
5 Japan, India, China Indoor C-GIS
and Distribution System
6 EATON UAE Indoor OEM To Propose
7 Hyosung South Korea Indoor OEM To Propose
8 Hyundai South Korea Indoor OEM To Propose
Note: Bidder’s must obtain Project Company Acceptance. Any Addition or Deletion of OEM shall be
REJECTED.
4. 33kV and 110kV Numerical Relays, Auxiliary Relays, Trip Circuit Supervision Relays for PV
Farm and Plant Substation
110kV Control & Relay Protection Panel must be procured from one of the following OEM’s.
Option Manufacturer Country of Origin Type Model

1 Siemens Energy Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
2 Hitachi Energy Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
3 General Electric Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
4 SEL USA, India, China Indoor OEM To Propose
REJECTED.
5. 110kV Control & Relay Protection Panel for Plant Substation
110kV Control & Relay Protection Panel must source from the Manufacturer as per SEC Approved vendor
list.
6. Substation Control & Monitoring System (SCMS) for Plant Substation

SCMS system must be procured from one of the following OEM’s. Any system integrator shall be rejected.

REJECTED.
7. DCS/SCADA for Solar PV Farm

SCADA system must be procured from one of the following OEM’s.

3 Green Power Monitoring Spain Indoor OEM To Propose
5 Schneider Electric Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
6 Takaoka Toko Co. Ltd Japan Indoor OEM To Propose
7 Emerson Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
8 Rockwell automation Europe/KSA Indoor OEM To Propose
9 InAcccess UK/USA Indoor OEM To Propose
REJECTED.
8. Earthing Transformer and Earthing Cum Auxiliary Transformer for Plant Substation
Transformers must be sourced from one of the following OEM’s.

1 Siemens Energy Europe, China, India Outdoor OEM To Propose
2 Hitachi Energy Europe, China, India Outdoor OEM To Propose
3 General Electric Europe, China, India Outdoor OEM To Propose

CG Power and Industrial
4 India, Belgium Outdoor OEM To Propose
Solutions Ltd.
5 Xian, XD Xian, China Outdoor OEM To Propose
6 Chint Electric Co., Ltd. Shanghai, China Outdoor OEM To Propose
7 Toshiba Transformer UAE, India Outdoor OEM To Propose
8 Voltamp Oman Outdoor OEM To Propose

REJECTED.
9. Digital Fault Recorder (DFR) Panel for Plant Substation

Digital Fault Recorder must be procured from one of the following OEM’s.

5 Qualitrol United Kingdom Indoor OEM To Propose
A. Eberle GmbH & Co.
6 Germany Indoor OEM To Propose
Kg
REJECTED.
10. Power Plant Controller (PPC) Panel for Plant Substation

PPC must be procured from one of the following OEMs only.

1 In Access Greece Indoor OEM To Propose
2 Green Power Monitoring Spain Indoor OEM To Propose
3 Siemens Gamesa Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
5 SMA Germany, China Indoor OEM To Propose
REJECTED.
11. Power Quality Monitor (PQM) Panel for Plant Substation

PQM must be procured from one of the following OEMs only.

4 Qualitrol United Kingdom Indoor OEM To Propose
5 Green Power Monitor Spain Indoor OEM To Propose
6 MR Germany Indoor OEM To Propose
7 EATON Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
8 Schneider Electric Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
REJECTED.
12. Cybersecurity
Cybersecurity must be procured from one of the following OEM’s and any system integrator shall be
Rejected.

REJECTED.
13. 125V Ni-Cd DC Batteries inside Plant Substation

Batteries and Charger Panels must be procured from one of the following OEM’s.
1 Saft Groupe SAS UAE, Europe, China Indoor OEM To Propose

2 ALCAD Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
HOPPECKE Batteries
3 Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
GmbH
4 EnerSys UK, India, China Indoor OEM To Propose
5 HBL India Indoor OEM To Propose
6 GAZ GmbH Germany Indoor OEM To Propose
REJECTED.
14. Thyristor Controller Battery Charger Panel inside the Plant Substation
Battery Charger Panels must be procured from one of the following OEM’s.

1 STATRON UAE, Sweden, China Indoor OEM To Propose
2 ALCAD Europe, China, India Indoor OEM To Propose
3 EnerSys UK, India, China Indoor OEM To Propose
4 HBL India Indoor OEM To Propose
REJECTED.
15. Telecom (SDH/IP-MPLS) inside the Plant Substation

Telecom (SDH/IP-MPLS) system must source from the Manufacturer as per SEC Approved vendor
list in coordination with the Offtacker’s Substation.
16. Centralized Roof Mounted Compressor and Air Handing Unit for Heating, Ventilation and Air
Condition (HVAC) System of the Plant Substation
HVAC System and Control Panels must be procured from one of the following suppliers.
Optio
Manufacturer Country of Origin Type Model
n
1 SKM UAE/KSA Outdoor OEM To Propose
2 Voltas UAE/KSA Outdoor OEM To Propose
3 Johnson Controls UAE, China Outdoor OEM To Propose
4 Carrier Global UAE, China Outdoor OEM To Propose
5 Midea Group UAE, China Outdoor OEM To Propose
6 Daikin UAE, China Outdoor OEM To Propose
REJECTED.
Power Transformer, 110kV Indoor Gas Insulated Switchgears along with its accessories, components, other
parts etc. and all other Electrical Equipment’s which has not been explicitly mentioned herein, must have
been supplied and commissioned with minimum three (3) years of Operational experience in any CIS
Countries. [Mandatory requirement]
The applicable issues of all International Standards (IEC, IEEE, and others) shall be at the latest published,
including the corresponding modifications, at the time of award of the order.
It is the Contractor and its selected manufacturer/suppliers’ responsibility to ensure and confirm that all
Electrical, Mechanical Equipment’s are manufactured, in accordance with the latest and recent edition of
IEC standard mentioned above. Furthermore, manufacturer/supplier during bid submission must include
complete lists of IEC standards and other (if missing) during design, engineering, manufacturing, and T&C
of the equipment’s with latest revision.
National, local laws, standards, and official regulations (technical, health and safety, environment etc.) which
is currently in force, along with others that are explicitly indicated shall be complied with.
If observed any discrepancies between various standards or said document, then most stringent and
demanding shall be prevail upon.
The manufacturer/supplier equipment and documentation shall comply with the requirements of the Project
Company having jurisdiction over the facility, as the requirements apply to the supplier/manufacturer
equipment, and the scope of manufacturer/supplier work under this document.
The manufacturer/supplier shall submit and obtain approval of all necessary documentation (including but
not limited to, design drawings and calculations, code data reports and shop drawings, as applicable, PE
sealed where so required) and shall provide support to the purchaser for the process of obtaining the
necessary local authority approvals.
The manufacturer/supplier shall also assist the purchaser in verifying plant testing documentation for
submittal to government authorities and shall assist in the approval process (e.g., responding to
questions/enquiries, providing documentation, participating in meetings, etc. as required).
Deviation and exceptions shall be justified and numbered by making references to the corresponding
Company Scope of Work Requirement, Minimum Functional Specification and Lists of Approved
Manufacturer Lists and applicable Standards. Deviation and exceptions that are not indicated and informed
to the Project Company shall not have any contractual validity.
Final decision shall be from the Project Company and solely reserves the right to decide, approve and
reject, with no technical and contractual liability to the Bidder, no matter for whatsoever reasons.
Annexure-2 Plant Substation Single Line Diagram for SADAWI Solar PV IPP.
Annexure-3 Plant Substation SCMS and Cybersecurity Architecture
Annexure-4 MV 33kV RMU SLD
Annexure-5 Earthing Installation Details
Annexure-6 Cable DUCT Bank and Trench Section Details

Schedule 1 Part IV - Company Scope of Work Requirements for MVHV Substations and Interconnections

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Schedule 1 Part IV - Company Scope of Work Requirements for MVHV Substations and Interconnections

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC PROJECT

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

Company Scope of Work Requirements for MV/HV

Revision Date Description Prepared Checked Approved

R0 Feb, 2024 First Issue for Tender Purpose PKN PKN

CSV Comma separated values

DCS Distributed control system

Electrical transient analyzer program is an electrical network modeling

HMI Human machine interface

HV High voltage > 50 kV

LV Low voltage <1kV

LV/MV It is the power transformer included in the Transformer Station with a

MV 1 kV < medium voltage < 50 kV

NVR Network video recorder

OEM Original equipment manufacturer

OPGW Optical Pilot Ground Wire

Power Plant Controller (PPC) which is a supervisory control constructed

Includes HV switchgear (circuit breaker, isolating switches, metering

PLC Programmable logic controller

Power system computer aided design is an electrical network modeling

Power system simulator for engineering is an electrical network modeling

DC/AC converter which collects the DC power generated by PV modules

RTU Remote terminal unit

SCMS Substation control and monitoring system

SDH Synchronous digital hierarchy

SFTP Secure file transfer protocol

SQL Structured query language

STC Standard test conditions

TCP/IP Transmission control protocol/internet protocol

In string inverter configuration, it collects the power generated by the

VLAN Virtual local area network

2 General scope of Works

This Annexures consists of two separate sets of documents, namely:

o Part II General Technical Specifications: The general technical specifications applicable

3 Civil scope of works

8 STUDIES AND SURVEYS

 Due diligence on all applicable aspects

b) Plot Plan of Substation Premises

e) Civil, Structural and Architectural Works

Nominal System Voltage 33 kV 110 kV

Pollution Level (degree as per UL and IEC) 3 3

Creepage Distance 31 mm/kV 31 mm/kV

12.1 GRID CONNECTION

AL HENAKIYAH 2 SOLAR PV IPP HIGH VOLTAGE INTERCONNECTION

 110 kV Connection Equipment;

The design, engineering, installation and commissioning of the above-mentioned HV Connection

13 Technical Requirements for the Electrical Balance of System

13.1 General Terms & Conditions:

13.2 Order of Precedence

a) EPC Contract Agreement (All Exhibits, Annexures)

13.3 Confidential Information

All MV AC cables shall comply with the following requirements:

 Construction compliant with IEC 60502 (All Series)

14.1 Bonding of Cables for 33kV PV Collector Feeders

15 33kV MV Cables for Plant Substation

All MV AC cables shall comply with the following requirements:

 Construction compliant with IEC 60502 (All Series)

15.1 Medium and low voltage cable system

16 LVDC, LVAC and 33kV MV Cable Installation

16.1 Laying Direct in the Ground

17 LVDC, LVAC and MV Cables Buried Systems

18.2 Cable Construction Requirements

All outdoor cables shall be the armored water-proof type.

18.3 Packing and sealing Requirements